ALU 7270 02 - SysConfig PDF

Alcatel assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented, which is subject to change without notice.
Alcatel, the Alcatel logo, MainStreet, and Newbridge are registered trademarks of Alcatel. All other trademarks are the property
of their respective owners.
Copyright 2001 Alcatel.
All rights reserved.
Disclaimers
Alcatel products are intended for commercial uses. Without the appropriate network design engineering, they must not be sold,
licensed or otherwise distributed for use in any hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation
of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life-support machines, or weapons
systems, in which the failure of products could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental
damage. The customer hereby agrees that the use, sale, licence or other distribution of the products for any such application
without the prior written consent of Alcatel, shall be at the customer's sole risk. The customer hereby agrees to defend and hold
Alcatel harmless from any claims for loss, cost, damage, expense or liability that may arise out of or in connection with the use,
sale, licence or other distribution of the products in such applications.
This document may contain information regarding the use and installation of non-Alcatel products. Please note that this
information is provided as a courtesy to assist you. While Alcatel tries to ensure that this information accurately reflects
information provided by the supplier, please refer to the materials provided with any non-Alcatel product and contact the
supplier for confirmation. Alcatel assumes no responsibility or liability for incorrect or incomplete information provided about
non-Alcatel products.
Alcatel has made reasonable efforts to ensure that the 7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3, complies in all material
respects with the "Referenced Detailed Functional Specification for Newbridge Product Date Compliance" (for all loads). To
obtain this document and other information related to Year 2000 Date Compliance, visit the Alcatel Year 2000 Date Compliance
website at the URL:
http://www.cid.alcatel.com/year2000/index.html
However, this does not constitute a representation or warranty. The warranties provided for Alcatel products, if any, are set forth
in contractual documentation entered into by Alcatel and its customers.
This document was originally written in English. If there is any conflict or inconsistency between the English version and any
other version of a document, the English version shall prevail.
PRINTED ON
RECYCLED PAPER
Preface
This document describes the 7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3,

software generic A21614.
Contents
The paper version of the 7270 Multiservice Concentrator Technical Practices is
divided into four binders:
Product Introduction and Installation

This binder contains general information about the 7270 MSC. It describes new
features, explains the functions, and lists the specifications for each component in
the system. This binder also contains installation instructions for each
component.
System Configuration
This binder contains the configuration procedures you follow when you use the
NMTI to configure the system.
Connection Configuration
This binder contains the configuration procedures you follow when you use the
NMTI to configure connections on the switch.
Performance and Fault Management
This binder contains information about statistics, LEDs, diagnostics, and alarms
on the 7270 MSC system.
7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3

April 2001 90-4521-43
iii
Preface
Related documentation
This document refers you to other documentation. Table 1 lists the customer
documentation referred to by the 7270 Multiservice Concentrator Technical
Practices.
Table 1 Related customer documentation
Customer documentation
Product release
Part number
5620 Network Manager User Guide
Release 4.1
90-0657-60
7470 Multiservice Platform Technical Practices
Release 4.3
90-2480-91
IP Services Card Technical Reference
Release 4.3
90-4521-43
Conventions
Table 2 lists the documentation conventions used throughout this documentation set.
Table 2 Documentation conventions
Convention
Description
Examples
Key name
Identifies a keyboard key.
Delete
Italics
Identifies a variable.
hostname
Key+Key
Type the appropriate consecutive keystroke sequence.
CTRL+G
Key-Key
Type the appropriate simultaneous keystroke sequence.
CTRL-G
Press the Return key.
Press
An em dash in a table cell indicates that there is no information or

that the category is not applicable.
An asterisk is a wildcard character that means any character in

a search argument.
Path_analysis.*file
An asterisk also indicates a default option for an NMTI parameter.
iv
Indicates a submenu.
File Save

90-4521-43 April 2001
Preface
Special information
The following are examples of how special information is presented in this
document.
Danger The described activity or situation may pose a threat to
personal safety.
Warning The described activity or situation may or will cause
equipment damage.
Caution The described activity or situation may or will cause
service interruption.
Note A note provides important information.
Procedures with options or substeps

When there are options in a procedure, they are identified by letters. When there are
substeps in a procedure, they are identified by roman numerals.
Procedure 1 Example of options in a procedure

At step 1, you can choose option a or b. At step 2, you must do what the step
indicates.
1
This step offers two options. You must choose one of the following:
a
This is one option.
This is another option.
You must perform this step.

April 2001 90-4521-43
Preface
Procedure 2 Example of substeps in a procedure

At step 1, you must perform a series of substeps within a step. At step 2, you must
do what the step indicates.
1
This step has a series of substeps that you must perform to complete the step.
You must perform the following substeps:
This is the first substep.
ii
This is the second substep.
iii
This is the third substep.
You must perform this step.
Measurement conventions
Measurements in this document are expressed in metric units and follow the
Systme international dunits (SI) standard for abbreviation of metric units. If
imperial measurements are included, they appear in brackets following the metric
unit. Table 3 lists the measurement conventions used in this document but not
covered by SI.
Table 3 Bits and bytes conventions
Measurement
Symbol
bit
byte
byte
dB/m
decibels per meter
RU
rack unit 1.75 in.
Contact information
If you have questions or comments about this documentation, please see:
http://www.cid.alcatel.com/contact/index.jhtml
vi

90-4521-43 April 2001
Online documentation
Introducing online documentation

You can use InfoPort, a documentation Web viewer, to display online documentation
for the 7270 Multiservice Concentrator Technical Practices.
InfoPort features
InfoPort features include:
ability to scroll through chapters

hyperlinks to related information
topic and word searches
bookmarks to create customized online documentation paths
alternative views of the table of contents, such as a list of figures
printing
easy PDF creation of document chapters
Click on the InfoPort Help button for InfoPort procedures and for more information
about InfoPort features.
Maintaining the online documentation library

TechInfo.NOW is a subscription service that gives you access to the latest customer
information, including new applications, improved methods of configuring and
upgrading, bug fixes and product enhancements. InfoPort documents can be
downloaded from the TechInfo.NOW website at:
http://www.cid.alcatel.com/support/index.jhtml

April 2001 90-4521-43
vii
Online Documentation
See the help.html file found in the directory where you installed the documentation
or click on the Documentation Library button for information about maintaining
your documentation library.
Displaying documentation
To display the online documentation, open the library.html file found in the directory
where you installed the documentation.
InfoPort documentation viewer orientation

Figure 1 shows the InfoPort documentation viewer.
Figure 1 InfoPort documentation viewer
Navigator
frame
Next Chapter and

Previous Chapter
buttons
Banner bar
Button
bar
Content display frame

15609
viii

90-4521-43 April 2001
The InfoPort documentation viewer is divided into the following parts:
banner bar
The banner bar is located at the top of the InfoPort documentation viewer
window. It contains the company logo and the title of the document you are
browsing. Click on the company logo to link to the webpage.
button bar
The button bar is located below the banner bar and contains the buttons listed in
Figures 2 and 3.
navigator frame
The navigation frame is located on the left side of the InfoPort documentation
viewer window, below the button bar. It allows you to view and navigate the table
of contents. The Next Chapter and Previous Chapter buttons appear at the top
right side of the navigation frame.
content display frame
The content display frame is located on the right side of the InfoPort
documentation viewer window and displays the content of the document you are
browsing. Use hyperlinks and bookmarks to help you navigate through the
documentation.

April 2001 90-4521-43
ix
Figure 2 InfoPort button bar buttons
Button name
Icon
Description
Table of Contents
Click on the Table of Contents button to

view an expandable and collapsible list
of the document's parts down to the
section level.
List of Figures
Click on the List of Figures button to

view a list of the figures in the
documentation.
List of Tables
Click on the List of Tables button to view

a list of the tables in the documentation.
List of Procedures
Click on the List of Procedures button to

view a list of the procedures in the
documentation.
Index
Click on the Index button to view an

alphabetical list of the document's index
entries. Use the drop-down menu to
navigate through the index entries.
See Procedure 18-1 for more
information.
Documentation Library
Click on the Documentation Library

button to view the documentation library
window, which has a hyperlink to each
book.
Introductory Splash Screen
Click on the Introductory Splash Screen

button to view the introductory splash
screen.
15279

90-4521-43 April 2001
Figure 3 InfoPort button bar buttons
Button name
Icon
Description
Glossary
Click on the Glossary button to view the

glossary. Use the drop-down menu to
navigate through the glossary entries.
PDF
Click on the PDF button to view or print

a PDF version of the documentation.
Rebranding
Click on the Rebranding button to view

the rebranded product portfolio.
Find Topic
Click on the Find Topic button to

perform a search in the documentation.
See Procedure 18-2 for more
information.
Print
Click on the Print button to print the

information that appears in the
documentation frame.
You can print a PDF or an HTML
version.
Help
Click on the Help button to launch the

InfoPort documentation viewer online
help.
15280

April 2001 90-4521-43
xi
Navigating through the online documentation

The navigation features described in this section help you to move easily through the
online documentation.
Table of contents
The table of contents contains a hierarchical list of the topics in each open document.
Use it to navigate through the document. Click on any title in the table of contents to
jump to the corresponding location in the content display frame.
When you first open a document, you usually see only the highest levels of the table
of contents: the title of the document and the titles of its major divisions.
To expand a level in the table of contents, click on the right arrow icon. Any heading
preceded by a right arrow can be expanded. When a division is expanded, the arrow
is replaced with one that points down. When you click on the down arrow, the list of
subsections disappears.
Alternative views
You can change the view in the table navigator frame by clicking on the List of
Procedures, List of Figures, or List of Tables buttons in the button bar.
Index
The index contains an alphabetical listing of the index entries in each open
document. Each entry provides a hypertext link to the appropriate location in the
document.
A fast-find feature allows you to jump to a specific letter in the alphabet. See
Procedure 1 for more information about searching the online documentation using
the index.
Hyperlinks
Hyperlinks are embedded software links that allow you to jump from one part of the
online documentation to another. Hyperlinks appear in blue.
Hyperlinks are found in body text and in tables throughout the online documentation.
They link to chapters, sections, tables, table notes, and figures.
When you position the cursor over the hyperlink, the cursor changes to a pointing
hand. To jump to the part of the documentation the hyperlink indicates, click on the
link.
xii

90-4521-43 April 2001
Bookmarks
A bookmark is an icon that marks a location in your online document for future
reference. The bookmarks you create using the InfoPort viewer appear in the
bookmarks list for your web browser. You can organize your document bookmarks
by sorting them into meaningful folders.
Figure 4 shows the bookmark icon.
Figure 4 Bookmark icon
Online presentation features

The presentation features described in this section have been added to the online
documentation to help you access information.
Glossary
You can view glossary terms in a new window by clicking the View Glossary icon.
Figures
You can open an inline figure in a separate window by clicking on it in the content
display frame. This feature allows you to view the selected figure while scrolling
through the related information in the content display frame.
Tables
Inline tables appear in the content display frame within the body text. Some tables
contain hyperlinks that allow you to quickly access information.
Many tables contain notes that supplement information in a cell. You can view these
notes by clicking on the table note number in the table or by scrolling to the bottom
of the table.

April 2001 90-4521-43
xiii
Searching the online documentation

You can search the documentation using the index or using the Find Topic button.
Procedure 1 To search the documentation using the index

1
Click on the Index button on the button bar.

The navigator frame displays the index.
Find the word or character string using one of the following methods.
a
Click on the button at the top of the index that appears beside the phrase
Go to entries starting with and choose the first letter of the word or string.
The index displays the indexed words for the selected letter.
Scroll through the navigator frame and click on the word or string.
The content display frame displays the information for the index entry.
Choose EditFind in Frame from the Netscape menu to highlight a word or string
in the content display frame.
Procedure 2 To search the documentation using the Find Topic

button
Note 1 The first time you click on the Find Topic button, the topic
database may take a few seconds to load. For subsequent searches, this
process is faster. The results of your most current topic find remain
accessible and active until you search for a new topic.
Note 2 The Find Topic feature is case-insensitive. For example, if you
enter ethernet, you will receive occurrences of Ethernet as well.
1
Click on the Find Topic button on the button bar.

The Find Topic window appears.
xiv
Choose the number of occurrences you want the Find Topic window to display.
Enter a word or string in the Find field.

90-4521-43 April 2001
Click on the Topic button to view the pull-down menu for search filtering options and
choose one of the options outlined in Table 1.
Table 1 Search filter options
Option
Description
Topics
Choose Topics to search titles and index entries.
Titles
Choose Titles to search titles.
Procedures
Choose Procedures to search procedure titles and index entries.
Figures
Choose Figures to search figure titles and index entries.
Tables
Choose Tables to search table titles and index entries.
Click on the Go button.

The matching occurrences for the word or string appear in a Results list, as shown
in Figure 5.
If there are more occurrences, click on the Next button to display additional results.
Click on the Prev button to scroll back to previous results.
Figure 5 Find Topic window
Find field
Results list
15608
Click on a word or string in the Results list to display the corresponding topic in the
content display frame.
Choose EditFind in Frame from the Netscape menu to highlight the word or string

April 2001 90-4521-43
xv
Managing bookmarks
This section describes how to create and manage your bookmarks.
Procedure 3 To create a bookmark

1
Click on the bookmark icon to the right of the relevant title in the content display
frame.
Follow the instructions in the pop-up window to create or file a bookmark in your
browser.
From the bookmarks menu, click on a bookmark to see the appropriate information
Procedure 4 To create a journal

A journal is a set of bookmarks that you frequently use.
xvi
Choose BookmarksEdit Bookmarks in Netscape.
Choose FileNew Folder.
Create a folder called Journal.
Click on the bookmark icon for the section you want to add to your journal. A new
window opens with instructions on how to file the bookmark.
File the bookmark in the Journal folder.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each section you want to include in the Journal folder.
Choose BookmarksEdit Bookmarks to rearrange the order of bookmarks in the

Journal folder.

90-4521-43 April 2001
Printing online documentation

While browsing a document, you may locate information you want to print. A
document is broken into small components such as sections and procedures so you
can easily print only the component being viewed.
If you want to print the whole document, choose the PDF icon and print the PDF
version.
Procedure 5 To print content information

1
Click on the Print icon in the banner bar. A new window opens.
Select one of the following:
HTML to send the appropriate pages to your default printer.
PDF to open a new window with the appropriate document loaded. Choose
FilePrint from this new window to print the document.
Click the Print icon in the new window.
Closing the online documentation browser window

Choose FileQuit from the InfoPort menu to quit the current online documentation
session. When you choose FileClose View from the InfoPort viewer menu, the
online documentation appears as an icon.

April 2001 90-4521-43
xvii
xviii

90-4521-43 April 2001
Contents
Preface
iii
Online documentation
vii
Node management sessions

34
Working with node management sessions

34.1
34.2
34.3
34.4
34.5
34.6
34.7
34.8
34.9
34-1
Before logging in ............................................................................................. 34-2

Support for features and software generics .................................................... 34-2
Accessing the node ........................................................................................ 34-2
Logging in and out .......................................................................................... 34-3
NMTI inactivity timer ....................................................................................... 34-5
Screen layout .................................................................................................. 34-6
Softkeys .......................................................................................................... 34-9
Keyboard entries ........................................................................................... 34-11
Example ........................................................................................................ 34-12

April 2001 90-4521-43
xix
Contents
35
Identifiers
35.1
35.2
35.3
35.4
35.5
35.6
35.7
35.8
35-1
Fabric identifiers ............................................................................................. 35-2

Shelf identifier ................................................................................................. 35-2
Slot identifiers ................................................................................................. 35-2
Port identifier information ................................................................................ 35-2
IMA group identifiers ....................................................................................... 35-3
Frame stream identifiers ................................................................................. 35-3
Endpoint information ....................................................................................... 35-3
Summary ........................................................................................................ 35-4
System parameters
36
Configuring the system

36.1
36.2
36.3
36.4
36.5
36.6
36.7
37
38
38-1
System synchronization .................................................................................. 38-2

Synchronization module present or not present ............................................. 38-3
Selecting synchronization sources ................................................................. 38-3
Disabling and enabling synchronization sources ............................................ 38-5
Synchronization mode .................................................................................... 38-6
Managing system synchronization .................................................................. 38-7
Configuring SNMP parameters

39.1
39.2
39.3
37-1
Serial-port baud rate ....................................................................................... 37-2

Date, time, and node name ............................................................................ 37-3
Using NTP servers for time and date .............................................................. 37-4
Access levels and passwords ......................................................................... 37-6
CPSS node parameters .................................................................................. 37-8
Managing CPSS ........................................................................................... 37-11
IP addresses and Subnet mask .................................................................... 37-15
Configuring synchronization
38.1
38.2
38.3
38.4
38.5
38.6
39
Switching fabric ............................................................................................... 36-2

Switching fabric type ....................................................................................... 36-2
Switching fabric profile .................................................................................... 36-3
Switching to the redundant switching fabric .................................................... 36-4
Configuring the system queue service factor .................................................. 36-5
CAC ................................................................................................................ 36-6
TCA profiles .................................................................................................. 36-14
Configuring node parameters

37.1
37.2
37.3
37.4
37.5
37.6
37.7
36-1
39-1
Configuring SNMP access communities ......................................................... 39-2

Configuring SNMP trap communities .............................................................. 39-4
Deleting SNMP communities .......................................................................... 39-6

April 2001 90-4521-43
xx
Contents
40
Configuring the shelf

40.1
40.2
40.3
41
42
Configuring the shelf name ............................................................................. 40-2

Configuring the call control group ................................................................... 40-2
Viewing shelf information ................................................................................ 40-3
Managing the database

41.1
41.2
41-1
Transferring files ............................................................................................. 41-2

Resetting the database ................................................................................... 41-6
Software downloading
42.1
42.2
40-1
42-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................... 42-2

Downloading ................................................................................................... 42-2
Card and slot management

43
Configuring and managing cards

43.1
43.2
43.3
43.4
44
Configuring slots for card type ........................................................................ 43-2

Naming slots ................................................................................................... 43-6
Managing cards and slots ............................................................................... 43-6
Managing the Control card ............................................................................. 43-8
Viewing card and slot information

44.1
44.2
44.3
44.4
44.5
44.6
43-1
44-1
Network inventory information ........................................................................ 44-2

Slot summary information ............................................................................... 44-3
Viewing hardware and SEEP information ....................................................... 44-5
Control card configuration and management information ............................... 44-8
Hub card configuration information ............................................................... 44-10
Interface card configuration information ....................................................... 44-11
Slot options
45
Configuring slot options for frame relay cards

45.1
45.2
45.3
45-1
Configuring frame relay card level congestion thresholds .............................. 45-2

Viewing slot option information for frame relay cards ..................................... 45-3
Selecting TCA profiles for frame relay cards .................................................. 45-4

April 2001 90-4521-43
xxi
Contents
46
Slot configuration for IMA

46.1
46.2
46.3
46.4
47
Viewing IMA slot configuration ........................................................................ 46-2

IMA slot configuration options ......................................................................... 46-2
Configuring IMA module presence ................................................................. 46-3
ICP header ...................................................................................................... 46-4
Configuring slots for OC3 CR and STM1 CR cards

47.1
48
49
50
49-1
Slot information for the voiceband services card ............................................ 49-2

DSP transport modules ................................................................................... 49-3
License credits ................................................................................................ 49-4
Configuring APS
50.1
50.2
50.3
50.4
50.5
48-1
Viewing slot information for DS3 CR and E3 CR cards .................................. 48-2
Slot configuration for voiceband services cards

49.1
49.2
49.3
47-1
Viewing slot information for OC3 CR and STM1 CR cards ........................... 47-2
Slot configuration for DS3 CR and E3 CR cards

48.1
46-1
50-1
Configuring the type of redundancy ................................................................ 50-2

Configuring the switching mode ...................................................................... 50-3
Configuring the switching type ........................................................................ 50-4
Configuring the WTR timer ............................................................................. 50-5
Managing card protection ............................................................................... 50-6
Ports
51
Configuring and managing ports

51.1
51.2
51.3
51.4
51.5
51.6
51.7
51.8
51.9
51.10
51.11
51.12
51.13
51.14
51.15
51.16
51-1
Physical port options ....................................................................................... 51-3

Naming ports .................................................................................................. 51-7
Line termination .............................................................................................. 51-7
Framing type ................................................................................................... 51-8
Trunk conditioning .......................................................................................... 51-9
Robbed bit signaling ..................................................................................... 51-15
Signaling ....................................................................................................... 51-16
Alarm time ..................................................................................................... 51-17
CRC framing ................................................................................................. 51-18
Channel speed .............................................................................................. 51-19
Zero suppression .......................................................................................... 51-19
E1 national use bits ...................................................................................... 51-20
AAL service ................................................................................................... 51-21
Synchronization ............................................................................................ 51-22
Playout buffer size ........................................................................................ 51-24
Reference point ............................................................................................ 51-25

April 2001 90-4521-43
xxii
Contents
51.17
51.18
51.19
51.20
51.21
51.22
51.23
51.24
51.25
51.26
51.27
51.28
51.29
51.30
51.31
51.32
51.33
51.34
51.35
52
TCA profiles
52.1
52.2
53
Cell payload scrambling ................................................................................ 51-26

Cell mapping ................................................................................................. 51-27
DS3 application ............................................................................................. 51-28
Line length .................................................................................................... 51-28
PCR and SCR scaling factors ....................................................................... 51-29
Line BER threshold ....................................................................................... 51-31
Trail trace ...................................................................................................... 51-32
Ethernet port speed ...................................................................................... 51-34
Ethernet duplex port operation ..................................................................... 51-35
Ethernet autonegotiation ............................................................................... 51-37
Managing ports ............................................................................................. 51-40
FDL mode ..................................................................................................... 51-44
Idle channel suppression .............................................................................. 51-44
Path trace ..................................................................................................... 51-47
PSI clocking parameters ............................................................................... 51-49
PSI control leads ........................................................................................... 51-50
PSI gender .................................................................................................... 51-51
PSI loopback processing .............................................................................. 51-52
PSI port interface type .................................................................................. 51-53
Selecting TCA profiles .................................................................................... 52-2

Viewing TCA profiles ...................................................................................... 52-8
Viewing ports
53.1
53.2
53.3
53.4
53.5
52-1
53-1
Viewing status information .............................................................................. 53-2

Viewing configuration information for T1, E1, and PSI FR ports .................... 53-7
Viewing configuration information for DS3 and E3 ports .............................. 53-10
Viewing configuration information for SONET and SDH ports ...................... 53-12
Viewing configuration information for Ethernet ports .................................... 53-13
Streams
54
Configuring and managing streams

54.1
54.2
54.3
54.4
54.5
54.6
54.7
54-1
Creating a stream ........................................................................................... 54-2

Viewing stream information ............................................................................ 54-2
Naming streams .............................................................................................. 54-5
Deleting streams ............................................................................................. 54-6
Stream configuration options .......................................................................... 54-6
Selecting TCA profiles for streams ................................................................. 54-7
Managing streams ......................................................................................... 54-8

April 2001 90-4521-43
xxiii
Contents
55
Configuring stream parameters

55.1
55.2
55.3
55.4
55.5
55.6
56
64 kb/s channels ............................................................................................. 55-2

Stream application .......................................................................................... 55-3
Congestion thresholds for streams ................................................................. 55-5
DLCI range for frame relay SVCs ................................................................... 55-7
HDLC parameters ........................................................................................... 55-8
Frame size ...................................................................................................... 55-9
Configuring frame stream management

56.1
56.2
56.3
56.4
56.5
56.6
55-1
56-1
Management protocol ..................................................................................... 56-2

Heartbeat ........................................................................................................ 56-5
Timeout ........................................................................................................... 56-6
Status rate ...................................................................................................... 56-7
Error threshold ................................................................................................ 56-7
Alarm filters ..................................................................................................... 56-9
DS1 circuits on the DS3 circuit emulation card

57
Configuring and managing DS1 circuits

57.1
57.2
57.3
57.4
57.5
57.6
57.7
57.8
57.9
57.10
57.11
57.12
57.13
57.14
57.15
57.16
57-1
DS1 circuit configuration overview .................................................................. 57-3

Naming circuits ............................................................................................... 57-4
Managing circuits ............................................................................................ 57-4
Physical options for DS1 circuits .................................................................... 57-6
Framing type on DS1 circuits .......................................................................... 57-6
Alarm time ....................................................................................................... 57-7
FDL mode ....................................................................................................... 57-8
Playout buffer size .......................................................................................... 57-9
Synchronization ............................................................................................ 57-10
54016 addresses .......................................................................................... 57-11
Target address .............................................................................................. 57-12
Origination address ....................................................................................... 57-13
TCA profiles information ............................................................................... 57-13
Selecting DS1 circuit TCA profiles ................................................................ 57-14
AAL1 performance ........................................................................................ 57-15
Viewing TCA profiles .................................................................................... 57-16

April 2001 90-4521-43
xxiv
Contents
58
Viewing DS1 circuits

58.1
58.2
58.3
58.4
58.5
58.6
58.7
58.8
58.9
58.10
58-1
Managing circuits ............................................................................................ 58-2

Physical options for DS1 circuits .................................................................... 58-3
Framing type on DS1 circuits .......................................................................... 58-3
Alarm time ....................................................................................................... 58-4
FDL mode ....................................................................................................... 58-5
Playout buffer size .......................................................................................... 58-6
Synchronization .............................................................................................. 58-7
54016 addresses ............................................................................................ 58-8
Target address ................................................................................................ 58-9
Origination address ....................................................................................... 58-10
Channel groups
59
Configuring channel groups

59.1
59.2
59.3
59.4
59.5
59.6
59.7
59.8
60
Configuration options for channel groups ....................................................... 59-2

Creating channel groups ................................................................................. 59-2
Adding channels ............................................................................................. 59-3
Naming channel groups .................................................................................. 59-4
Showing channels in a channel group ............................................................ 59-4
Configuring the playout buffer size ................................................................. 59-5
Configuring the number of data octets ............................................................ 59-6
Deleting channels and channel groups ........................................................... 59-8
Viewing channel groups

60.1
59-1
60-1
Viewing channel group information ................................................................. 60-2

April 2001 90-4521-43
xxv
Contents
IMA
61
Configuring and managing IMA

61.1
61.2
61.3
61.4
61.5
61.6
61.7
61.8
61.9
61.10
61.11
61.12
61.13
61.14
62
Viewing IMA information

62.1
61-1
IMA configuration options ............................................................................... 61-2

Creating IMA groups ....................................................................................... 61-2
Deleting IMA groups ....................................................................................... 61-3
Adding links to an IMA group .......................................................................... 61-4
Deleting links from an IMA group .................................................................... 61-4
Link activation timeout for an IMA group ........................................................ 61-6
Link deactivation timeout for an IMA group .................................................... 61-6
Reference point .............................................................................................. 61-7
Configuring links for CAC ............................................................................... 61-7
Dynamic CAC level mode ............................................................................... 61-8
Minimum link number ...................................................................................... 61-9
IMA group synchronization ........................................................................... 61-10
Differential link delay ..................................................................................... 61-11
Managing IMA ............................................................................................... 61-12
62-1
Viewing IMA configuration information ........................................................... 62-2
MTSM and eTM

63
Configuring and managing the MTSM and eTM

63.1
63.2
63.3
63.4
63.5
63.6
63.7
63.8
63.9
63.10
63.11
63-1
Overview ......................................................................................................... 63-2

Extended buffering .......................................................................................... 63-3
Per-VC queuing .............................................................................................. 63-3
Traffic shaping ................................................................................................ 63-3
ABR flow control ............................................................................................. 63-8
Configuring traffic shaping ............................................................................ 63-10
Configuring VPA shaping .............................................................................. 63-13
Configuring VS/VD for ABR connections ...................................................... 63-15
Configuring ABR parameters for the connection .......................................... 63-15
Connections affected by configuration changes ........................................... 63-17
Cell relay statistics on the MTSM and eTM .................................................. 63-17

April 2001 90-4521-43
xxvi
Contents
CE-EC module
64
CE-EC module
64.1
64.2
64.3
64.4
64.5
64.6
64.7
64.8
64-1
Overview of the CE-EC module ...................................................................... 64-2

Echo cancellation features on the CE-EC module .......................................... 64-3
Voiceband profiles .......................................................................................... 64-7
Narrowband signaling support ........................................................................ 64-9
Broadband signaling of clear channel bearer capability ............................... 64-10
CAS control of clear channel ........................................................................ 64-10
Redundancy .................................................................................................. 64-11
Configuration options .................................................................................... 64-11
Ethernet
65
Configuring the EN100 card

65.1
65.2
65.3
65.4
65.5
65.6
65.7
65.8
65.9
65-1
Overview of the EN100 card ........................................................................... 65-2

EN100 card options ........................................................................................ 65-4
Connection support ......................................................................................... 65-4
Ethernet bridge ............................................................................................... 65-5
Assigning a bridge name ................................................................................ 65-6
Configuring spanning tree ............................................................................... 65-6
Configuring entries in the filtering database ................................................. 65-11
Configuring service group options ................................................................ 65-15
Managing Ethernet bridges ........................................................................... 65-17

April 2001 90-4521-43
xxvii
Contents
Voiceband channels
66
Configuring voiceband channels and profiles

66.1
66.2
66.3
66.4
66.5
66.6
66.7
66.8
66.9
66.10
66.11
66.12
66.13
66.14
66.15
66.16
67
Voiceband profiles
67.1
67.2
67.3
67.4
67.5
67.6
68
67-1
Overview of voiceband profiles ....................................................................... 67-2

SVC options .................................................................................................... 67-3
Voiceband profile for a trunk group ................................................................. 67-5
Applying a voiceband profile ........................................................................... 67-6
Copying a voiceband profile ........................................................................... 67-8
Node predefined profiles ................................................................................. 67-9
Viewing voiceband information

68.1
68.2
68.3
68.4
68.5
68.6
68.7
68.8
66-1
Configuration options for voiceband channels and profiles ............................ 66-3

Configuring voiceband channels or profiles .................................................... 66-4
Naming voiceband channels or profiles .......................................................... 66-5
Configuring basic options ............................................................................... 66-6
Configuring CAS on a VS card ....................................................................... 66-8
Configuring per-channel gain for a VS card .................................................... 66-9
Configuring a 64 kb/s clear channel ............................................................. 66-10
Configuring echo cancellation ....................................................................... 66-11
Configuring a speech coder .......................................................................... 66-12
Configuring the speech packing factor on VS cards ..................................... 66-14
Connected channel limitations due to coder and
packing factor configuration ................................................................. 66-15
Configuring silence suppression on VS cards .............................................. 66-16
Configuring speech filters on VS cards ......................................................... 66-17
Configuring DTMF detection on VS cards .................................................... 66-18
Configuring fax demodulation on VS cards .................................................. 66-19
Configuring fax and modem bypass on VS cards ......................................... 66-21
68-1
Viewing voiceband information ....................................................................... 68-2

Voiceband parameter dependencies .............................................................. 68-3
Viewing information about voiceband channels and voiceband profiles ......... 68-5
Viewing CAS transport information ................................................................. 68-7
Viewing permanent clear channel information ................................................ 68-8
Viewing speech information ............................................................................ 68-9
Viewing fax and modem information ............................................................. 68-10
Viewing SVC options information of voiceband profiles ............................... 68-11
Glossary
Index

April 2001 90-4521-43
xxviii
34 Working with node management

sessions
34.1 Before logging in
34-2
34.2 Support for features and software generics

34.3 Accessing the node
34-2
34.4 Logging in and out
34-3
34.5 NMTI inactivity timer

34.6 Screen layout
34.7 Softkeys
34-5
34-6
34-9
34.8 Keyboard entries

34.9 Example
34-2
34-11
34-12

April 2001 90-4521-43
34-1
34 Working with node management sessions
34.1
Before logging in
You should be trained to telephone company standards or equivalent. You should
also be familiar with:
the use of a node management terminal or a network management system,

described in chapter 19
the node management concepts described in this chapter and the system concepts
described in chapter 2
34.2
Support for features and software generics

Node management sessions allow you to configure the components and features in
Release 4.3 of the 7270 MSC system. The components and features available to you
depend on the type of system and cards, the system software generic release, and the
node or software generic of the node or network management release. Some systems
may not have all the features described in this document.
The NMTI screen may display softkeys not supported in this release or
not applicable to your configuration. See section 34.7 for more information about
softkeys.
34.3
Accessing the node

This section describes how to access the system to start a node management session.
The procedure for accessing the node depends on the access equipment.
To access the system from a 5620 NM, see the 5620 NM documentation.
To connect a serial-based node management terminal, see section 20.2 then complete
the following tasks:
connect the terminal to a system serial port

power up the terminal
configure the terminal to match the configuration of the system serial port
To connect to the system from an Ethernet-based node management terminal, see
section 20.3 then complete the following tasks:
connect the terminal to a system Ethernet port

power up the terminal
use Telnet to access the system through its IP address
34-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
34.4
Logging in and out

The procedure in this section describes how to log in and out of a node management
session.
Up to six node management sessions can be active at one time on the active Control
card. You can access five of the seven sessions by telnet. One of the five telnet
sessions is reserved as a read-write session; the remaining four have read-only status.
One session per Control card can be accessed through serial ports. See section 20.2
for details.
Only one session has read-write privileges at any given time. When you start a
second node management session with read-write privileges while a read-write
session is already in progress, you can choose to disconnect the existing read-write
session and assume the read-write privileges or log in with read-only privileges.
Level
There are six access levels: 0 to 5. Level 0 provides read-only access; levels 1 to 5
provide read and write access. See section 37.4 for more information about access
levels.
Password
The default password for all levels is mainstreet. The password is not displayed and
is not case-sensitive.
A level 5 user can change passwords for any level. When the password for your level
has been changed, contact the network administrator.
See To change the password in section 37.4 to change passwords.

April 2001 90-4521-43
34-3
Procedure 34-1 To log on

After you access the system, you can log on.
1
Press at approximately 3-s intervals until the enter level prompt appears:
Enter level:
Enter your level.

a
When this is the first session on the 7270 MSC or when the level is 5, enter:
<5>
When you have been assigned an access level, enter:

<level>
where level is the access level from 0 to 5
To view management information without modifying it, enter:

<0>
If you entered an access level other than 0, enter the password for the level:
<password>
where password is a string containing 8 to 12 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces
When a read-write node management session is already in progress and you

attempt to log in with read-write privileges, a message appears asking if you want
to end the current read-write session and assume read-write privileges. Enter Y to
begin your session and notify the previous user that the NMTI session will terminate
with the next keystroke.
Procedure 34-2 To log out

You can log out in one of the following five ways:
34-4
select QUIT
from the main menu, enter <9>
from an information entry prompt, enter <ESC> to exit the prompt, and then <9>
from a keyboard entry prompt, enter <ESC> to exit the prompt, then <9> twice
from any other menu, enter <9> twice

90-4521-43 April 2001
34.5
NMTI inactivity timer

You can configure the timer to terminate an NMTI session after a period of
inactivity. The range is 1 min to 24 h. The default setting is 12 h. Set the timer to 0
to disable it.
A second timer protects telnet resources by terminating sessions that are not logged
in to NMTI and that are inactive for 1 min.
Procedure 34-3 To configure the NMTI inactivity timer

1
Select:
HOUSE MORE SESS_TIMEOUT
Enter the duration of the timeout session.

a
To set the timer to its default setting, select:

DEFAULT
To set the timer for a specific number of minutes, enter:

MINUTES <minutes>
where minutes is a value 0 to 59
To set timer for a specific number of hours, enter:

HOURS <hours>
where hours is a value 1 to 24

April 2001 90-4521-43
34-5
34.6
Screen layout
Figure 34-1 shows the node management screen. The main menu displays when you
log in. The menu softkeys are at the bottom of the screen.
Figure 34-1 Main menu
Product
Generic_Release
Long_Name
Alarms:2
Date
Time
1-CONFIG
2-HOUSE
3-MAINT
4-STATS
5-ALARMS
6-
7-
8-
9-QUIT
0-
6471
34-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
The node management screen is 78 characters wide by 24 lines high

and contains five functional areas, see Figure 34-2. As you work with the node
management session, the functional areas of the screen change to display
relevant information.
Figure 34-2 Layout of the node management session screen
Header line
Product
Generic_Release
Long_Name
Alarms:2
Automatic
Protection
Status line
Date
Time
Active
Data area
Command line
Text area
Softkey area
1-
2-
3-
4-
5-
6-
7-MORE
8-CANCEL
9-QUIT
0-PROCEED
6363
Header line
The header line displays information about the node to which you are connected.
Product indicates the node type.

Generic_Release indicates the Control card software generic.
Long_Name (node_name:Pshelf-slot) indicates the configured name of the node,
and the shelf and slot of the active Control card, for example, DENVER:P1-1.
You can configure the name of the node; see section 37.2.
Sev:Alarms:Number indicates the highest level of severity of any alarm in the
system and the total number of critical, major, and minor outstanding alarms.
You can view alarms; see section 146.1.
Date indicates the date in the format dd:mm:yy. You can set the date on the node
manually or by using NTP; see sections 37.2 and 37.3 for instructions.
For a standby Control card, the header line contains the string OnStandby
instead of the date.
Time indicates the time using a 24-hour clock in the format hh:mm.
You can set the time on the node manually or by using NTP; see sections 37.2 and
37.3 for instructions. When you have not set the time, it appears with an R to
indicate the elapsed time since the last system reset.

April 2001 90-4521-43
34-7
Automatic protection status line

The automatic protection status line indicates the protection status of the displayed
card. Table 34-1 lists the possible statuses.
Table 34-1 Automatic protection status
Status
Definition
Active
The working card is not spared.
Spared by Pshelf-slot
The working card is spared.
Standby
The protection card is on standby.
Protecting Pshelf-slot
The protection card is sparing a working card.
Data area
The data area displays information associated with the current menu item.
Command line
The command line displays softkey selections and keyboard entries.
Text area
The text area displays prompts, error messages, and information about the valid
range for numeric entries.
Softkey area
The softkey area displays the softkeys associated with function keys <F1> to <F10>
or number keys <1> to <9> and <0>.
Procedure 34-4 To refresh the display

You can refresh the information on the NMTI screen by entering <ESC> and
then <R>.
Refreshing the screen is useful when you are monitoring time-sensitive displays such as
system alarms or statistics, or when a transmission error or other delay-causing event
occurs.
34-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
34.7
Softkeys
A softkey is a key that is associated with different functions or commands at different
times.
Softkeys are named according to the function displayed for that softkey. Function
names are uppercase, such as PROCEED. They can contain underscores, hyphens,
or slashes. For simplicity, the term softkey means the key associated with a function
and the function itself.
The available softkeys appear in the softkey area. Each softkey is associated with a
function key or number key on the keyboard.
In this document, softkey names appear as they do on the screen.
Softkey menus
A group of softkeys that appears together is called a menu.
The group of six softkeys that appears when you log in to a node is called the
main menu.
Procedure 34-5 To select a softkey

You can select a softkey by selecting the function key or the number key associated with
the softkey. Number keys <1> to <9> are equivalent to function keys <F1> to <F9>.
Number key <0> is equivalent to function key <F10>. When the node management
session prompts you for a keyboard entry and you want to select a softkey, press <ESC>
then the function key or number key associated with the softkey.
For example, in Figure 34-1, you can select the CONFIG softkey with either of the
following key sequences: <F1> or <1>. See section 34.8 for information about keyboard
entries.
The NMTI displays most softkeys in sequence on the command line as you select them,
with the exception of MORE, CANCEL, QUIT, PROCEED, and display-related softkeys,
such as SHOW_CONNECT.
Instructions
An instruction or command is a sequence of softkey selections and keystrokes that
results in an action or change of state. The instruction takes effect after you select the
PROCEED softkey.
Toggle softkeys
Use a toggle softkey to select one of two commands associated with the
same softkey.

April 2001 90-4521-43
34-9
When you select a toggle softkey, the activity governed by the softkey and the
softkey label change to the alternate option, usually opposite to the original; for
example, use the same softkey for ON and OFF.
Display-related softkeys
Some softkeys display information while you are entering an instruction. These
softkeys change the display in the data area without interrupting
the instruction.
Procedure 34-6 To undo a selection

CANCEL undoes the current part of an instruction. It removes the last few selected
softkeys from the command line and displays the menu as it was before you selected
those softkeys.
CANCEL is always function key <F8>.
Procedure 34-7 To display the main menu

From the main menu, QUIT logs you out of the node. From any other menu, QUIT
displays the main menu of the node management session.
QUIT is always function key <F9>.
Procedure 34-8 To execute an instruction

To execute an instruction after you enter it, select PROCEED. The PROCEED softkey
appears in the softkey area only when you can select it. The message Press PROCEED
to confirm change displays. The procedures in this document do not direct you to select
the PROCEED softkey; follow the prompt on the screen.
After you select PROCEED, all softkeys except CANCEL, QUIT, and PROCEED
disappear briefly and a message indicates that the system is implementing the
instruction.
When the system completes the instruction, it displays the most useful softkey menu for
the next operation. Part of the instruction remains on the command line, to save you from
having to re-enter it.
PROCEED is always function key <F10>.
34-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
34.8
Keyboard entries
Use the keyboard to make keyboard entries. Examples of keyboard entries are an
endpoint identifier, a node name, or traffic rate. When a keyboard entry is necessary,
the screen displays:
a series of question marks or periods in quotation marks, such as ??-??

or ... on the command line
a prompt beginning with the word Enter in the data area, such as Enter the
traffic rate
CANCEL, QUIT, and display-related softkeys only in the softkey area
When you enter information, your entry replaces the prompt on the command line.
Use the <Delete> or <Backspace> key to correct typing errors. Use the <ESC> key
to exit a menu that you do not want.
This document uses angle brackets (< >) to indicate keyboard entries. A description
of the keyboard entry is given in angle brackets in italics; for example, <number>
and <slot_identifier>.
Format
Most keyboard entries have specific formats that you must follow. The prompt on the
command line or text area indicates the required format. This document also includes
the correct format in each procedure.
For example, enter the date in the format <dd-MMM-yyyy>, where dd is the day of
the month, MMM is the first three letters of the month and yyyy is the year. You must
enter the hyphens. You would enter September 6, 1999 as <6-SEP-2001>.
In many cases, the format is a mixture of specific letters and variable information.
For example, in a format like <Sstream/Dd>, S and D must be entered as S and D,
and stream and d represent variable information. You must also enter the slash. A
valid entry in this format would be <S1/D16>.
Procedure 34-9 To end a keyboard entry

When you finish a keyboard entry, press .

April 2001 90-4521-43
34-11
34.9
Example
This example shows you how to work with the node management session. Carry out
the steps on your workstation as you read.
The example shows you how to configure a slot for the type of card that is in the slot.
The card is in slot 4 on the 7270 MSC shelf.
Procedure 34-10 To configure a slot

1
Log in, see section 34.4 for instructions.

The main menu displays.
Select CONFIG from the main menu.
Select OBJECT from the menu.
Select SLOT from the menu.
Identify the shelf and slot:

<P1-4>
34-12
Select TYPE AS_PRESENT from the menu.
Select PROCEED from the menu.
Finish the example by selecting QUIT to display the main menu.

90-4521-43 April 2001
35 Identifiers
35.1 Fabric identifiers
35-2
35.2 Shelf identifier
35-2
35.3 Slot identifiers
35-2
35.4 Port identifier information

35.5 IMA group identifiers
35-3
35.6 Frame stream identifiers

35.7 Endpoint information
35.8 Summary
35-2
35-3
35-3
35-4

April 2001 90-4521-43
35-1
35 Identifiers
35.1
Fabric identifiers
The two switching fabrics are X and Y. The fabric identifier refers to the switching
fabric on the Hub card.
35.2
Shelf identifier
Use a P identifier to identify a shelf. The P identifier for the 7270 MSC is P1.
The system automatically configures the P identifier. See section 40.3 for more
information about P identifiers.
35.3
Slot identifiers
Use the Pshelf-slot format to identify slots. Identify card slots as 1 to 7 for the 6-slot
shelf and 1 to 9 for the 8-slot shelf. Each interface card consists of an interface card
and an interface I/O card. Slots 1 and 2 of shelf P1 are reserved for Control cards;
identify these slots by as P1-1 or P1-2 or by CTL and ICTL for the active and inactive
Control cards. Identify Hub card slots as P1-HX and P1-HY.
35.4
Port identifier information

Table 35-1 lists the port identifiers. Identify the port in the shelf-slot-port format. For
example, identify port 3 of a card in slot 3 of shelf P1 as P1-3-4.
Table 35-1 Port identifiers
Port type
Port identifiers
Hub, OC3, STM1, and DSE circuit emulation
DS3 and E3 cell relay
1 to 3
EN100 Ethernet
1 to 4
T1 and E1 frame relay
1 to 4
T1 and E1 voiceband services
1 to 4
T1 and E1 circuit emulation, and T1 and E1 cell relay

The port identifier for T1 and E1 cell relay cards refers to the physical port. (1)
1 to 8
PSI frame relay
1 to 16
Note
(1)
35-2
For information about logical port identifiers, see section 35.5.

90-4521-43 April 2001
35 Identifiers
35.5
IMA group identifiers

T1 CR and E1 CR cards with the optional IMA module have two types of ports:
physical and logical. Logical ports contain 1 to 8 physical ports called IMA groups.
There are up to four IMA groups on each card.
Identify an IMA group in the form Pshelf-slot-Lport where L is the prefix for the
logical port. For example, identify IMA group 1 of a card in slot 3 as P1-3-L1.
When you enter the identifier of an IMA group that does not already exist, the system
creates a new group. The system then prompts you to add the physical ports to the
new group.
See section 61.2 for more information about creating IMA groups.
35.6
Frame stream identifiers

There can be up to 24 frame streams for each port of the T1 FR card. The E1 FR card
supports up to 31 frame streams for each port.
The PSI FR card supports one frame stream for each port; the frame stream carries
the entire bit stream of the port. The frame stream identifier is always 1.
For all cards, identify the frame stream in the Pshelf-slot-port;Sstream format, where
stream is the frame stream number. For example, identify stream 1 of port 3 of a card
in slot 5 of shelf P1 as P1-5-3;S1.
35.7
Endpoint information
The type of endpoint and its identifier depend on the type of card and connection.
Table 35-2 lists the types of endpoints and the sections that describe them.
Table 35-2 Endpoint types
Endpoint type
Section
Cell relay (includes cell relay and IMA groups)
15.5
Circuit emulation (includes channel groups and circuits)
15.3
Ethernet
15.6
Voiceband services
15.4
Frame relay (includes frame relay and frame forwarding)
15.2

April 2001 90-4521-43
35-3
35 Identifiers
35.8
Summary
Table 35-3 lists the object identifier formats and values and provides an example. See
Table 15-8 for a list of endpoint identifiers. Use these tables to complete the
procedures in this documentation.
Note Slots 1 and 2 of shelf P1 are reserved for Control cards.
Table 35-3 Object identifiers

Identifier
Object
Format
Value
Example
Fabric
Shelf
<fabric>
<fabric> = X or Y
Shelf
Shelf
<Pshelf>
<shelf>= 1
P1
Slot
Hub card
<Pshelf-slot>
<slot> = HX or HY
P1-HX
Active or
inactive
<Pshelf-slot>
<slot> = 1 or 2
P1-1
Active
CTL
CTL
Inactive
ICTL
ICTL
<Pshelf-slot>
<slot> = 1 to 7
P1-5
Hub card
<Pshelf-slot-port>
<port> = 1
P1-HX-1
T1 FR and E1 FR cards
<Pshelf-slot-port>
<port> = 1 to 4
P1-3-4
T1 CE and E1 CE
<Pshelf-slot-port>
<port> = 1 to 8
P1-5-6
T1 VS and E1 VS
<Pshelf-slot-port>
<port> = 1 to 4
P1-6-2
DS3 CR and E3 CR cards
<Pshelf-slot-port>
<port> = 1 to 3
P1-7-2
OC3 and STM1 cards
<Pshelf-slot-port>
<port> = 1
P1-6-1
EN100 card
<Pshelf-slot-port>
<port> = 1 to 4
P1-4-3
PSI FR card
<Pshelf-slot-port>
<port> = 1 to 16
P1-4-16
Bridge
EN100 card
<Pshelf-slot-bridge>
<bridge> = 1 to 4
P1-5-4
Bridge port
EN100 card
<bridge_port>
<bridge_port> = A1 or L1
A1
Frame relay
stream
T1 FR card
<Pshelf-slot-port;Sstream>
<stream> = 1 to 24
P1-6-3;S15
E1 FR card
<Pshelf-slot-port;Sstream>
<stream> = 1 to 31
P1-4-2;S29
PSI FR card
<Pshelf-slot-port;S1>
<port> = 1 to 16
P1-4-2;S1
Circuit
DS3 CE card
<Pshelf-slot-port;Ccircuit>
<circuit> = 1 to 28
P1-3-1;C12
Channel
group
T1 CE and E1 CE cards
<Pshelf-slot-port;
CGchannelgroup>
<channelgroup> =
1 to 24 or 1 to 31
P1-3-4;CG22
VCN
EN100 card
<Pshelf-slot-port;vcn>
<vcn> = 1 to 64
P1-2-1;64
Control
card
Circuit emulation card

Frame relay card
Cell relay card
Voiceband services card
Ethernet card
Port
35-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
36 Configuring the system
36.1 Switching fabric
36-2
36.2 Switching fabric type

36.3 Switching fabric profile
36-2
36-3
36.4 Switching to the redundant switching fabric

36.5 Configuring the system queue service factor
36.6 CAC
36-4
36-5
36-6
36.7 TCA profiles

April 2001 90-4521-43
36-14
36-1
36.1
Switching fabric
For a standalone system, set the switching fabric to STANDALONE. Configure the
fabric as SIMPLEX or REDUNDANT.
Procedure 36-1 To configure the switching fabric

Select:
CONFIG SYSTEM FABRIC EQUIPMENT
36.2
Switching fabric type

You can configure the switching fabric type on the Hub card.
When you configure the switching fabric type as 32 K, you do not need to configure
the switching fabric profile. Setting the fabric as 32K provides the optimum traffic
management capabilities. See section 36.3 for information about the switching fabric
profile.
Note 1 The 2 K and 12 K fabric types are not supported as of
Release 2.0 of the 7270 MSC. Choosing 32K during a software
upgrade causes this to be the only configurable option.
Note 2 When you configure the switching fabric type, the
7270 MSC automatically resets the Control cards.
Procedure 36-2 To configure the switching fabric type

1
Select:
CONFIG SYSTEM FABRIC EQUIPMENT TYPE
Select:
32K_CELLS
36-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
36.3
Switching fabric profile

When the system is configured as 32 K, you do not need to choose the fabric profile.
The 32 K fabric supports all service categories and supports better queueing
capabilities than the 2 K and 12 K fabrics. Table 36-1 lists the fabric profiles.
Table 36-1 Fabric profiles
Profile
Supported service categories
Traffic characteristics
1*
CBR/rt-VBR + nrt-VBR/UBR
Voice, bursty video, and bursty image
CBR/rt-VBR + ABR/UBR
Voice and bursty data
CBR/rt-VBR + nrt-VBR + ABR/UBR
Voice, bursty video, bursty image, and bursty data
CBR/rt-VBR + nrt-VBR + UBR-EPD
Data that requires a relatively low cell loss ratio
See section 77.2 for information about service categories for frame relay. See
section 77.5 for information about service categories for cell relay. See section 77.5
for information about the EPD traffic policing option.
Caution When you change the switching fabric profile, the
system disconnects all existing connections except for CBR and

rt-VBR.
Note Changing the switching fabric profile may cause CAC to
change the type of connections the node accepts.

For example, when you change from profile 2 to profile 1, CAC does
not accept ABR connections.

April 2001 90-4521-43
36-3
Procedure 36-3 To configure the switching fabric profile

1
Select:
CONFIG SYSTEM FABRIC PROFILE
Enter the profile.

a
For voice, bursty video, and bursty image, enter:

<1>
For voice and bursty data, enter:

<2>
For voice, bursty video, bursty image, and bursty data, enter:
<3>
For data that requires a relatively low cell loss ratio, enter:
<4>
36.4
Reset the Control card. See Resetting a card in section 43.3.
Switching to the redundant switching fabric

The system automatically enables switching fabric redundancy when there is a
second Hub card in the system. The 7270 MSC identifies the redundant switching
fabrics as switching fabric X and switching fabric Y.
When the system powers up, switching fabric X becomes the active fabric. If the
active fabric experiences a problem, the system switches all traffic over to the
redundant switching fabric.
The failure or removal of the Hub card can cause the switching fabric to change.
If a problem occurs on the active fabric that causes the system to switch fabrics, the
system remains on the newly active fabric even when the problem on the other fabric
is repaired. To switch to the redundant fabric, you can force a fabric switch using a
node management session.
Caution A switching fabric change can cause a momentary
service interruption.
36-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 36-4 To change switching fabrics

You can determine which switching fabric is active before you switch to the redundant
fabric.
1
Select:
MAINT SYSTEM FABRIC
Select:
FORCE_SWITCH
36.5
Configuring the system queue service factor

Bandwidth that is not allocated to CBR, rt-VBR, or nrt-VBR queuing points is split
equally between ABR and UBR queuing points by default. You can change the ratio
of unallocated bandwidth that is applied to the ABR and UBR queuing points on the
node.
Cards that have the eTM installed and configured do not use the system queue
service factor because the eTM uses WFQ to allocate bandwidth. See chapter 63 for
information about the eTM.
Procedure 36-5 To configure the system queue service factor

1
Select:
CONFIG SYSTEM FABRIC QUEUE_SERVICE
Select:
UBR_PERCENT or ABR_PERCENT
Enter:
<percentage>
where percentage is the percentage of unallocated bandwidth to be applied to the ABR or UBR
queuing points
The remaining unallocated bandwidth is applied to queuing points with the other
service category. For example, if you enter 70% for UBR_PERCENT, then
ABR_PERCENT will automatically be set to 30%.

April 2001 90-4521-43
36-5
36.6
CAC
CAC is an algorithm that evaluates whether you can add a new connection to the
node without affecting the service objectives of other connections.
CAC is available for links and for trunk groups. This section describes CAC for
links. See section 85.4 for information about CAC for trunk groups, including
information about assigning a CAC profile to a trunk group.
CAC examines the shared resources of the switch, such as the number of existing
connections, available bandwidth, and available buffers. It also examines the
resource requirements of the proposed connection. CAC admits the proposed
connection when it does not affect QoS guarantees for the existing connections. The
switch must have available resources to accommodate the proposed connection and
its projected resource requirements.
The system supports 64 CAC profiles for cell relay and frame relay cards. Profile 1
is preconfigured: CAC is enabled with default values and the booking factor is set to
100% for each service category. For the other 63 profiles, you can independently
enable or disable capacity checking and configure booking factors for each of the
service categories.
The system automatically uses Profile 1 for circuit emulation cards. You can assign
any CAC profile to cell relay ports and frame streams.
For cell relay endpoints with the nrt-VBR service category, you can affect the virtual
bandwidth computation by configuring PCR and SCR scaling factors for the port.
See section 51.21 for information about PCR and SCR scaling factors and their
interaction with CAC options.
You can guarantee bandwidth for both ABR and UBR traffic by defining the
nrt-VBR limit using one of the CAC profiles. The default CAC profile is set to 100%,
which means that nrt-VBR traffic has higher priority than ABR or UBR traffic.
When a database is upgraded to Release 2.0 and later, the rate limit is set to a default
of 100% for all CAC profiles.
The system checks the nrt-VBR limit when:
a control card is reset

a line card is inserted
the CAC profile of the port is changed
the rate limit of the profile is changed
The system raises an alarm if the connections are affected.

The rate limit applies only to cards that have the MTSM installed and configured.
Cards that have the eTM installed and configured do not use the rate limit because
the eTM uses WFQ to allocate bandwidth. See chapter 63 for more information about
the MTSM and eTM.
36-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
The system automatically checks the system resources when a module type
configuration change or configured card version occurs. The system raises an alarm
if the QoS cannot be guaranteed on the existing connections.
Note Make sure that you follow the correct procedure for
installing or replacing cell relay cards.
For frame relay endpoints, the system translates frame relay traffic parameters to cell
relay parameters in compliance with ATM Forum B-ICI specification Method 2,
Option 1.
Table 36-2 lists how the CAC allocates system resources for the different
types of service categories. See section 77.8 for information about configuring
service categories.
Table 36-2 Resource allocation
Service category
Allocation basis
CBR
PIR
rt-VBR and nrt-VBR
PIR, SIR, and MBS
ABR and UBR
MIR
When you configure CAC options, the system displays the number of endpoints for
each service category and the number of CPSS connections.
Figure 36-1 shows an example of CAC for two OC3 cross-connections from
sources 1 and 2 to a single destination. The cell source 1 cross-connection has a
rate of 75 Mb/s and cell source 2 cross-connection has a rate of 50 Mb/s; together
they use 125 Mb/s; the OC3 link to the destination endpoint can support up
to 149.76 Mb/s. When you increase the cell source 2 cross-connection rate from
50 Mb/s to 75 Mb/s, CAC rejects the increase because the combined rate of 150 Mb/s
exceeds the payload bandwidth of the cell destination.

April 2001 90-4521-43
36-7
Figure 36-1 Operation of CAC

Cell
source 1
Cell
source 2
OC3
OC3
OC3
OC3
Bottleneck
OC3
OC3
Slot 3
Cell
destination
6
9227
Configure CAC options based on the service category and the queuing point type.
See section 77.2 for information about service categories for frame relay. See
section 77.5 for information about service categories for cell relay.
Table 36-3 lists the queuing point types.
Table 36-3 Queuing point types
Queuing point type
Softkey
All interface cards
LINE_CARD
Multiplexers on all Hub cards
MUX
Reserved for future functionality
SWITCH
You can configure the booking factor only when you enable capacity checking for
the service category and queuing point type.
Table 36-4 lists the CAC options for each queuing point type and service category.
Table 36-4 CAC options
Queuing point type
Capacity checking
Booking factor
Interface card
Multiplexer
Switch
You can configure CAC to accept proposed connections that it would otherwise not
admit. Do this by disabling capacity checking or by increasing the booking factor on
one or more of the queuing point types.
36-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
Capacity checking
You can enable or disable capacity checking for the service categories independently
on each queuing point type.
Table 36-5 lists the configurable options for capacity checking.
Table 36-5 Configuration options for capacity checking
Option
Softkey
Enable capacity checking (check for congestion)
CHECK_CONGEST
Disable capacity checking (accept all connections)
ACCEPT_ALL
You can enable capacity checking on a service category and queuing point type even
if the bandwidth used by existing connections exceeds the available capacity. When
you re-enable capacity checking, the booking factor retains its previous value.
Disable capacity checking for a service category on one or more of the three queuing
point types to force the system to accept all connections in a specific service
category. For example, to accept all CBR connections, disable capacity checking for
CBR on the switch, the multiplexer, and the interface cards.
When you enable capacity checking, you can configure the booking factor value for
the service category and queuing point type.
Capacity checking is automatically updated to reflect the current configuration when
you perform one of the following:
add a cross connect

change the service category or TRAP attributes for a cross-connect endpoint
add a trunk group with reserved bandwidth
change the bandwidth reserved for a trunk group
change the PCR or SCR scaling factor values for the nrt-VBR connections on a
port
change the configured cell relay card version
change the configured module type
If the virtual bandwidth exceeds the available bandwidth after a CAC update, a major
alarm is raised. This indicates that QoS guarantees are no longer valid.

April 2001 90-4521-43
36-9
Increasing a booking factor

You can force the CAC function to accept connections in specific service categories
by increasing the service category booking factor on one or more of the three queuing
point types. You can configure the booking factor after you have enabled capacity
checking.
The default booking factor is 100%. Table 36-6 lists the values and effects of
CAC booking factor values.
Table 36-6 Effect of booking factors
Booking factor value
Effect
0%
CAC does not admit any connections with the specified service category
on the queuing point type.
1% to 99%
CAC admits fewer connections than normal with the specified service
category on the queuing point type.
100%
CAC admits connections with the service category on the queuing point
type. This sets CAC for normal.
101% to 999%
CAC admits more connections than usual with the service category on
the queuing point type. Cell loss and cell delay guarantees for new or
existing connections with this service category and lower-priority service
categories are lost; see Table 36-7.
Table 36-7 lists the effects of overbooking CAC on the service categories.
Table 36-7 Effect of overbooking on cell loss and delay guarantees
36-10
Service category
with overbooking
Effect
CBR
There is a loss of performance objectives for all new and existing

connections on this queuing point.
rt-VBR
There is a loss of performance objectives for all new and existing

connections on this queuing point.
nrt-VBR
There is a loss of performance objectives for new and existing nrt-VBR,

ABR, and UBR connections on this queuing point.
ABR
There is a loss of performance objectives for new and existing ABR and
UBR connections on this queuing point.

90-4521-43 April 2001
Egress VC thresholds
Egress VC thresholds apply to cards that have the eTM installed and configured. You
configure egress VC thresholds as part of the CAC profile. On the eTM, the CBR,
rt-VBR, and nrt-VBR service categories share egress buffer space and have a
reserved buffer space for each service category. To provide isolation and fairness
among connections, you can configure per-VC buffer allocation thresholds for the
egress buffer space for the CBR, rt-VBR, and nrt-VBR service categories. The
values for each service category range between 0 and 65 535 cells. Table 36-8 lists
the default threshold values for each service category.
Table 36-8 Default values for egress VC thresholds
Service category
Default threshold
CBR
100 cells
rt-VBR
100 cells
nrt-VBR
500 cells
Procedure 36-6 To configure CAC options

1
Select:
CONFIG SYSTEM CON_ADMISSN
Select the queuing point type:

LINE_CARD or MUX or SWITCH
Select the service category:

CONSTANT_RATE or RT_VAR_RATE or NRT_VAR_RATE or AVAIL_RATE or
UNSPECIF_RATE
Configure capacity checking.

a
To enable capacity checking, select:

CHECK_CONGEST
To disable capacity checking, select:

ACCEPT_ALL
When you have enabled capacity checking, configure the booking factor by
entering:
BOOK_FACTOR <factor>
where factor is a booking factor from 1 to 999

April 2001 90-4521-43
36-11
Procedure 36-7 To assign a CAC profile to an ATM port

1
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT PORT <Pshelf-slot-port>
See Table 35-3 for shelf, slot, and port values.
Enter:
CON_ADDMISSN PROFILE_NUMBER <number>
where number is the number of the profile
Procedure 36-8 To configure the nrt-VBR limit for a CAC profile

1
Enter:
CONFIG SYSTEM CON_ADMISSN LINE_CARD <number>
Enter:
MORE RATE_LIMIT <number>
where number is a whole number percentage from 1 to 100
Procedure 36-9 To assign a CAC profile to a frame stream

1
Enter:
Enter:
STREAM <number>
where number is the number of the stream
Enter:
MORE CON_ADMISSN PROFILE_NUMBER <number>
36-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 36-10 To configure the egress VC threshold

1
Enter:
CONFIG SYSTEM CON_ADMISSN LINE_CARD <number>
Select the service category:

CONSTANT_RATE or RT_VAR_RATE or NRT_VAR_RATE
Enter:
VC_THRESHOLD <cells>
where cells is the number of cells for the threshold from 0 to 65535

April 2001 90-4521-43
36-13
36.7
TCA profiles
TCA profiles manage the large number of performance parameter thresholds that
you can configure on the node. Each TCA profile contains a group of similar
performance parameters.
You can view configuration information for TCA profiles on the node. Table 36-9
lists the fields on the configuration information screen.
Table 36-9 Configuration information for TCA profiles
Field
Description
TCA Profile Class
This field displays the TCA profile classes that you have
selected.
Profile Number
This field displays the profile number within the profile

class.
Profile Name
This field displays the optional name of a profile within the

TCA profile class.
Code
This field displays the code that the node management

terminal uses to indicate the performance parameter; see
Table 36-10.
Performance Parameter
This field displays the name of the performance

parameter.
Threshold Values (1)
15_MIN
This field displays the 15-min threshold value assigned to

the performance parameter.
NE Threshold Values (2)
15_MIN
This field displays the near-end, 15-min threshold value

assigned to the performance parameter.
24_HOUR
This field displays the near-end, 24-h threshold value

15_MIN
This field displays the far-end, 15-min threshold value

24_HOUR
This field displays the far-end, 24-h threshold value

FE Threshold Values (3)
Notes
(1)
This field displays for TCA profiles FRCC and FRSC only.
(2)
This field displays for TCA profiles OC3S, OC3L, OC3P, DS3P, DS3L, DS3PL, AAL1, DS1,
and E1 only.
(3)
This field displays for TCA profiles OC3L, OC3P, DS3P, DS3PL, DS1, and E1 only.
You can configure the threshold value for each performance parameter within a
TCA class.
36-14

90-4521-43 April 2001
Table 36-10 lists the TCA profile classes and where to find the default values for
performance parameters for each.
Table 36-10 Summary of TCA profile classes
Card type
Profile class
Code
Table
Frame relay
Card congestion
FRCC
36-11
Stream congestion
FRSC
36-11
DS3 port (line and path)
DS3L
DS3P
36-12
DS1 circuit (physical layer)
DS1
36-13
E1 circuit (physical layer)
E1
36-13
AAL1 circuit performance
AAL1
36-14
DS1 circuit (physical layer)
DS1
36-13
E1 circuit (physical layer)
E1
36-13
OAM
OAMALS
36-15
DS3/E3 (line, path, and PLCP)
DS3L
DS3P
DS3PL
36-12
OC3/STM1 (section, line, and path)
OC3S
OC3L
OC3P
36-16
Circuit emulation
Voiceband services
Cell relay port
The system automatically creates 39 TCA profile classes in the node database and
configures them with default values. Tables 36-11 to 36-16 list the default values for
the performance parameters for each TCA profile class.
Table 36-11 Default performance parameters for frame relay congestion
Performance parameter
TCA profile class

Card congestion (FRCC)
Stream congestion (FRSC)
15-min
15-min
MCT
SCT

April 2001 90-4521-43
36-15
Table 36-12 Default performance parameters for DS3 and E3 ports

TCA profile class

DS3 line
DS3 path
DS3 PLCP
15-min
24-h
15-min
24-h
15-min
24-h
CV
387
3865
382
3820
359
3584
ES
25
250
25
250
86
864
ESA
25
250
BES
25
250
FC
SEF
40
40
SEFS
SES
40
40
40
UAS
10
10
10
10
DM
Table 36-13 Default performance parameters for DS1 and E1 physical layers
36-16
TCA profile class

DS1 physical layer
E1 physical layer
15-min
24-h
15-min
24-h
CV
13340
13340
ES
65
65
ESA
65
BES
65
65
FC
SEFS
SES
10
10
UAS
10
10
CSS
DM
FEBE
14
FASER
14
CRC
14

90-4521-43 April 2001
Table 36-14 Default performance parameters for AAL1 circuits

TCA profile class

AAL1 performance
15-min
24-h
HE
10
LC
25
BU
10
BO
10
US
10
PPE
10
PR
10
Table 36-15 Default performance parameters for OAM on cell relay ports
OAM failure reporting threshold
AIS Threshold
20
RDI Threshold
20
Table 36-16 Default performance parameters for OC3 and STM1 ports
TCA profile class

OC3 section
OC3 line and OC3 path
15-min
24-h
15-min
24-h
CV
25
250
25
250
ES
20
200
20
200
SEFS
SES
UAS
10
10

April 2001 90-4521-43
36-17
During a node management session, you use a code to indicate which TCA profile
class you want to configure. Table 36-17 lists the codes for TCA profile classes, the
number of profiles you can configure for each TCA profile class, and the sections
that describe how to select profiles.
Table 36-17 Codes for TCA profile classes
TCA profile class
Code
Number of
profiles
Section
Frame relay card congestion
FRCC
45.1
Frame relay stream congestion
FRSC
54.5
DS3/E3 port line
DS3L
52.1
DS3/E3 port path
DS3P
52.1
DS3/E3 port PLCP
DS3PL
52.1
DS1 circuit physical layer
DS1
57.4
E1 circuit physical layer
E1
57.4
AAL1 circuit performance
AAL1
57.15
DXI stream statistics
DXI
54.6
OAM Failure Reporting Threshold
OFRT
52.1
OC3/STM1 port section
OC3S
52.1
OC3/STM1 port line
OC3L
52.1
OC3/STM1 port path
OC3P
52.1
Note When you configure a TCA profile through a node
management session, the profile may not be the same as the

equivalent profile on the rest of the network. This is because you
define network-wide TCA profiles through the 5620 NM. The node
raises a diagnostic alarm, which is displayed on the network manager,
that indicates that someone has changed the TCA profile through a
node management session.
Procedure 36-11 To name TCA profiles

1
Enter:
CONFIG SYSTEM TCA_PROFILE <class>
where class is the code of a TCA profile class; see Table 36-17
Enter:
<profile_number>
where profile_number is the number of profile; see Table 36-17
36-18

90-4521-43 April 2001
Enter:
NAME <name>
where name is 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters
Procedure 36-12 To configure thresholds for TCA profiles

1
Enter:
CONFIG SYSTEM TCA_PROFILE <class>
where class is the code of a TCA profile class; see Table 36-17
Enter the profile number.

<profile_number> PERF_PARAMTERS
where profile_number is the number of profile; see Table 36-17
Select the performance parameter; see Table 36-18.
For OFRT TCA, proceed to step 6. For all other TCAs, select the near end or the
far end.
a
For the OC3S, DS3L, or AAL1 TCA, select:

NEAR_END
For the OC3L, OC3P, DS3P, DS3PL, DS1, or E1 TCA, select:

NEAR_END or FAR_END
Select the interval.

a
For cell relay TCA profiles, select:

15_MIN or 24_HOUR
For frame TCA profiles, select:

15_MIN
For circuit emulation TCA profiles, select:

15_MIN
Enter the threshold value:

<value>
where value is the threshold value; see Table 36-18

April 2001 90-4521-43
36-19
Table 36-18 lists the threshold values for each performance parameter.
Table 36-18 Threshold values for performance parameters
Threshold value
CV
15_MIN
1 to 16 383
24_HOUR
1 to 1 048 575
15_MIN
1 to 900
24_HOUR
1 to 65 535
15_MIN
1 to 900
24_HOUR
1 to 65 535
15_MIN
1 to 900
24_HOUR
1 to 65 535
15_MIN
1 to 90
24_HOUR
1 to 8640
MCT
15_MIN
1 to 3600
SCT
15_MIN
1 to 3600
SEF
15_MIN
1 to 16 383
24_HOUR
1 to 1 048 575
15_MIN
1 to 900
24_HOUR
1 to 65 535
15_MIN
1 to 900
24_HOUR
1 to 65 535
15_MIN
1 to 900
24_HOUR
1 to 65 535
15_MIN
1 to 900
24_HOUR
1 to 65 535
15_MIN
1 to 15
24_HOUR
1 to 1440
15_MIN
1 to 3 695 400
24_HOUR
1 to 354 758 400
15_MIN
1 to 3 695 400
24_HOUR
1 to 354 758 400
15_MIN
1 to 3 695 400
24_HOUR
1 to 354 758 400
15_MIN
1 to 3 695 400
24_HOUR
1 to 354 758 400
15_MIN
1 to 3 695 400
24_HOUR
1 to 354 758 400
BES
ES
ESA
FC
SEFS
SES
UAS
CSS
DM
HE
LC
BU
BO
US
(1 of 2)
36-20

90-4521-43 April 2001
Threshold value
FEBE
15_MIN
1 to 16 383
FASER
15_MIN
1 to 16 383
CRC
15_MIN
1 to 16 383
PPE
15_MIN
1 to 3 695 400
24_HOUR
1 to 354 758 400
15_MIN
1 to 3 695 400
24_HOUR
1 to 354 758 400
T_LNG
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
T_SML
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
I_DSA
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
E_DSA
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
FFE_E
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
CRC_E
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
NON_I
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
ACF_E
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
F_EOL
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
I_CNG
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
E_CNG
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
NOT_A
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
RSP_E
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
INVAL
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
CON_1
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
CON_2
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
I_DIS
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
E_DIS
1_HOUR
1 to 4 294 967 295
AIS
0 to 100
RDI
0 to 100
PR
(2 of 2)

April 2001 90-4521-43
36-21
36-22

90-4521-43 April 2001
37 Configuring node parameters
37.1 Serial-port baud rate
37-2
37.2 Date, time, and node name
37-3
37.3 Using NTP servers for time and date

37.4 Access levels and passwords
37.5 CPSS node parameters
37.6 Managing CPSS
37-6
37-8
37-11
37.7 IP addresses and Subnet mask

April 2001 90-4521-43
37-4
37-15
37-1
37.1
Serial-port baud rate

The system has two ports for connecting to serial-based node management terminals:
SP1 and SP2. SP1 corresponds to the TIA/EIA-232 port on the Control I/O card and
SP2 corresponds to the NMTI port on the Control card faceplate. The NMTI screen
shows whether SP1 or SP2 is the port currently used for the node management
session.
You can change the baud rate for SP1 or SP2. Table 37-1 lists the baud rate options
for the serial ports.
Table 37-1 Baud rate options for serial ports
Baud rate
Softkey
600 b/s
600
1.2 kb/s
1200
2.4 kb/s
2400
4.8 kb/s
4800
9.6 kb/s
9600
19.2 kb/s
19 200
Initially, the baud rate of the node management terminal must be set at 9.6 kb/s to
establish communications with the system. After the terminal connects to the system,
you can configure SP1 or SP2 of the system for a new baud rate.
When you change the baud rate for SP1 or SP2, the change takes effect when you
select PROCEED. Change the baud rate of the node management terminal to match
the new baud rate of the serial port.
When you initiate a node management session from the terminal connected to the
non-current port, the non-current port becomes the current port. If a node
management session is in progress when you initiate the new one, then that session
is terminated.
37-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 37-1 To configure the baud rate

1
Select:
HOUSE
Select:
SER_PORT_1 or SER_PORT_2
Select:
BAUD_RATE
Select the baud rate of the port:

600 or 1200 or 2400 or 4800 or 9600 or 19200
37.2
Change the baud rate of the terminal to match the baud rate of the serial port.
Date, time, and node name

You can configure the date, time, and node name; they display in the header line. The
node name displays only when you have configured it. When you have configured
the date and time, the time displays in the 24-h format. When you have not
configured the time, it displays with an R to indicate elapsed time since the last
system reset.
You can also set the date and time manually or the system can derive the date and
time automatically from one or more remote NTP servers. When you enable NTP
server-usage, you cannot configure the node date and time manually. See
section 37.3 for more information.
Procedure 37-2 To configure the date

1
Select:
HOUSE
Enter:
DATE <dd-MMM-yyyy>
where dd is the day, MMM is the month and yyyy is the year; for example, enter September 6, 2000
as 06-SEP-2000

April 2001 90-4521-43
37-3
Procedure 37-3 To configure the time

1
Select:
HOUSE
Enter:
TIME <hh:mm>
where hh is the hour in 24-h format and mm is the minute; for example, enter 3:17 p.m. as 15:17
Procedure 37-4 To configure the node name

1
Select:
HOUSE
Enter:
NODE_NAME <name>
where name contains a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters without spaces
37.3
Using NTP servers for time and date

You can configure the node date and time to be derived automatically from one or
more remote NTP servers. You cannot manually change the time and date when
NTP servers are enabled.
NTP servers
NTP servers supply time-of-day to the node. NTP servers use UTC, an
internationally recognized timing standard, to supply the time to the node. You can
identify as many as four NTP servers. When you identify more than one server, the
node derives its time-of-day from the server that has the most accurate time source.
You must configure the UTC offset for the node to accurately reflect local times on
the system.
37-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Table 37-2 lists the fields in the NTP configuration screen.

Table 37-2 NTP configuration information
Field
Description
NTP Oper Status
NTP is up or down
NTP Admin Status
NTP is enabled or disabled
NTP Server Oper Status
The operational status of the NTP server, one of:
Up: the NTP server is supplying time

Up: the NTP server is in-service but is not supplying time
Down: the NTP server is out-of-service
Unreachable: the NTP server is unreachable
Unsuitable: the NTP server is not suitable for supplying time
UTC Date and Time
The UTC time when the screen was last refreshed
UTC Offset
The number of hours ahead of or behind UTC
Procedure 37-5 To identify an NTP server

Enter:
HOUSE MORE NTP IP_ADDRESSES <IP_address>
where IP_address is in the decimal format #.#.#.# and where # is in the range 0 to 255
Procedure 37-6 To enable or disable NTP server-usage

1
Select:
HOUSE MORE NTP
Select:
NTP_ENABLE or NTP_DISABLE

April 2001 90-4521-43
37-5
Procedure 37-7 To configure the NTP offset

1
Select:
HOUSE MORE NTP
Specify the UTC offset.

a
To specify a UTC offset that is ahead of UTC, enter:

UTC_OFFSET <+hh:mm>
where hh is the hour and mm is the minutes, set to 15 minute intervals of no more than 13
hours and no less than 15 minutes
To specify a UTC offset that is behind UTC, enter:

UTC_OFFSET <-hh:mm>
where hh is the hour and mm is the minutes, set to 15 minute intervals of no more than 13
hours and no less than 15 minutes
For example, enter -3:45 when you are located three hours and forty-five minutes
west of Greenwich, England. UTC is universally set to Greenwich Mean Time.
37.4
Access levels and passwords

The system has six access levels, numbered 0 to 5. Enter your access level and
password when you log in. See section 34.4 for information about logging in.
Access level 0
Access level 0 allows read-only access to all node management functions. You do
not need a password. Table 37-3 lists softkey options for access to level 0.
Table 37-3 Access level 0 softkey options
Function
Softkey
Permit
ENABLE
Prohibit
DISABLE
Access levels 1 to 5
Access levels 1 to 5 allow read and write access to all node management functions.
Each level can have its own password.
Levels 1 to 5 are similar, except that level 5 users can configure level 0 access and
passwords on the node and can download software. See section 42.1 for information
about downloading software.
37-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 37-8 To configure level 0 access

You must be logged in as a level 5 user to configure the level 0 access.
1
Select:
HOUSE MORE LEVEL_0
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
Passwords
The default password for levels 1 to 5 is mainstreet. Level 5 users can change the
password for each level. Passwords must be at least 8 and no more
than 12 alphanumeric characters with no spaces. Passwords are not case-sensitive.
When you first commission the system, we recommend that you change all the
passwords to protect the system from unauthorized use.
The system does not save passwords as part of the configuration database backup.
When you load a database into the node, the passwords revert to the default.
Procedure 37-9 To change the password

You must be a level 5 user to change passwords.
1
Enter:
HOUSE MORE CHNG_PSSWD <password>
where password is the level 5 password
Select the level that you want to change the password for:
LEVEL_1 or LEVEL_2 or LEVEL_3 or LEVEL_4 or LEVEL_5
Enter the new password:

<password>
where password contains 8 to 12 alphanumeric characters
The screen does not display the password. If you make a typing error, enter <Esc>
and select CANCEL. The system displays the HOUSE MORE menu.
4
Enter the new password again:

<password>
where password contains 8 to 12 alphanumeric characters

April 2001 90-4521-43
37-7
37.5
CPSS node parameters

This section describes the node parameters that you can configure for CPSS.
See section 19.5 for information about CPSS.
CPSS domain number

The CPSS domain number must be in the range 1 to 60; the default is 1. See
section 19.5 for information about domains.
CPSS node number

The CPSS node number must be in the range 1 to 254 and must be unique within the
domain. The default is 255. The HOUSE menu screen shows the default as
Unassigned.
CPSS class A address

The CPSS class A address must be in the range 1 to 126; the default is 10.
The system assigns the default CPSS class A address automatically; you do not need
to configure it. If you change the class A address, it must be mutually exclusive from
the IP class A address and another company must not own it. All elements in the
same network, including 5620 NM, must have the same CPSS class A network
address.
Inband CPSS
The E1 CE card transports TDM-based 16 kb/s CPSS inband messages over national
use bits to far-end TDM equipment.
Figure 37-1 shows an example of CPSS messages transported across a network. The
5620 NM is generating CPSS data over selected timeslots of the SPRITE card E1
interface. The 3600 MainStreet node, between the SPRITE card and the 7270 MSC
E1 CE port, is configured to carry 16 kb/s of CPSS data over the E1 timeslots. Data
from the 3600 MainStreet node to the 7270 MSC is transmitted over the two least
significant bits in the octet of the timeslots. ATM VCs cross-connected to the
timeslots carry the data over the network. At the far-end of the network, each VC is
cross-connected to a channel group configured to carry TS0 of an E1 CE port. The
two least significant bits received from each octet are buffered in the E1 CE until four
bits are received and they are transmitted on the next E1 frame. This completes the
link to the far-end equipment. The operation is reversed in the opposite direction.
You can use equipment other than the 3600 MainStreet node to transmit CPSS data
between the ATM network and the 5620 NM. The equipment must be capable of
transmitting 16 kb/s CPSS over E1 timeslots using the two least significant bits in
each octet to transmit the data.
37-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
Figure 37-1 E1 CE inband CPSS

3600 MainStreet
ATM
network
TS0
E1
NTU
TS0
E1
NTU
E1
E1
CE
OC3
CR
7270 MSC
OC3
CR
E1
CE
7470 MSP
SPRITE
card
5620 NM
TS0
E1
NTU
15490
CPSS node type

Table 37-4 lists the CPSS node types. When you change the node type, the
CPSS links restart; this causes a temporary disruption in CPSS traffic.
Table 37-4 Node types
Node type
Softkey
Routing node
ROUTING_NODE
Stub node
STUB_NODE
Leaf node
LEAF_NODE
Note Before you can change the node type to stub node, you must
disconnect CPSS links that have a current far-end type of stub node or
network management system. Also, none of the CPSS links should
have a programmed far-end type of stub node or network
management system whether they are configured or not.

April 2001 90-4521-43
37-9
Procedure 37-10 To configure the domain number, node number, or

class A address
1
Select:
HOUSE MORE CPSS
Enter the domain number, or the node number, or both.

a
To specify the domain number, enter:

DOMAIN_NUMBER <domain>
where domain is in the range 1 to 60
To specify the node number, enter:

NODE_NUMBER <node>
where node is in the range 1 to 254
To specify the class A address, enter:

CLASS_A_ADDR <address>
where address is in the range 1 to 126
Select:
PROG_TO_CURR
Procedure 37-11 To configure the node type

1
Select:
HOUSE MORE CPSS NODE_TYPE
Select the type of CPSS node.

a
For a routing or gateway node, select:

ROUTING_NODE
For a stub node, select:

STUB_NODE
For a leaf node, select:

LEAF_NODE
37-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
37.6
Managing CPSS
For each domain, you can view information about CPSS nodes and links in the
CPSS domain. See section 19.5 to view information about the network management
systems connected to the domain.
The NMTI screen displays the CPSS nodes that you can reach from the system, and
the CPSS links that are connected to it. You can view information for all links or for
links with a specific state or cost.
Table 37-5 lists the fields for each node on the screen. The number of visible nodes
includes the current node.
Table 37-5 Information about CPSS nodes
Field
Description
Node
This field indicates the CPSS node number of the far-end node or network
management system.
Cost
This field indicates the total CPSS path cost to the far-end node or network
management system. It is the sum of all the link costs along the least-cost path
to the destination.
Endpoint
This field indicates the cell relay or frame relay endpoint of the far-end node or
the IP address of the network management system.

April 2001 90-4521-43
37-11
Table 37-6 lists the CPSS link information

Table 37-6 Information about CPSS links
Field
Description
Link
This field indicates the CPSS link identifier.
Connected To
This field indicates the cell relay or frame relay endpoint or the IP address of
the far-end node or network management system.
Far End Type

Programmed
This field indicates the programmed CPSS routing type for the far-end device,
one of:
Far End Type

Current
Link Status
This field indicates the type of CPSS device at the end of the link, one of:
ROUTING_NODE
STUB_NODE
LEAF_NODE
NET_MGR
Unknown
This field indicates the status of the CPSS link:
Far End Address
a routing node 7270 MSC (ROUTING_NODE)

a stub node 7270 MSC system (STUB_NODE)
a leaf node (LEAF_NODE)
network management (NET_MGR)
CPSS determines what the far-end type is (AUTO)
UP
PARALLEL
DOWN
LOOPBACK
DOMAIN_ERROR
CLASS_A_ERROR
NON_ROUTABLE
This field indicates the CPSS node number of the far-end node or network
management system.
Procedure 37-12 To view CPSS node information

1
Select:
MAINT OBJECT RESOURCE CPSS SHOW_NODES ALL
To view nodes that are not on the screen, select the viewing option:
PREVIOUS or NEXT
To view nodes starting at a specific node number, enter:

FROM_NODE <node>
where node is the CPSS node number
37-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 37-13 To view information for all CPSS links

1
Select:
MAINT OBJECT RESOURCE CPSS SHOW_LINKS ALL
To view links that are not on the screen, select the viewing option.
a
To view information about links with lower link numbers, select:

PREVIOUS
To view information about links with higher link numbers, select:

NEXT
To view links starting at a specific link number, enter:

FROM_LINK <link>
where link is a CPSS link identifier in the range 1 to 99
The screen shows as many as 12 connections at one time.
Procedure 37-14 To view CPSS links with a specific state

You can view all active links or inactive links.
1
Select:
MAINT OBJECT RESOURCE CPSS SHOW_LINKS
Select the link state you want to view:

WITH_STATE_UP or WITH_STATE_DOWN
See Table 37-6 for a description of each field on the information screen.
3
To view links that are not on the screen, select:

PREVIOUS or NEXT

FROM_LINK <link>

April 2001 90-4521-43
37-13
Procedure 37-15 To view CPSS links with a specific cost

1
Select:
MAINT OBJECT RESOURCE CPSS SHOW_LINKS
Select the link cost you want to view.

a
To view all links with the default cost of 10, select:

WITH_BIAS NORMAL
To view all links with a cost of 50, select:

WITH_BIAS AGAINST
To view all links with a cost of 1, select:

WITH_BIAS TOWARD
To view all links where cost is not the default, select:

WITH_BIAS NOT_NORMAL
To view links with a cost other than 1, 10, or 50, select:

WITH_BIAS RANGE <value>
where value is either a single number or a range of numbers from 1 to 1023.
To view links that are not on the screen, select:

PREVIOUS or NEXT

FROM_LINK <link>
37-14

90-4521-43 April 2001
37.7
IP addresses and Subnet mask

Table 37-7 lists the three parameters that you can configure.
Table 37-7 Configurable IP parameters
IP parameters
Softkey
Control card
CTLIP
Default router
DEF_ROUTER
Subnet mask
SUBNET_MASK
Control card IP address

The Control card IP address is a unique 32-bit number that identifies the node within
the IP network. Enter it in dotted-decimal format.
Procedure 37-16 To configure the Control card IP address

1
Enter:
HOUSE MORE IP_ADDRESSES CTLIP <IP_address>
Reset the active card to activate the new IP address, see section 43.3.

April 2001 90-4521-43
37-15
Default router IP address

The system default IP address for the router is the IP address of the nearest network
router. When the system receives an IP packet addressed to a host on a different
subnet, the system forwards the packet to the default router.
The IP address of the default router must be in the same subnet as the card
IP address. You can disable the default router by entering the address
as 0.0.0.0.
Procedure 37-17 To configure the default router IP address

Enter:
HOUSE MORE IP_ADDRESSES DEF_ROUTER <IP_address>
The address takes effect immediately.
Subnet mask
The subnet mask is a hexadecimal code used to parse an IP address into a subnet ID
and a host ID. You can configure it only if the network is partitioned into
subnetworks. When you configure the subnet mask, the system knows it is in a
network divided into subnets. The system uses the subnet mask during forwarding
decisions to determine the subnet ID of the outgoing IP frames.
Procedure 37-18 To configure the subnet mask

Enter:
HOUSE MORE IP_ADDRESSES SUBNET_MASK <subnet_mask>
where subnet_mask is in the decimal format #.#.#.# and where # is in the range 0 to 255
The subnet mask takes effect immediately.
37-16

90-4521-43 April 2001
38 Configuring synchronization
38.1 System synchronization
38-2
38.2 Synchronization module present or not present

38.3 Selecting synchronization sources
38-3
38.4 Disabling and enabling synchronization sources

38.5 Synchronization mode
38-5
38-6
38.6 Managing system synchronization

April 2001 90-4521-43
38-3
38-7
38-1
38.1
System synchronization
The synchronization module synchronizes the 7270 MSC to the rest of the network.
The module receives a clock signal from a reference source and sends the timing
information to the shelves of the node.
When you do not install the synchronization module or configure it as absent, all
cards in the node run asynchronously. As a result, interface cards working at their
full transmission rate risk losing cells and circuit emulation cards working
synchronously or with SRTS timing will experience slips.
Table 38-1 lists the reference sources that the synchronization module uses to derive
system synchronization.
Table 38-1 Reference sources for the synchronization module
Source
Description
External A
The synchronization module uses the signal from a 1.544 Mb/s T1 signal BITS
clock or a 2.048 MHz external synchronization source connected to port A of
the reference clock I/O card.
External B
The synchronization module uses the signal from a 1.544 Mb/s T1 signal BITS
clock or a 2.048 MHz external synchronization source connected to port B of
the reference clock I/O card. Port B provides redundancy for port A.
Interface port
The synchronization module uses derived line timing from a port on a

synchronous interface in the node. You can use multiple ports to provide
redundancy.
Holdover mode
The synchronization module generates a timing signal based on the last

available source.
Free-run mode
The synchronization module generates a timing signal at Stratum 3 tolerances.
Note The NMTI refers to the synchronization module as the SSU.
Synchronization options
Table 38-2 lists the configuration options for system synchronization and the
sections that describe them.
Table 38-2 Configurable options for system synchronization
38-2
Configuration option
Section
Synchronization module present or not present
38.2
Selecting synchronization source
38.3
Disabling or enabling a synchronization source
38.4
Synchronization mode
38.5

90-4521-43 April 2001
38.2
Synchronization module present or not present

You can configure whether or not a synchronization module is present. When the
module is present, it provides functionality to the unit whether or not it is configured
as present. When the module is not present, or when it is not configured as present,
no alarm is generated.
Table 38-3 lists the configurable options and their softkeys.
Table 38-3 Synchronization module options
Option
Softkey
SSU present
PRESENT
SSU not present
NOT_PRESENT
Procedure 38-1 To configure the synchronization module

1
Select:
CONFIG SYSTEM SSU
Select:
PRESENT or NOT_PRESENT
38.3
Selecting synchronization sources

The synchronization module can use six synchronization sources, which you identify
as source numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, in decreasing order of priority. When source
number 1 is not available, it uses source number 2; when source number 2 is not
available, it uses source number 3, progressively on to source number 6. See
section 38.5 for information about how the synchronization module responds when
a source becomes available.
You can configure source numbers 1 to 4 to derive timing from External A,
External B, or ports on interfaces. Source number 5 corresponds to the holdover
mode and you cannot configure it. Source number 6 corresponds to the free-run
mode and you cannot configure it. You can force the synchronization module into
the holdover mode or free-run mode; see section 38.6.
See chapter 28 for information about synchronizing to external sources.

April 2001 90-4521-43
38-3
Table 38-4 lists the configurable source numbers and their default synchronization.
Table 38-4 Synchronization sources
Source number
Default synchronization source
External A
External B
Undefined
Undefined
Table 38-5 lists the synchronization sources you can select for the configurable
source numbers. The default depends on the source number; see Table 38-4.
Table 38-5 Softkey options for the synchronization source
Synchronization source
Softkey
External A
EXTERNAL_A
External B
EXTERNAL_B
Port on an interface card
DERIVED
Undefined
UNDEFINED
The synchronization module does not attempt to derive timing from an undefined
source. If an undefined source is selected, then the system automatically disables the
source. When you configure a source number to be undefined, you cannot enable it;
see section 38.4.
38-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 38-2 To select a synchronization source

1
Enter:
CONFIG SYSTEM SYNCH SRC_NUMBER <source>
where source is 1 to 4
Select:
SOURCE
Select:
EXTERNAL_A or EXTERNAL_B or DERIVED or UNDEFINED
If you selected DERIVED in step 2, identify the port:

<Pshelf-slot-port>
38.4
Disabling and enabling synchronization sources

You can disable or enable the synchronization sources; the default is enabled.
The synchronization module does not lock to a disabled synchronization source. You
cannot enable a synchronization source that you have configured as undefined; see
section 38.3.
Procedure 38-3 To disable or enable a synchronization source

1
Enter:
Select:
DISABLE or ENABLE

April 2001 90-4521-43
38-5
38.5
The synchronization module locks to source number 1, if possible. If a source is
faulty, then it locks to the next source number until it reaches source number 5.
Source number 5 is the holdover mode. If there is no holdover value available, then
it locks to source number 6, which is the free-run mode.
The synchronization mode determines how the system responds when a timing
source that was faulty becomes available after it has locked to a lower priority source
number. Table 38-6 lists the synchronization options and softkeys.
Table 38-6 Softkey options for synchronization modes
Softkey
Non-revertive
NON_REVERT
Revertive
REVERT
Non-revertive mode
In non-revertive mode, if source number 1 becomes available while the
synchronization module is locked to source number 2, 3, or 4, it remains locked to
the lower priority source number. If a higher priority source number becomes
available while the synchronization module is locked to source number 5 or 6, it
locks to the higher priority source number.
Revertive mode
In revertive mode, if a higher priority source number becomes available while the
SSU locked to a lower priority source number, it locks to the higher priority source
number.
Procedure 38-4 To configure the synchronization mode

1
Select:
CONFIG SYSTEM SYNCH
Select:
REVERT or NON_REVERT
38-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
38.6
Managing system synchronization

This section describes how to manage synchronization on your 7270 MSC, and how
to view synchronization information.
Doing a synchronization switch

You can force the synchronization module to enter holdover mode, which uses the
average frequency of the source that the synchronization module was locked to. If
there is no valid holdover value, the unit enters free-run mode. You can also force
the synchronization module to operate in free-run mode.
Procedure 38-5 To force a synchronization switch

1
Enter:
MAINT SYSTEM SYNC
Select:
MAINT SYSTEM SYNCH HOLDOVER or FREE_RUN
Procedure 38-6 To revert to the original synchronization source

Select:
MAINT SYSTEM SYNCH UNDO_MAINT

April 2001 90-4521-43
38-7
Viewing synchronization information

You can view information about the system synchronization. Table 38-7 lists the
information in the SYSTEM SYNCH display.
Table 38-7 Synchronization information
Field
Value
Significance
Number
1 to 6
The source number identifies the reference sources and indicates

their priority, with 1 being the highest priority.
Source
External A
The synchronization module synchronizes to the reference

source connected to port A of the reference clock I/O card.
External B
The synchronization module synchronizes to the reference

source connected to port B of the reference clock I/O card.
Shelf, or slot, or
port
The synchronization module synchronizes to a source through the

indicated interface port.
Holdover
The synchronization module is in holdover mode.
Free run
The synchronization module is in free-run mode.
Current
The system is deriving its timing from this source.
Ready
This source is able to act as a timing source.
Not ready
This source is unable to act as a timing source, because of a loss

of signal error, an AIS error or signal drift, or the port is down.
Acquiring
The system is currently being brought into synchronization with

this source. This state occurs every time the synchronization
module switches to a new source.
Disabled
The source is disabled. It is not used for synchronization.
Status
Procedure 38-7 To view system synchronization information

1
Select:
CONFIG or MAINT
Select:
SYSTEM SYNCH
38-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
Synchronization traceability
You can manage the quality indicator information of a node synchronization source
using synchronization traceability. The quality indicator displays the node
synchronization status.
Table 38-8 describes the main functions of synchronization traceability.
Table 38-8 Synchronization traceability main functions
Function
Description
Configure the quality

indicator
You can configure the quality indicator of the synchronization source

attached to CCIP port External A and CCIP port External B. You can set
these as the primary or non-primary synchronization source. The default is
non-primary.
Transmit the quality

indicator
The system automatically transmits the current synchronization source

quality indicator in a field in the overhead bits on OC3, STM1, and E3 cell
relay cards.
View the Rx and Tx

quality indicator
You can view the received and transmitted quality indicator for each
supported port type.
Synchronization traceability for E3 cell relay cards is supported by direct mapping

only.
Table 38-9 lists how the system translates the synchronization quality indicator
between different cards on a node when an E3 card is configured as the derived
synchronization source.
Table 38-9 E3 interface configured as derived synchronization source
E3 Rx
OC3 Tx
STM1 Tx
E3 Tx (1)
Primary
PRS
PRC
Primary
Non-primary
DUS
DNU
Non-primary
Note
(1)
A different E3 card on the node.

April 2001 90-4521-43
38-9
between different cards on a node when an STM1 card is configured as the derived
Table 38-10 STM1 interface configured as derived synchronization source
STM1 Rx
OC3 Tx
STM1 Tx (1)
E3 Tx
PRC
PRS
PRC
Primary
SSUT
ST3
SSUT
Non-primary
SSUL
ST3
SSUT
Non-primary
SEC
ST3
SEC
Non-primary
DNU
DUS
DNU
Non-primary
Note
(1)
A different STM1 card on the node.
between different cards on a node when an OC3 card is configured as the derived
Table 38-11 OC3 interface configured as derived synchronization source
OC3 Rx
OC3 Tx (1)
STM1 Tx
E3 Tx
STU
DUS
DNU
Non-primary
PRS
PRS
PRC
Primary
ST2
ST2
SSUT
Non-primary
ST3
ST3
SSUT
Non-primary
SMC
ST3
SSUT
Non-primary
RES
DUS
DNU
Non-primary
DUS
DUS
DNU
Non-primary
Note
(1)
38-10
A different OC3 card on the node.

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 38-8 To configure an external synchronization source as

primary or non-primary
1
Enter:
Select:
SOURCE
Select:
PRIMARY or NONPRIMARY
Procedure 38-9 To view synchronization traceability information

Enter:
MAINT OBJECT PORT <Pshelf-slot-port>

April 2001 90-4521-43
38-11
38-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
39 Configuring SNMP parameters
39.1 Configuring SNMP access communities

39.2 Configuring SNMP trap communities
39.3 Deleting SNMP communities

April 2001 90-4521-43
39-2
39-4
39-6
39-1
39.1
Configuring SNMP access communities

You can configure up to 10 access communities. A community number identifies
each access community. See section 19.3 for information about SNMP and access
communities.
Table 39-1 lists preconfigured values for access community 1 on new systems. The
system creates all other communities but does not configure them.
Table 39-1 Preconfigured values for access community 1
Parameter
Preconfigured value
Access community name
Public
IP address
Unassigned
Access privileges
READ
You can have an access community that is made up of more than one community
number; this lets you have a community of components with different characteristics.
For example, you can name the access community MGMT and it can be made up of
community number 1 and community number 2, where the two community numbers
must have only the configured community name in common.
For each access community number, you can configure:
a community name
the IP address parameter
access privileges
Access community name
The community name is case sensitive and can have up to 16 alphanumeric
characters. There is no default community name.
Procedure 39-1 To configure the access community name

1
Enter:
CONFIG SYSTEM SNMP ACCESS EDIT <number>
where number is 1 to 10
Enter:
NAME <name>
39-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
Access IP address parameter

For each community number, you can restrict access to a single IP address by
assigning an IP address, or you can allow access to any SNMP manager that uses
the community name by configuring the IP address as Unassigned. The default
is Unassigned.
When you want to assign multiple IP addresses to one access community, use a
different community number for each IP address and use the same community name.
You cannot have community numbers with the same IP addresses and the same
community names. Before you can configure the IP address parameter, you must
configure the community name, then the community number.
Procedure 39-2 To configure the access IP address parameter

1
Enter:
Enter:
IP_ADDRESS <ip_address>
where ip_address is in the decimal format #.#.#.# and where # is in the range 0 to 255
Access privileges
You can configure each community number to provide read privileges, read and
write privileges, or no privileges. The default is no privileges (NONE).
Before you can configure privileges, you must configure the name for the
community number.

April 2001 90-4521-43
39-3
Procedure 39-3 To configure access privileges

1
Enter:
Select:
PRIVILEGE
Select the access privilege you want to assign to the specified

community number.
a
For read privileges only, select:

READ
For read and write privileges, select:

READ_WRITE
To restrict access privileges, select:

NONE
39.2
Configuring SNMP trap communities

For information about SNMP and trap communities, see section 19.3.
You can create up to 10 trap communities. A community number identifies each trap
community.
You can have a trap community that is made up of more than one community
number; this lets you have a community of components with different characteristics.
For example, you can name the trap community MGMT and it can be made up of
community number 1 and community number 2, where the two community numbers
must have different destination IP addresses but share the name of the configured
trap community.
For each trap community number, you configure:
a community name
a destination IP address
trap generation
39-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Trap community name

The trap community name can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters and is
case-sensitive. There is no default for the trap community name.
Procedure 39-4 To configure the trap community name

1
Enter:
CONFIG SYSTEM SNMP TRAPS EDIT <number>
Enter:
NAME <name>
Destination IP address
For each community number, the destination IP address allows you to send traps to
a specific IP destination. By default, the trap generation field is DISABLED so that
traps are not sent to a specific IP address.
When you want to send traps to multiple IP addresses in one trap community, use a
different community number for each IP address and use the same community name.
Before you can configure the destination IP address, you must configure the name
for the community number. When you want to send traps to the same address, use
different trap community names.
Procedure 39-5 To configure the destination IP address

1
Enter:
Enter:
IP_ADDRESS <ip_address>
where ip_address is in the decimal format #.#.#.# and where # is in the range 0 to 255

April 2001 90-4521-43
39-5
Trap generation
For each community number, you can enable or disable trap generation. The default
setting is disabled.
Before you can configure trap generation, you must configure the name for the
community number and the destination IP address.
Procedure 39-6 To configure trap generation

1
Enter:
Select:
ENABLED or DISABLED
39.3
Deleting SNMP communities

You can delete information associated with a specific access or trap community
number or delete information associated with all access or trap communities. The
community number remains, but the values are deleted.
Procedure 39-7 To delete access and trap communities

1
Select:
CONFIG SYSTEM SNMP
Select:
ACCESS or TRAPS
Delete a specific community number or all communities.

a
To delete a specific community number, enter:

DELETE <number>
To delete all communities, select:

DELETE_ALL
39-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
40 Configuring the shelf
40.1 Configuring the shelf name
40-2
40.2 Configuring the call control group

40.3 Viewing shelf information

April 2001 90-4521-43
40-2
40-3
40-1
40.1
Configuring the shelf name

For 7270 MSC systems, you can configure a name for the system associated with a
P identifier.
Procedure 40-1 To configure a shelf name

1
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT SHELF <Pshelf>
where shelf is 1
Enter:
NAME <name>
where name is a maximum of 15 characters excluding space, tab, period, question mark, and
percent sign
40.2
Configuring the call control group

You can assign a group of interface cards that need call control to the Control card.
To allow interface cards to support SVC setup, SVC maintenance, or SPVC support,
assign the shelf to call control group 1. The interface cards on a 7270 MSC shelf can
use the call processing capabilities of the Control card only when you assign the shelf
to call control group 1. There is no default call control group.
Procedure 40-2 To configure a call control group

1
Enter:
where shelf is 1
Select:
CALL_CTL_GRP
40-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
Assign or unassign the call control group.

a
To assign a call control group to the shelf, enter:

<group>
where group is 1
To unassign the call control group from this shelf, select:

<Esc> UNASSIGNED
40.3
Viewing shelf information

You can view information for all P identifiers or for a specific P identifier.
Table 40-1 lists the displayed information.
Table 40-1 Display of P identifier information
Field
Description
# (1)
This field indicates the P identifier.
Configured (1)
This field gives the shelf type for the P identifier. (2)
Status
(3)
The status of the shelf can be:
Name (4)
ISL Assignment
: the shelf or sub-unit type is configured, but no shelf or sub-unit is

installed.
Ok: the shelf or sub-unit ID is configured correctly and is working. This is
the only valid configuration choice for a 7270 MSC shelf.
Wrong Shelf: the configured shelf type does not match the installed shelf
type.
This field indicates the name configured for the P identifier.

(1)
This field identifies the ISLs assigned to the P identifier.
Shelf
(3)
This field indicates the P identifier.
Type
(3)
This field indicates the shelf type configured for the P identifier. (2)
ISLs (3)
CallControlGroup
This field identifies the ISLs assigned to the P identifier.

(3)
This field indicates the call control group assigned to the P identifier.
(1 of 2)

April 2001 90-4521-43
40-3
Field
Sub#
Description
(3)
Configured
This field indicates the sub-unit. This field displays a 1 for a 7270 MSC shelf.
(3)
This field indicates the shelf type configured for the shelf that contains the
sub-unit. (2)
Installed (3)
This field indicates the shelf type installed for the shelf that contains the
sub-unit. (2)
Status (4)
The status of the ISL of the sub-unit is:
Ok: an ISL is attached.

Prob: the ISL is not attached or there is an ISL fault.
: the shelf type is not configured (no ISL is assigned)
The status of the 7270 MSC is always Ok.

(2 of 2)
Notes
(1)
This field displays when you view basic information.
(2)
Single is the only valid configuration choice for a 7270 MSC shelf.
(3)
This field displays when you view basic and detailed information.
(4)
This field displays when you view detailed information.
Procedure 40-3 To view basic shelf information

Select:
CONFIG OBJECT SHELF
Procedure 40-4 To view detailed shelf information

Enter:
where shelf is 1
40-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Viewing shelf component information

The display provides information about the shelf type, Power Supply Unit status,
power feeds (on a dc shelf), fans, Alarm I/O card, RCI, and RCO cards. Table 40-2
lists information about each status point.
Table 40-2 Power supply and fan status messages
Unit
Message
Description
Present shelf
type
6-slot DC
Shelf has 6 slots and uses DC power.
6-slot AC
Shelf has 6 slots and uses AC power.
8-slot DC
Shelf has 8 slots and uses DC power.
8-slot AC
Shelf has 8 slots and uses AC power.
Unknown
The system could not determine the shelf type.
Power Feed A
and Power Feed
B (DC shelf types
only)
Ok
Power Feed is receiving appropriate power.
Failed
Power Feed is not receiving appropriate power.
Unknown
The system could not determine the Power Feed Status.

This occurs if the Alarm I/O card is not installed.
Power Supply
Unit Status
Ok
Power Supply Unit is installed, and Input and Output power

are within range.
Not Present
Power Supply Unit is not installed.
Failed
Power Supply Unit is installed, but the Input or Output power

is out of range or the Power Supply Unit fan speed is too low
to supply sufficient cooling.
Unknown
The system could not determine the status of the Power

Supply Unit.This status is reported if the Fan Card is not
installed.
Ok
Power Supply Unit is installed, and Input power to the Power

Supply Unit is within range.
Failed
Power Supply Unit is installed, but Input power to the Power

Supply Unit is out of range.
n/a
OK
Power Supply Unit is installed, and Output power from the

Power Supply Unit is within range.
Failed
Power Supply Unit is installed, but Output power from the

Power Supply Unit is out of range.
n/a
Power Supply
Unit Input
Power Supply
Unit Output
(1 of 2)

April 2001 90-4521-43
40-5
Unit
Message
Description
Shelf Power
Status
Redundant
There are sufficient operational Power Supply Units for

N+1 Power Supply Unit redundancy.
Not redundant
There are sufficient operational Power Supply Units to

power the shelf but not enough for N+1 Power Supply Unit
redundancy. Add one more Power Supply Unit for a
power-redundant system.
Insufficient
There are not sufficient operational Power Supply Units to

power the shelf. Data traffic may be affected, or the system
may reset.
Unknown
The system could not determine the shelf power status due
to unknown Power Supply Unit statuses.
OK
Fan unit is installed, and all fans are operational.
Not Present
Fan unit is not installed.
Failed
Fan unit is installed, but one or more fans are operating at an

insufficient cadence.
Unknown
The system could not determine the fan unit status.
Present
Card is installed and operational.
Not Present
No card is installed in the slot.
Invalid
Incorrect card is installed in the slot.
Unknown
Could not determine the card status.
Normal
Shelf is not in critical over temperature condition.
Overtemperature
Shelf is in the critical over temperature condition. System

has stopped the fans.
Unknown
The system could not determine the shelf over temperature

status.
Fan Card Status
Alarm I/O card,

RCI card, RCO
card
Critical overtemp
(2 of 2)
Procedure 40-5 To view shelf component statuses

Enter:
MAINT OBJECT SHELF <Pshelf>
See Table 35-3 for shelf values.
40-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
Viewing shelf power requirements

NMTI displays the per-slot and per-shelf power requirements as well as the amount
of power supplied by the installed Power Supply Units.
Table 40-3 displays information on shelf power requirements. The power
information displayed is based on the configured, and not installed, card type.
Table 40-3 Information on shelf power requirements
Value
Description
Slots 19 power
Watts required from the 3.3 V, 5 V, and 12 V depend on the configured card
type. If a card is configured for slot 7 in a 6-slot shelf or slot 9 in an
8-slot shelf, then the power required by that card type will appear. If no card
is configured for these slots, then the power required by a control and hub
card is shown.
Overhead
Watts required from the 3.3 V, 5 V, and 12 V rails by the fan unit, RCI, RCO,
and Alarm I/O and Control I/O cards. This value includes all of the power,
regardless of whether the unit is installed.
Used
Total 3.3 V, 5 V, and 12 V Watts required by the system as configured.
Supplied
Amount of 3.3 V, 5 V, and 12 V power, Watts, supplied by the installed Power

Supply Units.
Remaining
Amount of power, in Watts, that the installed Power Supply Units can provide
beyond what is required by the shelfs configuration. If the power remaining
is more than that which is supplied by one Power Supply Unit, then the shelf
is N+1 Power Supply Unit redundant.
Procedure 40-6 To view shelf power requirements

1
Enter:
MAINT OBJECT SHELF <Pshelf>
Enter:
CARD_POWERS

April 2001 90-4521-43
40-7
40-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
41 Managing the database
41.1 Transferring files
41-2
41.2 Resetting the database

April 2001 90-4521-43
41-6
41-1
41.1
Transferring files
To manage the database you need an FTP server. You can configure the 5620 NM as
an FTP server to be able to receive or send the database file. To back-up the database,
transfer the database file from the Control card to a 5620 NM. To restore the
database, transfer the database file to the Control card from a 5620 NM.
We recommend that you routinely backup the Control card database, particularly
after you make major changes to the node configuration or connections.
When you backup or restore, the system locks the database during part of the process.
The Control card resets automatically when you restore the database.
Warning When you have installed an inactive Control card, you
must remove it before you restore the database. If you do not remove
the inactive card, then an activity switch occurs and the restored
database on the newly inactive Control card is overwritten during the
database reconciliation process.
This section contains the steps for transferring files by using a 5620 NM as the FTP
server. Table 41-1 lists the files transfer steps in order.
Table 41-1 File transfer overview
Step
Purpose
1 and 2
Specify the CPSS or IP address of the primary or secondary 5620 NM.
Specify your UNIX user ID and password on the 5620 NM.
Specify the directory and filename of the database file to be written or read on the
5620 NM.
Initiate the file transfer.
Note The system discards the address, file, user, and directory
information that you configure for network file transfers when the
Control card is reset.
41-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 41-1 To specify the 5620 NM IP address

Follow this procedure when the node is directly attached to an FTP server such as the
5620 NM, through an Ethernet connection.
1
Select:
MAINT FILE_TRANSFER NETWORK SOURCE
Enter:
IP_ADDR <IP_address>
where IP_address is in the decimal format #.#.#.#, and where # is in the range 0 to 255
Procedure 41-2 To specify the 5620 NM CPSS address

Follow this procedure when the node is not directly attached to an FTP server such as
the 5620 NM, through an Ethernet connection. The 5620 NM is always in domain 33 000.
1
Select:
MAINT FILE_TRANSFER NETWORK SOURCE CPSS_ADDR
To specify the CPSS domain, enter:

DOMAIN <33000>
To specify the CPSS node number, enter:

NODE <node_number>
where node_number is the major node number of the 5620 NM

April 2001 90-4521-43
41-3
Procedure 41-3 To specify user information

1
Select:
MAINT FILE_TRANSFER NETWORK
Enter:
USER_INFO USER_ID <username>
where username is the name of your UNIX account on the 5620 NM
Enter:
USER_INFO PASSWORD <password>
where password is the password for your UNIX account on the 5620 NM; the screen does not
display the password
Procedure 41-4 To specify file information

1
Select:
MAINT FILE_TRANSFER NETWORK
Enter:
FILE_INFO PATH <path>
where path is the path of the 5620 NM directory in which you want to read or write the database file
Enter:
FILE_INFO FILE <filename>
where filename is the name of the database file
41-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 41-5 To initiate the file transfer

1
Select:
MAINT FILE_TRANSFER NETWORK DATABASE
Transfer the database.

a
To transfer the database to the 5620 NM, select:

BACKUP
To transfer the database from the 5620 NM, remove the inactive Control card
and select:
RESTORE
The system checks all parameters before it proceeds with the file transfer. If
there is a problem, an error message appears below the command line.
Table 41-2 lists error messages for file transfers.
Table 41-2 Error messages for file transfers
Message
Description
FTP connection set up failed
The FTP connection was not established.
FTP connection failed
The FTP connection was established, but subsequently

failed.
FTP invalid user ID or password
The user account or password is invalid on the 5620 NM.

Redefine the parameters in the USER_INFO menu and try
again.
FTP invalid path, file name,

or permission
The directory path is invalid on the 5620 NM, or the file

cannot be found in the specified directory. Redefine the
parameters in the MAINT FILE_TRANSFER NETWORK
FILE_INFO menu and try again.
FTP communication error number - nn
The specified FTP error type has occurred, where nn is the

error type.

April 2001 90-4521-43
41-5
Table 41-3 lists the status messages for file transfers.

Table 41-3 Status messages for file transfers
41.2
Message
Description
Proceeding with backup
The Control card is copying the database file to the 5620 NM system.
Proceeding with restore
The Control card is reading the database file from the 5620 NM
system.
Software generic mismatch in

the standard file
The Control card software that created this file is older than the
current revision of software.
Database backup failed
The database backup was stopped by the Control card because one
or more of the database backup parameters is incorrect.
Database restore failed
The database restore was stopped by the Control card because one
or more of the database restore parameters is incorrect.
Database backup completed
The database backup was successful.
Database restore completed
The database restore was successful and the Control card is being
reset activate the database.
Invalid header format in the

standard file
The database file to be restored contains an invalid header format.

The file is invalid.
Resetting the database

If the database becomes corrupt, you can reset it to its default values.
All configuration information is lost.
Procedure 41-6 To reset the database in a control-simplex system

1
Enter:
MAINT OBJECT SLOT <CTL>
Select:
MORE ERASE_NVM
41-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 41-7 To reset the database in a control-redundant system

1
Remove the inactive Control card from the shelf.
Enter:
MAINT OBJECT SLOT <CTL>
Select:
MORE ERASE_NVM

April 2001 90-4521-43
41-7
41-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
42 Software downloading
42.1 Introduction
42.2 Downloading

April 2001 90-4521-43
42-2
42-2
42-1
42.1
Introduction
The software download function lets you download software from a 5620 NM to a
card that runs application software. Download new software to upgrade the existing
software on a card or to replace existing software.
Table 42-1 lists the cards and the type of software downloading they support. The
link between the 5620 NM and the system can be Ethernet or cell relay; the link
between nodes can be frame relay or cell relay.
Table 42-1 Software download support on 7270 MSC cards
Card
FTP over Ethernet
CPSS over frame relay or cell relay
Control and Hub
Circuit emulation
Cell relay
Ethernet
Frame relay
Voiceband services
Each card that has application software has two FLASH memory banks that store the
software called Bank 1 and Bank 2.
42.2
Downloading
Use the download function to transfer the software file from the 5620 NM. CPSS or
IP addressing communicates with the 5620 NM, see chapter 37.
The software file to be downloaded is called the source file; it must be located on the
5620 NM hard disk. You must configure the 5620 NM as an FTP server.
You must be logged in as a level 5 user to download software. For information about
access levels, see section 37.4.
42-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
Downloading software to the other bank

We recommend that you download the new software to the other bank.
See Table 42-2 for the steps to download software.
Table 42-2 Summary of software downloading
Step
Purpose
Configure the Current Bank and the Next Active Bank.
2 and 3
Specify the IP or CPSS address of the 5620 NM.
Specify your user information on the 5620 NM.
Specify the directory and filename of the application software file on the 5620 NM.
Specify the card and download the software to the appropriate memory bank.
Activate the new software.
Download the software to the other memory bank by repeating steps 2 to 5.
Procedure 42-1 To configure the next active bank and the

current bank
To prevent a failed boot attempt after an unsuccessful software download, the node does
not let you download software to the next active bank or to the current bank. In the event
of a failed download attempt, any subsequent card boot continues to use the current
bank.
1
To determine which memory bank is the current bank and which is the next active
bank on the target card, enter:
MAINT OBJECT SLOT
Enter the card identifier.

a
To view information for the active Control card, enter:

<CTL>
To view information for the inactive Control card, enter:

<ICTL>
To view information for a Hub card, enter:

<Pshelf-slot>
See Table 35-3 for shelf and slot values.

April 2001 90-4521-43
42-3
To view information for an interface card, enter:

<Pshelf-slot>
If the NMTI screen shows the status of one bank as Current and the status of the
other bank as Ok, then the Current Bank and the Next Active Bank are on the same
bank. Proceed to step 4.
If the NMTI screen shows the status of one bank as Current and the status of the
other bank as Next, then the Current Bank and the Next Active Bank are on different
banks. Configure the Current Bank as the Next Active Bank; follow step 3.
3
If the Current Bank is different from the Next Active Bank, select:
NEXT_BANK
The Current Bank and the Next Active Bank are set to the same bank.
4
Make note of the bank that is not the Current Bank or the Next Active Bank. You
must download software to this bank.
Procedure 42-2 To specify the IP address of the 5620 NM

Use this procedure when the node has a direct Ethernet attachment to the 5620 NM.
1
Select:
MAINT FILE_TRANSFER NETWORK SOURCE
Enter:
IP_ADDR <IP_address>
42-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 42-3 To specify the CPSS address of the 5620 NM

Use this procedure when the node is not attached directly by Ethernet to the 5620 NM.
1
Select:
MAINT FILE_TRANSFER NETWORK SOURCE CPSS_ADDR
To specify the CPSS domain, enter:

DOMAIN <33000>
To specify the CPSS node number, enter:

NODE <node_number>
where node_number is the major node number of the 5620 NM in the range 768 to 1023
Note The system retains the information that you configure for
network file transfers after you exit the MAINT FILE_TRANSFER
NETWORK screen.
Procedure 42-4 To specify the user information

1
Enter:
MAINT FILE_TRANSFER NETWORK USER_INFO USER_ID
<username>
where username is the name of your UNIX account on the 5620 NM
Enter:
USER_INFO PASSWORD <password>
where password is the password for your UNIX account on the 5620 NM

April 2001 90-4521-43
42-5
Procedure 42-5 To specify the file information

1
Enter:
MAINT FILE_TRANSFER NETWORK FILE_INFO PATH <path>
where path is the path of the directory that contains the source file
Enter:
FILE_INFO FILE <filename>
where filename is the name of the software file
Procedure 42-6 To download the software

1
Select:
MAINT FILE_TRANSFER NETWORK UPGRADE

a
To download software to the active Control card, enter:

<CTL>
To download software to the inactive Control card, enter:

<ICTL>
To download software to a Hub card, enter:

<Pshelf-slot>
See Table 35-3 for slot values.
Note When the system has switching fabric redundancy, download

the software to the Hub card in the inactive switching fabric.
To download software to an interface card, enter:

<Pshelf-slot>
42-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
To download software to the bank that is not the Current Bank or the Next Active
Bank, select:
BANK1 or BANK2
where the selected bank is not the Current Bank or the Next Active Bank
The system checks all parameters before proceeding with the download.
If there is a problem, an error message appears below the command line.
Table 42-3 lists the download message errors.
Table 42-3 Download error messages
Message
Indicates
Invalid user id/

password
The user account or password is not valid on the 5620 NM. Redefine the
parameters in the USER_INFO menu and try again.
Unknown path/file
The directory path is not valid on the 5620 NM, or the 5620 NM file cannot be
found in the specified directory. Redefine the parameters in the FILE_INFO
menu and try again.
Unknown shelf/slot
The selected shelf or slot does not contain a valid card for software download,
as listed in Table 42-1. Redefine the parameters in the UPGRADE menu and
try again.
Downloading to the
current bank is not
permitted
The software in the selected FLASH memory bank is currently operating the
card. Select the other bank as the target and try again.
Unable to connect
to source host
The IP address of the 5620 NM is invalid, or the node cannot find the 5620 NM
on the network. Redefine the parameters in the SOURCE menu and try again.
Unable to access
source file
The file name is not valid on the 5620 NM, or the 5620 NM cannot find the file
in the specified directory. Redefine the parameters in the FILE_INFO menu
and try again.
No response from
target
The target card is not responding to the download request.
The screen displays the status of the file download. Table 42-4 lists the download
status messages.
Table 42-4 Download status messages
Message
Indicates
Proceeding with
transfer
The selected memory bank is receiving the software file.
Download
terminated
The software downloading process was stopped by the target card. This may
be the result of three or more consecutive errors in the file transmission.
Incompatible load
The software load is incompatible with the target card.
Load received
The software transfer was successful.

April 2001 90-4521-43
42-7
Procedure 42-7 To activate the new software

1
Select:
MAINT OBJECT SLOT

a
For the active Control card, enter:

<CTL>
For the inactive Control card, enter:

<ICTL>
For a Hub card, enter:

<Pshelf-slot>
For an interface card, enter:

<Pshelf-slot>
Select:
NEXT_BANK
The bank that received the downloaded software is designated as the Next Active
Bank.
4
42-8
Reset the card, see Resetting a card in section 43.3.

90-4521-43 April 2001
43 Configuring and managing cards
43.1 Configuring slots for card type

43.2 Naming slots
43-6
43.3 Managing cards and slots

43.4 Managing the Control card

April 2001 90-4521-43
43-2
43-6
43-8
43-1
43.1
Configuring slots for card type

You configure a slot to accept a specific card type. When you configure the card type,
the card in that slot is configured with default settings.
You can use the CONFIG_ALL option to configure all unconfigured slots that have
cards installed. The system changes the slot type to match the card type installed.
Procedure 43-1 To configure all unconfigured slots in the system

1
Select:
CONFIG OBJECT SLOT
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT SLOT <Esc> CONFIG_ALL
Procedure 43-2 To configure a slot for the installed card type

1
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT SLOT <Pshelf-slot>
Select:
TYPE AS_PRESENT
Procedure 43-3 To configure a slot as empty

1
Enter:
Select:
TYPE EMPTY
43-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 43-4 To configure a slot for a service adaptation card

1
Enter the slot you want to configure:

Select:
TYPE ADAPTATION
Select the card that you want to configure.

Table 43-1 lists the slot options for service adaptation cards.
Table 43-1 Slot options for service adaptation cards
Card type
I/O card
Slot configuration
Softkeys
DS3 circuit
emulation
DS3 1-port 75 BNC
DS3 circuit emulation
CIRCUIT_EMUL DS3
T1 frame relay
T1 4-port
T1 frame relay
FRAME_RELAY T1 CHANNELIZED
E1 frame relay
E1 4-port 120
E1 120 frame relay
FRAME_RELAY E1 120_OHMS
CHANNELIZED
E1 4-port 75 BNC
E1 75 frame relay
FRAME_RELAY E1 75_OHMS CHANNELIZED
E1 4-port 75 Type 43
E1 75 frame relay
FRAME_RELAY E1 75_OHMS CHANNELIZED
PSI frame relay
PSI FR
PSI frame relay
FRAME_RELAY PSI
T1 circuit
emulation
T1 8-port
T1 circuit emulation
CIRCUIT_EMUL T1
E1 circuit
emulation
E1 8-port 120
E1 120 circuit
emulation
CIRCUIT_EMUL E1 120_OHMS
E1 8-port 75 BNC
E1 75 circuit emulation
E1 8-port 75 T43
E1 75 circuit emulation
T1 voiceband
services
T1 VS
T1 voiceband services
VOICE_SRVC T1
E1 voiceband
services
E1 120 VS
E1 120 voiceband
services
VOICE_SRVC 120_OHMS
E1 75 VS
E1 75 voiceband
services
VOICE_SRVC E1 75_OHMS
(1 of 2)

April 2001 90-4521-43
43-3
Card type
I/O card
Slot configuration
Softkeys
EN100 Ethernet
4-port 10/100BaseT
electrical
4-port 10/100BaseT
LAN ENET EN100T-4
4-port 100Base-FX
single mode optical
4-port 100Base-FX
SMF
LAN ENET EN100S-4
4-port 100Base-FX
multimode optical
4-port 100Base-FX
MMF
LAN ENET EN100M-4
(2 of 2)
Caution When you select PROCEED, the system removes any

connections on the slot.
Procedure 43-5 To configure a slot for a cell relay interface card

1
Enter:
Select:
TYPE CELL_RELAY
Select the card type that you want to configure.

Table 43-2 lists the slot options for cell relay interface cards.
Table 43-2 Slot options for cell relay interface cards
Card type
I/O card
Slot configuration
Softkeys
DS3
DS3/E3 3-port BNC
DS3 cell relay
DLC DS3
DS3/E3 3-port T43
DS3 cell relay
DLC DS3
E1 8-port 120
E1 cell relay
DLC E1 120
E1 8-port 75 BNC
E1 75 cell relay
DLC E1 75
E1 8-port 75 T43
E1 75 cell relay
DLC E1 75
DS3/E3 3-port BNC
E3 cell relay
DLC E3
DS3/E3 3-port T43
E3 cell relay
DLC E3
E1
E3
(1 of 2)
43-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Card type
I/O card
Slot configuration
Softkeys
OC3
OC3/STM1 SR
OC3 MMF
SONET OC3 OC3_MMF
OC3/STM1 IR
OC3 IR
SONET OC3 OC3_IR
OC3/STM1 LR
OC3 LR
SONET OC3 OC3_LR
OC3/STM1 XLR
OC3 LR
SONET OC3 OC3_LR
OC3/STM1 UTP5
OC3 Electrical
SONET OC3 OC3_ELC
OC3/STM1 CMI BNC
OC3 Electrical
SONET OC3 OC3_ELC
OC3/STM1 CMI T43
OC3 Electrical
SONET OC3 OC3_ELC
OC3/STM1 SR
STM1 MMF
SONET STM1 STM1_MMF
OC3/STM1 IR
STM1 IR
SONET STM1 STM1_IR
OC3/STM1 LR
STM1 LR
SONET STM1 STM1_LR
OC3/STM1 XLR
STM1 LR
SONET STM1 STM1_LR
OC3/STM1 UTP5
STM1 Electrical
SONET STM1 STM1_ELC
OC3/STM1 CMI BNC
STM1 Electrical
SONET STM1 STM1_ELC
OC3/STM1 CMI T43
STM1 Electrical
SONET STM1 STM1_ELC
T1 8-port
T1 cell relay
DLC T1
STM1
T1
(2 of 2)
Caution When you select PROCEED, the system removes any

connections on the affected slot.
Configure the card version. See section 47.1 for OC3 and STM1 cards and
section 48.1 for DS3 and E3 cards.

April 2001 90-4521-43
43-5
43.2
Naming slots
After you configure the card type, you can name the slot.
Procedure 43-6 To name a slot

1
Enter:
Enter:
NAME <name>
where name contains a maximum of 15 characters excluding space, tab, period, question mark, and
percent sign
43.3
Managing cards and slots

This section describes how to manage cards and slots. It contains procedures for:
resetting a card
placing a card in the boot PROM
Resetting a card
When you reset a Control card, the system initializes all hardware and software on
the card. The Control card then does hardware diagnostics and reloads its software.
Resetting a Hub card also resets the corresponding Control card. Resetting the
Control card in a non-redundant system does not affect user traffic on the node. You
must reset the card after you change node parameters.
The system automatically initiates an activity switch when you reset the active
Control card. If the corresponding Hub card is active when you reset the
Control card, then the system also initiates a fabric switch.
If the database of the inactive card is not synchronized with the database of the active
card, then the active card does not initiate an activity switch.
Resetting all other card types reinitializes the card software. Reset a card when you
upgrade the card software or if the card has persistent problems.
Caution When you reset a card, except for the Control card, a
momentary service interruption occurs.
43-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 43-7 To reset a card

1
Select:
MAINT OBJECT SLOT
Specify the card.

a
To reset the active Control card, enter:

<CTL>
To reset the inactive Control card, enter:

<ICTL>
To reset a Hub card, enter:

<Pshelf-slot>
Select:
RESET_CARD
Running a boot PROM application

You can use the FORCE_BOOT softkey to have any card run its boot PROM
application. The boot PROM application supports basic NMTI operations that let
you do emergency procedures, such as downloading application software and
databases, when a card cannot support the full NMTI.
Caution The card is out-of-service and cannot pass traffic when
running its boot PROM application.

April 2001 90-4521-43
43-7
Procedure 43-8 To run a boot PROM application

1
Select:
MAINT OBJECT SLOT
Specify the card.

a
To place the active Control card in the boot PROM, enter:

<CTL>
To place the inactive Control card in the boot PROM, enter:

<ICTL>
Select:
FORCE_BOOT
43.4
Managing the Control card

This section describes how to manage the Control card. It contains the following
procedures:
switching to the redundant Control card

switching to the inactive Control card
Switching to the redundant Control card
You automatically enable Control card, call control, and PNNI redundancy when
you install Control cards in slots P1-1 and P1-2. The active card or a user can initiate
an activity switch.
Caution The active and inactive Control cards must have the same
database and software revision. Otherwise, during an activity switch,

the database of the newly active card overwrites the database of the
previously active card.
The active card uses a demerit point system to monitor its own health relative to that
of the inactive card. When a fault occurs, the system assigns demerit values to the
active card and switches to the inactive Control card.
43-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
Table 43-3 lists the demerit values that the system applies to the Control card.
Table 43-3 Demerit values for the Control card
Fault
Demerit
value
Logged against
Mate Control card (1) is missing
5500
Mate Control card (1)
Mate Control card (1) is incompatible
5500
Inactive Control card
Cannot communicate with mate Control card (1)
1250
Mate Control card (1)
Inactive database is not synchronized
1000
Database reconcile in progress
1000
Management Ethernet port is down
500
Control card without

management Ethernet
connectivity (2)
Notes
(1)
The mate card is the inactive card.
(2)
The system also assigns demerit points to the inactive Control card when you do not attach a cable
to the inactive management Ethernet port on the Control I/O card.
When the active Control card accumulates more demerit points than the
inactive card, the system immediately switches to the inactive card. If the database
of the inactive card is not synchronized with the database of the active card, then the
active card does not initiate an activity switch even if it has more demerit points than
the inactive card. When the database is synchronized, the active card initiates an
activity switch.
Note 1 In a control-redundant system, failure of the active
Control card does not affect connected SVCs; however, the system
clears SVCs if they are in the process of being connected when the
failure occurs. New SVCs can begin to request connection again when
the system completes the card activity switch.
Note 2 TACs remain configured after an activity switch.
You can use a node management session to determine which Control card is active
and which is inactive. You can also view the status of the communication link
between the active and inactive cards and the status of the node database.

April 2001 90-4521-43
43-9
Switching to the inactive Control card

You can reset the active Control card or you can release the active card through a
node management session to prompt an activity switch. Reset the active card when
you make changes to the software that will not be activated on the card until it resets.
See Resetting a card in section 43.3 and Switching to the redundant Control card
in this section for more information.
The reset process takes several minutes and consists of a power cycle, hardware
diagnostics, software reloading, and a reconciliation of the system database to the
Control card that has just become inactive. The reset Control card cannot provide
redundancy until the reset is complete. If the active card does not require a reset, we
recommend that you do a direct activity switch. See To switch to the inactive
Control card.
After an activity switch or reset, the currently inactive Control card automatically
resets and reconciles its database with the currently active card.
Procedure 43-9 To switch to the inactive Control card

Select:
MAINT SYSTEM CONTROL RELEASE_CTL
43-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
44 Viewing card and slot information
44.1 Network inventory information

44.2 Slot summary information
44-2
44-3
44.3 Viewing hardware and SEEP information
44-5
44.4 Control card configuration and management information

44.5 Hub card configuration information
44-10
44.6 Interface card configuration information

April 2001 90-4521-43
44-8
44-11
44-1
44.1
Network inventory information

Network inventory information allows you to view hardware and software
information about cards on a shelf-by-shelf basis. You can view inventory
information for the shelf.
The system inventories each card by gathering information from the SEEP and
system software. For each card in the shelf, the NMTI screen displays the following
information:
slot
type
serial number
card ID
marketing part number
engineering part number
software generics
bank status
Procedure 44-1 To view inventory information for a shelf

1
Select:
MAINT SYSTEM MORE INVENTORY
Enter the shelf identifier.

<Pshelf>
44-2
You can use the following softkeys to navigate through the displayed information.
a
You can use the PAGE_UP and PAGE_DOWN softkeys to scroll through all
cards in the shelf.
You can use the RIGHT or LEFT softkeys to display other columns of
information for a card.
You can use the MODULE softkey to display inventory and module information
for a particular card.

90-4521-43 April 2001
Table 44-1 lists Network Inventory information about cards.

Table 44-1 Network inventory information about cards
Field
Description
Slot identifier
Installed
Card type installed
Serial No.
Serial number of the card
Card Id
Card identity
Mktg. Part No.
Marketing part number
Eng.Part No.
Engineering part number
Boot
Software generics
Bank 1
Bank 2
44.2
This symbol indicates the software generic is Current.
>
This symbol indicates that the software generic is Next.
This symbol indicates that the software generic is Current and Next.
***
This symbol indicates that the bank is not OK.
Slot summary information

You can view summary information about all the slots of a shelf.
For each slot, the screen shows the following information:
whether the card has been configured or installed

the type of card configured or installed
the slot status
any options configured for the slot
The installed card type can differ from the configured card type, see section 43.1. To
display information about all the slots in a shelf, you need to know the shelf
identifier. The screen identifies installed and configured card types by displaying
card identifiers, see chapter 35.

April 2001 90-4521-43
44-3
Procedure 44-2 To view a summary of all slots

1
Select:
CONFIG SHOW_SLOTS
Enter:
<Pshelf>
When there is too much information to list on the screen, use the PAGE_UP and
PAGE_DOWN softkeys.
Table 44-2 lists the information on the slot configuration screen.

Table 44-2 Information about slot configuration
Field
Description
Slot identifier
Configured
Type of card configured for the slot
Installed
Type of card installed in the slot
Status
This field indicates the status of the slot or card:
Card Options
44-4
: no card is installed
Initializing: the card is powering up
Ok: the card has no known hardware diagnostic faults
Wrong card: the configured card type does not match the installed card type
and the card is out-of-service
Boot: the card is operating from its boot PROM and is out-of-service
Fault: there is a diagnostic failure
Unreachable: Control-2 card cannot communicate with the card.
Port OOS: the card is operational, but one or more ports on the card is
currently out-of-service
Wrong Firm: incompatible hub and UCS card software
Dead: card presence cannot be determined by the system
Wrong Variant: the installed card type matches the configured card type, but
the installed card variant is incompatible with a configured option
Overheated: the temperature of the card has increased beyond its acceptable
maximum
Mod_Mismatch: the number or type of installed modules does not match the
configured number type
Card_OOS (Mod): the number or type of installed modules does not match
the configured number type
Card_OOS (Lic): the number of configured license credits does not match the
number available on the card
Card_OOS (CPU): the card does not have enough CPU resources to support
the current configuration or number of connections
This field indicates the options configured for the slot.

90-4521-43 April 2001
44.3
Viewing hardware and SEEP information

You can view configuration information and hardware information for cards in the
7270 MSC system.
Depending on the card type, you can view configuration information for a card in a
specific slot. To display information for a card in a specific slot, you must know the
slot number. See section 35.3 for slot values. Table 44-3 lists the card types for which
you can view card configuration information, and the sections that contain the
procedures.
Table 44-3 Information about card configuration
Card
Section
Control
44.4
Interface
44.6
See section 43.1 for information about card types.

See section 43.2 for information about card names.
The information on the screen for a specific slot is similar to the information on
the screen of information for all slots in a shelf. See Table 44-2 for a list of slot
information.
Viewing hardware information

The card maintenance display lets you view hardware information about a card
without removing the card from its slot. You can view information for any card
in a shelf.
Procedure 44-3 To view hardware information

1
Select:
MAINT OBJECT SLOT
Specify the card.

a

<CTL>
To view information for the inactive Control card, enter:

<ICTL>
Note To view the inactive Control card while it is booting,

enter <Pshelf-slot>.

April 2001 90-4521-43
44-5
To view information for a Hub card, enter:

<fabric-Sslot> <Pshelf-slot>
See Table 35-3 for fabric, shelf, and slot values.
To view information for an interface card, enter:

<Pshelf-slot>
Table 44-4 describes the information that the screen displays.

Table 44-4 Information about cards
44-6
Field
Description
Object
Card type
Card Ser. No.
Serial number of the card
Mktg. Part No.
Part number of the card
Bank 1 Status
Status of FLASH memory bank 1
Bank 2 Status
Status of FLASH memory bank 2
Bootprom Status
Status of the boot PROM
Bank 1 Software Generic
Software revision stored in FLASH memory bank 1
Bank 2 Software Generic
Software revision stored in FLASH memory bank 2
Bootprom Software Generic
Software revision running on the boot PROM
Card Status
Operating status of the card
Cause of last reboot
Cause of the last card restart, the field uses the subcode of the
System Restart alarm, see Table 148-3
Current Fabric
Switching fabric the card uses: X in a simplex system; X or Y in a

redundant system; unknown if the card is not in service

90-4521-43 April 2001
Viewing SEEP information

You can display information stored in the SEEP. Information about orderable items
is programmed into the SEEP when it is manufactured.
The active hub card SEEP also displays the SEEPs for the reference clock I/O card,
the alarm I/O card, the Fan Unit, and the midplane.
Procedure 44-4 To view SEEP information

1
Select:
MAINT OBJECT SLOT
Specify the card.

a
To view SEEP information for the active Control card, enter:

<CTL>
To view SEEP information for the inactive Control card, enter:

<ICTL>
To view SEEP information for a Hub card, enter:

<Pshelf-slot>
To view SEEP information for an interface card, enter:

<Pshelf-slot>
Select:
MORE DISPLAY_SEEP
Table 44-5 describes the SEEP information that the screen displays.
Table 44-5 SEEP information
Field
Description
Index
This field shows the hardware number.
Serial#
This field shows the hardware serial number.
CardId
This field shows the values for the major and minor card ID revision numbers.
MktgPtNo
This field shows the hardware marketing part number.

April 2001 90-4521-43
44-7
44.4
Control card configuration and management information

This section describes how to view configuration and management information for
Control cards. It contains procedures for viewing the following:
configuration information
status information
demerit points
PCMCIA information
Procedure 44-5 To view Control card configuration information

1
Select:
CONFIG OBJECT SLOT
Specify the active or inactive Control card.

a

<CTL>
To view information for the inactive Control card in a control-redundant system,

enter:
<ICTL>
44-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 44-6 To view Control card status information

Select:
MAINT SYSTEM CONTROL
Table 44-6 describes the status information that the screen displays.
Table 44-6 Status information for the Control card
Field
Mate Link Status
Description
(1)
Inactive Database
Status
System Demerit
Up
This field shows that the redundant Control cards are

communicating successfully.
Down
This field shows that the redundant Control cards cannot

communicate with each other over the switching fabric.
Not
Synchronized
This field shows that the database on the inactive

Control card does not match the database on the
active card.
Reconcile
in Progress
This field shows that the active Control card is propagating

its database to the inactive card.
Synchronized
This field shows that the database on the inactive

Control card matches the active card database.
Active
This field shows the total demerit points on the active

Control card. It also identifies the slot in which the
active card resides.
Inactive
This field shows the total demerit points on the inactive

Control card. It also identifies the slot in which the
inactive card resides.
Note
(1)
This field shows the status of the in-band cell relay communications link between the active and the
inactive Control cards.
Viewing demerit information

You can view the number of demerit points on the active and inactive Control cards.
For information about how the 7270 MSC system applies demerit points, see
Table 43-3.
Procedure 44-7 To view current demerits on the Control cards

Select:
MAINT SYSTEM CONTROL DEMERITS

April 2001 90-4521-43
44-9
Viewing PCMCIA module information

You can view the status, serial number, and capacity in megabytes of the
PCMCIA module on the active and inactive Control cards.
Procedure 44-8 To view PCMCIA module information

1
Select:
MAINT OBJECT SLOT
Specify the card.

a
To view information about the active Control card, enter:

<CTL>
To view information about the inactive Control card, enter:

<ICTL>
Select:
MORE PC_CARD_INFO
44.5
Hub card configuration information

You can view configuration information for Hub cards.
Procedure 44-9 To view Hub card information

1
Select:
CONFIG OBJECT SLOT
Enter the identifier for the Hub card:

<Pshelf-Hslot>
44-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
44.6
Interface card configuration information

You can view configuration information for interface cards.
Procedure 44-10 To view interface card information

1
Select:
CONFIG OBJECT SLOT
Enter the identifier for the interface card:

<Pshelf-slot>

April 2001 90-4521-43
44-11
44-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
45 Configuring slot options for frame

relay cards
45.1 Configuring frame relay card level congestion thresholds

45.2 Viewing slot option information for frame relay cards
45.3 Selecting TCA profiles for frame relay cards

April 2001 90-4521-43
45-2
45-3
45-4
45-1
45 Configuring slot options for frame relay cards
45.1
Configuring frame relay card level congestion thresholds

The frame relay cards buffer frames that are queued for processing. The card has two
buffers: one for ingress frames and one for egress frames. The ingress and egress
buffers are partitioned so that you do not need to configure them. Card level
congestion thresholds determine when the card buffer is congested in either direction
and when the system should apply congestion management. The system applies
congestion management and avoidance procedures separately to ingress and egress
traffic.
See section 55.3 for information about stream level congestion thresholds.
The card buffer ACT determines when the system considers the buffer to be
completely congested. You cannot configure it.
The card buffer SCT determines when the system considers the buffer to be severely
congested. You configure the SCT value to be between 1% and 100% of the ACT;
it must be greater than the MCT. The default is 80%.
The card buffer MCT determines when the system considers the buffer to be mildly
congested. You configure the MCT value to be between 0% and 99% of the ACT;
it must be less than the SCT. The default is 50%.
See section App A.4 for information about congestion levels and management for
frame relay traffic.
MCT configures the buffer percentage at which the system starts sending congestion
notifications, and SCT configures the buffer percentage at which the system drops
frames that have the DE bit set.
Procedure 45-1 To configure the frame relay card level congestion

thresholds
1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS THRESHOLDS
Select:
SCT or MCT
Enter:
<value>
where value is 1 to 100 for the SCT or 0 to 99 for the MCT and the SCT value is greater than the
MCT value
45-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
45.2
Viewing slot option information for frame relay cards

You can view the slot options that you configure for a frame relay card.
Procedure 45-2 To view slot option information for a frame relay

card
Select:
CONFIG OBJECT SLOT <Pshelfslot>

Table 45-1 lists the congestion status and threshold information that the NMTI screen
displays.
Table 45-1 Congestion information and threshold status
Field
Description
Congestion status
This field indicates the card congestion status. It is red, yellow, or

green.
Absolute congestion threshold
This field indicates the maximum number of bytes that the card will
buffer. It is not configurable.
Severe congestion threshold
This field indicates the level at which the system considers the
card buffer severely congested, expressed as a percentage of the
absolute congestion threshold. The severe congestion threshold
is configurable.
Mild congestion threshold
This field indicates the level at which the card sets the congestion
notification bits of frames queued for transmission, expressed as
a percentage of the absolute congestion threshold. The mild
congestion threshold is configurable.

April 2001 90-4521-43
45-3
45.3
Selecting TCA profiles for frame relay cards

You select a TCA profile for congestion on each frame relay card. Table 45-2 lists
the information that displays when you select TCA profiles. The default setting is
disabled.
Table 45-2 TCA profile information
Field
Description
TCA profile class
TCA profile class selected
Number
Profile number within the TCA profile class
Name
Optional name of a profile within the TCA profile class
Status
Indicates whether the TCA profile class is enabled or disabled
See section 36.7 for information about configuring threshold values for each
performance parameter within a TCA profile.
Procedure 45-3 To select TCA profiles for frame relay cards

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS TCA_PROFILE CONGESTION
Select the profile number or view all the profiles.

a
To select the profile number, enter:

PROFILE_NUM <profile_number>
where profile_number is 1 to 4
To view all the configured profile numbers, enter:

PROFILE_NUM <Esc> SHOW_PROFILES
To enable or disable TCA profiles, select:

ENABLE or DISABLE
45-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
46 Slot configuration for IMA
46.1 Viewing IMA slot configuration
46-2
46.2 IMA slot configuration options
46-2
46.3 Configuring IMA module presence

46.4 ICP header

April 2001 90-4521-43
46-3
46-4
46-1
46.1
Viewing IMA slot configuration

You can view information about IMA slot configuration on the 7270 MSC.
Table 46-1 lists the fields on the configuration information screen.
Table 46-1 IMA slot configuration information
Fields
Optional
Module
Configured
Installed
ICP_Header
46.2
Value
Description
None
The module is not configured for IMA.
IMA
The module is configured for IMA.
None
The module is not installed on the T1 or E1 cell relay

card.
IMA
The module is installed on the T1 or E1 cell relay card.
1 to FFFFFFFF
The value of the ICP header.
IMA slot configuration options

Table 46-2 lists the options for IMA slot configuration and the sections that
describe them.
Table 46-2 IMA slot configuration options
Option
Section
IMA module presence
46.3
ICP header
46.4
Caution Configure the IMA slot options identically on both nodes
that are IMA path-ends.
46-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
46.3
Configuring IMA module presence

You must configure the T1 CR or E1 CR card for an IMA module before you can
configure the card for IMA groups.
See section 61.2 for information about IMA groups.
Table 46-3 lists the configuration options for the IMA module.
Table 46-3 Options for IMA module presence
Option
Softkey
The IMA module is installed.
IMA
The IMA module is absent.
NONE
Procedure 46-1 To configure the IMA module

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MODULE IMA
Select:

April 2001 90-4521-43
46-3
46.4
ICP header
You can configure the ICP cell header as a hexadecimal value from 1 to FFFFFFFF.
The default value is 0000000B.
Note The ICP header configuration applies to all IMA groups on
the card.
Caution Before you change the ICP header, disconnect all
connections to all IMA groups on the card. When you change the
ICP header on a card configured for IMA groups, the system deletes
all IMA groups on the card.
Procedure 46-2 To configure the ICP header

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MODULE IMA ICP_HEADER
Enter:
<header>
where header is a hexadecimal value from 1 to FFFFFFFF
46-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
47 Configuring slots for OC3 CR and

STM1 CR cards
47.1 Viewing slot information for OC3 CR and STM1 CR cards

April 2001 90-4521-43
47-2
47-1
47 Configuring slots for OC3 CR and STM1 CR cards
47.1
Viewing slot information for OC3 CR and STM1 CR cards

You can view information for OC3 CR and STM1 CR cards on the 7270 MSC.
Procedure 47-1 To view slot information for OC3 CR and STM1 CR

cards
1
Select:
CONFIG OBJECT
Enter:
SLOT <Pshelfslot>
Table 47-1 describes the information that the screen displays.

Table 47-1 Configuration information about OC3 CR and STM1 CR cards
Field
Configured card version
Description
(1)
This field indicates the version the card is configured to be.
Installed card version
This field indicates the version of the card in the slot.
Optional module
This field indicates the module that you configured and the module that
you installed.
Memory module
This field indicates the amount of memory installed.
Total memory
This field indicates the total amount of memory available.
Note
(1)
47-2
The NMTI displays the preconfigured version of the card. In this release, you cannot change the
version of the card from its default value of 2.

90-4521-43 April 2001
48 Slot configuration for DS3 CR and

E3 CR cards
48.1 Viewing slot information for DS3 CR and E3 CR cards

April 2001 90-4521-43
48-2
48-1
48 Slot configuration for DS3 CR and E3 CR cards
48.1
Viewing slot information for DS3 CR and E3 CR cards

You can view slot information for DS3 CR and E3 CR cards on the 7270 MSC.
Procedure 48-1 To view slot information for DS3 CR and E3 CR

cards
1
Select:
CONFIG OBJECT
Enter:
SLOT <Pshelf-slot>

Table 48-1 Slot configuration information for DS3 CR and E3 CR cards
Field
Configured card version
Installed card version
Description
(1)
This is the configured version of the card

This is the version of the card in the slot
Note
(1)
48-2
The NMTI displays the preconfigured version of the card. You cannot change the version of the card
from its default value of 2; this configuration option is reserved for future use.

90-4521-43 April 2001
49 Slot configuration for voiceband

services cards
49.1 Slot information for the voiceband services card

49.2 DSP transport modules
49.3 License credits

April 2001 90-4521-43
49-2
49-3
49-4
49-1
49 Slot configuration for voiceband services cards
49.1
Slot information for the voiceband services card

You can view slot information about voiceband services cards on the 7270 MSC.
Procedure 49-1 To view voiceband services card option information

1
Enter:
To view license credit information, enter:

OPTIONS LIC_CREDIT
Table 49-1 lists the module and license credit information.

Table 49-1 Module and license credit information
49-2
Field
Description
Transport Module 1
This field indicates whether a DSP module is configured and installed in

the transport module 1 position.
Transport Module 2

Transport Module 3

Option Module
This field indicates whether any modules are installed in the option
module position. This option is reserved for future use.
G.723.1 License Credits
This field indicates the number of G.723.1 license credits that are
configured and installed. The numbers displayed in parentheses indicate
how many credits are installed on each DSP module.
G.729.A License Credits
This field indicates the number of G.729.A license credits that are
configured and installed. The numbers displayed in parentheses indicate
how many credits are installed on each DSP module.

90-4521-43 April 2001
49.2
DSP transport modules

DSP transport modules provide adaptation functions, such as compressing and
decompressing, demodulating and remodulating, and packing and transporting
voiceband channels across the ATM network.
The DSP transport module can process up to 40 voiceband channels. When you add
additional DSP transport modules, you can increase the number of voiceband
channels that the voiceband services card can support; see Table 49-3. When
determining the number of channels that you require, do not count channels that
carry CCS messages or E1 channels that carry CAS. The T1 VS card supports up to
96 channels. The E1 VS cards support up to 124 channels.
You must install at least one DSP transport module on the voiceband services card.
For information about installing a DSP transport module, see section 26.2.
Table 49-2 describes the two variants of the DSP transport module.
Table 49-2 DSP transport module variants
Variants
Description
DSP transport module with G.729A

support
This DSP transport module includes 40 license credits for

G.729A channels; see section 49.3.
DSP transport module
This DSP transport module does not include license credits.
Table 49-3 lists the DSP1 transport modules on the voiceband services card.
Table 49-3 DSP1 transport modules on the voiceband services card
Number of DSP modules
Maximum number of channels
40
80
120
Procedure 49-2 To configure a DSP transport module

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MODULE
Select the transport module.

TRANSPORT_1 or TRANSPORT_2 or TRANSPORT_3

April 2001 90-4521-43
49-3
Enable or disable the transport module.

a
To enable the module, select:

DSP1
To disable the module, select:

NONE
49.3
License credits
The voiceband services card supports two controlled voiceband processing
algorithms: G.729 Annex A and G.723.1. These algorithms require license credits.
The G.711, G.726 32k, and NetCoder algorithms do not require license credits.
A DSP transport module can contain 0 to 40 license credits for the G.729 Annex A
and G.723.1 processing algorithms. The actual number of credits that the
DSP transport module contains depends on which variant of the DSP module is
installed. The configured number of license credits must be less than or equal to the
number of the installed license credits on the card. Each credit allows you to run the
algorithm on a single connected channel.
You can only use the license credits on the voiceband services card that has
DSP transport module and license credits installed.
Procedure 49-3 To configure license credits

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MODULE LIC_CREDITS
Select the algorithm.

a
For G.723.1, enter:

G_723_1 <value>
where value is 0 to 120 and indicates the number of license credits you need
For G.729.A, enter:

G_729_A <value>
where value is 0 to 120 and indicates the number of license credits you need
49-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
50 Configuring APS
50.1 Configuring the type of redundancy

50.2 Configuring the switching mode
50.3 Configuring the switching type
50.4 Configuring the WTR timer
50.5 Managing card protection

April 2001 90-4521-43
50-2
50-3
50-4
50-5
50-6
50-1
50 Configuring APS
50.1
Configuring the type of redundancy

The 7270 MSC system supports 1+1 redundancy for OC3 and
STM1 cards.
The protection card assumes active operations if the working card fails. The working
card is the card on which connections are configured.
1+1 redundancy uses one protection card for each working card. Both cards have
the same configuration and transmit the same signal. This type of redundancy
provides rapid switching to the protection card if the working card fails.
You must install the working card in an odd-numbered slot and the protection card in
the next even-numbered slot. When the card in the even-numbered slot is configured
to be the protection card, the other card automatically becomes the working card. See
section 43.1 for information about configuring slots.
Procedure 50-1 To configure the type of redundancy

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS
Select:
PROTECTION TYPE
Select the protection type.

a
For 1+1 protection of OC3 and STM1 cards, select:

1+1
For no protection, select:

NONE
50-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
50 Configuring APS
50.2
Configuring the switching mode

Table 50-1 lists the switching modes that the system supports. The default for 1+1
redundancy is unidirectional. The default for 1:N redundancy is bidirectional.
Bidirectional is the only switching mode supported when you configure the MTSM
or eTM on the working card.
Table 50-1 Supported switching modes
Switching mode
Unidirectional
(1)
Bidirectional
Softkey
Function
UNIDIRECT
The near-end and far-end choose the line

and equipment independently.
BIDIRECT
Both ends use the same line to receive data.
Note
(1)
This switching mode applies to 1+1 redundancy for OC3 and STM1 cards only.
Procedure 50-2 To configure the switching mode

1
Enter:
Select:
PROTECTION SWITCHING
Select the switching mode:

UNIDIRECT or BIDIRECT

April 2001 90-4521-43
50-3
50 Configuring APS
50.3
Configuring the switching type

Table 50-2 lists the switching types that the system supports.
Table 50-2 Supported switching types
Switching type (1)
Softkey
Function
Non-revertive
NON-REVERT
If the protection card becomes the active card, traffic

does not switch back to the working card after recovery.
Revertive
REVERTIVE
If the protection card is active and then the working card

is restored, traffic switches back to the working card.
Note
(1)
The default switching type is non-revertive for 1+1 APS.
Procedure 50-3 To configure the switching type

1
Enter:
Select the switching type.

a
For non-revertive switching, select:

PROTECTION SWITCHING NON-REVERT
For revertive switching, select:

PROTECTION SWITCHING REVERTIVE
To configure the WTR timer for revertive switching, enter:

PROTECTION SWITCHING WTR_TIMER <minutes>
where minutes is in the range 0 to 60
50-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
50 Configuring APS
50.4
Configuring the WTR timer

If a failure occurs on a working card, the protection card becomes active. When you
configure the switching method as REVERTIVE, the protection card switches back
to the working card when the working card is no longer in a failed state.
The wait-to-restore timer determines how long the working card must be in a
non-failed state before it can return to service.
You can configure the WTR time from 1 to 60 min, in 1-min increments.
Procedure 50-4 To configure the WTR timer

1
Identify the protection card. Enter:

Select:
OPTIONS PROTECTION SWITCHING WTR_TIMER
Enter:
<WTR_time>
where WTR_time is an integer in the range 1 to 60

April 2001 90-4521-43
50-5
50 Configuring APS
50.5
Managing card protection

This section describes how to manage protection for interface cards that
support APS.
Card protection management

You can manage the protection on interface cards that you have configured for APS.
Table 50-3 lists the options for managing card protection.
Table 50-3 Options for managing card protection
Option
Softkey
Description
Clear
CLEAR
This option clears any outstanding

maintenance requests.
Lockout
LOCKOUT
This option prevents any of the working

cards from switching to the protection card.
Forced switch
FORCED_SWITCH
This option switches activity between the

working card and the protection card. The
activity switch overrides some card or line
failures. This option should only be used in
extreme cases. Connection information
may not be downloaded and existing traffic
may be disconnected. The preferred
method is to use the Manual Switch option.
Manual switch
MANUAL_SWITCH
This option switches activity between the

working card and the protection card.
Exercise
EXERCISE
This option exercises the protocol for a

protection switch on the protection card.
This option is available for the OC3 and
STM1 cards.
Show protection group
SHOW_PG
This option displays all the cards in the

protection group.
Procedure 50-5 To configure card protection management

1
Enter:
MAINT OBJECT SLOT <Pshelf-slot>
Select:
MORE PROTECTION
Select:
LOCKOUT or FORCED_SWITCH or MANUAL_SWITCH or CLEAR or EXERCISE or
SHOW_PG
50-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
50 Configuring APS
Viewing card protection information

You can view protection information for any interface card that you configure to
use APS.
Procedure 50-6 To view card protection information

1
Select:
Select:
MORE PROTECTION
Table 50-4 describes the card protection fields.

Table 50-4 Information about card protection
Field
Description
Card Status
This field shows the status of the card.
PG Status
This field shows the status of the protection group.
Protection Type
This field shows the type of redundancy.
Switching Mode
This field shows the switching mode.
Switching Type
This field shows the switching type.
Wait-To-Restore Timer
This field shows the length of time the system waits to restore to active
service a previously failed interface card that is recovered.
Current User Request
This field shows the status of the current user request.
APS Protocol Status
This field shows the status of the APS protocol status.
APS Local K1 Byte
This field shows the value of the K1 byte received in the SONET
overhead channel.
APS Remote K2 Byte
This field shows the value of the K2 byte received in the SONET
overhead channel.

April 2001 90-4521-43
50-7
50 Configuring APS
50-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
51 Configuring and managing ports
51.1 Physical port options

51.2 Naming ports
51-7
51.3 Line termination

51.4 Framing type
51-7
51-8
51.5 Trunk conditioning
51-9
51.6 Robbed bit signaling

51.7 Signaling
51-3
51-15
51-16
51.8 Alarm time

51.9 CRC framing
51-17
51-18
51.10 Channel speed
51-19
51.11 Zero suppression
51-19
51.12 E1 national use bits

51.13 AAL service
51-21
51.14 Synchronization
51.15 Playout buffer size

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-20
51-22
51-24
51-1
51.16 Reference point
51-25
51.17 Cell payload scrambling

51.18 Cell mapping
51-27
51.19 DS3 application

51.20 Line length
51-26
51-28
51-28
51.21 PCR and SCR scaling factors

51.22 Line BER threshold
51.23 Trail trace
51-29
51-31
51-32
51.24 Ethernet port speed
51-34
51.25 Ethernet duplex port operation

51.26 Ethernet autonegotiation
51.27 Managing ports
51.28 FDL mode
51-37
51-40
51-44
51.29 Idle channel suppression

51.30 Path trace
51-44
51-47
51.31 PSI clocking parameters

51.32 PSI control leads
51.33 PSI gender
51-49
51-50
51-51
51.34 PSI loopback processing

51.35 PSI port interface type
51-2
51-35
51-52
51-53

90-4521-43 April 2001
51.1
Physical port options

Table 51-1 lists the options for T1 FR, E1 FR, and PSI FR ports and the sections that
describe them.
Table 51-1 Configuration options for T1 FR, E1 FR, and PSI FR ports
Option
Port type
Section
T1
E1
PSI
Naming ports
Line termination
51.3
Framing type
51.4
Signaling
51.2
51.7
Alarm time
51.8
CRC framing
51.9
Channel speed
51.10
Zero suppression
51.11
Gender
51.33
Clock rate
51.31
Loopback processing
51.34
Control leads
51.32
Clocking mode
51.31
Clock inversion
51.31
Interface type
51.35

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-3
Table 51-2 lists the options for T1 CR and E1 CR ports and the sections that
describe them.
Table 51-2 Configuration options for T1 CR and E1 CR ports
Option
Port type
Section
T1
E1
Naming ports
Line termination
51.3
Framing type
51.4
Alarm time
51.8
CRC framing
51.9
Synchronization
51.14
Reference point
51.16
Cell payload scrambling
51.17
PCR and SCR scaling factors
51.21
51.2
Table 51-3 lists the options for T1 CE and E1 CE ports and the sections that
describe them.
Table 51-3 Configuration options for T1 CE and E1 CE ports
Option
Port type
T1
E1
Naming ports
Line termination
51.3
Framing type
51.4
Trunk conditioning
51.5
Signaling
51.7
Alarm time
51.8
CRC framing
51.9
Zero suppression
E1 national use bits
51-4
Section
51.2
51.11
51.12
AAL service
51.13
Synchronization
51.14
Playout buffer size
51.15
FDL mode
51.28

90-4521-43 April 2001
Table 51-4 lists the options for T1 VS and E1 VS ports and the sections that
describe them.
Table 51-4 Configuration options for T1 VS and E1 VS ports
Option
Port type
Section
T1
E1
Naming ports
Line termination
51.3
Framing type
51.4
Trunk conditioning
Signaling
51.2
51.5
51.7
Robbed bit signaling
Alarm time
51.8
CRC framing
51.9
Zero suppression
Idle channel suppression
51.6
51.11
51.12
51.29
Table 51-5 lists the options for DS3 and E3 ports and the sections that describe them.
Table 51-5 Configuration options for DS3 and E3 ports
Option
Port type
Section
DS3 CR
DS3 CE
E3 CR
Naming ports
51.2
Reference point
51.16
51.17
Cell mapping
51.18
Line length
TCA profiles
Trail trace

April 2001 90-4521-43
51.20
51.21
52.1
51.23
51-5
Table 51-6 lists the options for SONET and SDH ports and the sections that describe
them.
Table 51-6 Configuration options for SONET and SDH ports
Option
Port type
Section
OC3
STM1
Naming ports
51.2
Reference point
51.16
51.21
Line BER threshold
51.22
TCA profiles
52.1
(1)
51.30
Path trace
Note
(1)
Path trace is available on OC3 and STM1 cards only.
Table 51-7 lists the options for Ethernet ports and the sections that describe them.
Table 51-7 Configuration options for Ethernet ports
Option
Port type
Naming ports
Ethernet port speed
(1)
Section
Electrical
Optical
51.2
Ethernet duplex port operation
Ethernet autonegotiation
51.24
(2)
51.25
51.26
Notes
(1)
This option is not applicable to optical LAN interfaces.
(2)
This option must be manually configured on the optical variant.
51-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
51.2
Naming ports
After you configure the card type for the slot, you can name each port on the card.
See section 43.1 for information about configuring the card type.
Procedure 51-1 To name a port

1
Enter:
Enter:
NAME <name>
percent sign
51.3
Line termination
You can configure the T1 port for DS-1 or DSX-1 termination. Use DS-1 for
off-premises applications and use DSX-1 termination for on-premises applications.
The default is DSX-1.
When you configure the port for DS-1 termination, you can configure the line
build-out to be one of the following values:
0 dB
7.5 dB
15 dB
22.5 dB
The default is 0 dB.

When you configure the port for DSX-1 termination, you can configure the line
length to be one of the following ranges:
0 to 132 ft
133 to 265 ft
266 to 398 ft
399 to 532 ft
533 to 654 ft
The default is 0 to 132 ft.

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-7
Procedure 51-2 To configure the line termination

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL
Select:
DS1 or DSX1
If you selected DS1, go to step 4.

If you selected DSX1, go to step 5.
4
For a port with DS-1 line build-out, select:

0_dB or 7.5_dB or 15_dB or 22_dB
For a port with DSX-1 line length, select:

0132_ft or 133265_ft or 266398_ft or 399532_ft or 533654_ft
51.4
Framing type
You can configure the framing type for each T1 port to be ESF or D4. The default
is ESF.
For frame relay traffic, configure the framing type for ESF to comply with
Frame Relay Forum requirements.
When you select D4 framing, you must configure how the port responds to Red or
AIS alarms. Table 51-8 lists the framing options for each type of T1 card. There is
no default setting.
Table 51-8 D4 framing options
51-8
Response to red or AIS alarms
Frame
relay
Circuit
emulation
Cell relay
Softkey
Generate RDI (Yellow alarm) in

accordance with North American
standards
N_AMERICA
Generate RDI (Yellow alarm) in

accordance with Japanese standards
Do not generate RDI (Yellow alarm)
JAPANESE
NONE

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 51-3 To configure the framing type

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL FRAMING
Select the framing type:

ESF or D4
Note You cannot configure the card for D4 framing if you configured
the FDL mode of the card for T1.403 messaging. For information about
configuring the FDL mode, see section 57.7.
4
Select:
RDI_ALARM
If you selected D4, select the standard for RDI generation.

a
For T1 frame relay, select:

N_AMERICA or JAPANESE or NONE
For T1 cell relay cards, select:

N_AMERICA or NONE
51.5
Trunk conditioning
You can apply trunk conditioning to T1 and E1 voiceband services cards and to
T1 and E1 circuit emulation cards that are configured for SDT mode.
Trunk conditioning controls the data and signaling values that T1 and E1 channels
transmit when:
the channel is not involved in a connection

the card detects an interface fault
the connection experiences an LOC through the ATM network
You can configure the data and signaling values that the card transmits for each
channel of the T1 and E1 port.

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-9
The far-end circuit emulation or voiceband services card applies trunk conditioning
in the ingress direction when the near-end circuit emulation or voiceband services
card detects the following interface faults:
AIS
LOS
RAI
TS16 AIS (E1 only)

TS16 LOF (E1 only
TS16 RAI (E1 only)
When a circuit emulation or voiceband services card detects an AIS, LOS, or

LOF condition, it also transmits an RAI indication in the egress direction. When an
E1 circuit emulation or E1 voiceband services card detects a TS16 AIS or
TS16 LOF condition, it also transmits a TS16 RAI indication in the egress direction.
A circuit emulation or voiceband services card detects an LOC for a channel when
all cells stop arriving on that channel from the ATM network. When the card detects
the LOC fault, it applies trunk conditioning in the egress direction on the channel on
which the fault occurred. The card also applies trunk conditioning to the
corresponding channel at the opposite end of the ATM connection.
On a voiceband services card, the channel uses its configured trunk conditioning
values to apply trunk conditioning. On a circuit emulation card, the channel uses the
trunk conditioning values of the channel that detected the fault to apply trunk
conditioning.
Table 51-9 lists the three trunk conditioning modes that the 7270 MSC system
supports.
Table 51-9 Configuring options for trunk conditioning
51-10
Function
Softkey
The system sends the signaling option CODE1 on the signaling path for the duration of
failure. The user configures the data path according to the options in Table 51-11.
IDLE
The system sends the signaling option CODE1 on the signaling path for the duration of
2.5 s, followed by CODE2 for the duration of the failure. The user configures the data
path according to the options in Table 51-11.
SEIZED
The signaling path has the signaling option frozen to its last value. The data path is
passed transparently for channels on a circuit emulation card and has a silence pattern
for channels on a voiceband services card. The data path pattern is set to all 1 s for
channels on a circuit emulation card for faults that preclude the reception of a valid data
pattern from the interface, such as LOF.
DISABLE

90-4521-43 April 2001
You can configure the bit pattern transmitted for trunk conditioning on the signaling
path. Table 51-10 lists the configuration options for the signaling path.
Table 51-10 Signaling path options for trunk conditioning
Function
Bit pattern
Softkey
Transmits the bit pattern during the first 2.5 s of failure,

when you configure the channel to transmit idle fault
signaling. The default is 1101.
ABCD, where ABCD is 00

to 0F
CODE1
Transmits the bit pattern for the remaining duration of

the failure, when you configure the channel to transmit
seized fault signaling. The default is 1101.
ABCD, where ABCD is 00

to 0F
CODE2
For circuit emulation D4 channels connected to circuit emulation ESF channels, the
system copies the configured AB bits into the CD bit position in the
D4-to-ESF direction (the system transmits ABAB). In the circuit emulation
ESF-to-CE D4 direction, the system transmits only the configured AB bits and
ignores the CD bits. For more information about ESF and D4 framing, see
section 51.4. For voiceband services channels, the system always transmits the
trunk conditioning values configured at the egress interface.
You can configure the bit pattern that the system transmits on the data path.
Table 51-11 lists the configuration options for the data path.
Table 51-11 Data path options for trunk conditioning
Function
Bit pattern
Softkey
The system transmits an 8-character bit pattern that matches

the requirements of a downstream device. The bit pattern is
user configurable.
Configurable
CUSTOM
The system transmits an 8-character bit pattern that indicates

that the device is out-of-service at the end of the link.
00011010
MUX_OOS
The system transmits an 8-character bit pattern that indicates

there is a fault on the upstream device.
01111111
(T1 and E1 CE and VS)
IDLE
11010101 (E1 VS)

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-11
Procedure 51-4 To configure, enable, or disable trunk conditioning

1
Enter:
Select:
TRUNK_COND
See Table 51-12 for information about trunk group conditioning.
Table 51-12 Trunk conditioning information
Field
Description
CH
This field indicates the channel number.
CODE1
This field indicates the first signaling pattern sent out during the first 2.5 s of failure
when trunk conditioning is applied.
CODE2
This field indicates the signaling pattern transmitted for the remaining duration of the
failure, when the channel is configured to transmit seized fault signaling. The default
is 1101.
DATA
The data pattern configured for transmission while trunk conditioning is applied.
Specify the channel, channels, or channel group.

a
For a single circuit emulation or voiceband services channel, enter:

<channel_id>
where channel_id is a number from 1 to 24 for a T1 voiceband services or circuit emulation
card and 1 to 31 for an E1 voiceband services or circuit emulation card
For a circuit emulation channel group, enter:

<channel_group_id>
where channel_group_id is the lowest numbered channel in a channel group
For a circuit emulation or voiceband services channel range, enter:

<n1-n2>
where
n1 is the start of the channel range under the CH column
n2 is the last channel in the range under the CH column
Select the option.

DISABLE or IDLE or SEIZED
51-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 51-5 To configure the signaling path for trunk

conditioning
1
Enter:
Select:
TRUNK_COND
Specify the channel or channels.

a
For a circuit emulation or voiceband services single channel, enter:

<channel_id>

<channel_group_id>

<n1-n2>
where
Select:
SIGNALING
Enter the bit pattern for the signaling path.

a
To transmit an idle fault signaling bit pattern, enter:

CODE_1 <abcd>
where a, b, c, and d are 00 to 0F
To transmit seized fault signaling, enter:

i
CODE_1 <abcd>
ii
CODE_2 <abcd>

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-13
Procedure 51-6 To configure the data path for trunk conditioning

1
Enter:
Select:
TRUNK_COND

a
For a circuit emulation or voiceband services single channel, enter:

<channel_id>

<channel_group_id>

<n1-n2>
where
Select:
DATA
Select the bit pattern for the data path.

a
For a custom bit pattern, enter:

CUSTOM <custom>
where custom is an 8-character bit pattern
To transmit a signal that indicates that the multiplexer is out-of-service, select:

MUX_OOS
To transmit a signal that indicates a fault on the upstream device, select:

IDLE
51-14

90-4521-43 April 2001
51.6
Robbed bit signaling

You can configure robbed bit signaling for T1 circuit emulation and voiceband
services cards.
When the port is configured for robbed bit signaling, the card takes the least
significant bit of a channel every six frames to use as a signaling bit. Robbed bit
signaling is a form of CAS signaling.
Procedure 51-7 To configure robbed bit signaling

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL MORE RBS

a
For a single channel, enter:

<channel_id>
card
For a channel range, enter:

<n1-n2>
where
To enable RBS, select:

ON
To disable RBS, select:

OFF

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-15
51.7
Signaling
Signaling configuration is available for E1 frame relay and circuit emulation cards
only. You cannot configure signaling on the E1 cell relay card; the signaling defaults
to CCS. You can configure signaling on the E1 frame relay cards to be CAS, CCS,
or 31_CHANNEL. You can configure signaling on the E1 circuit emulation cards to
be CAS or 31_CHANNEL. The default is CAS. When the port is in CAS framing
mode, you can use 30 channels for connections; channel 31 is reserved for the
signaling channel.
When the port is in CCS signaling mode, you can use all 31 circuits for connections,
but you cannot configure the 31st circuit as part of a super rate connection. The
31_CHANNEL framing mode is the same as CCS, but you can configure the
31st circuit as a part of a stream.
Procedure 51-8 To configure signaling

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL SIGNALING
Select the signaling type.

a
For an E1 frame relay card, select:

CAS or CCS or 31_CHANNEL
For an E1 circuit emulation card, select:

CAS or 31_CHANNEL
51-16

90-4521-43 April 2001
51.8
Alarm time
For ESF framing on the T1 card and basic framing on the E1 circuit emulation cards,
you can configure the alarm declaration and clearing times from 1 to 300 tenths of a
second in one-second increments.
The E3 circuit emulation card has one E3 interface that is made up of 16 E1s. Each
one of these E1s has alarm declaration and clearing times that you can configure. The
default for alarm declaration is 0.8 s and for alarm clearing 10 s.
The E3 interface also has configurable alarm declaration and clearing times. The
default is 0.4 s for alarm declaration and 12 s for alarm clearing.
The DS3 circuit emulation card has one DS3 interface that is made up of 28 T1s.
Each of these T1s has configurable alarm declaration and clearing times. The default
is 2.5 s for alarm declaration and 10 s for alarm clearing. You cannot configure the
alarm declaration and clearing times for the DS3 interface.
Procedure 51-9 To configure the alarm time on the T1 card

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL ALARM_TIME
Select:
DECLARE or CLEAR or RDI_CLEAR
For the declare time, enter:

<declare>
where declare is 1 to 300 tenths of a second
For the clear time, enter:

<clear>
where clear is 1 to 300 tenths of a second
For RDI clearing, select:

ON_LOF_CLEAR or ON_RESYNCH

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-17
Procedure 51-10 To configure the alarm time on the E1 cards

1
Enter:
Select:
Select:
DECLARE or CLEAR

<declare>

<clear>
51.9
CRC framing
When you configure the port for ESF framing on the T1 card, you can enable or
disable the CRC framing mode. You can configure CRC framing for all E1 framing
modes. The default is enabled.
Procedure 51-11 To configure the CRC framing

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL CRC_FRAMING
Select:
ON or OFF
51-18

90-4521-43 April 2001
51.10
Channel speed
You can configure the channel speed for the T1 frame relay card. You can configure
the channel speed for each DS0 channel on the port. Valid channel speeds are 56 kb/s
or 64 kb/s. The default is 64 kb/s.
When you configure the channel speed, you can affect zero suppression,
see section 51.11.
Procedure 51-12 To configure the channel speed

1
Enter:
Enter:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL MORE CHAN_SPEED channel>
where channel is 1 to 24
Select:
64_Kbps or 56_Kbps
51.11
Zero suppression
You can configure zero suppression for the T1 frame relay, voiceband services, and
circuit emulation cards only.
You can configure a T1 CFR port to use the B8ZS, JB7, or transparent
(AMI) suppression algorithm. You cannot use JB7 when you configure the channel
speed for 64 kb/s. The default is B8ZS encoding.
You can configure a T1 VS port to use the B8ZS, JB7, or transparent
(AMI) suppression algorithm. The default is B8ZS encoding.
You can configure a T1 CE port to use the B8ZS, JB7 (AMI+ZCS), or transparent
(AMI) suppression algorithm. If you configure the port for UDT or monitored
UDT AAL service mode, JB7 is not available. See section 51.13. The default is
B8ZS encoding.

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-19
Procedure 51-13 To configure zero suppression

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL MORE ZERO_SUPPRESS
Select the algorithm type.

a
For T1 CFR or T1 VS, select:

B8ZS or JB7 or TRNSPRNT(AMI)
For T1 CE, select:

B8ZS or JB7(AMI+ZCS) or TRNSPRNT(AMI)
51.12

For E1 circuit emulation and voiceband services cards, you can specify the pattern
of the national use bits transmitted on ports configured with an AAL service mode
of SDT service, see section 51.13. When you change the AAL service mode, the
system disables the transmission of national use bits. You can set the pattern for the
national use bits to be a value between 00000 and 11111 or you can disable the
national use bits. The default is disabled. The system does not process the national
use bits it receives. The E1 circuit emulation cards also transmit TDM-based
CPSS messages in-band over national use bits, see section 19.5.
51-20

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 51-14 To set the national use bits

1
Select:
Set the national use bits.

a
To set the pattern for the national use bits, enter:

TX_NU_BITS <pattern>
where pattern is 00000 to 11111
To disable the national use bits, select:

TX_NU_BITS NO_MAINT
51.13
AAL service
You can configure the AAL service for UDT or SDT service.
UDT service provides clear-channel transmission at rates of up to 1.563 Mb/s for
T1 circuit emulation ports and 2.048 Mb/s for E1 circuit emulation ports. You can
make a single connection from a UDT port to another UDT port, channel group, or
cell relay VP or VC.
You can configure each UDT port to have the performance monitoring option. The
UDT performance monitoring service collects performance monitoring statistics, see
chapter 118. Select this option if the 7270 MSC is at the edge of the network where
the CPE is connected. UDT service complies with the ITU-T I.363 and
GR-1113-CORE specifications.
SDT service provides 24 channels for T1 circuit emulation ports and 31 channels for
E1 circuit emulation ports. You can configure each channel to have transparent or
CAS signaling. When you select basic SDT service, all 47 octets of the cell carry
information. When you select CAS SDT service, one octet of each cell is reserved
for signaling. SDT service complies with the ITU-T I.363.1, GR-1113-CORE, and
ANSI T1.403 specifications.

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-21
Table 51-13 lists the configuration options for the AAL service. You can configure
the SDT_CAS option for T1 circuit emulation ports and for E1 circuit emulation
ports configured for CAS and CCS, see section 51.7.
Table 51-13 AAL service options
Function
Softkey
Provides UDT service
UDT
Provides UDT service with performance monitoring
UDT_PERFMON
Provides SDT service
SDT_BASIC
Provides SDT service and transmits signaling bits
SDT_CAS
Procedure 51-15 To configure the AAL service

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS AAL_SERVICE
Select:
UDT or UDT_PERFMON or SDT_BASIC or SDT_CAS
51.14
Synchronization
You can configure synchronization at the port level for T1 and E1 circuit
emulation cards.
Configuring synchronization for T1 and E1 circuit emulation cards

You can configure each T1 and E1 circuit emulation port to operate synchronously
or asynchronously with the network. The synchronization options available depend
on the AAL service that you have configured on the port, see section 51.13.
51-22

90-4521-43 April 2001
Table 51-14 lists the configuration options for synchronization.

Table 51-14 Configuration options for synchronization
Option
Softkey
SDT
UDT
Synchronous timing
SYNC_SOURCE
Asynchronous timing, SRTS
SRTS
Asynchronous timing, ACR
ACR
Select the SYNC_SOURCE option when both ports are connected to links that are
in networks with the same timing sources. The 1.544 MHz source is derived from the
network synchronization source on both ports and conforms to the ANSI T1.403 and
AT&T 6241 specifications.
When you connect the two ports to links that are in networks with different timing
sources, configure both ports for asynchronous timing.
When you select the SRTS option, the ports work asynchronously with the node and
maintain path synchronization. The SRTS method of synchronization uses a network
clock to regenerate network timing. The SRTS method of timing transmission and
recovery complies with the ITU-T I.363 and ANSI T1.630 specifications.
When you select the ACR option, the ports work asynchronously with the node and
maintain path synchronization. The ACR option regenerates timing from the arrival
rate of the ATM cells.
Procedure 51-16 To configure synchronization for T1 and E1 circuit

emulation cards
1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL SYNCHRONIZE
Select:
SYNCH_SOURCE or SRTS or ACR

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-23
51.15
Playout buffer size

The playout buffer compensates for the effects of cell delay variation or congestion
in cell delivery.
For E1 circuit emulation ports in UDT mode and UDT with performance monitoring
mode, you configure the size of the playout buffer at the port level.
The playout buffer absorbs the negative CDV of the incoming AAL1 cell stream by
storing cells and transmitting them when cells arrive late. This cell store counteracts
the increased time between cells arriving at the interworking function.
The playout buffer also absorbs the positive CDV of the incoming AAL1 cell stream
by storing cells that arrive too soon. This cell store counteracts the decreased time
between cells arriving at the interworking function.
The buffer size is the total size of the buffer. The buffer fills up to the median
fill-level before it transmits cells. This means that the median fill-level determines
the forwarding delay introduced by the port. The median fill-level is the tolerance of
the port for negative CDV. The difference between the median fill-level and the
buffer size is the tolerance of the port for positive CDV. For example, to have a
negative CDV tolerance of 2 ms and a positive CDV tolerance of 4 ms, configure the
median fill-level for 2 ms and the buffer size for 6 ms.
You configure the median fill-level of the buffer by configuring the CDV tolerance.
See Circuit emulation traffic rates in section 77.3.
You can configure the size of the playout buffer from 1.0 ms to 12.0 ms in
0.5 ms increments. The default size is 6.0 ms. Larger playout buffer sizes introduce
greater delay in overall cell transfer.
Smaller playout buffer sizes have a limited ability to handle clumping or the effects
of queuing delays in the network. Small playout buffers can lead to a starvation state
that occurs when the buffer has no cells to transmit.
For more information about the playout buffer, see section App B.3.
Procedure 51-17 To configure the playout buffer

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS AAL_SERVICE
Enter:
PLAYOUT_BUFF <size>
where size is 1 to 12 in increments of 0.5 ms
51-24

90-4521-43 April 2001
51.16
Reference point
The reference point is a configurable port option used for OAM loopbacks,
see chapter 141.
For information about configuring reference points for the IMA group, see
section 61.8.
The port reference point determines the default value of the OAM segment type for
endpoints on the port. For example, a cross-connection between two B-ISSI ports is
an OAM segment intermediate point by default.
The reference point type also determines the CPI range that you can use for the port.
If the reference is UNI, the supported VPI range is 0 to 255. For the other reference
points, the supported VPI range is 0 to 4095.
You must configure both ends of a physical link to the same type of reference point
to reflect the link type.
Table 51-15 lists each link type, its use, and the softkey for the reference point.
Table 51-15 Port reference point types
Link type
Use
Softkey
UNI
Connects user equipment to the network
UNI
B-ICI
Connects two interior nodes belonging to different carriers
B-ICI
B-ISSI
Connects two interior nodes belonging to one carrier
B-ISSI
Procedure 51-18 To configure the cell relay port reference

point type
1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS REFERENCE_PT
Select:
UNI or B-ICI or B-ISSI

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-25
51.17

You can configure cell payload scrambling for DS3 and cell relay ports only.
Table 51-16 lists the configuration options for cell payload scrambling.
Table 51-16 Configuration options for cell payload scrambling
Function
Softkey
The transmit and receive ports do not change the payload.
DISABLE
The transmit port scrambles the unscrambled payload and the receive port
unscrambles the scrambled payload.
ENABLE
(1)
Note
(1)
Enable is the default for the DS3 cell relay cards.
If you configure direct cell mapping, the port suspends cell payload unscrambling
until it finishes verifying cell delineation on the headers of incoming cells.
Configure cell scrambling for ports with PVCs using transmission equipment that is
sensitive to bit patterns in the ATM cell payload.
Caution When the cells coming into a port are not scrambled and
cell payload scrambling is enabled on the port, the port tries to

unscramble the payload; this results in distorted information. If cells
coming into a port are scrambled and cell payload scrambling is not
enabled, the port does not unscramble the payload information; this
results in distorted information.
Note When you enable cell payload scrambling on a port, the bit
error rate on the port may increase because of error multiplication.
Procedure 51-19 To configure cell payload scrambling

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS CELL_SCRAMBLE
Select:
DISABLE or ENABLE
51-26

90-4521-43 April 2001
51.18
Cell mapping
Table 51-17 lists configuration options for cell mapping.
Table 51-17 Configuration options for cell mapping
Function
Softkey
The port transmits the PLCP mapping protocol, using G.751 frame format for
E3 PLCP and ATM Forum UNI specifications for DS3 PLCP.
PLCP
The port transmits cells directly into the DS3 or E3 ceII payload using G.804 direct
cell mapping.
DIRECT
The PLCP mapping option uses additional bandwidth; this reduces the traffic
throughput of the DS3 or E3 cell relay port.
When you select the direct cell mapping option, you remove the PLCP layer; this
allows more efficient bandwidth usage for cell relay user traffic. When you also
configure cell payload scrambling on the port, the port suspends unscrambling until
it finishes verifying cell delineation on the headers of incoming cells.
Table 51-18 lists the cell throughputs for DS3 and E3 cell relay cards with direct and
PLCP mapping.
Table 51-18 Cell throughput for direct and PLCP mappings
Card type
Mapping type
Cell throughput (kb/s)
DS3 cell relay
Direct
44 210
PLCP
40 704
Direct
33 920
PLCP
30 528
E3 cell relay
Procedure 51-20 To configure cell mapping

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS CELL_MAPPING
Select:
PLCP or DIRECT

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-27
51.19
DS3 application
Table 51-19 lists the DS3 application options.
Table 51-19 Configuration options for DS3 application
Function
Softkey
The port transmits and expects the DS3 C-bit application.
C_BIT_PARITY
The port transmits and expects the DS3 M23 application.
M23
Procedure 51-21 To configure the DS3 application on a DS3 cell

relay card
1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS DS3_APPLIC
Select:
C_BIT_PARITY or M23
51.20
Line length
Table 51-20 lists the coaxial cable spans that you can configure for each DS3 port.
Table 51-20 Configuration options for line length
Function
Softkey
Up to 70 m (225 ft)
SHORT
More than 70 m (225 ft)
LONG
When you configure the port for a short coaxial cable span, the nominal transmitted
pulse is 0.75 V.
When you configure the port for a long coaxial cable span, the nominal transmitted
pulse is 0.9 V.
51-28

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 51-22 To configure line length

1
Enter:
See Table 35-3 for shelf, slot, and port values
Select:
OPTIONS LINE_LENGTH
Select:
SHORT or LONG
51.21

For cell relay endpoints with the nrt-VBR service category, you can affect the virtual
bandwidth computation used by CAC by configuring PCR and SCR scaling factors
for the port. The scaling factors apply only to endpoints with the nrt-VBR service
category.
Use the PCR scaling factor to influence the virtual bandwidth computation for the
peak rate.
Use the SCR scaling factor to influence the virtual bandwidth computation for the
sustained rate.
See Cell relay traffic rates in section 77.5 for information about configuring the
sustained rate for a cell relay endpoint.
The PCR and SCR scaling factors are percentages that let you increase or decrease
the bandwidth for the endpoints; the default is 100%.
Table 51-21 lists the values and effects of PCR and SCR scaling factors.
Table 51-21 Effect of PCR and SCR scaling factors
Scaling factor value
Effect
0%
The endpoints have no bandwidth for their configured peak or sustained

rates. The node QoS is no longer guaranteed.
1% to 99%
The endpoints have less bandwidth than their configured peak or sustained
rates. The node QoS is no longer guaranteed.
100%
The endpoints use the bandwidth configured for their peak or sustained
rates. This is the normal bandwidth specification.
101% to 999%
The endpoints have more bandwidth than their configured peak or sustained
rates.

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-29
The capacity checking and booking factor options that you configure for CAC do not
affect the PCR and SCR scaling factors. When you change the PCR and SCR scaling
factors and enable capacity checking, the system applies the CAC algorithm to
existing and future connections. When existing connections do not meet the
CAC requirements as a result of the changed PCR or SCR scaling factors, the system
still allows the connection. When new connections do not meet the CAC
requirements as a result of the changed PCR or SCR scaling factors, the system does
not allow the connection. Because the scaling factors affect CAC only, the system
continues to do traffic policing based on the configured peak and sustained rates. See
Cell relay traffic policing in section 77.5 for information about cell relay traffic
policing.
Procedure 51-23 To configure the PCR and SCR scaling factors

1
Enter:
Select the appropriate softkeys.

a
For cell relay cards other than the DS3 and E3 cell relay cards, select:
OPTIONS SCALE_FACTOR NRT_VAR_RATE
For the DS3 and E3 cell relay cards, select:

OPTIONS MORE SCALE_FACTOR NRT_VAR_RATE
Select the scaling factor:

PCR_SF or SCR_SF
Enter the scaling factor percentage:

<factor>
where factor is 0 to 999
51-30

90-4521-43 April 2001
51.22
Line BER threshold

You can configure two line BER thresholds for OC3 or STM1 cards.
If the system exceeds the BER threshold for signal degradation, the system raises a
signal degradation alarm on the port. If the BER threshold for signal failure is
exceeded, the system raises a signal failure alarm that suppresses the signal
degrade alarm.
If the system exceeds a BER threshold for ports on an interface card that you
configured for automatic protection switching, the traffic on the working card
switches to the protection card. See chapter 50 for information about configuring
interface cards for automatic protection switching.
Procedure 51-24 To configure the BER threshold for signal degrade

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS BER_THRESH SIG_DEGRADE
Select:
10E-5 or 10E-6
Procedure 51-25 To configure the BER threshold for signal failure

1
Enter:
Select:
SIG_FAIL OPTIONS BER_THRESH
Select:
10E-4 or 10E-5

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-31
51.23
Trail trace
You can use trail trace to verify the continued connection between a trail-receiving
terminal and the intended transmitter on an E3 cell relay port. Trail trace raises an
alarm when the trail trace received string is not equal to the expected string. This
indicates that the E3 port is receiving a signal from a source other than the intended.
When you define the transmit string, it is automatically inserted into the egress
E3 stream. Until then, a full string of null characters is transmitted. Verify that the
expected and transmit values are correct before enabling trail trace to avoid raising
unnecessary alarms.
Trail trace is supported by direct cell mapping only. If trail trace is enabled and you
change the cell mapping to PLCP, trail trace becomes disabled. If you then switch
cell mapping back to direct mode, you must re-enable trail trace.
The default for trail trace is disabled.Table 51-22 describes trail trace parameters.
Table 51-22 Description of trail trace parameters
Parameter
Value
Description
Transmit string
TRANSMIT <string>
Trail trace value currently being transmitted by the port
Expected string
EXPECTED <string>
Trail trace value expected to be received by the port
Received string
RECEIVED <string> (1)
Trail trace value currently being received by the port
Monitoring
state
Enabled
Trail trace is enabled on the port
Disabled
Trail trace is disabled on the port
Status
Ok
No trail trace problem detected
Mismatch
A trail trace mismatch has been detected
Unavailable
The examined port does not support trail trace
Note
(1)
You cannot configure this value.
If a trail trace mismatch occurs and the monitoring state is enabled, the following
events occur:
the system generates a physical RDI upstream

the system inserts a VP/VC AIS downstream on each connection that has alarm
surveillance enabled
the system raises a trail trace mismatch alarm
data flow through the port stops
51-32

90-4521-43 April 2001
You can configure the following parameters for trail trace:
transmit string
expected string
monitoring state
Note You must configure the transmit and received strings before
enabling trail trace.
Procedure 51-26 To configure transmit and expected strings

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS TRAIL_TRACE
To configure the transmitting port, enter:

TRANSMIT <string>
where string is a maximum of 15 characters excluding tab, grave accent, and percent sign
To configure the receiving port, enter:

EXPECTED <string>
where string is a maximum of 15 characters excluding tab, grave accent, and percent sign

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-33
Procedure 51-27 To enable or disable trail trace

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS TRAIL_TRACE
Select:
ENABLE_TRACE or DISABLE_TRACE
51.24
Ethernet port speed

You can configure each port of the electrical variant of the EN100 card to operate at
either the 10BASE-T (10 Mb/s) or 100BASE-TX (100 Mb/s) rate. A port remains in
the state you configure until you change the configured rate.
Note When a 10 Mb/s manually configured Ethernet port is
connected to a 100 Mb/s device, the software detects a link, causing

the Link LED to illuminate. However, traffic cannot pass through the
two devices because of the rate discrepancy.
You can configure the Ethernet port speed for manual or autoconfigured operation.
In autoconfigured operation, the EN100 card can autonegotiate the port speed. See
section 51.26 for information about autonegotiation.
The default port speed for manual operation is 10 Mb/s. The default port speed for
autoconfigured operation is 10/100 Mb/s.
The optical variants operate at a fixed rate, as no standard exists for configuring or
negotiating optical port speed.
51-34

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 51-28 To configure an Ethernet port speed for manual

operation
1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL MANUAL_CONFIG SPEED
Select:
10_MBS or 100_MBS
Note The optical variants do not support port speed configuration.
Procedure 51-29 To configure an Ethernet port speed for

autoconfigured operation
1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL AUTO_CONFIG SPEED
Select one or more of:

10_MBS or 100_MBS or 10/100 MBS
See Table 51-23 for information about autonegotiation parameters.
51.25
Ethernet duplex port operation

You can configure each port of the EN100 card for half- or full-duplex operation. A
port remains in the state you configure until you change the configured operation.
To remove the collision domain between receiving and transmitting traffic, operate
both the EN100 card port and the attached equipment in full duplex whenever
possible.

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-35
You can configure the Ethernet duplex port mode for manual or autoconfigured
operation. In autoconfigured operation, the EN100 card can autonegotiate the duplex
mode. See section 51.26 for information about autonegotiation.
The default duplex mode for manual operation is half duplex. The default duplex
mode for autoconfigured operation is half/full duplex.
Note You must manually configure this option on the optical
variants.
Procedure 51-30 To configure an Ethernet port duplex mode for

manual operation
1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL MANUAL_CONFIG DUPLEX
Select
HALF_DUPLEX or FULL_DUPLEX
Procedure 51-31 To configure an Ethernet duplex mode for

autoconfigured operation
1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL AUTO_CONFIG DUPLEX
Select one or more of:

HALF_DUPLEX or FULL_DUPLEX or HALF/FULL DUPLEX
51-36

90-4521-43 April 2001
51.26
Ethernet autonegotiation
You can configure each port of the electrical variant of the EN100 card to
autonegotiate the port speed and duplexing configuration.
Note The optical variants of the EN100 card do not support
autonegotiation, as no standard exists for autonegotiating

configuration of LAN optical interfaces.
During autonegotiation, the near-end port negotiates the most efficient physical port
speed and duplexing configuration with the far-end equipment. Both end devices
advertise their transmission capability, and the highest common capability becomes
the configuration. The capabilities, in descending order, are:
100BASE-TX full duplex

100BASE-TX half duplex
10BASE-T full duplex
10BASE-T half duplex
When the autonegotiation process determines the most efficient configuration, it

remains in effect until one of the following criteria is met:
you force a renegotiation

you disable autonegotiation
a link becomes active
the EN100 card is reset
a change occurs in the advertised configuration
The NMTI displays the active port speed and duplex options in the
Current Configuration field. Disabling the autonegotiation feature changes the
configuration of the port to match the current manual configuration.
During the negotiation process, the NMTI displays a Negotiating message in the
Current Configuration field. If the negotiation process times out, the NMTI displays
a Negotiation Failed message and the system generates an alarm. During both states,
the Link Integrity Status field displays the message Link Lost. When the system
successfully completes the negotiation process, the Current Configuration field
displays the new configuration.
The electrical variant of the EN100 card can negotiate the port speed with far-end
equipment that is operating in manual configuration mode or is incapable of
autonegotiation. The near-end Ethernet port matches the port speed configuration of
the far-end equipment, if possible. In this situation, you should manually determine
the duplex operation of the far-end equipment and configure the EN100 card to
match it.

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-37
Table 51-23 lists the autonegotiation parameters that are shown in the
Auto Negotiation Configuration field when a card has successfully autonegotiated
the speed and duplex options.
Table 51-23 Autonegotiation parameters
Port speed option
Duplex operation option
Autonegotiation display
10/100_MBS
FULL/HALF_DUP
All entries Enabled
FULL_DUPLEX
10 Mbps Full Duplex Enabled

10 Mbps Half Duplex Disabled
HALF_DUPLEX
10 Mbps Full Duplex Disabled

10 Mbps Half Duplex Enabled
10_MBS
FULL/HALF_DUP

FULL_DUPLEX

HALF_DUPLEX

(1 of 2)
51-38

90-4521-43 April 2001
Port speed option
Duplex operation option
Autonegotiation display
100_MBS
FULL/HALF_DUP

FULL_DUPLEX

HALF_DUPLEX

(2 of 2)
Procedure 51-32 To invoke renegotiation

1
Enter:
Select:
MORE RENEGOTIATE

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-39
Procedure 51-33 To enable or disable autonegotiation

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL AUTO_NEGOT
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
Note The optical variants do not support autonegotiation.
51.27
Managing ports
This section describes how to manage ports. It contains the following procedures:
resetting ports
disabling and enabling ports
disabling and enabling the optical transmit laser
Resetting ports
Resetting a port reinitializes the software on the port, causing the ATM payload
scramblers and the transmit and receive framers to reset.
Reset a port when the port enters a persistent errored state. You can reset ports on
interface cards.
Caution Resetting a port causes a momentary service interruption
on the port.
51-40

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 51-34 To reset a port

1
Enter:
Select:
RESET PORT
Disabling and enabling ports

Table 51-24 lists the management procedures for each card.
Table 51-24 Managing operations for ports
Cards
Port disable
and enable (1)
Laser disable
and enable
Port reset
DS3 and E3
EN100
OC3 and STM1 MMF
OC3 and STM1 IR, LR, and XLR
OC3 and STM1 Electrical
T1 and E1
PSI
Note
(1)
The default value for all ports is enabled, except for the PSI port which is disabled.
Table 51-25 lists the port management procedures and where to find information
about them.
Table 51-25 Management procedures for ports
Option
Section
Port disable and enable
51.27
Laser enable and disable
51.27
Port reset
51.27

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-41
When you disable a port, the system turns off the port-related LEDs and stops
generating alarms on the port.
Caution Disabling a port affects service.
Note Disabling a laser-based port disables the optical transmit
laser on the port. Disabling a LED-based or electrical port affects the

transmitted signal and causes the far-end device to declare an
LOF failure.
Danger Because laser emissions can damage your eyes, we
recommend that you disable the optical transmit laser on installed,
uncabled laser-based cards.
Table 51-26 lists the management options for ports.

Table 51-26 Management options for ports
Function
Softkey
In-service
ENABLE_PORT
Out-of-service
DISABLE_PORT
Procedure 51-35 To disable or enable a port

1
Select:
MAINT OBJECT PORT
Enter the port identifier.

a
To disable or enable a port on a DSC, enter:

<fabric-slot-port>
See Table 35-3 for fabric, shelf, slot, and port values.
To disable or enable a port on an interface card, enter:

<Pshelf-slot-port>
See Table 35-3 for fabric, shelf, slot, and port values.
Select:
DISABLE_PORT or ENABLE_PORT
51-42

90-4521-43 April 2001
Disabling and enabling the optical transmit laser

Disabling the optical transmit laser on laser-based cards prevents the card from
producing laser emissions on the transmit port. You can enable or disable the optical
transmit laser through the MAINT OBJECT PORT menu.
Danger Because laser emissions can damage your eyes, we
recommend that you disable the optical transmit laser on installed,
uncabled laser-based cards.
Caution Disabling the optical transmit laser affects service.
Table 51-27 lists management options for the optical transmit laser on installed
laser-based cards.
Table 51-27 Management options for optical transmit lasers
Function
Softkey
In-service
ENABLE_LASER
Out-of-service
DISABLE_LASER
Procedure 51-36 To disable or enable the optical transmit laser

1
Enter:
Select:
DISABLE_LASER or ENABLE_LASER
Response to local port failure

Response to local port failure lets the 7270 MSC start rerouting traffic in direct
response to a port failure instead of waiting for notification from the signaling link.
See section 83.2 for information about how to configure the response to local port
failures.

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-43
51.28
FDL mode
You can configure the T1 circuit emulation card to support or to ignore
ANSI T1.403 messaging over the FDL channel. To support remote line loopback
and payload loopback requests, you must configure T1.403 messaging over the
FDL channel on the T1 circuit emulation card.
Procedure 51-37 To configure the FDL mode

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL MORE FDL_MODE
Select:
T1.403 or IGNORE
Note When you have configured the card for D4 framing, you cannot
configure the card for T1.403 messaging. See section 51.4 for
information about configuring framing.
51.29
Idle channel suppression

You can configure idle channel suppression on a per-channel basis. Idle channel
suppression suppresses cell generation on ATM connections that carry idle channels.
Idle channel suppression activates and deactivates as narrowband calls are being set
up and torn down.
You can enable idle channel suppression for E1 ports that are configured for CAS
and for T1 ports that are configured for RBS. Idle channel suppression occurs at the
ingress to the ATM connection and is controlled independently by the voiceband
services card at each end of the connection. The voiceband services card suppresses
the ingress cell flow if the equipment at both ends of the connection (for example, a
telephone or PBX) is idle. The voiceband services card determines if the end
equipment is idle by monitoring the state of the CAS bits flowing in both directions
on the connection.
51-44

90-4521-43 April 2001
You must configure the CAS codes that correspond to the idle state. You can
configure these codes on a per-channel basis, see Table 51-28.
You cannot configure idle channel suppression on channel 31 of an E1 card. This
channel carries an ABCD signaling bits instead of voiceband channel data.
Table 51-28 Signaling path options for idle channel suppression
Function
Bit pattern
Softkey
Defines the state of the CAS bits that will be

present when the near-end equipment idle.
ABCD, where ABCD is 0, 1, or X. X

means that the state of the
signaling bit should be ignored.
INGRESS_CAS
Defines the state of the CAS bits that will be

present when the far-end equipment idle.
ABCD, where ABCD is 0, 1, or X. X

means that the state of the
signaling bit should be ignored.
EGRESS_CAS
Table 51-29 lists the CAS codes for idle channel suppression for some of the
common protocols.
Table 51-29 Idle state CAS codes
Signaling type
ABCD ingress code
ABCD egress code
T1 E and M, PLAR, and one-way DID
0XXX
0XXX
T1 FXO loop start
X1XX
0XXX
T1 FXS loop start
0XXX
X1XX
T1 FXO ground start
1XXX
01XX
T1 FXS ground start
01XX
1XXX
E1 PLAR
1XXX
1XXX
R2
10XX
10XX

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-45
Procedure 51-38 To configure idle channel suppression

1
Enter:
Enter:
IDLE_SUPPR

a

<channel_id>
where channel_id is a number from 1 to 24 for a T1 voiceband services card or 1 to 31 for an
E1 voiceband services card

<n1-n2>
where n1 is the start of the channel range under the CH column and n2 is the last channel in
the range under the CH column
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
To configure the ingress CAS, enter:

INGRESS_CAS <ingress_cas_code>
where ingress_cas_code is an ABCD bit pattern
To configure the egress CAS, enter.

EGRESS_CAS <egress_cas_code>
where egress_cas_code is an ABCD bit pattern
51-46

90-4521-43 April 2001
51.30
Path trace
Path trace detects signaling errors on OC3 and STM1 cell relay ports.
When you define the transmit value, it is automatically injected into the egress
SONET/SDH stream. Verify that the expected and transmit values are equal before
enabling path trace to avoid setting off unwanted alarms.
The default for path trace is disabled.
Table 51-30 describes path trace parameters.
Table 51-30 Description of path trace parameters
Parameter
Value
Description
Transmit string
TRANSMIT <string>
Path trace value currently being transmitted by the port
Expected string
EXPECTED <string>
Path trace value expected to be received by the port

(1)
Received string
RECEIVED <string>
Monitoring state
Enabled
Path trace is enabled on the port
Disabled*
Path trace is disabled on the port
Ok
No path trace problem detected
Mismatch
A path trace mismatch has been detected
Unavailable
The examined port does not support path trace
Status
Path trace value currently being received by the port
Note
(1)
You cannot configure this string.
The path trace alarm indicates that the path trace received string is not equal to the
expected string. The SONET/SDH port is receiving a signal from a source other than
that which was intended. If a mismatch occurs and the monitoring state is enabled,
the following events occur:
the system inserts a physical RDI upstream

the system inserts a VP/VC AIS downstream
a path trace mismatch alarm is raised
traffic through the port in the ingress direction stops
You can configure the transmit value, expected value, and monitoring state for
path trace.
Note You must configure the transmit and received values before
enabling path trace.

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-47
Procedure 51-39 To configure transmit and expected strings

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MORE PATH_TRACE
To configure the transmitting port, enter:

TRANSMIT <string>
where string is a maximum of 62 characters for OC3 cards and 15 characters for STM1 cards
excluding tab, grave accent, and percent sign
To configure the receiving port, enter:

EXPECTED <string>
where string is a maximum of 62 characters for OC3 cards and 15 characters for STM1 cards
excluding tab, grave accent, and percent sign
Procedure 51-40 To enable or disable path trace

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PATH_TRACE
Select:
ENABLE_TRACE or DISABLE_TRACE
51-48

90-4521-43 April 2001
51.31
PSI clocking parameters

You can configure the clock rate, clocking mode, and clock inversion on PSI ports.
You can configure the clocking mode for PSI ports configured as V.35 or
V.28 interfaces. The PSI card provides timing to the attached device (SLAVE
mode). The attached device provides the timing (EXTERNAL mode). PSI ports
configured as X.21 interfaces can only operate in SLAVE mode.
On ports configured as DCE, the clock that samples incoming data from the attached
device may be inverted to compensate for clock phase shifts on high speed
connections to external equipment caused by round trip delays through physical
devices. By default this option is disabled.
Procedure 51-41 To configure the PSI clock rate

1
Enter:
CONFIG PORT <Pshelf-slot-port>
See Table 35-3 for shelf, slot and port values.
Select:
OPTIONS CLOCK_RATE <clock_rate>
where clock_rate is the value corresponding to the desired clock rate, see Table 51-31
Table 51-31 PSI clock rates

Value
Clock rate (kb/s)
Value
Clock rate (kb/s)
2.4
14
96
4.8
15
128
9.6
16
192
14.4
17
256
19.2
18
384
28.8
19
512
10
38.4
20
768
11
48
21
1024
12
56
22
1536
13
64
23
2048
Note The maximum clock rate that can be configured for V.28
interfaces is 128 kb/s.

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-49
Procedure 51-42 To configure the clocking mode

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS CLOCKING MODE
Select:
SLAVE or EXTERNAL
Procedure 51-43 To configure inverted clocking

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS CLOCKING TX_INVERT
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
51.32
PSI control leads

You can configure the control leads on all PSI interfaces. The inputs and outputs
depend on which gender and interface type is configured for the PSI port.
The default value for inputs is active. The default value for outputs is FORCE_ON
or IND_MAINT (TM control lead).
Procedure 51-44 To configure PSI control leads

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS CTRL_LEADS
51-50

90-4521-43 April 2001
Select:
INPUTS or OUTPUTS
Select:
a
For V.35 and V.28 interfaces:

DSR or DCD or CTS or TM or DTR or RTS
For X.21 interfaces:

C or I
Select:
ASSUME_ON or ASSUME_OFF or ACTIVE or FORCED_ON or FORCED_OFF or
IND_MAINT
Procedure 51-45 To set the PSI control leads to their default values
1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS CTRL_LEADS
Select:
SET_DEFAULT
51.33
PSI gender
You can use the PSI card with DCE or DTE devices. The default setting is DTE. If
you configure the port with the wrong gender, meaning the port is configured as DCE
and you attach a DTE cable to it, the system allows the incorrect configuration but
initiates a gender mismatch alarm.
Note 1 When the gender of a PSI port is changed, the port is
disabled and must be re-enabled to activate it with the new gender
configuration.
Note 2 You can change the port gender only when no connection
is attached to the port.

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-51
Procedure 51-46 To configure the PSI gender

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS
Select:
GENDER_DCE or GENDER_DTE
51.34
PSI loopback processing

The PSI loopback processing configuration indicates whether the system has
processed or ignored the PSI loopback signals. When you configure the system to
process PSI loopback signals, the attached device can initiate loopbacks. This occurs
under certain circumstances only, see section 140.3. Otherwise, you can only initiate
loopbacks through NMTI and NCI-2. The default is to process the PSI loopback
signals.
Procedure 51-47 To configure the PSI loopback processing

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS
Select:
LB_PROCESS or LB_IGNORE
51-52

90-4521-43 April 2001
51.35
PSI port interface type

You can configure the interface type of PSI ports as V.35, X.21 or V.28. The default
setting is V.35.
Warning 1 Ensure that the interface type configured on the port
and the cable attached to the port match. If a port configured as

V.35 or V.28 is connected to an X.21 device, equipment damage may
result.
Warning 2 When the interface of a PSI port is changed, the port is
disabled and must be re-enabled to activate it with the new

configuration.
Note You can change the interface type only when no connection
is attached to the port.
Procedure 51-48 To configure the PSI port interface type

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS IF_TYPE
Select:
V.35 or X.21 or V.28

April 2001 90-4521-43
51-53
51-54

90-4521-43 April 2001
52 TCA profiles
52.1 Selecting TCA profiles

52.2 Viewing TCA profiles

April 2001 90-4521-43
52-2
52-8
52-1
52 TCA profiles
52.1
Selecting TCA profiles

You select some TCA profiles at the port level. For information about TCA profiles,
see section 36.7.
Table 52-1 lists the information that displays when you select TCA profiles for a
port. The default is disabled.
Table 52-1 Display of TCA profiles information
Field
Description
TCA profile class
This field indicates the TCA profile class selected.
Number
This field indicates the profile number within the TCA profile class.
Name
This field indicates the optional name of the TCA profile class.
Status
This field indicates whether the TCA profile class is enabled or disabled.
For information about configuring threshold values for each performance parameter
within a port-level TCA profile, see To configure thresholds for TCA profiles in
section 36.7.
Procedure 52-1 To select TCA profiles for T1 or E1 ports

Use this procedure for CE, VS, and CR T1 or E1 ports.
1
Select:
Select:
OPTIONS TCA PROFILE PHYSICAL
Select the profile number or view all profiles.

a
To select a profile number, enter:


<Esc> SHOW_PROFILES
To enable or disable the physical layer TCA profile enter:

ENABLE or DISABLE
52-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
52 TCA profiles
Procedure 52-2 To select TCA profiles for DS3 and E3 CR ports

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MORE TCA_PROFILE
Select the OAM failure reporting threshold or the layer threshold.

a
For OAM failure reporting threshold, select:

ATM OAMALS
For a layer threshold, select:

LINE or PATH or PLCP

a

where profile_number is 1 to 3 for the OAM failure reporting threshold or 1 to 4 for the layer
threshold


ENABLE or DISABLE

April 2001 90-4521-43
52-3
52 TCA profiles
Procedure 52-3 To select TCA profiles for OC3 and STM1 CR ports
1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS TCA_PROFILE
Select the OAM failure reporting threshold or the layer threshold.

a
For OAM failure reporting threshold, select:

ATM OAMALS
For layer thresholds, select:

SECTION or LINE or PATH
Select the profile number.

a
To configure a profile number, enter:

where profile_number is 1 to 3 for the OAM failure reporting threshold or 1 to 4 for the layer
threshold


ENABLE or DISABLE
52-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
52 TCA profiles
Procedure 52-4 To select TCA profiles for DS3 CE ports

Use this procedure for DS3 CE ports.
1
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT PORT <Pshelf-slot-port> OPTIONS TCA_PROFILE
Select the layer:

LINE or PATH

a



ENABLE or DISABLE

April 2001 90-4521-43
52-5
52 TCA profiles
Procedure 52-5 To select TCA profiles for DS1 circuits

Use this procedure for DS3 CE ports.
1
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT MORE CIRCUIT <endpoint>
See Table 15-8 for endpoint values.
Select:

a


<Esc> SHOW_PROFILES

ENABLE or DISABLE
Procedure 52-6 To select TCA profiles for AAL1

1
Enter:
a
For DS3 CE cards, enter:

For E1 CE and T1 CE cards, enter:

52-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
52 TCA profiles
Select:
OPTIONS TCA PROFILE AAL1

a


<Esc> SHOW_PROFILES
To enable or disable the TCA profile for AAL1 performance, enter:

ENABLE or DISABLE
Procedure 52-7 To select TCA profiles for FR streams

1
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT PORT <Pshelf-slot-port-Sstream>
See Table 35-3 for shelf, slot, port, and stream values.
Select:
STREAM OPTIONS TCA_PROFILE CONGESTION

a



ENABLE or DISABLE

April 2001 90-4521-43
52-7
52 TCA profiles
52.2
Viewing TCA profiles

This section describes how to view configuration information for TCA profiles.
TCA profile information

You can view configuration information for TCA profile classes.
Table 52-2 lists the information that displays for TCA profile classes. See
section 36.7 for information about configuring TCA profiles.
Table 52-2 Information for TCA profile classes
Field
Description
Profile
This field indicates the profile number within the profile class.
Name
This field indicates the optional name of a profile within the TCA profile class.
NMTI-Affected
This field indicates that the profile has been modified through the node
management terminal and may not be the same as the equivalent profile on
the rest of the network. An asterisk appears beside the TCA profile classes that
have been changed through a node management session; see section 36.7.
Procedure 52-8 To view TCA profile information

Enter:
MAINT SYSTEM TCA_PROFILE <class>
See Table 36-17 for class values, where class is the code of a TCA profile class.
52-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
53 Viewing ports
53.1 Viewing status information
53-2
53.2 Viewing configuration information for T1, E1, and

PSI FR ports 53-7
53.3 Viewing configuration information for DS3 and E3 ports
53-10
53.4 Viewing configuration information for SONET and

SDH ports 53-12
53.5 Viewing configuration information for Ethernet ports

April 2001 90-4521-43
53-13
53-1
53 Viewing ports
53.1
Viewing status information

This section describes port maintenance.
Port status information

The port status screen provides information about an individual port on an
interface card and includes hardware status, loopback status, and operating status, as
applicable.
Procedure 53-1 To view port information

Enter:

Table 53-1 lists the tables that contain port information.
Table 53-1 Port information about interface cards
53-2
Type
Table
DS3 CR
53-2
DS3 CE
53-2
E3 CR
53-2
EN100
53-3
OC3 and STM1
53-4
T1 and E1 CR
53-5
T1 and E1 CE
53-5
T1 and E1 FR
53-5
T1 and E1 VS
53-5
PSI FR
53-5

90-4521-43 April 2001
53 Viewing ports
Table 53-2 lists the displayed information for DS3 and E3 ports.
Table 53-2 Information about DS3 and E3 ports
Field
Value
Description
Port type
E3
The port is on an E3 card.
DS3
The port is on a DS3 card.
Ok
No errors have been detected at the E3 layer.
LOS
LOS errors lasting at least 2.5 s have been detected.
LOF
LOF errors lasting at least 2.5 s have been detected.
AIS
AIS errors lasting at least 2.5 s have been detected.
RDI
RDI errors lasting at least 2.5 s have been detected.
Ok
No LCD errors have been detected.
LCD
LCD errors lasting at least 2.5 s have been detected.
TRM (E3-2 only)
Trail trace mismatch lasting at least 2.5 s detected.
Ok
No PLCP errors have been detected.
LOF
LOF errors lasting at least 2.5 s have been detected.
RDI
RDI errors lasting at least 2.5 s have been detected.
Enabled
The port is in-service.
Disabled
The port is out-of-service.
Latched
A latched equipment loopback is active.
Timed
A timed equipment loopback is active until the timer expires.
Off
No equipment loopback is active.
Latched
A latched line loopback is active.
Timed
A timed line loopback is active until the timer expires.
Off
No line loopback is active.
Status of
Incoming DS3
and E3
DS3 and
E3 layer
Cell
Delineation (1)
PLCP
(2)
Port
Loopbacks
Equipment
Line
Notes
(1)
This field displays when you configure the port for direct cell mapping.
(2)
This field displays when you configure the port for PLCP cell mapping.

April 2001 90-4521-43
53-3
53 Viewing ports
Table 53-3 lists the displayed information for Ethernet ports.

Table 53-3 Information about Ethernet ports
Field
Value
Description
shelf-slot-port
This field indicates the values of the shelf, slot, and port.
Type
EN100T-4
This field indicates the card type.
EN100S-4
EN100M-4
Status
Ok
Physical port signal integrity is OK or the port is out-of-service.
Link Lost
The port is enabled and the link integrity is lost.
Neg Failed
The autonegotiation process failed. The failure may be because of

incompatible devices or a time-out in the autonegotiation process.
Name
Name of the port
The name assigned to the port.
Link Integrity Status
Ok
Physical port signal integrity is OK.
Disabled
Link Lost
The port is enabled and the link integrity is lost.
Enabled
The current configuration is the result of the autonegotiation process.
Disabled
The current configuration of the port changes to the value of the manual
configuration field.
Speed
The current configuration of the port speed, which can be one of 10Mbps or
100Mbps.
Duplex
The current configuration of the duplex mode, which can be one of

Half Duplex or Full Duplex.
Negotiating
The autonegotiation process is not complete on the port. The port is not
configured yet.
Negotiation Failed
The autonegotiation process failed. The failure may be because of

incompatible devices or a time-out in the autonegotiation process.
Speed
The port speed you manually configured. You can set the port speed to one
of 10Mbps or 100Mbps.
Duplex
The port speed you manually configured. You can set the port speed to
either Half Duplex or Full Duplex.
Auto-Negotiation
Current
Configuration
Manual
Configuration
Auto Negotiation
Configuration
53-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
53 Viewing ports
Table 53-4 lists the displayed information for OC3 and STM1 ports.
Table 53-4 Information about OC3 and STM1 ports
Field
Value
Description
Port Type
OC3_MMF or STM1_MMF
The port is on an OC3 or STM1 MMF card.
OC3_IR or STM1_IR
The port is on an OC3 or STM1 IR card.
OC3_LR or STM1_LR
The port is on an OC3 or STM1 LR card.
OC3_XLR or STM1_XLR
The port is on an OC3 or STM1 XLR card.
OC3_ELC or STM1_ELC
The port is on an OC3 or STM1 Electrical card.
Ok
No errors have been detected at the SONET

section layer.
LOS
The section layer is in an LOS state.
LOF
The section layer is in an LOF state.
Ok
No errors have been detected at the SONET line layer.
AIS-L
The line layer has received an AIS error.
RDI-L
The line layer has received an RDI error.
Ok
No errors have been detected at the SONET path layer.
AIS-P
The path layer is in an AIS state.
RDI-P
The path layer has received an RDI error.
LOP
The path layer is in an LOP state.
TIM-P (-2 card only)
A path trace mismatch is declared.
Ok
No LCD errors have been detected on the port.
LCD
The port is in an LCD state.
Ok
No signal label mismatch errors have been detected on

the port.
SLM
The port is in an signal label mismatch state.
Enabled
Disabled
The port is out-of-service. For IR and LR cards, the

system automatically disables the optical laser when you
disable the port.
Latched
A latched equipment loopback is active on the port.
Timed
A timed equipment loopback is active on the port until the

timer expires.
Off
No equipment loopback is active on the port.
Latched
A latched line loopback is active on the port.
Timed
A timed line loopback is active on the port until the

timer expires.
Off
No line loopback is active on the port.
Alarm
Surveillance
Section
Line
Path
Cell
Delineation
Signal Label
Port
Loopbacks
Equipment
Line

April 2001 90-4521-43
53-5
53 Viewing ports
Table 53-5 lists the displayed information about T1 and E1 CE and FR ports and PSI FR
ports.
Table 53-5 Information about T1 and E1 CE, VS, and FR ports and PSI FR ports
Field
Value
Description
Port Type
T1_CFR
The port is on a T1 FR card.
E1CFR120 or
E1CFR75
This port is on an E1 FR 120 or 75 card.
T1
This port is on a T1 CR card.
E1_120 or
E1_75
This port is on an E1 CR 120 or 75 card.
T1_CE
This port is on a T1 CE card.
E1_CE120 or
E1_CE75
This port is on an E1 CE C.
T1_VS
This port is on a T1 VS card.
E1_VS120 or
E1_VS75
This port is on an E1 VS 120 or 75 card.
PSIFR
This port is on a PSI FR card.
Ok
No errors detected at the T1 layer.
LOS
LOS errors lasting at least 2.5-s detected.
LOF
LOF errors lasting at least 2.5-s detected.
AIS
AIS errors lasting at least 2.5-s detected.
RDI
RDI errors lasting at least 2.5-s detected.
Ok
No errors detected at the E1 layer.
LOS
LOS errors lasting at least 2.5-s detected.
LOF
LOF errors lasting at least 2.5-s detected.
AIS
AIS errors lasting at least 2.5-s detected.
RDI
RDI errors lasting at least 2.5-s detected.
Ok
No errors detected at the PSI layer.
LOS
LOS errors detected lasting at least 2.5-s
LOR
LOR errors detected lasting at least 2.5-s.
Enabled
Disabled
Latched
A latched equipment loopback is active.
Timed
A timed equipment loopback is active until the timer expires.
Off
No equipment loopback is active.
Latched
A latched line loopback is active.
Timed
A timed line loopback is active until the timer expires.
Off
No line loopback is active.
Alarm
Surveillance
T1 layer
E1 layer
PSI layer
Port
(1)
Loopbacks
Equipment
Line
(1 of 2)
53-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
53 Viewing ports
Field
National Use Bits
(2)
Value
Description
Transmit
The pattern transmitted for the National Use Bits, see section 51.12.
Receive
The pattern received for the National Use Bits.
(2 of 2)
Notes
(1)
This status displays for E1 CE and PSI FR ports only.
(2)
This status displays for E1 CR and CE ports only.
53.2
Viewing configuration information for T1, E1, and

PSI FR ports
You can view status information and physical options for T1, E1, and PSI FR ports.
Procedure 53-2 To view port configuration information

Enter:

Table 53-6 lists the T1, E1, and PSI FR ports and their corresponding names.
Table 53-6 Type field for T1, E1, and PSI FR ports
Card
Type field
T1 channelized FR
T1_CFR
E1 channelized FR (120 )
E1CFR120
E1 channelized FR (75 )
E1CFR75
T1 CE
T1_CE
E1 CE (120 )
E1_CE120
E1 CE (75 )
E1_CE75
T1 voiceband services
T1_VS
E1 voiceband services (120 )
E1_VS120
E1 voiceband services (75 )
E1_VS75
T1 CR
T1
E1 CR (120 )
E1_120
E1 CR (75 )
E1_75
PSI unchannelized FR
PSIFR

April 2001 90-4521-43
53-7
53 Viewing ports
The Status field shows the highest-priority alarm detected on the port. Table 53-7 lists the
possible states for T1 and E1 ports.
Table 53-7 Status information for T1 and E1 ports
Status
Description
No card is present.
Ok
There are no alarms on the port.
LOS
The port is experiencing LOS.
AIS
The port is experiencing AIS (Blue alarm).
LOF
The port is experiencing LOF.
RDI
The port is experiencing RDI.
LCD
The port has detected a loss of cell delineation in the incoming signal.
Available only for T1 and E1 CR ports.
Unknown
Port status cannot be determined.
Table 53-8 lists the possible statuses for PSI FR ports.

Table 53-8 Status information for PSI FR ports
53-8
Status
Description
Ok
LOS
The port is experiencing LOS.
LOR
The port is experiencing a near-end or far-end LOR.

90-4521-43 April 2001
53 Viewing ports
Procedure 53-3 To view physical options on a port

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL
Table 53-9 lists the physical options on T1 ports.

Table 53-9 Physical options for T1 ports
Option
Description
Physical interface
The card is a T1 card. This option also shows the line termination that is
configurable for DS-1 or DSX-1 termination.
DSX-1 line length or

DS-1 line build-out
For DS-1 termination, you can configure the line build-out for 0, 7.5, 15,
or 22.5 dB. For DSX-1 termination, configure the line length in selectable
ranges of feet.
Framing
You can configure the framing type for ESF or D4. When you choose D4,
configurable RDI generation is also indicated. For FR cards, set the
framing mode should be set to ESF.
FDL mode
The FDL mode is always set to None.
Zero suppression
For T1 CFR and T1 VS ports, you can configure this option for the B8ZS,
JB7, or transparent (AMI) algorithm. For T1 CE ports, you can configure
this option for the B8ZS, JB7 (AMI+ZCS), or transparent (AMI) algorithm.
Alarm times
You can configure alarm declaration and clearing times and RDI clearing
condition.
CRC framing
For ESF framing, you can configure CRC framing to On or Off.
Synchronization
You can configure this option for Synchronization Source of Loop Timing
mode. This option is available for T1 CR ports only.
Clock synchronization
You can configure this option for SRTS, ACR or Synchronous. This option
is available only for T1 CE ports.
AAL service type
You can configure this option for UDT, UDT with performance monitoring,
SDT and SDT with CAS. This option is available only for T1 CE ports.

April 2001 90-4521-43
53-9
53 Viewing ports
Table 53-10 lists the physical options on E1 ports.

Table 53-10 Physical options for E1 ports
53.3
Field
Description
Physical interface
The card is an E1 card.
Alarm times
You can configure alarm declaration and clearing times and RDI clearing
condition.
CRC framing
You can configure CRC framing to On or Off.
Signaling
You can configure the card for one of three signaling modes: CAS, CCS, and
31_CHANNEL. This option is available only for E1 FR ports. You can
configure the E1 VS port for CAS or 31_CHANNEL mode.
Synchronization
You can configure this option for Synchronization Source or Loop Timing
mode. This option is available for E1 CR ports only.
Clock
synchronization
You can configure this option for SRTS, ACR or Synchronous. This option is
available only for E1 CE ports.
AAL service type
You can configure this option for UDT, UDT with performance monitoring,
SDT and SDT with CAS. This option is available only for E1 CE ports.
Viewing configuration information for DS3 and E3 ports

You can view status information for DS3 and E3 ports.

Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT PORT <Pshelf-slot-1>

Table 53-11 lists the DS3 and E3 ports and their corresponding names.
Table 53-11 Type field for DS3 and E3 ports
Type field
Port
DS3_CCE
DS3 CE
DS3
DS3 CR
E3
E3 CR
The Status field on the CONFIG PORT screen shows the highest-priority alarm detected
on the port.
53-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
53 Viewing ports
Table 53-12 lists the possible statuses of the DS3 CR port.

Table 53-12 Status information for DS3 CR ports
Status
Description
Ok
LOS
The port has detected a loss of signal.
LOF
The port has detected a loss of frame.
Idle
The port has received an idle signal, which occupies the entire DS3 CR payload.
AIS
The port is receiving an AIS, which occupies the entire DS3 CR payload.
RAI
The port is experiencing RAI.
PLCP-LOF
The port cannot detect PLCP framing in the incoming signal. This status appears
for ports configured for PLCP cell mapping only.
LCD
The port has detected a loss of cell delineation in the incoming signal. This status
appears for ports when you configure direct cell mapping.
PLCP-RD
The port has detected a PLCP LOF condition at the remote end of the
DS3 CR link. This status appears for ports configured for PLCP cell mapping only.
Table 53-13 lists the possible statuses of the E3 CR port.

Table 53-13 Status information for E3 CR ports
Status
Description
Ok
LOS
The port has detected a loss of signal.
LOF
The port has detected a loss of frame.
AIS
The port has received an AIS that occupies the entire E3 CR payload.
RDI
The port has received a remote defect indication because of an LOS or

LOF condition at the remote end of the E3 CR link.
PLCP-LOF
The port cannot detect PLCP framing in the incoming signal. This status displays for
ports configured for PLCP cell mapping only.
LCD
The port has detected an LOD in the incoming signal. This status displays for ports
only when you configure direct cell mapping.
PLCP-RDI
The port has detected a PLCP LOF condition at the remote end of the E3 CR link.
This status displays for ports configured for PLCP cell mapping only.
TRM
The port has detected a trail trace mismatch.

April 2001 90-4521-43
53-11
53 Viewing ports
53.4
Viewing configuration information for SONET and

SDH ports
You can view configuration information for SONET and SDH ports. The screen
shows you the port type and status.

Enter:

The information that displays depends on the type of interface card.
SONET and SDH port configuration

Table 53-14 lists the possible types for each port.
Table 53-14 SONET and SDH port types
Configured
Type
OC3_SR or STM1_SR
OC3 short range or STM1 short range
OC3_IR or STM1_IR
OC3 UNI Intermediate Range or STM1 UNI Intermediate Range
OC3_LR or STM1_LR
OC3 UNI Long Range or STM1 UNI Long Range
OC3_ELC or STM1_ELC
OC3 UNI Electrical or STM1 UNI Electrical
OC3_XLR
OC3 UNI extended long range or STM1 extended long range
The status field on the CONFIG PORT screen shows the highest-priority alarm
detected on the port. Table 53-15 lists the possible statuses for the SONET
and SDH port.
Table 53-15 SONET and SDH port status
Status
Description
Ok
There are no alarms on the port
LOS
The port has detected a section layer LOS
LOF
The port has detected a section layer LOF
AIS-L
The port has received a line layer AIS
RDI-L
The port has received a line layer RDI
(1 of 2)
53-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
53 Viewing ports
Status
Description
AIS-P
The port has received a path layer AIS
RDI-P
The port has received a path layer RDI
LOP
The port has detected a loss of pointer
LCD
The port has detected a LOD
SLM-P
The port has detected a path layer signal label match failure
SF-L
The port has detected a signal fail on the line
SD-L
The port has detected a signal degrade on the line
TIM-P
The port has detected a path trace mismatch
(2 of 2)
53.5
Viewing configuration information for Ethernet ports

Table 53-16 lists the possible types for each port.
Table 53-16 Ethernet port types
Configured
Port type
EN100T-4
4-port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
EN100S-4
4-port 100BASE-FX SMF
EN100M-4
4-port 100BASE-FX MMF
See Table 53-3 for information about the fields that are displayed when you view
Ethernet port information.
Procedure 53-6 To view port Ethernet port information

1
Enter:
Enter:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL

April 2001 90-4521-43
53-13
53 Viewing ports
53-14

90-4521-43 April 2001
54 Configuring and managing streams
54.1 Creating a stream
54-2
54.2 Viewing stream information

54.3 Naming streams
54-5
54.4 Deleting streams
54-6
54.5 Stream configuration options
54-2
54-6
54.6 Selecting TCA profiles for streams

54.7 Managing streams

April 2001 90-4521-43
54-7
54-8
54-1
54.1
Creating a stream
Frame streams of varying bandwidths can be created on T1 and E1 channelized
frame relay cards. When a single frame stream using the complete bandwidth of the
port is created, the port provides the same functionality as an unchannelized frame
relay port and can be interconnected with an unchannelized frame relay port.
You create a frame stream on a T1 or E1 frame relay port by configuring a stream
and allocating a number of 64 kb/s channels to the stream. You cannot configure or
carry traffic on a T1 or E1 frame relay card frame stream that has no 64 kb/s channels
allocated. See To allocate 64 kb/s channels in section 55.1 for the procedure to
follow.
When you identify a frame stream to be created on a T1 or E1 frame relay card, you
can enter the stream number or you can use the NEXT_AVAIL softkey for the
system to find the next unconfigured stream. You can create up to 24 streams for
each T1 frame relay port and up to 30 or 31 streams for each E1 frame relay port.
After you create a frame stream, you can configure it for the frame relay or frame
forwarding application and other options. For information about stream applications,
see section 55.2.
PSI frame relay cards have one frame stream on each port. When you configure the
clock rate, you change the bandwidth of the stream.
54.2
Viewing stream information

You can view information about all frame relay and frame forwarding streams on a
frame relay port. For a frame relay card, the screen shows the single frame stream.
Procedure 54-1 To view information for all streams on a frame relay

card
1
To display information about all streams on a T1 or E1 frame relay port, enter:

CONFIG OBJECT PORT <Pshelf-slot-port> STREAM <Esc> SHOW_STREAMS
54-2
When there are too many streams to list on the screen, use the PAGE_UP and
PAGE_DOWN softkeys to view the other streams.

90-4521-43 April 2001
Table 54-1 lists the displayed frame relay and frame forwarding frame stream
information.
Table 54-1 Frame relay and frame forwarding frame stream information
Field
Description
Stream #
This field indicates the stream.
Name
This field indicates the configured name of the stream.
Bandwidth
This field indicates the number of channels and their configured channel
speed (56 kb/s or 64 kb/s).
Assigned Channels
This field indicates the channels that you have assigned to the stream.
Application
This field indicates the configured application.
After you configure a stream, you can view more detailed information about
the stream.
Procedure 54-2 To view information for a configured stream

1
Enter:
Enter:
STREAM <stream>
See Table 35-3 for stream values.

April 2001 90-4521-43
54-3
Table 54-2 lists the displayed frame relay and frame forwarding frame stream
configuration information.
Table 54-2 Frame relay and frame forwarding stream configuration information
Field
Description
Stream Bandwidth
This field indicates the total bandwidth that the stream uses.
Maximum Frame Size
This field indicates the maximum frame size, from 16 to 4472 bytes.
Application
(1)
This field indicates that the stream is configured as a frame forwarding stream.
PVC Management
Timeout (nT2)
(2)
(2)
This field indicates the type of protocol for the frame stream PVC.
This field indicates the maximum time between receipt of status enquiries in 5 to 30 s in
increments of 5 s. This field is user configurable.
Heartbeat (nT1) (2)
This field indicates the time interval at which the user-side device sends a status enquiry
message to the network-side device in 5 to 30 s. This field is user configurable.
Full Status Rate (nN1) (2)
This field indicates the rate at which the user-side device requests the status of all
configured DLCs from the network-side device in 1 to 255 polls.
Error Threshold (nN2/nN3) (2)
This field indicates the number of errors that occur within an event that cause the link to be
declared down.
Congestion Status
This field indicates the current congestion status of the stream, see section App A.4.
Alarm Filter PVC
This field indicates the alarm rate for the PVC alarm filter.
Alarm Filter Stream
This field indicates the alarm rate for the stream alarm filter.
Absolute Congestion
Threshold
This field indicates the ACT for the transmit buffer in each priority level. This field is user
configurable.
For frame forwarding applications, BEST_EFFORT is the only priority level available.
Severe Congestion Threshold
This field indicates the SCT for the transmit buffer in each priority level. This field is user
configurable.
Mild Congestion Threshold
This field indicates the MCT for the transmit buffer in each priority level. This field is user
configurable.
HDLC
This field indicates whether the streams are using the standard or inverted HDLC format.
Flags between Frames
This field indicates the number of flags that are being transmitted between idle packets.
Frame Check Sequence
This field indicates the programmed CRC. When the CRC is not the same as the received
CRC in the ingress direction, the frame is discarded and a counter is increased.
Notes
(1)
This field displays when you configure streams for the frame forwarding application only.
(2)
This field displays when you configure streams for the frame relay application only. The field depends on the PVC
management protocol type and interface type.
54-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
54.3
Naming streams
You can assign a name to each frame relay and frame forwarding frame stream.
Procedure 54-3 To name a stream

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a
To specify a PSI FR stream, select:

STREAM
To specify any other stream, enter:

STREAM <stream>
Enter:
NAME <name>
where name is a string containing a maximum of 15 characters excluding space, tab, period,
question mark, and percent sign

April 2001 90-4521-43
54-5
54.4
Deleting streams
You can delete individual frame relay and frame forwarding frame streams on the
frame relay cards. You cannot delete a single frame stream on a PSI FR card.
Procedure 54-4 To delete a stream

1
Enter:
Enter:
STREAM <stream>
Select:
DELETE_STREAM
54.5
Stream configuration options

Table 54-3 lists options for configuring frame relay and frame forwarding stream
parameter options.
Table 54-3 Options for frame stream parameters
54-6
Option
Frame relay
Section
64 kb/s channels
55.1
Stream application
55.2
Congestion thresholds
55.3
DLCI range for frame relay SVCs
55.4
HDLC format and number of flags
55.5
Frame size
55.6

90-4521-43 April 2001
Table 54-4 lists frame relay management options. Both tables list the sections that
describe how to configure the options. Where applicable, Table 54-4 lists the
standard parameter ID that corresponds to each management option defined by the
LMI and Annex A/Annex D standards.
Table 54-4 Options for frame relay stream management
Option
54.6
Standard parameter ID
Section
LMI
Annex A / Annex D
Management protocol type
56.1
Management protocol interface
56.1
Heartbeat
T1
T391
56.2
Timeout
T2
T392
56.3
Status rate
N1
N391
56.4
Error threshold
N2/N3
N392/N393
56.5
Alarm filter
56.6
Selecting TCA profiles for streams

You select a stream congestion TCA profile for each stream. Table 54-5 lists the
information that displays when you select TCA profiles. The default configuration is
disabled.
Table 54-5 Information about TCA profiles
Field
Description
TCA Profile Class
Number
Name
Status
For information about TCA profiles, see section 36.7. To configure threshold values
for the performance parameters within TCA profiles, see To configure thresholds
for TCA profiles in section 36.7.

April 2001 90-4521-43
54-7
Procedure 54-5 To select TCA profiles for streams

1
Enter:
Enter:
STREAM <stream>
Select:
OPTIONS TCA_PROFILE
Select:
CONGESTION

a
To select the profile number, enter:


<Esc> SHOW_PROFILES

ENABLE or DISABLE
54.7
Managing streams
This section describes how to manage streams. It contains procedures for the
following tasks:
enabling and disabling streams

viewing errored frames
viewing status information for streams
Disabling and enabling streams
You can enable or disable a frame relay or frame forwarding frame stream. The
default setting is enabled.
The stream maintenance display allows you to view information about the stream.
See To view status information for streams in this section.
54-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 54-6 To enable or disable a stream

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>
Select:
ENABLE_STREAM or DISABLE_STREAM
Errored frames
You can view the last errored frame that a stream has received. When the system
discards the first frame on a stream because of an error, the first 32 octets of the frame
are stored by the frame relay card. This frame cannot be overwritten until you display
the information. The system stores only frames discarded because of service
interworking protocol errors or those whose header does not match any translation
rules in the current translation profile; the system discards all other errored frames.
Table 54-6 describes the errored frame fields.
Table 54-6 Summary display for errored frames
Field
Description
First IF Side Errored Frame
This field indicates the first 32 octets of the errored frame that the
interface side received.
First ATM Side Errored Frame
This field indicates the first 32 octets of the errored frame that the
ATM side received.
Endpoint
This field indicates the endpoint that received the errored frame.

April 2001 90-4521-43
54-9
Procedure 54-7 To view errored frames

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>
Select:
ERRORED FRAME
Procedure 54-8 To view status information for streams

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>
54-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
Table 54-7 describes the frame relay and frame forwarding stream fields.
Table 54-7 Information about frame relay and frame forwarding streams
Field
Description
Stream
This field shows the stream as enabled or disabled.
Stream Congestion Status
This field shows the stream congestion status as Green, Yellow, or

Red.
Max. FR Frame Size
This field shows the maximum frame relay size or the maximum
DXI information size that you configure.
Number of PVC
Connections
This field shows the number of PVC connections per stream.
Number of HDLC Flags
This field shows the number of HDLC flags that you configure.
Stream Oper Status
This field shows the status of the stream.
PVC Management
This field shows the PVC Management PVC protocol that

you configure.
Number of SVC
Connections
This field shows the number of SVC connections per stream.
SVC Signaling Protocol
This field shows the signaling protocol supported on the signaling link
configured.

April 2001 90-4521-43
54-11
54-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
55 Configuring stream parameters
55.1 64 kb/s channels

55.2 Stream application
55-2
55-3
55.3 Congestion thresholds for streams

55.4 DLCI range for frame relay SVCs
55.5 HDLC parameters
55.6 Frame size

April 2001 90-4521-43
55-5
55-7
55-8
55-9
55-1
55.1
64 kb/s channels
For T1 and E1 frame relay cards, you can allocate the number of 64 kb/s channels
that make up the frame relay and frame forwarding stream. For information about
how to configure a stream as a frame relay or frame forwarding stream, see
section 55.2.
After you allocate the number of 64 kb/s channels, assign the 64 kb/s channels to the
stream. When the 64 kb/s channels are contiguous, specify only the first channel;
when the 64 kb/s channels are not contiguous, specify all the channels.
You create a stream on a frame relay card by allocating 64 kb/s channels to the
stream. When you identify a stream for the system to create, you can enter the stream
number or you can use the NEXT_AVAIL softkey for the system to find the next
available stream.
You can reallocate 64 kb/s channels for a stream that you have created. When you
reallocate 64 kb/s channels, connections are lost.
Note The 64 kb/s channel numbers must be identical on each end
of a link between two frame relay cards.
Procedure 55-1 To allocate 64 kb/s channels

1
Enter:
Enter:
STREAM <stream>
Specify the 64 kb/s channels.

a
When the 64 kb/s channels are contiguous, enter:

CONTIGUOUS <first>
where first is the first 64 kb/s channel
When the 64 kb/s channels are not contiguous, enter:

NON_CONTIG <range>
where range specifies the 64 kb/s channels; the range can be a comma-separated listing
(1,3,5), a hyphen-separated or colon-separated range (1-5 or 1:5), or a mix (1, 3-5, 12);
specify the 64 kb/s channels in time-ordered sequence, in ascending order
55-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
55.2
Stream application
You configure each frame stream for the frame relay or frame forwarding
application. Table 55-1 lists the frame stream application options.
Table 55-1 Frame stream application options
Application
Softkey
Frame relay
FRAME_RELAY
Frame forwarding (supports packet-oriented protocols such as X.25

that use HDLC-delineated packets)
FRAME_FWD
Frame relay application

When you configure frame streams for the frame relay application, the system
provides frame relay switching capabilities. When you install a combination of frame
relay cards and cell relay cards in the node, the system adapts frame relay traffic for
transport over the high-speed cell relay backbone.
You can configure the type of management protocol for frame stream PVCs on each
frame relay stream. There are five configuration options:
ITU-T Q.933 Annex A management protocol

ANSI T1.617 Annex D management protocol
LMI management protocol
automatic detection of the management protocol type
no management protocol
You can configure the frame stream management type for each stream.
Frame forwarding applications

When you configure frame streams for the frame forwarding application, the system
supports packet-oriented protocols such as X.25 and PPP that use HDLC-delineated
packets. Frame forwarding streams do not use a frame stream management protocol.
For frame forwarding, you must configure the application as transparent or
translated. There is no default. When you configure the stream for translated frame
forwarding, you identify the translation profile.
Table 55-2 lists the application options for frame forwarding.
Table 55-2 Application options for frame forwarding
Application option
Softkey
Transparent frame forwarding (transparent HDLC)
TRANSPARENT
Translated frame forwarding (HDLC-delineated PPP packets from IP)
TRANSLATED

April 2001 90-4521-43
55-3
Procedure 55-2 To configure the stream application

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM
To select any other stream, enter:

STREAM <stream>
Select:
APPLICATION
Select:
FRAME_RELAY or FRAME_FWD
If you selected frame forwarding in step 4, specify the application.

a
For translated frame forwarding, enter:

TRANSLATED <profile_number>
For transparent frame forwarding, select:

TRANSPARENT
55-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
55.3
Congestion thresholds for streams

For each stream, the buffers on the frame relay cards hold the frames while it queues
them for transmission over a port. Congestion thresholds determine the size of the
stream transmit buffer and the conditions under which the system considers the
buffers to be congested.
For information about card level congestion, see section 45.1.
Frame relay stream congestion thresholds

The congestion threshold controls the maximum length of time each frame remains
in the priority level. You can configure a priority level for the congestion threshold.
For frame forwarding streams, you can configure the congestion threshold for the
BEST_EFFORT priority level only. For more information about priority levels, see
Frame priority levels in section 77.2.
Table 55-3 lists the congestion threshold defaults for each priority level. The system
treats LMI and other management protocol control frames as LOW_DELAY but
exempts them from the ACT discard rule. It transmits the control frames before any
data frames. For information about stream management, see chapter 56.
Table 55-3 Defaults for congestion thresholds
Congestion
threshold
Priority level
REAL_TIME
LOW_DELAY
COM_THRUPUT
BEST_EFFORT
ACT
500-ms
800-ms
1250-ms
1250-ms
SCT
400-ms
625-ms
1000-ms
1000-ms
MCT
250-ms
400-ms
625-ms
625-ms
The ACT determines the level at which the stream buffers are absolutely congested.
You configure the ACT value in milliseconds. The system drops frames when
congestion reaches the ACT level.
When you set the ACT at a low value, it minimizes competition among streams for
buffer space but may cause congestion on the stream. When you set the ACT at a
high value, it minimizes the possibility of congestion on the stream, but may cause
streams to compete for buffer space.
The SCT determines the level at which the stream buffers are severely congested.
You configure the SCT value in milliseconds; it must be less than or equal to the
ACT value. When the system reaches the SCT level, the system discards frames with
the DE bit set and sets the FECN and BECN bits. For more information about how
the system sets FECN and BECN bits, see section App A.5.
The MCT determines the level at which the stream buffers are mildly congested. You
configure the MCT value in milliseconds; it must be less than or equal to the
SCT value. When the system reaches the MCT level, the system sets the FECN and
BECN bits. For more information about how the system sets FECN and BECN bits,
see App A.5.

April 2001 90-4521-43
55-5
For information about frame relay congestion levels and management, see
section App A.5.
When you configure the ACT value for a frame relay stream, consider the number of
DLCs on each stream, the expected and maximum frame sizes, and the amount of
traffic that has the DE bit set. The amount of traffic with the DE bit set depends on
the CIR, the Maximum Burst rate, and the severe congestion level. You can
configure the CIR and the MBR as class-of-service parameters. For information
about class-of-service, see App A.6.
For frame forwarding streams, the SCT and MCT have no effect on the frames,
because there are no frame relay header bits; however, the system raises congestion
alarms. When you configure the ACT value for a frame forwarding stream, consider
the expected and maximum frame sizes. For information about frame forwarding
congestion, see App A.7.
Procedure 55-3 To configure the stream-level congestion threshold

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>
Select:
OPTIONS THRESHOLD
Select the priority level:

REAL_TIME or LOW_DELAY or COM_THRUPUT or BEST_EFFORT
Select the threshold:

ACT or SCT or MCT
55-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
Enter the congestion threshold value.

a
For the stream-level ACT, enter:

<value>
where value is 1 to 60 000
For the stream-level SCT, enter:

<value>
where value is 0 to 60 000 and is less than or equal to ACT and greater than or equal to MCT
For the stream-level MCT, enter:

<value>
where value is 0 to 60 000 and is less than or equal to SCT
55.4
DLCI range for frame relay SVCs

For frame relay SVCs, you can configure the range of DLCIs supported at the frame
relay UNI. Frame relay SVCs automatically use cell relay VCs at the NNI. A frame
relay stream can support PVCs and SVCs at the same time. The minimum DLCI
is 16 and the maximum DLCI is 991. The default minimum DLCI is 16 and the
default maximum DLCI is 991.
Note The system does not support frame relay SVCs on a stream
that has the LMI management protocol. For information about the
LMI management protocol, see section 56.1.
Procedure 55-4 To configure the DLCI range

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>

April 2001 90-4521-43
55-7
Select:
OPTIONS SVC_MGMNT
To configure the minimum DLCI, enter:

DLCI_MIN <minimum>
where minimum is 16 to 991
To configure the maximum DLCI, enter:

DLCI_MAX <maximum>
where maximum is 16 to 991
55.5
HDLC parameters
You can configure the streams on T1 and E1 cards to use the standard or
inverted HDLC format. The default is standard HDLC format. You can configure the
streams on PSI cards to use the standard HDLC format only. You can also configure
the minimum number of flags between HDLC frames. Permitted values are 1 to 10.
The default is 1.
Procedure 55-5 To configure HDLC parameters

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>
Select:
OPTIONS HDLC
55-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
To configure HDLC format for streams other than PSI, select:

INVERTED or STANDARD
To configure the number of flags between HDLC frames, enter:

NUM_FLAGS <number>
55.6
Frame size
Use small frames in small bandwidth applications; use large frames in high
bandwidth applications.
Minimum frame size

The 7270 MSC system supports frames that are a minimum of 3 bytes in size,
including address and payload but not including the CRC.
Maximum frame size

You can configure the maximum allowable frame size for a frame relay or frame
forwarding stream on a frame relay card. The 7270 MSC system rejects frames that
are larger than the maximum frame size.
Configure the maximum frame size to be a value between 16 and 4472 bytes. The
default is 1600 bytes, which is guaranteed to be accepted by all frame relay devices.
Some devices in the network may reject large frame size.
Management protocol and number of DLCs

When you enable a management protocol for a frame relay stream, the maximum
frame size configured for the frame stream affects the number of DLCs that each
frame stream supports.
For frame relay streams, the smaller the maximum frame size, the lower the number
of DLCs that each frame stream supports. The maximum number of DLCs supported
depends on the PVC management type that you configure for the frame stream.
For example, each frame relay stream that you configure for Annex A or Annex D
supports a maximum of 891 DLCs when the maximum frame size is 4472 bytes.
When you use the default maximum frame size of 1600 bytes, frame streams
configured for these protocols support a maximum of 317 DLCs for each
frame stream.

April 2001 90-4521-43
55-9
For Annex A frame streams, the maximum number of DLCs for each frame stream
is determined by the following formula:
Maximum number of connections =
frame size 13
5
8694
For Annex D frame streams, the maximum number of DLCs for each frame stream
is determined by the following formula:
frame size 14
5
8695
For LMI frame streams, the maximum number of DLCs for each frame stream is
determined by the following formula:
frame size 13
8
8693
Using these formulae, each frame stream configured for LMI supports a maximum
of 557 DLCs if the maximum frame size is 4472 bytes. When you use the default
frame size of 1600 bytes, frame relay streams configured for this protocol support a
maximum of 198 DLCs for each frame stream.
For frame relay streams that you configure for a PVC management type of None, the
maximum frame size has no effect on the maximum number of connections
supported.
55-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 55-6 To configure the maximum frame size

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>
Enter:
FRAME_SIZE <size>
where size is 16 to 4472

April 2001 90-4521-43
55-11
55-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
56 Configuring frame stream

management
56.1 Management protocol

56.2 Heartbeat
56.3 Timeout
56-2
56-5
56-6
56.4 Status rate
56-7
56.5 Error threshold

56.6 Alarm filters

April 2001 90-4521-43
56-7
56-9
56-1
56 Configuring frame stream management
56.1
Management protocol
Frame relay streams use a reserved DLC for the stream management connection. It
is known as the PVC management DLC and does the following tasks:
notifies adjacent nodes of active and present DLCs

notifies adjacent nodes of the removal or failure of a DLC
monitors link integrity
You can configure the frame relay stream for:
ITU-T Q.933 Annex A management protocol

ANSI T1.617 Annex D management protocol
LMI management protocol
automatic detection of the management protocol type
no management protocol (NONE)
The default is no management protocol (NONE).

The management protocol type and its interface option affect the management
options described in this chapter.
All interface options support asynchronous status update messages.
Annex A
The Annex A management protocol works on DLCI 0. The status element is 5 bytes.
The Annex A protocol supports UNI mode and NNI mode. You can choose from the
following Annex A interface options:
UNI user-side (USER)

UNI network-side (NETWORK)
NNI (BIDIR)
There is no default interface for Annex A.
Annex D
The Annex D management protocol works on DLCI 0. The status element is 5 bytes.
The Annex D protocol supports UNI mode and NNI mode. The Annex D interface
options are:

NNI (BIDIR)
There is no default interface for Annex D.
56-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
LMI
The LMI management protocol supports UNI mode and runs on DLCI 1023. The
status element is 8 bytes. The LMI interface options are:

UNI network extended (NETEXT)
There is no default interface for LMI.
Automatic detection of management protocol

When you configure a frame relay stream for automatic detection of management
protocol (AUTO-NET), the system matches the management protocol configured at
the far-end of the frame stream. You must configure the management protocol at the
far end as a UNI interface. The near end of the frame stream uses the UNI network
side interface for the detected management protocol.
When you configure a frame relay stream for AUTO-NET, the stream status is
OOS-Idle. This means that the management protocol is out of service and not yet
detected. The system attempts to start or restart the link using the detected
management protocol and the timeout of the detected management protocol.
Any link failures after the stream goes into service generate stream OOS status
and alarms.
Note You cannot configure AUTO-NET when you have
configured the user side protocol as NONE.
Management options
Table 56-1 lists the configurable options for each management protocol and interface
and the sections that describe how to configure them.
Table 56-1 Management option summary
Option
Annex A and D
USER
Heartbeat
NETWORK
Timeout
Status rate
Error threshold
Alarm filter stream
Alarm filter PVC
LMI
BIDIR
USER
Auto
NETWORK
Section
NETEXT
56.2
56.3
56.5
56.6
56.6

April 2001 90-4521-43
56.4
56-3
Procedure 56-1 To configure the management protocol type

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>
Select:
OPTIONS PVC_MGMNT TYPE
Select:
LMI or ANNEX_A or ANNEX_D or AUTO-NET
If you selected LMI or ANNEX_A or ANNEX_D, select the interface option.

a
For LMI, select:

USER or NETWORK or NETEXT
For Annex A or Annex D, select:

USER or NETWORK or BIDIR
56-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 56-2 To disable connection management

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>
Select:
OPTIONS PVC_MGMNT TYPE NONE
56.2
Heartbeat
You can configure the heartbeat of a frame relay stream when the interface of the
management protocol type is USER or BIDIR. The heartbeat is the time interval at
which the user-side device sends a status enquiry message to the network-side
device. The range is 5 to 30 s in increments of 5 s; the default is 10 s. The heartbeat
must be less than the timeout configured for the network or BIDIR interface at the
far end of the frame stream, see section 56.3.
Procedure 56-3 To configure the heartbeat

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>

April 2001 90-4521-43
56-5
Select:
OPTIONS PVC_MGMNT
Enter:
HEARTBEAT <time>
where time is 5 to 30, in increments of 5
56.3
Timeout
You can configure the timeout of a frame relay stream when the interface of the
management protocol type is NETWORK, NETEXT, or BIDIR. The timeout is
the maximum time between receipt of status enquiries. The range is 5 to 30 s in
increments of 5 s; the default is 15 s. The timeout must be higher than the heartbeat
configured for the USER or BIDIR interface at the far end of the frame stream.
When you configure the frame relay stream for automatic detection of management
protocol type, the frame stream bases the timeout on the heartbeat of the user side;
you cannot configure the timeout.
Procedure 56-4 To configure the timeout

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>
Select:
OPTIONS PVC_MGMNT
Enter:
TIMEOUT <time>
where time is 5 to 30, in increments of 5
56-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
56.4
Status rate
You can configure the status rate of a frame relay stream when the interface of the
management protocol type is USER or BIDIR. The status rate is the rate at which the
user-side device requests the status of all configured DLCs from the network-side
device. The range is 1 to 255 polls in increments of 1; the default is 6 polls.
Procedure 56-5 To configure the frame stream status rate

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>
Select:
OPTIONS PVC_MGMNT
Enter:
STATUS_RATE <polls>
where polls is 1 to 255
56.5
Error threshold
You can configure the error threshold of a frame relay stream when you configure
the management protocol to a value other than NONE. The error threshold is the
number of errors that occur within a number of events that cause the link to be
declared down. The error range is 1 to 10 and the event range is 1 to 10.

April 2001 90-4521-43
56-7
Table 56-2 lists defaults for error threshold. Configure the events value to be greater
than or equal to the errors value.
Table 56-2 Defaults for the error threshold
Management protocol type
Default
Annex A and Annex D
3 errors out of 4 events
Automatic detection and LMI
2 errors out of 4 events
Procedure 56-6 To configure the error threshold

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>
Select:
OPTIONS PVC_MGMNT THRESHOLD
Enter the error or event value, or both.

a
For the number of events, enter:

EVENTS <event>
where event is 1 to 10 and is a value greater than or equal to the error value
For the number of errors, enter:

ERRORS <error>
where error is 1 to 10 and is a value less than or equal to the event value
56-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
56.6
Alarm filters
This section describes alarm filter thresholds.
PVC alarm filters

You can configure the alarm filter on PVCs to suppress excess link management
alarms. The alarm filter is the number of alarms that the system raises; it generates a
PVC alarm in the major alarms queue. You can configure the alarm filter to prevent
unnecessary performance slow downs associated with PVC failures.
The alarm filter range for PVCs is 0 to 250 alarms in 0 to 60 s, specified
in 5-s increments. The default is three alarms in 15 s. To disable the PVC alarm filter,
set either variable to 0.
Frame stream alarm filter

You can configure the alarm filter on frame streams to suppress excess link
management alarms. The alarm filter is the number of alarms that the system
raises before it generates a frame stream alarm in the major alarms queue. The
filter prevents unnecessary performance slow downs associated with frame
stream failures.
The alarm filter range for frame streams is 0 to 250 alarms in 0 to 60 minutes
specified in 5-min increments. The default is 8 alarms in 10 minutes. To disable the
frame stream alarm filter, set either variable to 0.
Procedure 56-7 To configure the PVC or stream alarm filter

1
Enter:
Specify the stream.

a

STREAM

STREAM <stream>
Select:
OPTIONS PVC_MGMT ALARM_FILTER
Select:
PVC or STREAM

April 2001 90-4521-43
56-9
If you selected PVC in step 4:

a
For the number of alarms, enter:

#ALARMS <alarms>
where alarms is 0 to 255

INTERVAL <interval>
where interval is 0 to 60, in increments of 5 s
If you selected STREAM in step 4:

a
For the number of alarms, enter:

#ALARMS <alarms>
where alarms is 0 to 255

INTERVAL <interval>
where interval is 0 to 60, in increments of 5 min
56-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
57 Configuring and managing

DS1 circuits
57.1 DS1 circuit configuration overview

57.2 Naming circuits
57.3 Managing circuits
57-4
57-4
57.4 Physical options for DS1 circuits

57.5 Framing type on DS1 circuits
57.6 Alarm time
57-7
57.7 FDL mode
57-8

57.10 54016 addresses
57.11 Target address
57-6
57-6
57-9
57-10
57-11
57-12
57.12 Origination address
57-13
57.13 TCA profiles information
57-13
57.14 Selecting DS1 circuit TCA profiles

April 2001 90-4521-43
57-3
57-14
57-1
57 Configuring and managing DS1 circuits
57.15 AAL1 performance

57.16 Viewing TCA profiles
57-2
57-15
57-16

90-4521-43 April 2001
57.1
DS1 circuit configuration overview

Each DS3 circuit emulation card has 28 DS1 circuits. The system automatically
configures these circuits for each DS3 circuit emulation card. Each circuit serves as
a connection endpoint, see section 15.3.
Table 57-1 lists the options that you can configure for each DS1 circuit and the
sections that describe the options.
Table 57-1 Option summary
Type of option
Option
Section
Name
Circuit name
57.2
Physical
Framing type
57.5
Alarm time
57.6
FDL mode
ATM
54016 address
(2)
TCA Profile Class
(1)
57.7
Playout buffer size
57.8
Output timing
57.9
Target address
57.11
Origination address
57.12
Physical
57.14
AAL1
57.15
Notes
(1)
This option is available only when you configure the DS1 circuit for ESF, see section 57.5.
(2)
This option is available only when you configure the FDL mode for 54016, see section 57.7.

April 2001 90-4521-43
57-3
57.2
Naming circuits
After you configure the slot for the DS3 circuit emulation card type, you can name
each circuit on the card. See section 43.1 for information about configuring the card
type.
Procedure 57-1 To name a circuit

1
Enter:
See Table 15-8 for endpoint values, where endpoint is a circuit on a circuit emulation card.
Enter:
NAME <name>
where name contains a maximum of 15 characters excluding spaces, tabs, periods, question
marks, and percent signs
57.3
Managing circuits
This section describes how to manage circuits.
Circuit management information

The maintenance menu allows you to view information about configured circuits.
Procedure 57-2 To view circuit information

Enter:
MAINT OBJECT CIRCUIT <endpoint>
See Table 15-8 for endpoint values, where endpoint is circuit on a circuit emulation card.
57-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Table 57-2 lists the circuit management information that the NMTI screen displays.
Table 57-2 Management information for circuits
Field
Alarm surveillance
Description
T1 layer
This field shows whether the DS1 signal received from

the DS3 port is OK or has received an LOS, LOF, RDI, or
AIS alarm.
Regenerated layer
This field shows whether the regenerated DS1 signal is

OK or has received an LOS, LOF, RDI, or AIS alarm.
AAL1 layer
This field shows whether the AAL1 cell stream is OK, is

receiving insufficient cells, or is receiving too many cells.
Circuit
Loopbacks
This field shows whether the circuit is enabled or

disabled.
Equipment
This field shows whether the circuit has an equipment

loopback and whether the loopback is latched or timed.
Line
This field shows whether the circuit has a line loopback

and whether the loopback is latched or timed.
Remote
This field shows whether the circuit has a remote

loopback and whether the loopback is latched.
Enabling and disabling circuits

You can enable or disable a circuit. The default setting is disabled.
Procedure 57-3 To enable or disable a circuit

1
Enter:
MAINT OBJECT CIRCUIT <endpoint>
See Table 15-8 for endpoint values, where endpoint is circuit on a circuit emulation card.
Select:
ENABLE_CIRC or DISABLE_CIRC

April 2001 90-4521-43
57-5
57.4
Physical options for DS1 circuits

Table 57-3 lists the physical options for DS1 circuits on DS3 circuit emulation cards.
Table 57-3 Physical options for DS1 circuits
57.5
Option
Section
Framing type
57.5
Alarm time
57.6
FDL mode
57.7
Framing type on DS1 circuits

Table 57-4 lists the configuration options for the framing type on DS1 circuits. For
the DS3 circuit emulation card, you can configure the framing type as ESF, D4, or
Transparent.
Table 57-4 Configuration options for framing type
Option
Softkey
ESF
ESF
D4
D4
Transparent
TRANSPARENT
The ESF provides a superframe of twenty-four 193-bit frames, an FDL, and a

CRC-6 frame-check sequence over each superframe. For more information about
FDL, see section 57.7. When you configure the DS1 circuit for ESF, you can
configure the FDL mode on the circuit.
The D4 option provides 12 separate 193-bit frames in a superframe.
When you select transparent framing, the circuit ignores all framing bits and passes
the full 193-bit DS1 frame into the AAL1 SAR process.
57-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 57-4 To configure framing type on DS1 circuits

1
Enter:
See Table 15-8 for endpoint values, where endpoint is the identifier of the circuit on the circuit
emulation card.
Select:
Select:
ESF or D4 or TRANSPARENT
57.6
Alarm time
You can configure the alarm declaration and clearing times from 0.1 to 30 s in
increments of 0.1 s.
Procedure 57-5 To configure alarm time on DS1 circuits

1
Enter:
See Table 15-8 for endpoint values, where endpoint is a circuit on a circuit emulation card.
Select:
Select:
DECLARE or CLEAR

<declare>

<clear>

April 2001 90-4521-43
57-7
57.7
FDL mode
You can configure the FDL mode for the circuits on a DS3 circuit emulation card.
The FDL is a 4 kb/s communications path between the two ends of a DS1 link
configured for ESF framing. The FDL sends information in 12 of the 24 framing bits
in a superframe and monitors the performance of the DS1 link. You can configure
the FDL mode when you configure the DS1 circuit for ESF.
Table 57-5 lists the configuration options for the FDL mode.
Table 57-5 FDL configuration options
Option
Softkey
54016
54016
T1.403
T1.403
Ignore FDL
IGNORE_FDL
When you select 54016, the DS3 circuit emulation card sends messages to the
far-end of the circuit, requesting 15-min statistics. If you select the 54016 option, you
must also configure the 54016 address. For more information about 54016 addresses,
see section 57.10.
When you select T1.403, the near-end of the circuit receives 1-s performance report
messages from the far-end of the circuit.
Procedure 57-6 To configure the FDL mode on DS1 circuits

1
Enter:
CONFIG CONNECT MORE CIRCUIT <endpoint>
See Table 15-8 for endpoint values, where endpoint is the identifier for the circuit on the circuit
emulation card.
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL FDL_MODE
Select:
54016 or T1.403 or IGNORE_FDL
57-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
57.8
Playout buffer size

The playout buffer compensates for the effects of cell delay variation in cell delivery.
You can configure the playout buffer for each DS1 circuit.
The playout buffer absorbs the negative CDV of the incoming AAL 1 cell stream by
storing cells and transmitting them when cells arrive late. This cell storage
counteracts the increased time between cells arriving at the interworking function.
The playout buffer also absorbs the positive CDV of the incoming AAL 1 cell stream
by storing cells that arrive too soon. This cell storage counteracts the decreased time
The system transmits buffered data onto the DS1 circuit at a constant rate, regardless
of the cell arrival time.
the forwarding delay introduced by the circuit. The median fill-level is the tolerance
of the circuit for negative CDV. The difference between the median fill-level and the
buffer size is the tolerance of the circuit for positive CDV. For example, to have a
You can configure the size of the playout buffer from 1.0 ms to 6.0 ms in
0.5 ms increments. The default size is 6.0 ms. Larger playout buffer sizes introduce
larger overall cell transfer delay. Smaller playout buffer sizes have a limited ability
to manage clumping or the effects of queuing delays in the network. Small playout
buffers can lead to a starvation state when there are no cells to transmit.
For more information about the playout buffer, see App B.3.
Caution You may experience a loss of data when changing the
size of the playout buffer.

April 2001 90-4521-43
57-9

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS ATM PLAYOUT_BUFFER
Enter:
BUFFER_SIZE <size>
where size is 1.0 to 6.0, in increments of 0.5 ms
57.9
Synchronization
You can configure each DS1 circuit to operate synchronously or asynchronously
with the network. For more information about synchronization, see App B.5. In the
NMTI, configure the circuit synchronization in the OUTPUT_TIMING menu.
Table 57-6 lists the configuration options for circuit synchronization.
Table 57-6 Configuration options for circuit synchronization
Option
Softkey
Asynchronous timing
SRTS
Synchronous timing
SYNCHRONOUS
If the two endpoints in the circuit connection are connected to links that are in a
network with a different timing source, configure both circuit endpoints for SRTS.
With the SRTS option, the circuit endpoints operate asynchronously with the node
and maintain path synchronization. The SRTS method of transmitting and recovery
timing complies with the ITU-T I.363 and ANSI T1.630 specifications.
Select SRTS when both endpoints are circuits and are synchronous with each other.
Circuit endpoints may be asynchronous with the cell relay network but they must be
synchronous with each other.
Select the synchronous option if both endpoints are connected to links that are in
networks with the same timing sources. The 1.544 MHz source is derived from the
network synchronization source on both endpoints and complies with the
ANSI T1.403 and AT&T 6241 specifications.
57-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 57-8 To configure the synchronization

1
Select:
Select:
OPTIONS ATM OUTPUT_TIMING
Select:
SRTS or SYNCHRONOUS
57.10
54016 addresses
When you configure the FDL mode for 54016 on a DS1 circuit you must specify the
54016 address of the DS1 circuit. The circuit receives the 54016 status messages
from the far-end device that has the address that you specify.
You can configure a target and an origination address for the 54016 address for
both the regenerated and interface sides. The interface side consists of incoming
circuit switched traffic. The regenerated side consists of ATM-adapted circuit
switched traffic.
The target address indicates whether the 54016 messages are destined for a CSU or
the DSU at the far-end. Two ASCII address options are available for each
destination type.
Use the origination address to identify the address of the originating DS1 circuit; it
can be any value from ASCII A to ASCII Z.
Table 57-7 lists the configuration options for 54016 addresses on the interface and
regenerated sides.
Table 57-7 Configuration options for 54016 addresses
Address
Destination
Option
Softkey
Value
Target
CSU
ASCII B
ASCII Y (01011001)
ASCII A (01000001)
ASCII Z (01011010)
ASCII A to ASCII Z
(0100001 to 01011010)
A to Z, default is Z
(01000010)
DSU
Origin

April 2001 90-4521-43
57-11
57.11
Target address
You can configure the target address for the interface or the regenerated side.
Procedure 57-9 To configure the target address

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS 54016_ADDR
Select:
INTERFACE or REGENERATED
Select:
TARG_ADDR
Select:
CSU or DSU
If you select CSU, go to step 6.

If you select DSU, go to step 7.
6
Select:
B or Y
Select:
A or Z
57-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
57.12
Origination address
You can configure the origination address for the interface or the regenerated side.
Procedure 57-10 To configure the origination address

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS 54016_ADDR INTERFACE ORIG_ADDR
Select:
Select:
ORIG_ADDR
Enter:
<address>
where address is A to Z
57.13
TCA profiles information

Table 57-8 lists the information that displays when you select TCA profiles. The
default is disabled.
Table 57-8 Display of TCA profiles information
Field
Description
TCA Profile Class
Number
This field indicates the profile number within the TCA profile class.
Name
Status
For information about configuring threshold values for each performance parameter
within a TCA profile, see section 36.7.

April 2001 90-4521-43
57-13
57.14
Selecting DS1 circuit TCA profiles

You can select TCA profiles for the DS1 circuits in a DS3 circuit emulation card.
Procedure 57-11 To select the DS1 circuit TCA profile

Use this procedure for DS3 circuit emulation cards.
1
Enter:
Select:

a


<Esc> SHOW_PROFILES

ENABLE or DISABLE
57-14

90-4521-43 April 2001
57.15
AAL1 performance
You can select TCA profiles for DS1 AAL1 performance.
Procedure 57-12 To select the TCA profile for AAL1 performance

Use this procedure for DS3 circuit emulation cards.
1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS TCA PROFILE AAL1

a


<Esc> SHOW_PROFILES
To enable or disable the TCA profile for AAL1 performance, enter:

ENABLE or DISABLE

April 2001 90-4521-43
57-15
57.16
Viewing TCA profiles

This section describes how to view configuration information for TCA profiles.
TCA profile information

You can view configuration information for TCA profile classes.
Table 57-9 lists the information that displays for TCA profile classes.
For information about configuring TCA profiles, see section 36.7.
Table 57-9 Information for TCA profile classes
Field
Description
Profile
Name
This field indicates the optional name of a profile within the TCA profile class.
NMTI-Affected
This field indicates that the profile has been modified through the node
management terminal and may not be the same as the equivalent profile on
the rest of the network. An asterisk appears beside the TCA profile classes that
have been changed through a node management session, see section 36.7.
Procedure 57-13 To view TCA profile information

Enter:
MAINT SYSTEM TCA_PROFILE <class>
See Table 36-17 for class values, where class is the code of a TCA profile class.
57-16

90-4521-43 April 2001
58 Viewing DS1 circuits
58.1 Managing circuits
58-2
58.2 Physical options for DS1 circuits

58.3 Framing type on DS1 circuits
58.4 Alarm time
58-4
58.5 FDL mode
58-5
58-7
58.8 54016 addresses
58-8
58-9
58.10 Origination address

April 2001 90-4521-43
58-3
58-6
58.9 Target address
58-3
58-10
58-1
58.1
Managing circuits
This section describes how to manage circuits.
Circuit management information

The maintenance menu allows you to view information about configured circuits.
Procedure 58-1 To view circuit information

Enter:
MAINT OBJECT CIRCUIT <identifier>
See Table 15-8 for identifier values, where identifier is circuit on a circuit emulation card.
Table 58-1 lists the circuit management information that the NMTI screen displays.
Table 58-1 Management information for circuits
Field
Alarm surveillance
Description
T1 layer
This field shows whether the DS1 signal received from

the DS3 port is OK or has received an LOS, LOF, RDI, or
AIS alarm.
Regenerated layer
This field shows whether the regenerated DS1 signal is

OK or has received an LOS, LOF, RDI, or AIS alarm.
AAL1 layer
This field shows whether the AAL1 cell stream is OK, is

receiving insufficient cells, or is receiving too many cells.
Circuit
Loopbacks
58-2
This field shows whether the circuit is enabled or

disabled.
Equipment
This field shows whether the circuit has an equipment

loopback and whether the loopback is latched or timed.
Line
This field shows whether the circuit has a line loopback

and whether the loopback is latched or timed.
Remote
This field shows whether the circuit has a remote

loopback and whether the loopback is latched.

90-4521-43 April 2001
Enabling and disabling circuits

You can enable or disable a circuit. The default setting is disabled.
Procedure 58-2 To enable or disable a circuit

1
Enter:
MAINT OBJECT CIRCUIT <identifier>
See Table 15-8 for identifier values, where identifier is circuit on a circuit emulation card.
Select:
ENABLE_CIRC or DISABLE_CIRC
58.2
Physical options for DS1 circuits

Table 58-2 lists the physical options for DS1 circuits.
Table 58-2 Physical options for DS1 circuits
58.3
Option
DS1 circuit on DS3 circuit emulation

card
Section
Framing type
58.3
Alarm time
58.4
FDL mode
58.5
Framing type on DS1 circuits

Table 58-3 lists the configuration options for the framing type. For the
DS3 circuit emulation card, you can configure the framing type as ESF, D4, or
Transparent.
Table 58-3 Configuration options for framing type
Option
DS1
Softkey
ESF
ESF *
D4
D4
Transparent
TRANSPARENT

April 2001 90-4521-43
58-3
The ESF provides a superframe of twenty-four 193-bit frames, an FDL, and a

CRC-6 frame-check sequence over each superframe. See section 58.5 for more
information about FDL. When you configure the DS1 circuit for ESF, you can
configure the FDL mode on the circuit.
The D4 option provides 12 separate 193-bit frames in a superframe.
When you select transparent framing, the circuit ignores all framing bits and passes
the full 193-bit DS1 frame into the AAL1 SAR process.
Procedure 58-3 To configure framing type on DS1 circuits

1
Enter:
See Table 15-8 for endpoint values, where endpoint is the identifier of the circuit on the circuit
emulation card.
Select:
Select:
ESF or D4 or TRANSPARENT
58.4
Alarm time
You can configure the alarm declaration and clearing times from 0.1 to 30 s in
increments of 0.1 s.
Procedure 58-4 To configure alarm time on DS1 circuits

1
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT MORE CIRCUIT <identifier>
See Table 15-8 for identifier values, where identifier is a circuit on a circuit emulation card.
Select:
Select:
DECLARE or CLEAR
If you select DECLARE, go to step 4.

If you select CLEAR, go to step 5.
58-4

90-4521-43 April 2001

<declare>

<clear>
58.5
FDL mode
You can configure the FDL mode for the circuits on a DS3 circuit emulation card.
The FDL is a 4 kb/s communications path between the two ends of a DS1 link
configured for ESF framing. The FDL sends information in 12 of the 24 framing bits
in a superframe and monitors the performance of the DS1 link. You can configure
the FDL mode when you configure the DS1 circuit for ESF.
Table 58-4 lists the configuration options for the FDL mode.
Table 58-4 FDL configuration options
Option
Softkey
54016
54016
T1.403
T1.403 *
Ignore FDL
IGNORE_FDL
When you select 54016, the DS3 circuit emulation card sends messages to the
far-end of the circuit, requesting 15-min statistics. If you select the 54016 option, you
must also configure the 54016 address. See chapter 58.8 for more information about
54016 addresses.
When you select T1.403, the near-end of the circuit receives 1-s performance report
messages from the far-end of the circuit.

April 2001 90-4521-43
58-5
Procedure 58-5 To configure the FDL mode on DS1 circuits

1
Enter:
CONFIG CONNECT MORE CIRCUIT <endpoint>
See Table 15-8 for endpoint values, where endpoint is the identifier for the circuit on the circuit
emulation card.
Select:
OPTIONS PHYSICAL FDL_MODE
Select:
54016 or T1.403 or IGNORE_FDL
58.6
Playout buffer size

You can configure the playout buffer for each DS1 circuit.
The playout buffer absorbs the negative CDV of the incoming AAL 1 cell stream by
storing cells and transmitting them when cells arrive late. This cell storage
counteracts the increased time between cells arriving at the interworking function.
The playout buffer also absorbs the positive CDV of the incoming AAL 1 cell stream
by storing cells that arrive too soon. This cell storage counteracts the decreased time
The system transmits buffered data onto the DS1 circuit at a constant rate, regardless
of the cell arrival time.
the forwarding delay introduced by the circuit. The median fill-level is the tolerance
of the circuit for negative CDV. The difference between the median fill-level and the
buffer size is the tolerance of the circuit for positive CDV. For example, to have a
See Circuit emulation traffic rates in section 77.3 for more information.
You can configure the size of the playout buffer from 1.0 ms to 6.0 ms in 0.5 ms
increments. The default size is 6.0 ms. Larger playout buffer sizes introduce larger
overall cell transfer delay. Smaller playout buffer sizes have a limited ability to
manage clumping or the effects of queuing delays in the network. Small playout
buffers can lead to a starvation state when there are no cells to transmit.
58-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
See App B.3 for more information about the playout buffer.
Caution You may experience a loss of data when changing the
size of the playout buffer.

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS ATM PLAYOUT_BUFFER
Enter:
BUFFER_SIZE <size>
where size is 1.0 to 6.0, in increments of 0.5 ms
58.7
Synchronization
You can configure each DS1 circuit to operate synchronously or asynchronously
with the network. See App B.5 for more information about synchronization. In the
NMTI, configure the circuit synchronization in the OUTPUT_TIMING menu.
Table 58-5 lists the configuration options for circuit synchronization.
Table 58-5 Configuration options for circuit synchronization
Option
Softkey
Asynchronous timing
SRTS *
Synchronous timing
SYNCHRONOUS
When the two endpoints in the circuit connection are connected to links that are in a
network with a different timing source, configure both circuit endpoints for SRTS.
With the SRTS option, the circuit endpoints operate asynchronously with the node
and maintain path synchronization. The SRTS method of transmitting and recovery
timing complies with the ITU-T I.363 and ANSI T1.630 specifications.
Select SRTS when both endpoints are circuits and are synchronous with each other.
Circuit endpoints may be asynchronous with the cell relay network but they must be
synchronous with each other.

April 2001 90-4521-43
58-7
Select the synchronous option if both endpoints are connected to links that are in
networks with the same timing sources. The 1.544 MHz source is derived from the
network synchronization source on both endpoints and complies with the
ANSI T1.403 and AT&T 6241 specifications.
Procedure 58-7 To configure the synchronization

1
Select:
Select:
OPTIONS ATM OUTPUT_TIMING
Select the timing method:

SRTS or SYNCHRONOUS
58.8
54016 addresses
When you configure the FDL mode for 54016 on a DS1 circuit you must specify the
54016 address of the DS1 circuit. The circuit receives the 54016 status messages
from the far-end device that has the address that you specify.
You can configure a target and an origination address for the 54016 address for
both the regenerated and interface sides. The interface side consists of incoming
circuit switched traffic. The regenerated side consists of ATM-adapted circuit
switched traffic.
The target address indicates whether the 54016 messages are destined for a CSU or
the DSU at the far-end. Two ASCII address options are available for each
destination type.
Use the origination address to identify the address of the originating DS1 circuit; it
can be any value from ASCII A to ASCII Z.
58-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
Table 58-6 lists the configuration options for 54016 addresses on the interface and
regenerated sides.
Table 58-6 Configuration options for 54016 addresses
Address
Destination
Target
CSU
Option
Softkey
Value
ASCII B
ASCII Y (01011001)
ASCII A (01000001)
A*
ASCII Z (01011010)
ASCII A to ASCII Z
(0100001 to 01011010)
A to Z, default is Z
(01000010)
DSU
Origin
58.9
Target address
You can configure the target address for the interface or the regenerated side.
Procedure 58-8 To configure the target address

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS 54016_ADDR
Select:
Select:
TARG_ADDR

April 2001 90-4521-43
58-9
Select:
CSU or DSU
If you select CSU, go to step 6.

If you select DSU, go to step 7.
6
Select:
B or Y
Select:
A or Z
58.10
Origination address
You can configure the origination address for the interface or the regenerated side.
Procedure 58-9 To configure the origin address

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS 54016_ADDR INTERFACE ORIG_ADDR
Select:
Select:
ORIG_ADDR
Enter:
<address>
where address is A to Z
58-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
59 Configuring channel groups
59.1 Configuration options for channel groups

59.2 Creating channel groups
59.3 Adding channels
59-2
59-2
59-3
59.4 Naming channel groups
59-4
59.5 Showing channels in a channel group

59.6 Configuring the playout buffer size
59-4
59-5
59.7 Configuring the number of data octets
59-6
59.8 Deleting channels and channel groups
59-8

April 2001 90-4521-43
59-1
59.1
Configuration options for channel groups

Table 59-1 lists the configuration options for channel groups and where to find
information about them in this chapter.
Table 59-1 Channel group configuration options
59.2
Option
Section
Creating channel groups
59.2
Adding channels
59.3
Naming channel groups
59.4
Showing channels in a channel group
59.5
Configuring the playout buffer size
59.6
Configuring the number of data octets
59.7
Deleting channels and channel groups
59.8
Creating channel groups

You can create a channel group for structured T1 CE and E1 CE ports. Channel
groups let you group several channels together so that they function as a single
connection endpoint.
Procedure 59-1 To create a channel group

Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT MORE CHANNELGROUP <endpoint>
59-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
59.3
Adding channels
You can add channels to channel groups. Table 59-2 lists the displayed channel
information for a group.
Table 59-2 Channel group information
Field
Description
TS #
This field indicates the timeslot number.
Ch #
This field indicates the channel number.
Chan Grp
This field indicates the channel group identifier.
The channels in the channel group can be contiguous or non-contiguous; however,

the channels must maintain their end-to-end time ordering; see Figure 60-1.
The system does not let you assign a channel to more than one channel group.
The number of channels affects the cell rate of the channel group for E1 CE ports.
For channel groups configured for CAS, timeslots 0 and 16 are reserved for framing
and signaling, and you cannot add them to a channel group. For E1 CE channel
groups configured for BASIC, timeslot 0 is reserved for framing and cannot be added
to a channel group.
Procedure 59-2 To add channels to channel groups

1
Enter:
Select:
ADD_CHANNEL

a

<channel_id>
where channel_id is 1 to 24 for a T1 CE card or from 1 to 31 for an E1 CE card

<channel_range_start-channel_range_end>
where channel_range_start and channel_range_end is 1 to 24 for a T1 CE card or 1 to 31 for
an E1 CE card

April 2001 90-4521-43
59-3
59.4
Naming channel groups

You can assign an optional 15-character name to each channel group. There is no
default name.
Procedure 59-3 To name a channel group

1
Enter:
Enter:
NAME <name>
where name is a string containing a maximum of 15 characters excluding space, tab, question mark,
and percent sign
59.5
Showing channels in a channel group

You can show the channels that are in each channel group. Table 59-3 lists the
displayed information about channels in a channel group.
Table 59-3 Channel information
Field
Description
CG#
Name
This field indicates the user assigned name of the channel group.
Channels
This field indicates the channels that the channel group contains.
Procedure 59-4 To show channels in a channel group

1
Enter:
Select:
SHOW_GROUPS
59-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
59.6
Configuring the playout buffer size

You can configure the playout buffer for each channel group.
The playout buffer absorbs the negative CDV of the incoming AAL1 cell stream by
storing cells and transmitting them when cells arrive late. This cell store counteracts
the increased time between cells arriving at the interworking function.
The playout buffer also absorbs the positive CDV of the incoming AAL1 cell stream
by storing cells that arrive too soon. This cell store counteracts the decreased time
fill-level before it transmits cells. The median fill-level determines the forwarding
delay introduced by the channel group. The median fill-level is the tolerance of the
channel group for negative CDV. The difference between the median fill-level and
the buffer size is the tolerance of the channel group for positive CDV. For example,
to have a negative CDV tolerance of 2 ms and a positive CDV tolerance of 4 ms,
configure the median fill-level for 2 ms and the buffer size for 6 ms.
You can configure the size of the playout buffer from 1.0 ms to 6.0 ms in 0.5 ms
increments. The default size is 6.0 ms.
Larger playout buffer sizes introduce larger overall cell transfer delay.
Smaller playout buffer sizes have a limited ability to manage clumping or the effects
of queuing delays in the network. Small playout buffers can lead to a starvation state
that occurs when the buffer has no cells to transmit.
For more information about the playout buffer, see App B.3.

1
Enter:
Enter:
OPTIONS PLAYOUT_BUFF <size>
where size is 1.0 to 6.0 in increments of 5 ms

April 2001 90-4521-43
59-5
59.7
Configuring the number of data octets

You can configure the number of data octets in one cell for each channel group. The
number of data octets can be from 1 to 46. The higher the number of data octets, the
lower the backplane cell rate and the longer the ingress delay.
When you change the number of data octets for each cell, the system calculates and
displays the cell rate and delay.
When you select the ALL softkey, every available octet in the cell payload contains
user data. This option produces the lowest backplane cell rate and the highest delay.
Table 59-4 lists SDT connection configurations that are unavailable because of a
limitation in the SAR device.
Table 59-4 Unavailable connection configurations
Port type
Channel group size (channels)
Octets per cell (bytes)
T1
37
43
15
46
33
29
33
15
31
16
33
E1
The configuration for a channel group must meet the following rules:
Basic Mode: the number of channels must be greater than or equal to the number
of octets per cell
CAS Mode: the number of channels must be greater than the number of octets per
cell (when the number of octets is 17 or fewer), or the number of channels must
be greater than the number of octets per cell plus one (when the number of octets
is greater than or equal to 17)
See section App B.4 for more information about cell rates.
Note Disconnect the channel group before you change the number
of data octets, see section 59.8.
59-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 59-6 To configure the number of data octets

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS NUM_DATA_OCT
Specify the number of data octets.

a
To use only some of the available payload octets, enter:

<octet>
where octet is 1 to 46
To use all of the available payload octets, select:

ALL

April 2001 90-4521-43
59-7
59.8
Deleting channels and channel groups

You can delete channels from channel groups and you can delete a channel group
from the system.
Procedure 59-7 To delete channels and channel groups

1
Enter:
Specify the channel or channel group that you want to delete.

a
To delete a channel from a channel group, enter:

DEL_CHANNEL <channel_range_start-channel_range_end>
where
channel_range_start is 1 to 24 for a T1 CE card or 1 to 31 for an E1 CE card
channel_range_end is 1 to 24 for a T1 CE card or 1 to 31 for an E1 CE card
Note Deleting the first channel from a channel group deletes the
channel group from the system. Deleting any other channel from a
channel group deletes the channel from the group but not the system.
b
To delete a channel group from the system, enter:

DEL_CHANNEL <channel_number>
where channel_number is the first channel on a T1 CE card or an E1 CE card
59-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
60 Viewing channel groups
60.1 Viewing channel group information

April 2001 90-4521-43
60-2
60-1
60.1
Viewing channel group information

You can group one or more channels of an E1 CE or T1 CE port in SDT mode into
a channel group. The channel group acts as a single super-rate endpoint. The
channels in the group can be contiguous or non-contiguous; however, the channels
must maintain their end-to-end time ordering.
Figure 60-1 shows an example of an end-to-end time-ordered connection.
Channels 2, 5, and 7 connect to channels 4, 6, and 13. In this example,
channel 2 connects to channel 4, channel 5 connects to channel 6, and
channel 7 connects to channel 13.
Figure 60-1 Time-ordered connection
DSO channels must maintain their end-to-end time ordering
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
E1 CE
port
E1 CE
port
7270 MSC
E1CE
E1ATM
7270 MSC
ATM
network
E1ATM
E1CE
Circuit
switching
device
Circuit
switching
device
Source node
Destination node
15529
A channel group consists of 1 to 24 channels for a T1 circuit emulation port and

1 to 31 channels for an E1 circuit emulation port. For the E1 circuit emulation card
in CAS mode, channel 16 is reserved for signaling and cannot carry data. A channel
can belong to only one channel group.
You identify a channel group by the lowest-numbered channel in the group. For
example, if the channel group consists of channels 4, 5, 6, and 7, you identify the
channel group as CG4.
You can view configuration information for channel groups.
60-2

90-4521-43 April 2001

Table 60-1 Configuration information for the channel group
Field
Description
Section
Channel group
59.2
Name
This field indicates the optional channel group name.
59.4
Number of channels
This field indicates the number of channels in the

channel group.
Channels
This field indicates the channels in the channel group.
59.3
Playout Buffer Size
This field indicates the size of the playout buffer.
59.6
Data Octets per Cell
This field indicates the number of data octets for each cell.
59.7
This field indicates the AAL service type:
51.13
Service
UDT
UDT_PERFMON
SDT_BASIC
SDT_CAS
Pad character
This field indicates the pad character. When the value of

the data octets per cell is 46 bytes or less, the system uses
pad octets set to the pad character to fill the AAL1 cell
payload.
Cell Rate
This indicates the ATM cell transmission rate.
Ingress Frame Delay
This indicates the number of microseconds required to

adapt a single frame to fit the AAL payload.
Procedure 60-1 To view configuration information for

channel groups
Enter:

April 2001 90-4521-43
60-3
60-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
61 Configuring and managing IMA
61.1 IMA configuration options

61.2 Creating IMA groups
61-2
61.3 Deleting IMA groups
61-3
61-2
61.4 Adding links to an IMA group
61-4
61.5 Deleting links from an IMA group
61-4
61.6 Link activation timeout for an IMA group

61.7 Link deactivation timeout for an IMA group
61.8 Reference point
61-7
61.10 Dynamic CAC level mode

61.11 Minimum link number
61-8
61-9
61.12 IMA group synchronization

61.13 Differential link delay

April 2001 90-4521-43
61-6
61-7
61.9 Configuring links for CAC
61.14 Managing IMA
61-6
61-10
61-11
61-12
61-1
61.1
IMA configuration options

Table 61-1 lists the IMA configuration options and the sections that describe them.
Table 61-1 Configuration options for IMA
61.2
Option
Section
Creating IMA groups
61.2
Deleting IMA groups
61.3
Adding links to an IMA group
61.4
Deleting links from an IMA group
61.5
Link activation timeout for an IMA group
61.6
Link deactivation timeout for an IMA group
61.7
Reference point
61.8
Configuring links for CAC
61.9
Dynamic CAC level mode
61.10
Minimum link number
61.11
IMA group synchronization
61.12
Differential link delay
61.13
Creating IMA groups

An IMA group is a logical port formed by multiple physical ports. The T1 CR and
E1 CR cards support a maximum of four IMA groups.
Create an IMA group by specifying an unused IMA group identifier, ranging from
L1 to L4.
See section 35.5 for more information about IMA group identifiers.
The system prompts you to specify a list or range of unused ports to add to the group.
You indicate a list by inserting commas between the port identifiers, such
as 1, 2. You indicate a range by inserting a hyphen between port identifiers, such
as 3-5.
Caution Before you add a port to an IMA group, disconnect all
connections on the port.
You must set up an IMA group on nodes that are IMA path-ends. An IMA group
configured at the far end does not require the same IMA group identifier as the
near-end; for example, the near-end IMA group identifier could be L1 and the
far-end IMA group identifier could be L4.
61-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 61-1 To create an IMA group

1
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT PORT <Pshelf-slot-Lport>
Identify the ports included in the IMA group.

a
For a port list, enter:

<p1,p2>
where p1 is the first port identifier and p2 is the last port identifier
For a port range, enter:

<p1-p2>
where p1 is the first port identifier and p2 is the last port identifier
61.3
Deleting IMA groups

You can delete individual IMA groups on the T1 CR and E1 CR card. Ports forming
the IMA group automatically reconfigure to be single cell relay ports.
Caution Before you delete an IMA group, disconnect all
connections to the IMA group.
Procedure 61-2 To delete an IMA group

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS DELETE_GROUP

April 2001 90-4521-43
61-3
61.4
Adding links to an IMA group

You can add links to an IMA group while the group is in-service. Adding links does
not affect connections in the IMA group.
Adding a link to an IMA group automatically configures that link to be part of
the IMA group.
You cannot move a link that is already in an IMA group to another IMA group. You
must first delete the link from the group, then add it to the new group.
See section 61.5 for information about deleting links from IMA groups.
The differential delay between any two links within one IMA group can be a
maximum of 50 ms. When you add a link with a higher differential delay than other
links in an IMA group, a service interruption of up to 50 ms occurs.
Procedure 61-3 To add a link to an IMA group

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS ADD_LINK
Enter:
<link>
where link is 1 to 8
61.5
Deleting links from an IMA group

You can delete links from an IMA group while the group is in service. When you
delete a link from an IMA group, it automatically reconfigures as a single cell relay
link.
Each IMA link carries a maximum of 256 connections. An IMA group carries a
maximum number of 256 connections times the number of IMA links in the group.
61-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Certain conditions must exist before you can delete a link from an IMA group.
You must reduce the number of connections to n 256, where n is the new
number of links in the IMA group. For example, an IMA group with two links
remaining contains a maximum of 512 connections. Of the 256 connections,
33 connections are reserved for OAM purposes and you cannot use them for
user connections.
The overall bandwidth of the IMA group must not surpass the remaining
available bandwidth as configured by the value of C (the value of C multiplied by
the bandwidth of a single T1 or E1 link). C can be a value ranging from one link
through the maximum number of links in the IMA group.
Caution 1 When the number of PVCs on the IMA group exceeds
the allowed number of connections for the remaining links, the
DELETE softkey is blocked until you reduce the number of PVCs.
See chapter 76 for information about disconnecting PVCs.
Caution 2 When the total number of connections on the
IMA group exceeds the allowed number of connections for the
remaining links, all SVCs are disconnected.
Caution 3 When you delete the number of links in the IMA group
below the value of C, all connections are disconnected on the
IMA group, see section 61.9.
Note You must manually delete a link from the IMA group at the
near end when it is deleted at the far-end.
Procedure 61-4 To delete a link from an IMA group

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS DEL_LINK
Enter:
<link>

April 2001 90-4521-43
61-5
61.6
Link activation timeout for an IMA group

You can configure the link activation timeout for an IMA group. Link activation
timeout is the time limit for links to stabilize before the system reactivates them. The
default value is 10 000 ms.
Procedure 61-5 To configure the link activation timeout for an

IMA group
1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS ACT_TIMEOUT
Enter:
<activation_timeout>
where activation_timeout is 1 to 10000
61.7
Link deactivation timeout for an IMA group

You can configure the link deactivation timeout for an IMA group. Link deactivation
timeout is the time limit for a defective link to stabilize before the system deactivates
it. The default value is 1000 ms.
Procedure 61-6 To configure the link deactivation timeout for an

IMA group
1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS DEACT_TIMEOUT
Enter:
<deactivation_timeout>
where deactivation_timeout is 1 to 10000
61-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
61.8
Reference point
The reference point is a configurable IMA group option used for OAM loopbacks;
see chapter 141.
The reference point determines the default value of the OAM segment type for
endpoints on the group, the default OAM alarm surveillance setting, and the
OAM alarm surveillance raising configuration.
Configure both path-ends of an IMA group for the same reference point type.
Procedure 61-7 To configure the reference point type

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS REFERENCE_PT
Select:
UNI or B-ICI or B-ISSI
61.9
Configuring links for CAC

For IMA, CAC calculations are based on the available bandwidth of the IMA group.
See section 36.6 for more information about CAC calculations.
You can configure the number of links an IMA group uses for CAC calculations.
This configuration value is C. The value of C ranges from 1 to 8 links, depending on
the number of active links in the IMA group. The default value for C is the number
of configured links in the IMA group.
The value of C cannot be greater than the number of links in an IMA group. If the
number of links falls below the value of C, then the system automatically reduces the
value of C to the new number of links.
Caution When the value of C decreases on an IMA group, all
connections on that group are disconnected. The IMA group then goes
out-of-service.

April 2001 90-4521-43
61-7
Procedure 61-8 To configure the value of C

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MORE CAC_LINKS C
Enter:
<link>
61.10
Dynamic CAC level mode

You can enable or disable dynamic CAC on an IMA group.
You can activate dynamic CAC when the number of active links in an IMA group
falls below the value of C, see section 61.9. Dynamic CAC calculates the amount of
bandwidth that the IMA group is currently using by the IMA group against the
remaining available bandwidth before declaring an IMA group out-of-service.
Table 61-2 lists the dynamic CAC options.
Table 61-2 Options for dynamic CAC
61-8
Function
Softkey
When the number of active links falls below the value of C, the system raises an
IMA group failure alarm and places the group out-of-service. The group returns to
service only when the number of active links increases above the value of C.
DISABLED
When the number of active links falls below the value of C, the system raises an
IMA group failure only when the remaining links cannot provide the amount of
bandwidth currently used. The group returns to service as soon as the remaining
links provide enough bandwidth for the remaining number of connections.
ENABLED

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 61-9 To configure dynamic CAC level mode

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MORE DYNAMIC_CAC
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
61.11
Minimum link number

You can configure the minimum number of active links in an IMA group. The
minimum number of active links is the value of P. The value of P ranges from
1 to 8 links. The default value for P is one link.
The configured value of P must be lower than or equal to the value of C. C is the
number of links an IMA groups uses for CAC calculations. See section 61.9 for
information about the value of C.
When the number of active links falls below the configured value of P, the
IMA group is out-of-service.
Procedure 61-10 To configure the minimum link number

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MORE MIN_NUM_LINKS
Enter:
<link>

April 2001 90-4521-43
61-9
61.12
IMA group synchronization

You can configure IMA group synchronization. Table 61-3 lists the
configuration options.
Table 61-3 Options for IMA group synchronization
Function
Softkey
The transmit clock of at least one link in the IMA group does not derive from the
same clock source as any other terminal link.
ITC *
The transmit clocks of all links in the IMA group derive from the same
clock source.
CTC
You cannot use one port clock to synchronize the entire IMA group; each port
synchronizes individually, either to the system clock or to the received line clock.
Configuring IMA groups in a network that does not have a

network clock
When a network does not have its own clock reference and the two endpoints of an
IMA connection are not synchronized to each other, configure all the links of the
group at one end for LOOP timing and configure all the links of the group at the other
end for SYNC_SOURCE timing. You can configure the IMA group synchronization
as ITC or CTC.
Alternately, in a network that does not have its own clock reference, where the two
endpoints of an IMA connection are synchronized to each other or are both
synchronized to another node that has a higher clock accuracy, you can configure all
the links of the group at both ends for SYNC_SOURCE timing. You can configure
the IMA group synchronization as ITC or CTC.
See section 51.14 for information about LOOP timing and SYNC_SOURCE timing.
Configuring IMA groups in a network that has a network clock

In a network that has its own clock reference, where the two endpoints of an
IMA connection are not synchronized to each other, configure all the links of the
group at both ends for LOOP timing. Synchronize the two endpoints of the IMA
connection to a network that is common to both endpoints.
When the links in the IMA group are asynchronous, configure the IMA group
synchronization as ITC. Otherwise configure the IMA group synchronization
as CTC.
See section 51.14 for information about LOOP timing.
61-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 61-11 To configure IMA group synchronization

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MORE TX_SYNCHRO
Select:
CTC or ITC
61.13
Differential link delay

You can configure the maximum differential delay tolerated between links in an
IMA group.
You can configure the maximum differential delay for a value from 1 to 50 ms. The
default value is 50 ms.
Procedure 61-12 To configure the differential link delay

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MORE DIFFDELAY_MAX
Enter:
<link_delay>
where link_delay is 1 to 50 ms

April 2001 90-4521-43
61-11
61.14
Managing IMA
This section describes how to manage IMA groups and ports. It contains the
following procedures:
resetting IMA ports

enabling and disabling IMA groups
Resetting IMA ports
You can reset individual ports within an IMA group; this causes a momentary service
interruption on the IMA group.
Resetting a physical port reinitializes the software on the port and resets the
ATM payload scramblers, transmit, and receive framers.
Reset an IMA group or physical port when the port enters a persistent error state.
Procedure 61-13 To reset an IMA physical port

1
Enter:
Select:
RESET_PORT
Disabling and enabling IMA groups and physical ports

You can disable and enable both IMA groups and IMA physical ports. Disabling an
IMA group or physical port affects service.
When you disable an IMA group or a physical port, the system turns off port-related
LEDs and stops alarms on the group or port.
Table 61-4 lists the management options for IMA groups and IMA physical ports.
Table 61-4 Management options for IMA groups and physical ports
61-12
Function
Softkey
In-service
ENABLE_PORT *
Out-of-service
DISABLE_PORT

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 61-14 To disable or enable an IMA group or physical port

1
Select:
MAINT OBJECT PORT
Enter the port identifier.

a
To disable or enable an IMA group, enter:

<Pshelf-slot-Lport>
To disable or enable an IMA physical port, enter:

<Pshelf-slot-port>
Select:

April 2001 90-4521-43
61-13
61-14

90-4521-43 April 2001
62 Viewing IMA information
62.1 Viewing IMA configuration information

April 2001 90-4521-43
62-2
62-1
62.1
Viewing IMA configuration information

You can view information for IMA configuration on the 7270 MSC. You can also
view information about IMA groups and ports.
Table 62-1 IMA configuration information
Field
Value
Description
Section
CAC_Links (C)
1 to 8
The number of links used to calculate CAC for

an IMA group
61.9
MinNumLinks (P)
1 to 8
The number of required active links in an

IMA group
61.11
TxSynchro
ITC
The transmit clock of at least one link in the

IMA group is not derived from the same clock
source as any other terminal link
61.12
CTC
The transmit clocks of all links in the IMA group

are derived from the same clock source
Disabled
Dynamic CAC is disabled
Enabled
Dynamic CAC is enabled
Links In Group
1 to 8
The links that are part of a particular IMA group
Reference Point
UNI
Connects user equipment to the network
61.8
B-ICI
Connects two interior nodes belonging to

different carriers
B-ISSI
Connects two interior nodes belonging to

one carrier
ActTimeout
0 ms to maximum available
Rx clearance time
The time limit for links to stabilize before they

are reactivated
61.6
DeActTimeout
0 ms to maximum available
Rx clearance time
The time for defective links to stabilize before

they deactivate
61.7
DiffDelayMax
1 to 50 ms
The maximum differential delay tolerated

between links in an IMA group
61.13
Dynamic CAC
61.10
(1 of 2)
62-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
Field
Physical
Links
In IMA L1
In IMA L2
In IMA L3
In IMA L4
Value
Description
Section
OK
IMA group 1 is not experiencing link failure
LOS
IMA group 1 has an outstanding LOS alarm
LOF
IMA group 1 has an outstanding LOF alarm
AIS
IMA group 1 has an outstanding AIS alarm
LCD
IMA group 1 has an outstanding LCD alarm
LIF
IMA group 1 has an outstanding LIF alarm
LODS
IMA group 1 has an outstanding LODS alarm
OK
LOS
LOF
AIS
LCD
LIF
LODS
OK
LOS
LOF
AIS
LCD
LIF
LODS
OK
LOS
LOF
AIS
LCD
LIF
LODS
(2 of 2)

April 2001 90-4521-43
62-3
Procedure 62-1 To view IMA port information

1
Select:
MAINT OBJECT PORT
Enter the identifier.

a
To view IMA group information, enter:

<Pshelf-slot-Lport>
To view IMA physical port information, enter:

<Pshelf-slot-port>
Table 62-2 lists the information that you can view for IMA groups.
Table 62-2 Maintenance information for IMA group
Field
Value
Description
Port Type
T1
The IMA group is on a T1 cell relay card
E1_120 or E1_75
The IMA group is on an E1 cell relay 120

or 75 card
Enabled
The IMA group is in-service
Disabled
The IMA group is out-of-service
Not Configured
The IMA group is not configured
Start Up
The IMA group is configured and waiting for the

far-end IMA group
Config Abort
The system aborted the IMA group start up because

of incompatible parameters proposed by the far-end
IMA group
Insufficient Links
Less than the required minimal number of links are

active in the IMA group
Operational
The IMA group is operating
OK
The IMA group did not fail
Start Up NE
The near-end IMA group restarted
Start Up FE
The far-end IMA group restarted, causing a near-end

restart
Invalid M Value FE
The far-end IMA group proposed an incompatible

frame length during startup
Insufficient Links NE
Less than the required minimum number of links are

active in the near-end IMA group
Insufficient Links FE
Less than the required minimum number of links are

active in the far-end IMA group
Port
Group State
Failure State
(1 of 3)
62-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Field
Value
Description
Configured
1 to 8
The number of configured links on the IMA group
Rx Active
1 to 8
The number of receiver active links on the IMA group
Tx Active
1 to 8
The number of transmitter active links on the

IMA group
Cell Rate
Mb/s available
0 Mb/s to maximum
available bandwidth
The available cell rate of the IMA group
Link Delay
ms maximum
deviation
0 to 50
The delay difference between links with the smallest

and largest delays
32, 64, 128 or 256
The IMA frame length value received from the

far-end IMA function
Rx
0 to 255
IMA identification for the IMA group receiver
Tx
0 to 255
IMA identification for the IMA group transmitter
In IMA L1
OK
LOS
LOF
AIS
LCD
LIF
LODS
OK
LOS
LOF
AIS
LCD
LIF
LODS
OK
LOS
LOF
AIS
LCD
LIF
LODS
Links
Rx FrameLength
IMA ID (1)
Physical Links
In IMA L2
In IMA L3
(2 of 3)

April 2001 90-4521-43
62-5
Field
Physical links
In IMA L4
Value
Description
OK
LOS
LOF
AIS
LCD
LIF
LODS
(3 of 3)
Note
(1)
You can use the IMA ID values to identify the far-end IMA logical port ID by comparing the swapped Rx and Tx values
between the far-end node and the near-end node.
Table 62-3 lists the information for IMA physical ports

Table 62-3 Maintenance information for IMA physical ports
Field
Value
Description
Port Type
T1
The port is on a T1 cell relay card
E1_120 or E1_75
The port is on an E1 cell relay 120 or 75 card
In IMA L1
The port is configured in IMA group 1
In IMA L2
In IMA L3
In IMA L4
No Failure
The line has not failed
Line Failure
The line has a physical defect (LOS, LOF, LCD, AIS, RDI)
LIF Failure
The line lost IMA frame synchronization
LODS Failure
The line delay is beyond the acceptable range
Fault
The IMA group detected a fault
Far End Tx
Link Unusable
The far-end transmitter is unusable
Far End RX
Link Unusable
The far-end receiver is unusable
Port Configuration
Near End Defect
(1 of 2)
62-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
Field
Near End
State
Machine
Rx
Tx
Far End State

Machine
Rx
Tx
Port
Loopbacks
Equipment
Line
Value
Description
Unusable
The receiver is unusable for one of the following reasons: a

defect persists, a misconnection exists, the link is blocked or the
link is being tested
Usable
The near-end receiver is usable, but inactive, because of

far-end behavior
Active
The receiver is receiving data
Unusable
The transmitter is unusable for one of the following reasons: a

Usable
The near-end transmitter is usable, but inactive, because of

far-end behavior
Active
The transmitter is transmitting data
Not In Group
The far-end link is not configured in the IMA group
Unusable
The receiver is unusable for one of the following reasons: a

Usable
The far-end receiver is usable, but inactive, because of

far-end behavior
Active
The receiver is receiving data
Not In Group
The far-end link is not configured in the IMA group
Unusable
The transmitter is unusable for one of the following reasons: a

Usable
The far-end transmitter is usable, but inactive, because of

far-end behavior
Active
The transmitter is transmitting data
Enabled
The port is in-service
Disabled
The port is out-of-service
Latched
A latched equipment loopback is active
Timed
A timed equipment loopback is active until the timer expires
Off
No equipment loopback is active
Latched
A latched line loopback is active
Timed
A timed line loopback is active until the timer expires
Off
No line loopback is active
(2 of 2)

April 2001 90-4521-43
62-7
62-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
63 Configuring and managing the MTSM

and eTM
63.1 Overview
63-2
63.2 Extended buffering

63.3 Per-VC queuing
63.4 Traffic shaping
63.5 ABR flow control
63-3
63-3
63-3
63-8
63.6 Configuring traffic shaping

63.7 Configuring VPA shaping
63-10
63-13
63.8 Configuring VS/VD for ABR connections
63-15
63.9 Configuring ABR parameters for the connection
63-15
63.10 Connections affected by configuration changes

63.11 Cell relay statistics on the MTSM and eTM

April 2001 90-4521-43
63-17
63-17
63-1
63 Configuring and managing the MTSM and eTM
63.1
Overview
The MTSM and eTM are optional bidirectional modules for cell relay cards. The
modules provide extended traffic management functions for all service categories.
The following interface cards support the modules:
DS3 and E3 cell relay

OC3 and STM1 cell relay
The OC3-2M and STM1-2M cell relay cards also support the eTM. The OC3-2M
and STM1-2M cell relay cards support the MTSM when the cards are installed in
slots configured for the OC3 and STM1 variants.
Figure 63-1 shows the position of the modules in a cell relay card.
Figure 63-1 Position of the MTSM or eTM in a cell relay card
Egress flow
Switching
fabric
Switch
interface
MTSM
or
eTM
ATM layer
PHY layer
Standard
ATM
layer
processing
Physical
layer
termination
and
processing
Physical
interface to
the card
Ingress flow
15142
The MTSM and eTM shape traffic entering the network, to produce a conformant
cell stream. The enhanced traffic management functionality provided by the modules
includes:
63-2
extended buffering
per-VC queuing
per-VC shaping
VPA shaping (eTM only)
ABR flow control

90-4521-43 April 2001
63.2
Extended buffering
The MTSM adds 200 000 cells of storage to the interface card. This represents a
partitioning of 100 000 cells of buffering in both the ingress and egress directions.
The eTM adds 1 048 576 cells of storage to the interface card. The storage is shared
between the ingress and egress directions. The eTM provides a minimum guaranteed
buffer space for each service category for each direction and allocates a large shared
buffer space to be used on demand.
MTSM and eTM buffer space is shared among all output ports but not among service
categories.
63.3
Per-VC queuing
Per-VC queuing provides intelligent congestion management to increase bandwidth
efficiency and provide isolation and fairness among connections.
The MTSM performs per-VC queuing in the ingress direction and per-service
category queuing in the egress direction. Per-service category queuing is applied to
each service category and to each subclass of the rt-VBR and nrt-VBR service
categories. See Cell relay service category in section 77.5 for information about
the rt-VBR and nrt-VBR subclasses.
The eTM performs per-VC queuing in the ingress and egress directions.
Table 63-1 lists the number of connections supported by the modules.
Table 63-1 Number of connections supported by the MTSM and eTM
Card
Module
Number of supported connections
DS3 or E3 cell relay
MTSM and eTM
2048 on each port
OC3 or STM1 cell relay

OC3-2M or STM1-2M cell relay
63.4
4096
eTM
16 384
Traffic shaping
Traffic shaping ensures that traffic exceeding the configured traffic policing rates is
shaped so that it conforms to the traffic policing parameters for that connection. By
storing non-conforming traffic in cell buffers and forwarding it as a cell stream that
conforms to configured traffic rates, traffic shaping allows traffic that temporarily
exceeds the configured traffic rates to be accepted and transported on a connection.
The number of cell buffers that are available to a connection control the number of
cells that can be stored.
Traffic shaping performs a different function from traffic policing. Traffic policing
ensures that the traffic on a connection conforms to the traffic contract for that
endpoint by tagging or discarding all nonconforming cells.

April 2001 90-4521-43
63-3
Figure 63-2 shows the difference between shaping and policing.

Figure 63-2 Traffic shaping and policing
Shaping
6
MTSM
or
eTM
UPC
Clumping
Policing
6
3
4
1
2
Dropped
15139
Per-VC shaping
The MTSM and eTM perform traffic shaping on a per-VC basis according to the
connection traffic descriptors. You can enable fixed or variable mode ingress
shaping. In fixed mode, each connection has a fixed number of cell buffers available
to store traffic that must be shaped to conform to the connections traffic rates. In
variable mode, each connection has a variable number of cell buffers available. In
the egress direction per-VC shaping allows strict control of CDV.
Per-VC shaping applies to both VC and VP connections.
Fixed mode, ingress
In fixed mode, shaping is enabled and policing is disabled. The default is fixed mode.
In fixed mode, the ingress buffer allocation for each connection is limited by a fixed
threshold on each per-VC queue. The fixed mode ingress buffer threshold for each
CBR and rt-VBR connection is 100 cells on the MTSM and 200 cells on the eTM.
The fixed mode ingress buffer threshold for each nrt-VBR connection is 100 cells on
the MTSM and 1024 cells on the eTM. This does not vary with the traffic parameters
on both the MTSM and eTM.
Variable mode, ingress
In variable mode, shaping and policing are enabled in the ingress direction. The fixed
threshold is removed and connections may freely share the ingress buffer space
allocated to their service category. In this case, the buffer space occupied by each
connection is limited by the configured CDVT. Cells that do not conform to their
connections CDVT will be discarded by the policing function, while cells that do
conform will be buffered.
63-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Egress shaping
Egress shaping is the same for both fixed and variable modes.
On the MTSM, the egress buffer allocation threshold is fixed for each service
category and for each subclass of the rt-VBR and nrt-VBR service categories. See
Cell relay service category in section 77.5 for information about the rt-VBR and
nrt-VBR subclasses.
On the eTM, you can configure egress per-VC buffer allocation thresholds for the
CBR, rt-VBR, and nrt-VBR service categories. The buffer allocation thresholds
apply to each connection within each service category. See Egress VC thresholds
in section 36.6 for information about configuring per-VC buffer allocation
thresholds. For the ABR and UBR service categories, per-VC buffer allocation
thresholds are dynamically calculated by the system to provide MIR-proportional
fair buffer management.
VPA shaping
VPA shaping is a commissioning capability that aggregates the traffic of multiple
VCCs terminating on the same VPI and shapes the aggregated traffic on the egress
port of a node to a particular VPC traffic descriptor, rather than shaping individual
VCCs to their own traffic descriptors. VPA shaping simplifies the network core
while maintaining QoS guarantees for individual VCCs. You deploy VPA shaping
at the edge of the network.
Before you enable VPA shaping, you must enable egress or bidirectional per-VC
shaping for the same service category on which you want to enable VPA shaping. If
you do not enable per-VC shaping on a port, you can configure VPA shaping on the
port, but the VPA shaping function is not performed on the aggregate traffic. Only
the eTM supports VPA shaping.
You enable VPA shaping on trunk groups that have a single VPI. VPA shaping does
not support trunk groups with a range of VPIs. To implement VPA shaping, you must
first configure a trunk group and then configure trunk group shaping. See chapter 85
for information about configuring trunk groups.
VPA shaping is supported on cell relay cards that have the eTM installed and
configured. VPA shaping is supported on PVCs, SVCs, and SPVCs.

April 2001 90-4521-43
63-5
In Figure 63-3, VPA shaping is deployed in a network at points X and Y. The VCCs
enter through the UNI ports and are policed, shaped, or policed and shaped to their
original traffic parameters. As the VCCs enter the network at points X and Y, they
are aggregated onto a VPC. When the VPC reaches the destination node, it is
segregated into individual VCCs, which may be shaped to their original traffic
descriptors. The destination node is where the VPC terminates and the individual
VCCs are segregated. In Figure 63-3, traveling from left to right, node D is the
destination node and Y is the segregation point.
Figure 63-3 Edge-to-edge VPA shaping
Source/
Destination
Source/
Destination
3
UNI ports
UNI ports
Node B
Node A
Node C
Y Node D
Node E
Node F
Source/
Destination
Source/
Destination
15156
Note Do not enable policing at the VP segregation points because
the traffic patterns of individual VCCs may have been altered by the
VPA shaping function.
63-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
Figure 63-4 shows how VPA shaping is implemented between networks. For
example, you have three offices in Region 1 that want to connect to a fourth office
in Region 2. You can purchase a VPC through a public network. You can implement
VPA shaping at the NNI to maximize your use of the VPC. The traffic is switched
through the public network as a VPC. The office in Region 2 can perform
VPA shaping at the edge of its network, but it is not required.
Figure 63-4 VPA shaping between networks
Private network
Region 1
Private network
Region 2
Shaped VP enters network
Cells are not discarded as
traffic is compliant with
its traffic parameters
Office 1
Region 2
Public network
Node
Node
Node
Passes through
network as a VPC
Office 2
VPA shaping
performed on egress
Office 4
Segregation performed
on VPC
Multiple VCCs
NNI
Office 3
15191
VPA shaping preserves the QoS guarantees of individual VCCs, provided that the
trunk group and port are not overbooked. Within a trunk group that has VPA shaping
enabled, CBR traffic is serviced exhaustively, which means that CBR cells are
transmitted as long as they are present. Non real-time service categories and the
rt-VBR service category are serviced based on the total virtual bandwidth of the
connections they contain relative to the total virtual bandwidth of all connections in
the trunk group. A service category receives more bandwidth when its connections
have a greater virtual bandwidth. Each service category that contains connections
receives a minimum share of the available bandwidth after CBR traffic has been
serviced. Within a service category, connections are serviced based on a coarse
weighted round robin algorithm, which services connections based on an assigned
weight that is proportional to the virtual bandwidth.
At the port level, a trunk group with VPA shaping enabled is serviced like a PVC.

April 2001 90-4521-43
63-7
You can configure a VP termination endpoint on a trunk group that has VPA shaping
enabled, so that VP-level OAM functions are available on the trunk group. See
section 80.1 for information about configuring VP termination endpoints.
WFQ on the eTM

The eTM uses WFQ to schedule cell transmission efficiently for nrt-VBR, ABR, and
UBR connections. WFQ is a method for connections to share bandwidth in
proportion to a weight assigned to each connection. The weight for each connection
is derived from its virtual bandwidth allocated by CAC. WFQ is work conserving,
which means that inactive connections, which are not transmitting cells, have no
effect on the active connections and do not receive credit for bandwidth that they are
not using.
Cards that have the eTM installed and configured use WFQ rather than the system
queue service factor or the rate limit. See section 36.5 for information about the
system queue service factor. See section 36.6 for information about the rate limit.
WFQ is applied when you configure the eTM as present, whether you enable or
disable shaping. The MTSM does not support WFQ.
63.5
ABR flow control

The 7270 MSC supports the following ABR control functions on the MTSM and
eTM:
VS/VD
ER marking
VS/VD
An ABR source adapts its transmission rate according to network conditions.
Feedback about the state of the network is sent to the ABR source in the form of
RM-cells along ABR control loops. VS/VD facilitates segmentation of the ABR
control loop to reduce feedback delay and to allow faster reaction to network
congestion and available bandwidth.
63-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
Figure 63-5 shows symmetric VS/VD functionality.

Figure 63-5 VS/VD
Upstream loop
Source
Downstream loop
MTSM
or eTM
Destination
VD VS
Destination
ABR endpoint 1
VS VD
Source
ABR endpoint 2
Forward RM flow
Backward RM flow
15140
When the MTSM is cross-connected to a non-cell relay endpoint, the module

operates with asymmetric VS/VD, in which there is only one control loop in the
egress direction from the cell relay card. In figure 63-5, if ABR endpoint 2 were a
non-cell relay endpoint, only the upstream loop would be supported.
The modules use VS/VD for all ABR VCCs on non-terminating VPCs.
When you configure VS/VD, all ABR connections are configured as VS/VD
endpoints. These connections can be VC or VP switched.
Note You can configure point-to-multipoint connections through
the modules. However, because point-to-multipoint connections are

unidirectional, a closed control loop is impossible and flow control
information is unavailable. Therefore, point-to-multipoint
connections transmit traffic at a rate equal to ICR.

April 2001 90-4521-43
63-9
ER marking
The MTSM and eTM monitor local congestion and perform backward ER marking
and calculation of local values for the ER on a per-VC basis for all ABR connections.
Table 63-2 indicates whether the MTSM and eTM support ER calculation and
marking on ingress and egress.
Table 63-2 ER calculation and marking on the MTSM and eTM
Module
63.6
ER calculation
Backward ER marking
Ingress
Egress
Ingress
Egress
MTSM
eTM
Configuring traffic shaping

To configure traffic shaping on the port you must configure the MTSM or eTM as
present and then configure the shaping mode.
When you configure traffic shaping on the DS3 or E3 cell relay cards, you must
configure all ports on the card to use the same cell mapping option. All ports must
use PLCP mapping or all ports must use direct mapping.
Enabling the modules

When you replace the MTSM with the eTM on a card and configure the eTM as
present, all user-configurable settings are maintained.
When you replace the eTM with the MTSM on a card and configure the MTSM as
present, all user-configurable settings, except VPA shaping and egress shaping for
the UBR service category, are maintained.
Caution When you enable or disable the modules, all
user-configurable settings are reset to their default values and service

interruption may occur.
You must configure the eTM with software releases 4.3 and later. If you install the
eTM on an interface card using software releases earlier than 4.3, the interface card
will be operational but no eTM features will be available.
63-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 63-1 To enable the MTSM or eTM

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MODULE
Select:
MTSM or eTM
Select:
Configuring the shaping mode

You can configure the shaping mode on the MTSM and eTM as fixed or variable.
When you configure the shaping mode as fixed and you configure a service category
to shape ingress or bidirectional traffic, ingress policing is disabled. When you
configure the shaping mode as variable, ingress policing is enabled for all
connections assigned to service categories that are configured to shape ingress or
bidirectional traffic.
Procedure 63-2 To configure the shaping mode

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MODULE
Select:
MTSM or eTM
Select:
SHAPING
Select:
FIXED or VARIABLE

April 2001 90-4521-43
63-11
Port and service category level shaping

On the MTSM and eTM, you can enable traffic shaping at the port level and at the
service category level. Enabling or disabling traffic shaping for a particular port and
service category affects all connections on the port for the service category.
You can configure a port and service category to shape egress, ingress, or
bidirectional traffic. The default is disabled for both ingress and egress traffic for a
port for all service categories.
Unless you configure the port for VS/VD, the system shapes the ABR service
category at PCR.
Note Egress per-VC queuing is not supported on the MTSM. You
cannot enable egress shaping for the UBR service category.
Procedure 63-3 To configure traffic shaping

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MORE SHAPING
Select:
INGRESS or EGRESS or BIDIR
Select:
CONSTANT_RATE or RT_VAR_RATE or NRT_VAR_RATE or UNSPECIF_RATE
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
Bypass mode on the eTM

You can enable a bypass mode for the eTM. When you enable the bypass mode, cell
flow is routed around the eTM. All configured settings are maintained, but the eTM
does not shape the traffic. The eTM must be configured as present before you can
enable the bypass mode.
63-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
Enabling the bypass mode is different than configuring the eTM as not present.
When you configure the eTM as not present, all user-configurable eTM settings are
lost.
Caution Service interruption may occur when you enable or
disable the bypass mode.
The bypass mode configuration is not persistent over control card resets on
non-redundant control systems or on dual control card resets on redundant control
systems.
Procedure 63-4 To configure the eTM bypass mode

1
Enter:
Select:
MORE MORE eTM_BYPASS
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
63.7
Configuring VPA shaping

The eTM supports VPA shaping. You configure VPA shaping on a trunk group.
Trunk groups are shaped based on a service category at one or more traffic rates. You
must assign the service category to a trunk group and then configure the value of the
traffic rates for the service category.
VPA shaping supports the CBR service category and the PIR traffic rate.
If you configure the egress trunk group bandwidth before you configure
VPA shaping, the traffic rate defaults to the value of the egress trunk group
bandwidth. See section 85.4 for information about configuring the egress trunk
group bandwidth.
If you do not configure the egress trunk group bandwidth before you configure
VPA shaping, you are prompted to enter the traffic rate. The traffic rate that you enter
becomes the egress trunk group bandwidth.
You can change the egress trunk group bandwidth by changing the value of the
corresponding traffic rate. The valid range for the PIR traffic rate for the CBR service
category is 1 kb/s to the port rate.

April 2001 90-4521-43
63-13
When you enable VPA shaping, the VCCs in the trunk group can have the same
service category as the trunk group or they can have a service category of a lower
priority. A trunk group associated with the CBR service category can contain VCCs
of any service category.
Trunk group CAC is applied to trunk groups that have VPA shaping enabled. See
Trunk group CAC in section 85.4 for more information. CAC ensures that the total
virtual bandwidth of all connections in the egress trunk group does not exceed the
value of the traffic rate. The virtual bandwidth of a VCC in the trunk group is
affected by the booking and scaling factors configured for the port or trunk group
CAC profile.
You can add a VCC to a trunk group that has VPA shaping enabled without affecting
existing connections.
Caution You can configure VPA shaping when the trunk group
has existing connections; however, service may be interrupted for all

connections on the trunk group.
Procedure 63-5 To configure VPA shaping

1
Enter:
Enter
TRUNK_GROUP <tgi>
See Table 15-9 for tgi values.
Select:
MORE SHAPING
Select:
CONSTANT_RATE or NO_SHAPING
If you selected CONSTANT_RATE and you have not configured the egress
trunk group bandwidth or you want to change the value of the traffic rate, enter:
PEAK_RATE <rate>
where rate is the value of the traffic rate, PIR
63-14

90-4521-43 April 2001
63.8
Configuring VS/VD for ABR connections

You can configure VS/VD at the port level on the MTSM and eTM. Only the ABR
service category supports VS/VD. After you enable VS/VD on a port, all ABR
connections on that port use VS/VD. The default for VS/VD is disabled.
Procedure 63-6 To configure VS/VD

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MORE VSVD
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
63.9
Configuring ABR parameters for the connection

The MTSM and eTM support explicit rate ABR. For explicit rate ABR to work
properly on the modules, you must configure several parameters. Table 63-3 lists
these parameters and where to find the configuration procedure. It also lists the
default values for configurable parameters and fixed values for fixed parameters.
To configure ICR, RIF, or RDF, you must have an existing ABR connection and
VS/VD must be enabled.
Table 63-3 ABR service parameters
Parameter
Default value
PIR
Section
77.10
77.10
MIR
ICR
63.9
RIF
63.9
RDF
63.9
(1 of 2)

April 2001 90-4521-43
63-15
Parameter
Default value
Section
Nrm (Optionally signaled)
25
Not configurable
CRM
100
Not configurable
ADTF (Optionally signaled)
500 ms
TBE
16 777 215
CDF (Optionally signaled)
TCR
Not configurable
Not configurable
Not configurable
Not configurable
(2 of 2)
Procedure 63-7 To configure ICR, RIF, or RDF

1
Enter:
CONFIG CONNECT <Pshelf-slot-port; vpi/vci>
See Table 35-3 for shelf, slot, port, vpi, and vci values.
Select:
TRAFFIC BIDIR OPTIONS VSVD
Select:
ICR or RIF or RDF
Set the values.

a
To set ICR, enter:

<information rate> k or <information rate> M
where
information rate is greater than or equal to the MIR, less than or equal to the PIR, and less
than or equal to the line rate
k is kb/s
M is Mb/s
To set RIF or RDF, enter:

<integer>
where integer is 0 to 9
63-16

90-4521-43 April 2001
63.10
Connections affected by configuration changes

Some configuration changes on a card that has the eTM installed and configured may
cause service interruption. Service interruption causes momentary cell loss.
Table 63-4 lists the configuration changes that cause service interruptions and the
sections that describe the configuration changes.
Table 63-4 Configuration changes that cause service interruptions
Configuration change
Connections that are affected
Section
Configure the eTM as present or not present
All connections on the card
63.6
Change the booking factor
All connections on the port to which the booking

factor applies
36.6
Configure VPA shaping or change the shaping rate
All connections on the trunk group
63.7
Configure VS/VD
All ABR connections on the port
63.8
Configure the service category
The configured connection
77.8
Configure the traffic descriptor
77.9
Configure the MIR for ABR and UBR connections
77.10
63.11
Cell relay statistics on the MTSM and eTM

Table 63-5 lists the types of cell relay statistics that the MTSM and eTM collect and
the sections that provide information about them.
Table 63-5 Cell relay statistics on the MTSM and eTM
Type of statistics
Module
Section
Cell relay endpoint
eTM
133.1
Special study
MTSM
133.2
Port congestion
MTSM and eTM
63.11
VPA shaping
eTM
63.11

April 2001 90-4521-43
63-17
Port congestion statistics on cell relay cards

The MTSM and eTM collect port congestion statistics for the egress queues. See
Table 112-1 for information about port congestion statistics.
For multiport interface cards that have the MTSM configured, the cell discard count
is an aggregate of all ports on the card.
Statistics for the MTSM and eTM are collected for each service category on each
port. Statistics are also collected for the subclasses of the rt-VBR and nrt-VBR
service categories. See Cell relay service category in section 77.5 for information
about the rt-VBR and nrt-VBR subclasses.
On the eTM, cells discarded because of congestion in the ingress queues are included
in the cell relay endpoint statistics rather than the port congestion statistics.
When the eTM is in bypass mode, no cells are discarded because of congestion on
the eTM and the cell discard count only includes discards on the interface card.
Procedure 63-8 To view port congestion statistics

1
Enter:
STATS OBJECT PORT <Pshelf-slot-port>
Select:
CONGESTION
To view more details for a specific queue, enter:

SHOW_QUEUE <number>
where number is a value from 1 to 64
VPA shaping statistics

The eTM collects cell relay endpoint statistics for VPA shaping for the egress
queues. See chapter 133 for information about cell relay endpoint statistics.
All VPA shaping statistics are based on the current and previous 15-min and 1-h
intervals. All intervals are aligned to the hour.
63-18

90-4521-43 April 2001
The eTM also collects additional cell relay endpoint statistics for VPA shaping. You
can view the VPA shaping statistics separately from the cell relay endpoint statistics.
Table 63-6 lists the additional statistics collected for VPA shaping.
Table 63-6 VPA shaping statistics
Statistic
Description
Total Cells Transmitted (CLP_0+1)
The total number of cells transmitted, regardless of CLP, on

all VCCs on a trunk group that has VPA shaping enabled
Total Cells Discarded Due to

Congestion (CLP_0+1)
The total number of cells discarded, regardless of CLP, due

to congestion on all VCCs on a trunk group that has
VPA shaping enabled
Total Cells Discarded Due to

Congestion (CLP_0) (1)
The total number of CLP_0 cells discarded due to

congestion on all VCCs on a trunk group that has
VPA shaping enabled
Note
(1)
This statistic also increases when CLP_1 cells are discarded and belong to CBR connections, rt-VBR
connections with the P_0+1/S_0+1 traffic descriptor, or nrt-VBR connections with the P_0+1/S_0+1
traffic descriptor.
When the eTM is in bypass mode, all VPA shaping statistics have a value of zero.
Procedure 63-9 To view VPA shaping statistics

1
Enter:
STATS OBJECT PORT <Pshelf-slot-port>
Enter:
TRUNK_GROUP <tgi>
See Table 15-9 for tgi values.
Select:
15_MINUTE or 1_HOUR
Select:
PREV_INTVL or CURRENT or TEMP_CLEAR

April 2001 90-4521-43
63-19
63-20

90-4521-43 April 2001
64 CE-EC module
64.1 Overview of the CE-EC module
64-2
64.2 Echo cancellation features on the CE-EC module

64.3 Voiceband profiles
64-3
64-7
64.4 Narrowband signaling support
64-9
64.5 Broadband signaling of clear channel bearer capability

64.6 CAS control of clear channel
64.7 Redundancy
64-10
64-11
64.8 Configuration options

April 2001 90-4521-43
64-10
64-11
64-1
64 CE-EC module
64.1
Overview of the CE-EC module

The CE-EC module is an add-on module that provides voiceband echo cancellation
functionality and related features to the ports of T1 CE and E1 CE cards that are
configured for SDT service.
Module variants
The CE-EC module is available in two variants: the CE-EC-64 and the CE-EC-128.
Each variant supports a different tail-circuit capacity, which is measured in
milliseconds. The echo canceller will only operate satisfactorily if this capacity is
greater than the round-trip delay from the echo canceller to the farthest echo point
and back again, including the signal dispersion caused by the echo sources.
The CE-EC-64 provides 63 ms of echo cancellation, supporting a 63 ms tail-length
circuit on the near-end side of the echo canceller for each configured channel. You
can configure the CE-EC-128 for one-way or two-way echo cancellation. When you
select one-way echo cancellation, the CE-EC-128 provides 127 ms of echo
cancellation, supporting a 127 ms tail-length circuit on the near-end side of the echo
canceller for each channel. With two-way echo cancellation, the CE-EC-128
provides, for each channel, 63 ms of echo cancellation on the near-end side and
another 63 ms of echo cancellation on the far-end side of the echo canceller.
Performance parameters
Table 64-1 lists the performance parameters of the CE-EC module.
Table 64-1 Performance parameters of the CE-EC module
Maximum tail circuit
Value
CE-EC-64
CE-EC-128
One-way mode
63 ms
127 ms
Two-way mode
63 ms
Steady state ERLE
22 dB (for ERL 6 dB and Lrin 10 dBm0) (1)
Minimum ERL
6 dB with configuration option for 0 dB
Note
(1)
Where Lrin is the value of the received signal power level.
ERLE is the attenuation of the external echo signal as it passes through the echo
canceller toward the talker. This excludes nonlinear processing by the echo
canceller, which provides further attenuation.
ERL is the attenuation of echo due to transmission and hybrid loss in the near-end
path. The echo canceller adapts its model of the echo path if the power of the ingress
signal arriving at the echo canceller is less than the power of the egress signal leaving
the canceller by at least the minimum ERL.
64-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
64 CE-EC module
The echo cancellation functionality supported by both variants of the CE-EC module
conforms to ITU G.165 and G.168 performance requirements.
64.2
Echo cancellation features on the CE-EC module

Both variants of the CE-EC module support the following features:
echo cancellation
tone disabler
nonlinear processor
permanent clear channel
channel coding mode
Echo cancellation
Depending on which variant you install, you can configure the module for one-way
or two-way echo cancellation.
One-way echo cancellation
One-way echo cancellation typically involves echo cancellers at each end of an

ATM connection. Each echo canceller cancels echoes arising in its near-end path so
that you do not hear echo at the far end. Each one-way echo canceller monitors
ingress and egress speech to compute an estimate of the undesired echo that may be
present externally between the egress and ingress paths. The estimate is subtracted
from the send (ingress) path toward the far end of the ATM path. When you
configure both ends of a connection for one-way echo cancellation, the delay
between the two one-way echo cancellation devices does not need to be factored into
the tail circuit capacities of the echo cancellers.
One-way echo cancellation is the default mode of operation.

April 2001 90-4521-43
64-3
64 CE-EC module
Figure 64-1 Example of one-way echo cancellation
Ingress
7470 MSP
7270 MSC
CE-EC
CE-EC
Egress
Switched Circuit
Network
Ingress
Egress
ATM
Network
PBX
Telephone
C
Telephone
D
E
F
15189
In Figure 64-1, the CE-EC module at node A monitors the egress direction from
point A and subtracts an echo estimate from the ingress direction. This cancels
echoes that accumulate on the ingress signal due to hybrids and other effects on the
circuit network side (near-end path) of the CE-EC. Echoes that would be heard at
telephone D are cancelled by the CE-EC module at point A. The circuit emulation
adaptation process and ATM network contribute to the end-to-end delay but do not
add any echoes, since each direction of conversation is carried independently
through the ATM network without any signal coupling between them. The
CE-EC module at point B cancels echoes that would otherwise be heard at telephone
C. E represents the near-end path for the CE-EC module in the 7470 MSP; F
represents the near-end path for the CE-EC module in the 7270 MSC.
64-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
64 CE-EC module
Two-way echo cancellation
Two-way echo cancellation applies when a single echo canceller cancels echo in
both its near-end and far-end paths. In two-way mode, the tail circuit capacity of the
CE-EC in the far-end direction accommodates the entire round-trip delay from the
CE-EC to the point of farthest echo at the far end of the connection and back again.
All delay, including propagation delay, occurring within the ATM portion of the
connection, is included in this tail circuit.
Figure 64-2 Example of two-way echo cancellation
A
B
CE-EC
7270 MSC
7270 MSC
Switched Circuit
Network
ATM
Network
PBX
Telephone
C
Telephone
D
E
F
15758
In Figure 64-2, the CE-EC module at point A cancels echoes from its near-end path
that would otherwise be heard at telephone D. In two-way mode, this CE-EC module
also cancels echoes from its far-end path that would otherwise be heard at
telephone C. The 7270 MSC at point B does not contain any echo cancellers in this
example. E represents the near-end path for the CE-EC module in the 7270 MSC at
point A; F represents the far-end path for the CE-EC module on the 7270 MSC at
point A.
Tone disabler
A tone disabler improves the performance of data transmission by disabling echo
cancellation on a per-call basis. With the tone disabler enabled, the system
automatically turns off echo cancellation provided by the echo cancellation module
when it detects a tone in the bearer circuit indicating that echo cancellation should be
disabled. This tone is a 2100 Hz tone containing periodic phase reversals emitted by
a high-speed data modem, which usually contains its own echo cancellers. In
contrast, low-speed devices, such as fax machines, emit a non-phase-reversed tone
intended to disable echo suppressors. In general, echo suppressors are detrimental to
the performance of fax and low-speed modems, while echo cancellers are beneficial.

April 2001 90-4521-43
64-5
64 CE-EC module
A tone disabler cancels echo cancellation if a disabler tone is detected in either

direction of a channel. Echo cancellation is re-enabled for a channel when the
drop-out condition occurs simultaneously in both directions of the channel. The
drop-out condition occurs when the signal power in the channel falls below a
specified level.
A per-channel status point on the NMTI indicates whether echo cancellation is
currently disabled due to tone disabler operation.
The tone disabler feature conforms to G.165 and G.168.
Nonlinear processor
The nonlinear processor further reduces low-level residual echo signals that remain
after imperfect cancellation of the circuit echo. In one-way mode, the processor is
located in the send (ingress) path toward the far end of the ATM network. In two-way
mode, nonlinear processors are located in both directions in the same manner as the
echo cancellation function.
You can enable or disable the nonlinear processor for each channel. The nonlinear
processor defaults to enabled on channels that have echo cancellation enabled. When
you enable the nonlinear processor for typical applications, you achieve the greatest
possible attenuation of echo.
If your application contains a high level of background noise, users may experience
a noticeable contrast in the level of background noise between when they are talking
and not talking. This effect is caused by the actions of the nonlinear processor. In this
situation, you might want to disable the nonlinear processor if the noise contrast is
determined to be less desirable than the potential increase in residual echo level when
the nonlinear processor is disabled.
The nonlinear processor feature conforms to G.165 and G.168.
Permanent clear channel

Permanent clear channel is a per-channel configuration option on the CE-EC module
that disables all voiceband processing functions on a channel. You should disable all
voiceband processing functions on all channels that are not being used to transport
A-law or Mu-law coded telephony speech signals. For example, voiceband
processing functions should be disabled for channels carrying N-ISDN D-channel
signals, SS7 signaling, video information, or compressed voice information.
When you enable permanent clear channel on a channel, the system transports data
end-to-end through the ATM network without modifying the data.
The value of the permanent clear channel configuration option must be the same at
either end of a connection between CE endpoints.
64-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
64 CE-EC module
Channel coding mode

The per-channel Channel Coding Mode status point indicates the type of coding that
the CE card is currently sending into the ATM network to transport the channel
through the ATM network. Table 64-2 describes the values for this status point.
Table 64-2 Coding mode status values
Coding mode
Description
Clear Channel
No echo cancellation, recoding, or compression of the channel is being

performed. 64 kb/s channel data is transported through the ATM network
transparently inside ATM cells.
Either the per-channel user configuration of permanent clear channel is enabled
for the channel, the channel is operating in clear channel due to a narrowband
signaled request for clear channel, or the channel is operating in clear channel
due to CAS clear channel override.
Speech
The channel is being coded for transport through the ATM network using speech
coding; that is, A-law for E1 and Mu-law for T1, as defined in G.711. (1)
Not Connected
The channel is not connected. No coding is performed on unconnected channels.
Note
(1)
The coding mode status is Speech on channels where tone disabler has disabled echo cancellation.
The coding mode for a connected channel is determined by the configuration of

permanent clear channel and by narrowband signaling.
If no CE-EC module is installed, the coding mode returned for connected channels
is always clear channel.
64.3
Voiceband profiles
The CE-EC module supports voiceband profiles to:
simplify user configuration of PVCs and SPVCs

dynamically select parameters for SVCs when an SVC connection is set up
Applying voiceband profiles to channels
By using voiceband profiles, you can configure all of the voiceband parameters of a
channel to a set of predetermined values in one operation.
See chapter 66 for more information about configuring voiceband profiles and
chapter 67 for more information about applying voiceband profiles to channels.
Applying voiceband profiles to SVCs created by narrowband

signaling interworking
You must select a voiceband profile for each trunk group on a CE port that will be
used for SVCs containing voiceband connections; see Per-call echo canceller
configuration in section 64.4 for more information.

April 2001 90-4521-43
64-7
64 CE-EC module
Applying voiceband profiles to connections established using the

signaling API
An ACP can request the creation of connections using the signaling API of the
7270 MSC. The adjunct call processor can signal a voiceband profile number to the
7270 MSC node on the ingress side of the call using the GAT IE in the call setup
message. At the ingress node, the voiceband profile number that is signaled from the
ACP determines the voiceband parameters for the ingress endpoint of the
connection.
Adjunct call processor control of echo cancellation at ingress and egress
endpoints
The ACP controls echo cancellation for connections that it creates through the profile
selected for the connection. It does this in one of three ways:
the profile has clear channel enabled

Permanent clear channel is enabled at both the ingress node and the egress node.
The ingress node signals the egress node to enable clear channel at the egress
node.
the profile has clear channel disabled and echo cancellation enabled
Echo cancellation is enabled at the ingress node. The ingress node signals the
egress node to disable permanent clear channel. At the egress endpoint, the egress
nodes configuration controls echo cancellation.
the profile has clear channel and echo cancellation disabled
Echo cancellation is disabled at the ingress node. The ingress node signals the
egress node to disable permanent clear channel. At the egress endpoint, the egress
nodes configuration controls echo cancellation.
In the last two cases, whether echo cancellation is enabled or disabled at the egress
endpoint depends on the configuration at the egress node.
When you configure the node for two-way echo cancellation, a CE-EC module is
typically present at only one endpoint along the path of a connection. You control
echo cancellation for both directions of a call by enabling or disabling echo
cancellation at the endpoint where the CE-EC module is located.
Node predefined profiles

The 7270 MSC contains several node predefined profiles for T1 CE and E1 CE
cards; see section 67.6 for more information.
64-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
64 CE-EC module
64.4
Narrowband signaling support

The CE-EC module works with N-ISDN and QSIG narrowband signaling
interworking features to:
provide per-call echo canceller configuration

support signaled requests for 64 kb/s clear channels
See chapter 16 for more information on N-ISDN and chapter 17 for more information
on QSIG.
Per-call echo canceller configuration

Each time a call is established on a channel by narrowband signaling interworking,
the voiceband configurations of the channel at the calling and called-end endpoints
are initialized to the configurations of the respective voiceband profiles that are
associated with the trunk groups that contain these endpoints.
The resulting channel configuration at the calling-end endpoint may then be
modified by signaled requests for 64 kb/s clear channels. The resulting channel
configuration at the called-end endpoint may then be modified by broadband
signaling from the calling-end endpoint to the called-end endpoint of voiceband
configuration that must be configured compatibly at both endpoints; see section 64.5
for more information.
The particular voiceband profile that is associated with a trunk group is a port
configuration option that is only available when an SVC signaling link is present on
the port. The trunk group is created, and a default profile is associated with the trunk
group at the time the SVC signaling link is created on the port. The default profile,
which is assigned when an SVC signaling link is created using NMTI, configures all
calls established by narrowband signaling interworking as clear channel calls.
Signaled requests for 64 kb/s clear channels

On a call-by-call basis, when a node receives a signaling request for clear channel, it
disables any channel processing operations being performed that could interfere with
clear channel, such as echo cancellation, for the duration of the call.
When a channel is not configured for permanent clear channel operation, the
signaling support for 64 kb/s clear channel enables terminal equipment to
temporarily override a channels configuration so that clear channel is provided for
the duration of the call.

April 2001 90-4521-43
64-9
64 CE-EC module
The nodes interpretation of whether or not a call requires clear channel is based on
the contents of the Information Transfer Capability field of the Bearer Capability IE
received by the node from the calling party equipment. This field is interpreted as
shown in Table 64-3.
Table 64-3 Mapping of Information Transfer Capability to 64 kb/s clear channel
Value of Information Transfer Capability field in Bearer Capability IE
64 kb/s clear channel
00000 Speech
Not required
01000 Unrestricted Digital Information
Required
01001 Restricted Digital Information
Required
10000 3.1 kHz Audio
Not required
10001 Unrestricted Digital Information with Tones (ETSI only)
Required
11000 Video (ETSI only)
Required
You can configure the node on a per-trunk group basis to intentionally block signaled
requests for 64 kb/s clear channel. If the clear channel signaling parameter of the
voiceband profile that is associated with the trunk group is set to disabled, the node
will reject all setup attempts for clear channel calls.
64.5
Broadband signaling of clear channel bearer capability

For connections established between circuit emulation endpoints using SVCs or
SPVCs, voiceband parameters that must be configured compatibly at both ends of
the connection for the connection to function properly are signaled between the
nodes at the two ends of the connection. Connections established through
narrowband signaling interworking and connections established using the signaling
API benefit from this capability.
These parameters are signaled from the originating endpoint of the connection to the
terminating endpoint. The signaled parameters override the preconfigured values at
the terminating endpoint. These parameters are signaled using the GAT IE.
Intermediate nodes along the path of the connection must support the ability to pass
along the GAT IE.
The only voiceband parameter signaled between circuit emulation endpoints is the
clear channel configuration of the originating endpoint. The echo cancellation
configuration for a channel does not have end-to-end significance and is not signaled
end-to-end. This parameter can have different values at either end of a circuit
emulation connection.
64.6
CAS control of clear channel

For E1 CE cards, you can configure a port to allow the voiceband configuration of
an endpoint to be temporarily overridden to clear channel under the control of the
endpoints associated ingress CAS bits. This functionality is consistent with the
coding of bearer service signals specified in Q.50, Annex A.
64-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
64 CE-EC module
64.7
Redundancy
Both variants of the CE-EC module support the 1:N APS functionality of circuit
emulation cards. The configured module of the protection card must match or exceed
the capabilities of the configured module for all of the working cards contained in a
protection group. For example, if any of the working cards is configured for a
CE-EC-128 module, the protection card must also be configured for a
CE-EC-128 module.
64.8
Configuration options
Once you configure a CE-EC module as present, you can configure all other echo
cancellation features for the CE card. When you configure a CE-EC module as
present, the system resets all per-channel echo cancellation configuration to its
default value, and the permanent clear channel configuration for all channels on the
card is automatically enabled.
Table 64-4 lists the configuration options and their procedures.
Table 64-4 Echo cancellation configuration options
Configuration and viewing options
Location
See procedure
To configure EC-CE module presence and type
Card
64-1
To configure mode of operation of echo cancellation
Module
64-2
To configure Minimum External ERL
Port
64-3
To configure CAS control of clear channel
64-4
To select the BIT for CAS control of clear channel
64-4
You configure channel- and profile-level echo cancellation options. See chapters 64,
67, and 68 for voiceband configuration options, including echo cancellation, for
channels on T1 CE and E1 CE cards.
Configuring a CE card for echo cancellation

If a CE-EC module is configured and you change its configuration to none, the
system blocks the ability to configure any echo cancellation features for the CE card,
the CE card no longer provides any echo cancellation features, and any echo
cancellation previously being provided on any of the channels ceases.
If you change the variant of the configured module, you do not affect the per-channel
configuration of echo cancellation features. However, the installed CE-EC module
must either match or exceed the capabilities of the configured module. If a less
powerful module is installed, the system will raise a Module Configuration
Mismatch alarm and echo cancellation functionality is limited to the capabilities of
the installed module; see chapter 148.

April 2001 90-4521-43
64-11
64 CE-EC module
Procedure 64-1 To configure a CE-EC module

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MODULE TYPE
Select:
NONE or CE-EC-64 or CE-EC-128
Configuring the CE-EC module for mode of operation

The default mode of operation of echo cancellation on a CE-EC module is one-way.
You can change the mode of operation while the system is running if the configured
module is CE-EC-128. Channels connected through the CE card experience a service
interruption of < 1 s when this occurs.
If you set the configured module to CE-EC-64, the configuration mode defaults to
one-way. You cannot change the echo cancellation mode while the configured
module is CE-EC-64.
Procedure 64-2 To configure the echo cancellation mode

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS MODULE OPTION EC_MODE
Select:
ONE_WAY or TWO_WAY
where the default value of echo cancellation mode is one-way when a configured
module is changed to a new value
64-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
64 CE-EC module
Configuring Minimum External ERL

Minimum External ERL is normally configured to 6 dB. You can configure an
alternative level of 0 dB on a per-port basis. You use the 0 dB option to manage
severe impedance mismatches, where the returned echo signal could exceed the
default level of 6 dB below the egress signal. The configuration setting for each port
applies to all channels on the port.
Procedure 64-3 Configuring Minimum External ERL

1
Enter:
Select:
VOICE ECHO_CANCEL EXTERNAL_ERL
Select:
0_DB or 6_DB
Configuring CAS control of clear channel

You configure whether CAS control of clear channel is enabled, and if it is, which
ingress CAS bit is monitored. The system overrides echo cancellation to clear
channel based on the state of the monitored bit.
If the bit state is 0, the channel operates normally in no override state. If you
configure the channel for echo cancellation, echo cancellation occurs on the channel
while the bit state is 0. If the bit state is 1, the channel is in clear channel override and
clear channel operation is provided for the channel. Echo cancellation is not
performed during clear channel operation.
If you want to disable echo cancellation in both directions of a connection, the
ingress CAS bit must be 1 at both ends of the connection. This causes the CE-EC
modules at both ends of the connection to enter clear channel override. If the ingress
CAS bit is 0 at one end of the connection and 1 at the other end, only one of the two
CE-EC modules enters clear channel override and echo cancellation will be disabled
only in one direction.

April 2001 90-4521-43
64-13
64 CE-EC module
With two-way echo cancellation, a CE-EC module is typically installed at only one
endpoint along the connection path. Echo cancellation is disabled for both directions
when clear channel override due to CAS occurs at the endpoint where two-way echo
cancellation is in use. The system monitors the configured ingress CAS bit to enable
or disable both directions of echo cancellation at this endpoint. The system does not
monitor CAS bits in the other direction (that is, the ingress CAS bits of the endpoint
at the other end of the connection) in this scenario.
Note CAS clear channel functionality is supported only for E1 CE
cards.
Procedure 64-4 To configure CAS control of clear channel

1
Enter:
Select:
VOICE CAS_CLR_CHAN
Select the desired CAS clear channel option.

a
To enable or disable, select:

ENABLE or DISABLE
To set the BIT, select:

BIT_SELECT BIT_A or BIT_C
64-14

90-4521-43 April 2001
65 Configuring the EN100 card
65.1 Overview of the EN100 card

65.2 EN100 card options
65-4
65.3 Connection support
65-4
65.4 Ethernet bridge
65-2
65-5
65.5 Assigning a bridge name

65.6 Configuring spanning tree
65-6
65-6
65.7 Configuring entries in the filtering database

65.8 Configuring service group options
65.9 Managing Ethernet bridges

April 2001 90-4521-43
65-11
65-15
65-17
65-1
65.1
Overview of the EN100 card

The EN100 card connects remote LANs through the ATM network. The ATM
network bridges individual LAN segments and joins them into a seamless bridged
virtual LAN. Local traffic is not bridged through the network, but locally filtered.
Only frames destined for stations across the ATM network are forwarded.
Figure 65-1 shows a full-mesh configuration set up in the ATM network that allows
all LAN stations to have access to each other.
Figure 65-1 Virtual LAN using Ethernet bridging
7270 MSC
7270 MSC
LAN
LAN
EN100
card
Cell
relay
card
Cell
relay
card
ATM network
EN100
card
7270 MSC
Cell relay link

100BASE-FX
Router
10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX
Media extension device
Virtual connection
LAN
Cell
relay
card
EN100
card
15847
You can optimize bandwidth requirements by constructing a bridged virtual LAN

across the ATM network with less than a fully connected mesh of connections
between all LAN ports. You do this by provisioning ATM virtual channels between
those LAN ports where the attached LAN stations need to pass traffic across the
network.
Note Ethernet ports that are not connected to each other cannot
exchange Ethernet frames.
65-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
ATM adaptation layer processing

Ethernet bridges provide segmentation and reassembly based on AAL5 as specified
in the Bellcore GR-1113 standard and LLC/SNAP encapsulation for bridged
protocols as specified in Section 5.2 of RFC 2684 (which supersedes RFC 1483).
The EN100 card supports simultaneous segmentation and reassembly of up to 64
VCs on each of the four ports.
MAC address filtering

The EN100 card implements four independent self-learning bridges. The bridge
observes all traffic on a port at wire speed and discards frames destined for local
delivery. Frames recognized as destined for remote destinations are forwarded across
the ATM WAN, reserving ATM bandwidth for essential traffic.
You can configure permanent entries which are not subject to aging or being
overwritten by other dynamic entries. You can filter dynamic entries through an
aging process. Each Ethernet port is capable of learning 8192 local and remote
dynamic entries.
Spanning tree
Spanning tree is a protocol based on an IEEE 802.1d standard that detects and
eliminates forwarding loops in a bridged network. When multiple paths exist, the
spanning tree protocol selects the most efficient path for the bridge to use. If the
selected path fails, the spanning tree protocol automatically reconfigures the network
to activate another path.
The EN100 card has four independent instances of spanning tree that you can enable
or disable for each bridge. When enabled, spanning tree will exchange BPDUs with
neighboring bridges and participate in convergence to a stable, singly-connected
bridge network topology. You can configure spanning tree operation, and the NMTI
reports the forwarding state of each bridge as forwarding, blocking, listening,
learning, or disabled.
The EN100 card uses the collapsed spanning tree model in which all the VCN
connections into the WAN are viewed as a single bridge port, which is an ATM port
designated as A1.
Buffering
The EN100 card buffering capability allows for generous burst tolerance to LAN
interfaces and the ATM network through the use of buffer chaining. Each port has an
independent buffering capacity of up to 8 192 frames on ingress and 4 096 frames on
egress. The ingress buffer size is 4 Mbytes; the egress buffer size is 2 Mbytes. The
large buffering capability allows full wire speed frames to arrive from the 10/100 Mb
LAN interface without incurring frame loss. These frames are then shaped into the
ATM WAN according to the specified connection traffic descriptor. Each port has
an independent frame buffer; buffering is not affected by the conditions or behavior
of other ports.

April 2001 90-4521-43
65-3
Burst handling capability of any buffer is dependent upon the input rate, the buffer
size, and the output rate. Because of this, the burst tolerance will vary widely
depending on the following factors:
the selected connection bandwidth

the traffic service class, which determines the shaping behavior
the autonegotiated bandwidth of the LAN interface
For example, if the ATM WAN bandwidth is set to carry the full bandwidth of the
LAN, the burst tolerance is infinite. The EN100 card will support this mode of
operation up to the bandwidth limits of the ATM interface.
The large buffering capacity is also useful because it provides the bandwidth
smoothing and rate conversion required for the use of smaller WAN bandwidths.
65.2
EN100 card options

Table 65-1 lists the configuration options for the EN100 card and the sections that
describe them.
Table 65-1 Configuration options for the EN100 card
65.3
Option
Section
Assigning a bridge name
65.5
Configuring bridge port options
65.6
Configuring spanning tree
65.6
Configuring entries in the filtering database
65.7
Configuring service group options
65.8
Connection support
The system supports ATM interconnections through the switching fabric from
port-to-port, port-to-cell relay-port, port-to-frame relay-port, or port-to-ISC port. See
the IP Services Card Technical Reference for more information about the ISC. You
can make a connection as a point-to-point PVC or SPVC or as a point-to-multipoint
PVC.
If you configure spanning tree on bridges that have point-to-multipoint connections,
spanning tree will not function on the point-to-multipoint connections.
The bridge for the source endpoint of a point-to-multipoint connection forwards only
those multicast frames whose destination MAC address is a static entry in the
filtering database. The bridge for the source endpoint of a point-to-multipoint
connection does not forward unicast frames.
When you configure a point-to-multipoint connection on the EN100 card, you can
also configure a parallel point-to-point connection.
65-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
65.4
Ethernet bridge
The EN100 card supports two port bridges, where one physical Ethernet port is
designated as L1 and one ATM port is designated as A1. A card supports four
bridges, and each bridge is associated with a port. The ATM port contains
n connections to remote bridges, where n is the number of virtual connections or
VCNs connecting the remote bridges through the switching fabric. Each ATM bridge
port can have 0 to 64 simultaneous connections. The EN100 card uses PVCs and
SPVCs to set up connections. ATM connections terminating on the Ethernet bridge
are identified by a VCN.
The EN100 card supports bridging as specified in IEEE 802.1d.
Figure 65-2 shows the relationship between the port, bridge, and bridge ports.
Figure 65-2 Ethernet bridge interface
Ethernet LANs
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
ATM network interface
EN100
L1
Bridge
1
A1
L1
Bridge
2
A1
L1
Bridge
3
A1
L1
Bridge
4
A1
Set of VCNs
Set of VCNs
Set of VCNs
Set of VCNs
15848

April 2001 90-4521-43
65-5
65.5
Assigning a bridge name

You can assign each bridge a name of up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Procedure 65-1 To configure the bridge name for the EN100 card
1
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT MORE BRIDGE <Pshelf-slot-bridge>
See Table 35-3 for shelf, slot, and bridge values.
Enter:
NAME <name>
where name is a string of 32 alphanumeric characters that does not contain spaces
65.6
Configuring spanning tree

You can configure the spanning tree options for each bridge. Table 65-2 lists the
information displayed for Ethernet ports in the Spanning Tree Status field.
Table 65-2 Information about Ethernet ports for spanning tree
Value
State
Description
Forwarding
Active
Incoming and outgoing frames are filtered and learned by the address learning filter.
Blocking
Active
Both incoming and outgoing frames are dropped and addresses of incoming frames
are not learned.
Listening
Active
The bridge waits for hello messages to arrive. Both incoming and outgoing frames
are dropped and addresses of incoming frames are not learned.
Learning
Active
Incoming and outgoing frames are dropped, and addresses of incoming frames are
learned.
Disabled
Inactive
The bridge software disables a port when an error condition occurs. The port does
not participate in forwarding or the spanning tree protocol.
You can configure the spanning tree cost for the bridge port for the Ethernet and
ATM ports. The cost can be a value between 0 and 65 535; the default is 32 767.
65-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 65-2 To configure spanning tree bridge port cost for a

EN100 card
1
Enter:
Enter:
BRIDGE_PORT <bridge_port_id>
where bridge_port_id is L1 for the physical port or A1 for the ATM port
Enter:
SPAN_TREE COST <cost>
where cost is 0 to 65535
Configuring spanning tree options

Table 65-3 lists the spanning tree options for the EN100 card. You can independently
configure all spanning tree options for each bridge.
Table 65-3 Spanning tree configuration options
Softkey
Description
Values
Default
FWD_DELAY
The number of seconds a port should remain in the

listening or learning state before moving to the next
state.
3 to 30 s
15 s
HELLO_TIME
The frequency of transmission of hello messages.
1 to 10 s
2s
MAX_AGE
The maximum time stored information is retained by the

bridge.
4 to 40 s
20 s
PRIORITY
The bridge priority value. A low value indicates high

priority.
0 to
65 535
32 768
ENABLE or
DISABLE
Enable or disable the spanning tree option.
ENABLE
Note The spanning tree model for the EN100 card assumes that
the underlying ATM network is robust and stable. It treats the entire
ATM interface as a single bridge port for spanning tree purposes.

April 2001 90-4521-43
65-7
If you configure the maximum age, hello time, and forward delay, you must maintain
the following relationships among the parameters:
2 * (FWD_DELAY 1) MAX_AGE
MAX_AGE 2 * (HELLO_TIME + 1)
15849
You can perform the following steps to ensure that the relationships are maintained
among the parameters:
1
Locate the configured hello time in Table 65-4, and ensure that the
corresponding maximum age is less than or equal to the configured maximum
age.
Locate the configured maximum age in Table 65-4, and ensure that the
corresponding forward delay is less than or equal to the configured forward
delay.
Table 65-4 Spanning tree timer settings
65-8
Hello time
Maximum age
Forward delay
10
12
14
16
18
10
20
11
10
22
12
24
13
26
14
28
15
30
16
32
17
34
18
36
19
38
20
40
21
22 to 30

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 65-3 To enable or disable spanning tree

1
Enter:
Select:
SPAN_TREE
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
Note 1 When spanning tree is disabled, manually ensure that the

bridged network does not contain any physical loops that could lead to
broadcast storms.
Note 2 When spanning tree is disabled, the bridge does not exchange
BPDUs within the bridge neighbors nor participate in the convergence to
a stable, singly-connected bridged LAN topology.
Procedure 65-4 To configure the forward delay

1
Enter:
Enter:
SPAN_TREE FWD_DELAY <delay>
where delay is 3 to 30 s

April 2001 90-4521-43
65-9
Procedure 65-5 To configure the hello time

1
Enter:
Enter:
SPAN_TREE HELLO_TIME <time>
where time is 1 to 10 s
Procedure 65-6 To configure the maximum age

1
Enter:
Enter:
SPAN_TREE MAX_AGE <age>
where age is 4 to 40 s
Procedure 65-7 To configure the priority

1
Enter:
Enter:
SPAN_TREE PRIORITY <priority>
where priority is 0 to 65535
65-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
65.7
Configuring entries in the filtering database

The first time the card receives a LAN frame destined to an unknown destination
MAC address, it broadcasts the frame to all remote destinations. Each time the
database encounters a new local- or remote-station MAC address, the system creates
a database entry.
As the EN100 card reassembles each LAN frame from the ATM interface, it updates
the database entries for the source MAC address and the VCN on which the frame
was received. Subsequently, when the EN100 card receives a frame from the LAN
with an existing MAC address as a destination address, the card segments the frame
into ATM cells and forwards the frame directly on the associated VCN. This learning
process allows direct routing of all traffic with a learned address and filtering of all
frames with learned local addresses.
Each Ethernet bridge has a separate database capable of learning up to 8192 local and
remote station addresses. Static and permanent entries are included in the total
number of learned addresses.
The filtering database stores dynamic and static entries. The entries are aged
according to IEEE 802.1d standard, Section 3.9, and the dynamic entries are
periodically discarded. You can configure up to 32 static entries. Static entries are
not overwritten by the learning process, are not aged, and are preserved across power
interruptions. The database will accept static entries even when the filtering database
is full.
The NMTI screen displays database entries as a MAC address followed by the
Ethernet or ATM port and a physical LAN port number. The Ethernet port is
identified as L1, an ATM port is identified as A1, and a LAN port is identified by a
port number. For example, a destination of L1_PORT3 indicates that the received
frames are intended for the LAN port of physical LAN port 3.
You can display filtering database entries. The NMTI screen displays filtering
database entries in the following order: static, internal, and dynamic. You can also
configure the entry lifetime. The entry lifetime for the EN100 card can be from 10 to
65 535 s; the default is 300 s. If the entry lifetime is set to time, the time required for
the entry to age out is between time and 2(time)1. To disable the aging process, set
the entry life to 0.
You can display, add, and delete static entries. Each static entry begins with an
asterisk.
Internal entries are permanent entries specified for protocol processing. There are
two permanent entries: the MAC address of the bridge and the spanning tree group
address. The spanning tree group address is added to the database when spanning tree
is enabled for a bridge, and the address is removed when spanning tree is disabled.
Note The MAC address of a bridge is a permanent entry.

April 2001 90-4521-43
65-11
Procedure 65-8 To view filtering database entries

1
Enter:
Select:
FILTERING
To view entries that do not fit on the screen, select:

PREVIOUS or NEXT
Procedure 65-9 To view information about a specific MAC address

in the filtering database
1
Enter:
Enter:
FILTERING FIND_STATION <MAC_address>
where MAC_address is the preassigned 12-digit hexadecimal MAC address
Procedure 65-10 To delete all static and dynamic entries in the

filtering database
1
Enter:
Select:
FILTERING DELETE_ALL
Note Internal entries are not deleted when you select DELETE_ALL.
65-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 65-11 To configure the entry lifetime

1
Enter:
Enter:
FILTERING ENTRY_LIFE <time>
where time is 10 to 65535 s; the default is 300 s
Procedure 65-12 To view static entries in the filtering database

1
Enter:
Select:
STATIC
To view entries that do not fit on the screen, select:

PREVIOUS or NEXT
Procedure 65-13 To view information about a specific MAC address

that is a static entry in the filtering database
1
Enter:
Enter:
STATIC FIND_STATION <MAC_address>
where MAC_address is the pre-assigned 12-digit hexadecimal MAC address

April 2001 90-4521-43
65-13
Procedure 65-14 To add static entries to the filtering database

1
Enter:
Enter:
STATIC ADD <vci_pair>
where vci_pair is a MAC address and VCI combination separated by a space; if the VCI is 0, it
implies a local port
Procedure 65-15 To delete a specific static entry from the filtering

database
1
Enter:
Enter:
STATIC DELETE <index>
where index is the index of the entry to delete
Procedure 65-16 To delete all static entries in the filtering database

1
Enter:
Select:
STATIC DELETE_ALL
65-14

90-4521-43 April 2001
65.8
Configuring service group options

Service groups allow users to allocate cost resource bandwidth to the LAN ports. See
Appendix C for more information about calculating Ethernet bandwidth.
Note Because of the collision-based nature of transmitting
Ethernet data, there is no guarantee that data can be transmitted onto

the collision domain of the physical LAN.
It is recommended that service groups be used on all ports to ensure the EN100 card
proportionally allocates the FPB across its ports. When you assign bandwidth to a
service group, the bandwidth is removed from the FPB pool. The bandwidth sum for
service groups cannot exceed the total FPB of the card. Using service groups ensures
that each port will have access to at least that share of the FPB of the card for its
VCN connection.
When you request a connection on a port, the system verifies that the connection
bandwidth is available from the service group bandwidth or the FPB of the card. If
you disable the service group on one or more ports, those ports compete for
transmission priority on the remaining FPB in the order the data is received.
A change in the interface rate may cause a discrepancy between the physical port
bandwidth and the assigned service group bandwidth. When a change in port rate is
detected, the system declares a diagnostic alarm. If this occurs, then you may choose
to revise bandwidth allocations for service groups.
You can assign up to one service group per port. Specifying the bandwidth for a
service group will create a service group. You should assign a name to each
service group.
Assigning a bandwidth amount of 0 disables the service group. The default
bandwidth for a service group is 0. The bandwidth amount that you assign to a
service group must be equal to or greater than the total bandwidth of the existing
connections on the port.

April 2001 90-4521-43
65-15
Procedure 65-17 To assign a name to a service group

1
Enter:
Enter:
SERVICE_GROUP NAME <name>
percent sign
Procedure 65-18 To configure bandwidth for service groups

1
Enter:
ENTER:
SERVICE_GROUP BANDWIDTH <bandwidth>
where bandwidth is a number from 0 to the maximum Mb/s of available FPB
65-16

90-4521-43 April 2001
65.9
Managing Ethernet bridges

You can enable or disable bridge ports. Table 65-5 lists the information the NMTI
displays for Ethernet bridge ports.
Table 65-5 Information about Ethernet bridge ports
Field
Description
Value
Bridge
This field indicates the bridge number.
1 to 4
Bridge Port
A1 is the ATM bridge port.
A1 or L1
L1 is a LAN bridge port.

Physical Port
This field is only displayed when the Bridge Port field is L1.
This field indicates the physical port that is attached to the LAN
bridge port.
Port 1 to Port 4
Port Status
See Table 65-2 for value descriptions.
See Table 65-2

for values.
Procedure 65-19 To enable or disable bridge ports

1
Enter:
MAINT OBJECT MORE BRIDGE <Pshelf-slot-bridge>
Enter:
BRIDGE_PORT <bridge_port>
where bridge_port is L1 for the physical port or A1 for the ATM port
Select:
Note When disabled, a bridge port does not process or forward LAN
frames.

April 2001 90-4521-43
65-17
65-18

90-4521-43 April 2001
66 Configuring voiceband channels and

profiles
66.1 Configuration options for voiceband channels and profiles

66.2 Configuring voiceband channels or profiles
66.3 Naming voiceband channels or profiles
66.4 Configuring basic options
66-4
66-5
66-6
66.5 Configuring CAS on a VS card
66-8
66.6 Configuring per-channel gain for a VS card

66.7 Configuring a 64 kb/s clear channel
66.8 Configuring echo cancellation
66.9 Configuring a speech coder
66-3
66-9
66-10
66-11
66-12
66.10 Configuring the speech packing factor on VS cards
66-14
66.11 Connected channel limitations due to coder and packing factor

configuration 66-15
66.12 Configuring silence suppression on VS cards
66.13 Configuring speech filters on VS cards

April 2001 90-4521-43
66-16
66-17
66-1
66 Configuring voiceband channels and profiles
66.14 Configuring DTMF detection on VS cards

66.15 Configuring fax demodulation on VS cards
66-18
66-19
66.16 Configuring fax and modem bypass on VS cards
66-2
66-21

90-4521-43 April 2001
66.1
Configuration options for voiceband channels and profiles

Table 66-1 lists the configuration options for voiceband channels and profiles on
T1 VS and E1 VS cards and on T1 CE and E1 CE cards configured with
a CE-EC module. See chapter 67 for more information about voiceband profiles.
Table 66-1 Voiceband channel and profile options
Task
Section
T1 and E1 CE
cards with
CE-EC module
T1 and E1 VS
cards
To configure a voiceband channel or profile
66.2
66.2
To name a voiceband channel or profile
66.3
66.3
To configure LOC monitoring, network jitter tolerance, and

subchannel identifiers
66.4
To configure pulse dialing and CAS bandwidth optimization
66.5
To configure ingress and egress per-channel gain
66.6
To configure a permanent 64 kb/s clear channel
66.7
66.7
To configure echo cancellation, external echo return loss, and

nonlinear processing (1)
66.8
66.8
To configure a speech coder
66.9
To configure speech compression
66.10
To configure silence suppression
66.12
To configure post and high-pass speech filters
66.13
To configure DTMF detection
66.14
To configure fax demodulation, the maximum fax rate, and the

fax transmission level
66.15
To configure fax and modem bypass
66.15
Note
(1)
You can configure external echo return loss for channels and profiles on the T1 VS and E1 VS cards
only. On T1 CE and E1 CE cards configured with a CE-EC module, you configure external echo
return loss at the port-level for all of the channels on a port.
You can reconfigure the following parameters on a connected channel:
channel name
echo cancellation
high-pass and post filters
egress channel gain
OAM features

April 2001 90-4521-43
66-3
The following parameters can also be reconfigured on a connected channel;

however, a momentary service interruption occurs:
nonlinear processor
minimum external ERL
ingress channel gain
bidirectional endpoint loopback
To change all other parameters you must first disconnect the channel.
66.2
Configuring voiceband channels or profiles

You can configure a voiceband channel or profile for T1 and E1 VS cards and for
T1 CE and E1 CE cards configured with a CE-EC module. Both card types support
the transport of a single channel within an ATM connection.
The T1 CE and E1 CE cards also support the transport of multiple channels within
an ATM connection.
Procedure 66-1 To configure a voiceband channel or profile

1
Select:
CONFIG OBJECT MORE VOICEBAND
Specify the channel or profile.

a
To specify a voiceband channel for a VS or a CE card, enter:

CHANNEL <channel_endpoint>
See Table 15-8 for channel_endpoint values.
To specify a voiceband profile for a VS card, enter:

PROFILE_A <profile_number>
See Table 67-2 for profile_number values.
To specify a voiceband profile for a CE card, enter:

PROFILE_B <profile_number>
66-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
66.3
Naming voiceband channels or profiles

For T1 VS and E1 VS cards, you can assign an optional name to each voiceband
channel (15 characters) or profile (35 characters). By default, no name is assigned.
For T1 CE and E1 CE cards configured with a CE-EC module, you can assign an
optional 35-character name to each voiceband profile. By default, no name is
assigned.
Procedure 66-2 To name a voiceband channel or profile

1
Select:

a
To specify a voiceband channel, enter:



Enter:
NAME <name>
where name is a string containing a maximum of 15 characters for a voiceband channel or profile
on a VS card and 35 characters for a voiceband channel or profile on a CE card, excluding spaces,
tabs, question marks, and percent signs

April 2001 90-4521-43
66-5
66.4
Configuring basic options

You can configure the following basic options for voiceband channels or profiles on
VS cards:
LOC monitoring
minimum network jitter tolerance
subchannel identifier
You can configure LOC monitoring on a per-channel basis. When you enable
LOC monitoring, the card raises an LOC alarm when it detects an LOC condition.
When you disable LOC monitoring, the card does not raise any LOC alarms. The
default for LOC monitoring is enabled.
You can configure the minimum network jitter tolerance on a per-channel basis.
During periods of high jitter, the jitter buffer dynamically adapts to provide increased
jitter compensation. You should configure the minimum network jitter tolerance to
be at least as large as the maximum network jitter (cell delay variations) that you
expect. You can configure the minimum network jitter tolerance from 1 to 130 ms.
The default for the minimum network jitter tolerance is 10 ms.
You can configure a subchannel identifier on a per-channel basis. A subchannel
identifier identifies the channels data within a connection as specified in FRF.11.
Because the card transports the subchannel identifier through an end-to-end
connection, you must configure the subchannel identifier consistently at both ends of
the connection. When the VS card receives egress data that has an unexpected
subchannel identifier, it discards the data. You can configure a subchannel identifier
of 4 to 255. The default subchannel identifier is 4.
Note Because the VS card currently supports only one channel
within each connection. You should keep the default value of 4 for the
subchannel identifier.
66-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 66-3 To configure basic options on a VS card

1
Select:

a
To specify a voiceband channel on a VS card, enter:

To specify a voiceband profile, enter:

Select:
OPTIONS BASIC_OPTION
To configure the sub channel ID, enter:

SUBCHAN_ID <value>
where value is 4 to 255
To configure the minimum jitter, enter:

MIN_JITTER <value>
where value is 1 to 130 ms
To configure the LOC monitor, select:

LOC_MONITOR
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE

April 2001 90-4521-43
66-7
66.5
Configuring CAS on a VS card

You can configure pulse dialing and CAS bandwidth optimization on a per-channel
basis on a T1 or E1 VS card. When you enable pulse dialing, the VS card allocates
additional bandwidth in the traffic descriptor to support the transportation of CAS
transitions at a rate high enough for pulse dialing. The default for pulse dialing is
disabled.
When you enable CAS bandwidth optimization, the VS card deviates from
Signaling Bit Transfer Syntax FRF.11 Annex B procedures to save ATM bandwidth.
The default for CAS bandwidth optimization is enabled.
Procedure 66-4 To configure CAS on a VS card

1
Select:

a


To configure pulse dialing, select:

OPTIONS CAS PULSE_DIAL
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
To configure CAS bandwidth optimization, select:

OPTIONS BW_OPTIMIZE
Enable or disable the CAS bandwidth option, select.

ENABLE or DISABLE
66-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
66.6
Configuring per-channel gain for a VS card

You can configure gain on a per-channel basis for VS cards. The per-channel gain
determines the gain adjustment that the VS card performs on the ingress or egress
channel. You can configure the ingress and egress per-channel gain within a range
of 16 dB to 16 dB in 1 dB increments. The default egress and ingress per-channel
gain is 0 dB.
Procedure 66-5 To configure per-channel gain for a VS card

1
Select:

a


Select:
OPTIONS GAIN
To specify the ingress gain, enter:

INGRESS <value>
where value is 16 dB to 16 dB in 1 dB increments
To specify the egress gain, enter:

EGRESS <value>
where value is 16 dB to 16 dB in 1 dB increments

April 2001 90-4521-43
66-9
66.7
Configuring a 64 kb/s clear channel

You can configure a 64 kb/s clear channel on a per-channel basis. When you enable
a clear channel, data passes transparently through the channel. You cannot configure
a clear channel for gain adjustment, echo cancellation, silence suppression,
compression and other voiceband processing functions such as fax and voiceband
data modem detection. The default is disabled.
You can configure a clear channel packing factor on a per-channel basis. The clear
channel packing factor affects the amount of delay and bandwidth that a channel
consumes when it is in clear channel mode. You can configure the packing factor for
a clear channel within the range of 1 to 4. The default value for the clear channel
packing factor is 4.
Procedure 66-6 Configuring a 64 kb/s clear channel

1
Select:

a
To specify a voiceband channel for a VS or CE card, enter:



Select:
OPTIONS PERM_CLEAR
To enable or disable a permanent channel, select:

DISABLE or ENABLE
To configure the clear channel packing factor, enter:

PACK_FACTOR <value>
where value is 1 to 4
66-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
66.8
Configuring echo cancellation

You can enable or disable echo cancellation on a per-channel basis. The VS cards
support only one-way echo cancellation. When you enable one-way echo
cancellation, the card monitors ingress and egress speech to estimate the amount of
undesired echo of the egress speech that may be present in the ingress speech. The
card uses this estimate to cancel echoes on the ingress signal. When you require echo
cancellation, ensure that it is enabled at both ends of the connection. The default for
echo cancellation is enabled.
T1 CE and E1 CE cards with a CE-EC module support both one-way and two-way
echo cancellation. In two-way mode, echo estimates are subtracted from both the
ingress and egress signals through the card configured for two-way operation. See
section 66.1 for more information on these two modes of operation; see section 64.8
for information about how to configure the mode of operation.
For voiceband channels on a VS card, you can specify the minimum external echo
return loss that the echo canceller requires on a per-channel basis. The external echo
return loss is the attenuation of the echo because of transmission and hybrid loss in
the near-end path. If the near-end path has sufficient hybrid loss, then specify a high
value for echo return loss. If the hybrid loss is poor, then specify a lower value for
echo return loss. The default value for the external echo return loss is 6 dB.
For voiceband channels on the T1 CE and E1 CE cards configured with a CE-EC
module, external echo return loss is configured at the port-level. See section 64.8 for
more information.
You can enable the nonlinear processor on a per-channel basis. When you enable the
nonlinear processor, it reduces low-level residual echo signals. The default for the
nonlinear processor is enabled.
Procedure 66-7 To configure echo cancellation

1
Select:

a
To specify a voiceband channel for a VS or a CE card, enter:

To specify a voiceband profile for a channel on a VS card, enter:

To specify a voiceband profile for a channel on a CE card, enter:


April 2001 90-4521-43
66-11
Select:
OPTIONS SPEECH ECHO_CANCEL
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
If you enable echo cancellation for a channel on a VS card in step 4, you must set
the external echo return loss.
EXTERN_ERL 3_DB or 6_DB
To set the nonlinear processor, select:

NLP ENABLE or DISABLE
66.9
Configuring a speech coder

You can configure speech coding on a per-channel basis. The VS card provides
speech coding to reduce the amount of bandwidth that is required to transport speech
through an ATM network.
Table 66-2 lists the speech coders that the VS cards support. A speech coder with a
low bit rate is not suitable for use with a fax or modem; however, the VS card detects
fax and modem signals and automatically switches to a compatible coding mode. For
more information, see section 66.15 and section 66.16. The default is G.729A
compression at 8 kb/s.
Table 66-2 Supported speech coders
Speech coder
Transmission
Description
G.711
64 kb/s Mu-law
The channel uses G.711 compression and encapsulates the

compressed data within ATM cells for transport through the
ATM network. The card supports Mu-law and A-law.
64 kb/s A-law
G.723.1
5.3 kb/s
6.3 kb/s
G.726
32 kb/s

ATM network.
G.729A
8 kb/s
The channel uses G.729 Annex A compression and

encapsulates the compressed data within ATM cells for
transport through the ATM network.
NetCoder
8 kb/s
The channel uses the NetCoder compression algorithm and

encapsulates the compressed data within ATM cells for
transport through the ATM network.
9.6 kb/s
66-12
The channel uses G.723.1 compression and encapsulates the

ATM network.

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 66-8 To configure speech coding on a VS card

1
Select:

a
To specify a voiceband channel on a VS card, enter:

See Table 15-8 for vs_channel_endpoint values.

Select:
OPTIONS SPEECH SPEECH_CODER
Select the speech coding and compression option.

a
To configure speech and compression as G.711, select:

G_711 U_LAW or A_LAW
To configure speech and compression as G.726, select:

32_KBIT/S
To configure speech and compression as G.723.1, select:

G_723_1 5.3 KBIT/S or 6.3 KBIT/S
To configure speech and compression as G.729 Annex A, select:

G_729_A
To configure speech and compression as NetCoder, select:

NETCODER 8_KBIT/S or 9.6_KBIT/S

April 2001 90-4521-43
66-13
66.10
Configuring the speech packing factor on VS cards

You can configure the packing factor for speech compression on a per-channel basis
on T1 VS and E1 VS cards. Speech compression affects the amount of delay and
bandwidth that the channel uses when it is in speech coding mode. The packing
factor provides a balance between bandwidth efficiency and delay: a lower packing
factor provides a lower packing delay and a higher packing factor may provide better
bandwidth efficiency.
Table 66-3 lists the valid ranges and defaults for the VS card.
Table 66-3 Packing factor values for speech coders for VS cards
Speech coder
Transmission
Range
Default
G.711
64 kb/s Mu-law
1 to 4
5.3 kb/s
1 to 4
6.3 kb/s
1 to 3
G.726
32 kb/s
1 to 9
G.729A
8 kb/s
1 to 8
NetCoder
8 kb/s
1 to 6
9.6 kb/s
1 to 5
64 kb/s A-law
G.723.1
Procedure 66-9 To configure speech compression on a VS card

1
Select:

a


Enter:
OPTIONS SPEECH PACK_FACTOR <value>
See Table 66-7 for packing factor values.
66-14

90-4521-43 April 2001
66.11
Connected channel limitations due to coder and packing

factor configuration
For some combinations of coder and packing factor, processing limitations of the VS
card limit the maximum number of channels that can be connected on the card to an
amount that is less than the physical number of channels that the card supports.
Table 66-4 shows the limitation for each combination of coder and packing factor.
This limitation applies to both the configured voice coder and, if fax/modem bypass
is enabled, the configured fax/modem bypass coder. For example, if the configured
voice coder of every channel on the card is G.729A, PF = 3, and the configured
bypass coder of every channel on the card is G.711, PF = 4, then you can
simultaneously connect a maximum of 96 channels on the card. However, if the
bypass coder of every channel is G.726, PF = 4, the number of channels you can
connect before the processing limitation is reached increases to 124.
Table 66-4 Limits on the number of connected channels
Coder
PF = 1
PF = 2
PF = 3
PF = 4
PF = 5
PF = 6
PF = 7
PF = 8
PF = 9
Clear Channel or G.711
30
69
76
96
G.726 32 kb/s
42
84
119
124
79
124
85
124
124
G.729A 8 kb/s
76
96
124
124
124
124
124
124
NetCoder 8 kb/s
124
124
124
124
124
124
NetCoder 9.6 kb/s
124
124
124
124
124
Additional limits
Additional limits exist on the maximum number of supported channels. These limits
are independent of the processing limitations described in Table 66-4:
The physical number of channels supported by the E1VS card is 124 (four E1s at
31 channels each).
The physical number of channels supported by the T1 VS card is 96 (four T1s at

24 channels each)
One DSP module supports a maximum of 40 voiceband channels. You can
provision a maximum of four DSP modules on a T1 VS or E1 VS card. Therefore,
the E1 VS card supports a maximum of 124 voiceband channels. However, if you
use one channel per E1 port for CAS or CCS signaling, you only require three
DSP modules. CAS and CCS signaling do not require DSP module support.

April 2001 90-4521-43
66-15
66.12
Configuring silence suppression on VS cards

You can enable silence suppression on a per-channel basis on T1 VS and E1 VS
cards. Silence suppression stops the transmission of speech data for a channel over
its ATM connection during periods of silence within a conversation. The ingress
VS card controls silence suppression. By default, silence suppression is enabled.
Procedure 66-10 To configure silence suppression on a VS card

1
Select:

a


Select:
OPTIONS SPEECH SILENCE_SUPP
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
66-16

90-4521-43 April 2001
66.13
Configuring speech filters on VS cards

You can configure the post and high-pass filter on a per-channel basis for channels
that use G.723.1, G.729A, or NetCoder speech coding on T1 VS and E1 VS cards.
When you enable the speech filters, the speech quality may improve for single-hop
connections that involve a single instance of speech compression and
decompression. For multihop connections with several links that each provide
speech compression and decompression, you can improve speech quality by
disabling the filters for the intermediate VS cards in the connection and enabling the
filters for the VS cards at the near and far-end of the connection. The default for
speech filters is enabled.
Procedure 66-11 To configure speech filters on VS cards

1
Select:

a


Select:
OPTIONS SPEECH FILTERS ENABLE or DISABLE

April 2001 90-4521-43
66-17
66.14
Configuring DTMF detection on VS cards

You can configure DTMF detection on a per-channel basis for channels that use
G.723.1, G.729.A, and NetCoder speech coding on T1 VS and E1 VS cards. You do
not need to configure DTMF detection and regeneration for channels that are
configured for high bit rate speech coding, such as G.711 or G.726 at 32 kb/s.
When you enable DTMF detection and the VS card detects digit tones in the ingress
signal, it sends FRF.11-compliant in-band information about the digits to the far end.
The far end uses this information to resynthesize the correct tones corresponding to
the detected digits. The default for DTMF detection is enabled.
When you enable DTMF bandwidth optimization, the VS card deviates from the
Dialed Digit Transfer Syntax FRF.11 Annex A procedures to save ATM bandwidth.
The default for DTMF bandwidth optimization is enabled.
Procedure 66-12 To configure DTMF detection on VS cards

1
Select:

a


Select:
OPTIONS SPEECH DTMF_DETECT
To enable or disable DTMF detection, select:

ENABLE or DISABLE
To set DTMF bandwidth optimization, select:

BW_OPTIMIZE ENABLE or DISABLE
66-18

90-4521-43 April 2001
66.15
Configuring fax demodulation on VS cards

You can configure fax demodulation on a per-channel basis on T1 VS and E1 VS
cards. When you enable fax demodulation, the VS card monitors the channel for a
fax signal. When the card detects a fax signal, the card switches the coding mode to
fax demodulation.
Table 66-5 lists the fax modulations that the VS card supports.
Table 66-5 Supported fax modulations on T1 VS and E1 VS cards
Modulation
Transmission level
V.27
2.4 kb/s or 4.8 kb/s
V.29
7.2 kb/s or 9.6 kb/s
V.33
12 kb/s or 14.4 kb/s
V.17
7.2 kb/s, 9.6 kb/s, 12 kb/s, or 14.4 kb/s
When you disable the fax demodulation, the card uses the fax bypass mode or the
configured speech coder. Fax demodulation is more bandwidth efficient that fax
bypass. When fax demodulation and fax bypass are enabled, the VS card uses fax
demodulation when fax signals are present. See section 66.16 for more information
about fax bypassing. See section 66.9 for more information about speech coding. The
default for fax demodulation is enabled.
You can configure the maximum fax rate allowed on the channel. When a fax
attempts to communicate at a rate that is higher that the maximum fax rate, the fax is
transmitted at the maximum fax rate or lower. You can configure the maximum fax
rate at: 2400, 4800, 9600, and 14 400. The default value for the maximum fax rate
is 14 400.
You can configure the fax transmission level. The fax transmission level specifies
the absolute transmission power level for an outgoing fax transmission. You can
configure the fax transmission level within a range of 16.5 dBm to 3.5 dBm in
1 dBm increments. The default value for the fax transmission level is 13.5 dBm.

April 2001 90-4521-43
66-19
Procedure 66-13 To configure fax demodulation on VS cards

1
Select:

a


Select:
OPTIONS FAX_DEMODUL
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
b
To specify the maximum fax rate, select:

MAX_FAX_RATE 2.4_KBIT/S or 4.8_KBIT/S or 9.6_KBIT/S
or 14.4_KBIT/S
To specify the fax transmission level, enter:

FAX_TX_LEVEL <value>
where value is 16.5 dBm to 3.5 dBm in 1 dBm increments
66-20

90-4521-43 April 2001
66.16
Configuring fax and modem bypass on VS cards

You can configure fax and modem bypass on a per-channel basis on T1 VS and
E1 VS cards. When you enable fax and modem bypass, the VS card monitors the
channel for a fax or modem signal. When the card detects a fax or modem signal, the
card switches the coding mode to a higher rate coder that is compatible with fax and
modem signals. The default for fax and modem bypass is disabled.
Table 66-6 lists the bypass coders that the 7270 MSC supports. The default is G.726
compression at 32 kb/s.
Table 66-6 Supported fax and modem bypass coders
Speech coder
Transmission
Description
G.711
64 kb/s Mu-law

ATM network. The card supports Mu-law and A-law.
64 kb/s A-law
G.726
32 kb/s

ATM network.
You can configure the bypass packing factor on a per-channel basis for channels that
use speech coding. The bypass packing factor affects the amount of delay and
bandwidth that the channel uses when it is in fax and modem bypass mode.
Table 66-7 lists the valid ranges and defaults.
Table 66-7 Packing factor values and defaults
Speech coder
Transmission
Range
Default
G.711
64 kb/s Mu-law
1 to 4
1 to 9
64 kb/s A-law
G.726

April 2001 90-4521-43
32 kb/s
66-21
Procedure 66-14 To configure fax and modem bypass on VS cards

1
Select:

a


Select:
OPTIONS BYPASS
Select:
ENABLE or DISABLE
To specify the bypass coder as G.711, select:

BYPASS_CODER G.711 U_LAW or A_LAW
To specify the bypass coder as G.726, select:

BYPASS_CODER G.726 32_KBIT/S
To specify the packing factor, enter:

PACK_FACTOR <value>
See Table 66-7 for packing factor values.
66-22

90-4521-43 April 2001
67 Voiceband profiles
67.1 Overview of voiceband profiles

67.2 SVC options
67-2
67-3
67.3 Voiceband profile for a trunk group

67.4 Applying a voiceband profile
67-6
67.5 Copying a voiceband profile
67-8
67.6 Node predefined profiles

April 2001 90-4521-43
67-5
67-9
67-1
67.1
Overview of voiceband profiles

A voiceband profile is a complete set of values for the per-channel configuration
parameters of a voiceband channel. When you configure a voiceband channel, you
can copy all the parameters from a selected profile to the channel. This eliminates the
need to individually configure a large number of parameters for each channel.
Table 67-1 lists the configurable options for voiceband profiles.
Table 67-1 Configurable options for voiceband profiles
Task
Procedure
T1 and E1 CE
cards with
CE-EC module
T1 and E1 VS
cards
To create a voiceband profile
66.2
66.2
To configure a voiceband profile name
66.3
66.3
To configure voiceband options
66.1
66.1
To configure the service category, clear channel signaling, and maximum

signaling time
67.2
67.2
To associate a voiceband profile with a trunk group
67.3
67.3
To apply a voiceband profile
67.4
67.4
To copy a voiceband profile
67.5
67.5
The 7270 MSC supports two types of voiceband profiles:
user-defined profiles
node predefined profiles
Table 67-2 lists the voiceband profile groups for the 7270 MSC. See section 67.6 for
more information about node predefined profiles.
Table 67-2 Voiceband profile groups
Voiceband profile number (1)
Voiceband profile group
NMTI access
1 to 20
Node predefined profiles (2)
Read-only
51 to 70
Node user-defined (2)
Read-write
101 to120
Network management node predefined profiles (3)
Read-only
151 to 170
Network management user-defined (3)
Read-only
Notes
(1)
Profiles between 1 to 250 that are not currently allocated to one of the voiceband profile groups are
reserved for future use.
(2)
Node profiles are local to the node.
(3)
Network management profiles are downloaded to the node from the 5620 NM. You cannot modify
network management profiles from the NMTI, but you can use them to configure connections.
67-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
67.2
SVC options
You can configure SVC options on a per-profile basis. For SVCs established
between VS endpoints, these options include:
service category
clear channel signaling
maximum signaling time
For SVCs established between CE endpoints, the only SVC option you can configure
is clear channel signaling.
When an SVC is established between VS or CE endpoints, the SVC uses the
following configuration:
VS or CE endpoint at the calling side: the voiceband profile associated with the
trunk group that contains the endpoint determines the configuration options for
the SVC
VS or CE endpoint at the called side: the voiceband profile associated with the
trunk group that contains the endpoint determines the configuration options for
the SVC, except that some profile options are overridden by parameters signaled
from the calling-end endpoint.
Note SVC options are effective only when a profile is
dynamically selected for use with an SVC at the time of SVC set-up.
Service category
For the T1 VS and E1 VS cards, you can configure a service category on a per-profile
basis. When you configure a service category, SVC calls that do not signal the
service category use the service category that you configure for the voiceband
profile. The following service categories are available:
CBR
rt-VBR
nrt-VBR
UBR
The default is rt-VBR.

April 2001 90-4521-43
67-3
Procedure 67-1 To configure the service category

1
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT MORE VOICEBAND PROFILE_A <profile_number>
Select:
SVC_OPTIONS SERVICE_CAT
Select:
CONSTANT_RATE or RT_VAR_RATE or NRT_VAR_RATE or UNSPECIF_RATE
Clear channel signaling

You can configure clear channel signaling requests on a per-profile basis. When the
node receives a request for a clear channel, it temporarily disables any voiceband
processing that would interfere with the clear channel. After the call is complete, the
node resumes the previous channel processing functions.
When you enable clear channel signaling, the node attempts to set up a clear channel
when requested. When you disable clear channel signaling, the card rejects call-setup
requests that require a clear channel. The default is enabled.
Procedure 67-2 To configure clear channel signaling

1
Select:
Specify the profile.

a


Select:
SVC_OPTIONS CLR_CHAN_SIG
To enable or disable clear channel signaling requests, select:

ENABLE or DISABLE
67-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Maximum signaling time

You can configure the maximum amount of time for a SVC setup or disconnect
message to propagate across the network from one VS card to another.
When the connection does not connect or disconnect within the maximum signaling
time, the node raises an LOC alarm. You can configure the maximum signaling time
from 0 ms to 11 s in 100-ms increments.
The default is 3 s.
Procedure 67-3 To configure the maximum signaling time

1
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT MORE VOICEBAND PROFILE_A <profile_number>
Select:
SVC_OPTIONS
To configure the maximum signal time, enter:

SIGNAL_MAX_T <value>
where value is from 0 to 11 s in 100-ms increments
67.3
Voiceband profile for a trunk group

The node automatically creates a trunk group on a VS or CE port when a signaling
link is configured on that port. You must select a voiceband profile for each trunk
group that uses SVCs carrying voiceband connections.
Procedure 67-4 To configure a voiceband profile for a trunk group

1
Enter:
Enter:
TRUNK_GROUP VOICE_PROF <profile_number>

April 2001 90-4521-43
67-5
67.4
Applying a voiceband profile

You can apply voiceband profiles on a per-channel basis. When you apply a
voiceband profile to a channel, the channel uses the voiceband channel configuration
contained within the voiceband profile.
Note When you modify the voiceband profile, you must reapply
the profile to the voiceband channel.
On a circuit emulation card with the CE-EC installed, you can also apply voiceband
profiles to multiple channels with a single command. You can use the apply profile
command only on channels that are not connected in an ATM connection. When you
apply a profile to multiple channels, you have the option of disconnecting all of the
connected channels in the selected group of channels before proceeding with the
command.
Applying a voiceband profile to a channel

You can apply a voiceband profile to a channel for T1 VS and E1 VS cards and
T1 CE and E1 CE cards configured with a CE-EC module.
Procedure 67-5 To apply a voiceband profile to a channel

1
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT MORE VOICEBAND CHANNEL <channel_endpoint>
Enter:
APPLY_PROFILE <profile_number>
To view the available voiceband profiles, select:

SHOW_PROFILES PAGE_UP or PAGE_DOWN
67-6

90-4521-43 April 2001
Applying voiceband profiles to multiple channels

You can apply voiceband profiles to multiple channels on T1 CE and E1 CE cards
configured with a CE-EC module.
Procedure 67-6 To apply a voiceband profile to multiple channels

1
Select:
Enter the voiceband profile for the CE card:


3
Select:
APPLY_TO
Enter the slot, port, or channels:

a
To apply the profile to a port, enter:

PORT <port_id> CHANNELS <channel_list> or <channel_group_id>,or
ENTIRE_PORT
To apply the profile to a slot, enter:

ENTIRE_SLOT <slot_id>

April 2001 90-4521-43
67-7
67.5
Copying a voiceband profile

You can copy all the parameters from one voiceband profile to another.
Procedure 67-7 To copy a voiceband profile

1
Select:

a



3
Enter:
COPY_FROM <profile_number>
To view the available voiceband profiles, select:

SHOW_PROFILES PAGE_UP or PAGE_DOWN
67-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
67.6
Node predefined profiles

Node predefined profiles are read-only. The 7270 MSC contains predefined profiles
that are suitable for a variety of common voiceband applications such as clear
channels, speech-only channels, and fax and modem channels.
Group A profiles apply to T1 and E1 VS cards; Group B profiles apply to T1 CE and
E1 CE cards configured with a CE-EC module.
Table 67-3 lists the Group A node predefined profiles.
Table 67-3 List of Group A (VS card) node predefined profiles
Profile
Name
Silence
suppression
DTMF
detection
Other details
Clear channel
This profile provides a transparent channel with

no voiceband processing functions.
G.711 Mu-law (no compression)
No
This profile is suitable for fax and modem.
G.711 A-law (no compression)
No
G.726 32 kbit/s ADPCM
No
G.729A Speech-only (Strict

FRF.11)
Yes
Yes
This profile is not suitable for fax or modem.
G.729A Speech-only (optimized)
Yes
No

DTMF tones are compressed and decompressed
using G.729A.
G.729A Speech-only
optimization with DTMF
Yes
Yes

DTMF tones are detected at ingress and
reconstructed at egress. You need more peak
bandwidth to reserve profile 7 than profile 6. See
Table 67-7 for traffic rates.
G.729A Speech and Fax

Demodulation
Yes
Yes
This profile is suitable for speech and fax only.

The profile is not suitable for modem.
G.729A Speech and Bypass
Yes
Yes
This profile is suitable for fax and modem. The

bypass coder is G.726 32 kbit/s ADPCM.
10
G.729A Speech, Fax

Demodulation, and Bypass
Yes
Yes
This profile is suitable for fax and modem. The fax

is demodulated and the modem is bypassed. The
bypass coder is G.726 32 kbit/s ADPCM.
1120
Profiles 11 through 20 are reserved for future node predefined profiles. It is not recommended to use these profiles.

April 2001 90-4521-43
67-9
Table 67-4 shows the parameter settings for each of the Group A node predefined
profiles.
Table 67-4 Parameter settings for Group A (VS card) node predefined profiles
Parameter
Profile
1
10
Subchannel ID
Minimum Jitter
Tolerance
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
LOC Monitor
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Disab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Permanent Clear
Channel
Enab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Clear Channel PF
Ingress Gain
Egress Gain
Echo Cancellation
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Non-linear
Processor
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Min. External ERL
Speech Coder
Mu-law
A-law
G.726
32kb/s
G729A
G729A
G729A
G729A
G729A
G729A
Speech PF
P/H Filter
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Silence Suppression
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Fax Demodulation
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Enab.
Disab.
Enab.
Maximum Fax Rate
14400
14400
Fax Tx Level
13.5
13.5
Fax/Mod. Bypass
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Enab.
Enab.
Bypass Coder
G726
32kb/s
G726
32kb/s
Bypass PF
DTMF Detection
Enab.
Disab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
DTMF Optimization
Disab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Pulse Dialing
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
Disab.
CAS Optimization
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Disab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Service Category
rt-VBR
rt-VBR
rt-VBR
rt-VBR
rt-VBR
rt-VBR
rt-VBR
rt-VBR
rt-VBR
rt-VBR
Clear Channel Sig.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Enab.
Sig. Max. Time
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
67-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
Tables 67-5 and 67-6 list the Group B node predefined profiles and show their
parameter settings.
Table 67-5 List of Group B (T1 CE and E1 CE cards configured with a CE-EC module)
node predefined profiles
Profile
Name
Description
Clear channel
Provides a transparent channel. No voiceband processing

functions, such as echo cancellation, are performed.
Echo Cancellation Disabled
Does not provide echo cancellation.
Echo Cancellation Enabled
Provides echo cancellation.
Table 67-6 Parameter settings of Group B (T1 CE and E1 CE cards configured with a
CE-EC module) node predefined profiles
Function
Profile profile
1
Permanent Clear Channel
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Echo Cancellation
Disabled
Enabled
Nonlinear Processor
Enabled
Clear Channel Signaling
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled

April 2001 90-4521-43
67-11
Table 67-7 lists the traffic rates for Group A node predefined profiles.
Table 67-7 ATM traffic rates for Group A node predefined profiles
Profile
Name
Actual rate (kb/s)
Peak rate
reserved (kb/s)
Speech coder
Fax demodulation (1)
Bypass
Clear channel
84.8
86
G.711 u-law (no compression)
84.8
86
G.711 A-law (no compression)
84.8
86
G.726 32 kbit/s (ADPCM)
42.4
44
G.729A speech-only (optimized)
14.1
23 without CAS,
44 with CAS (2)
G.729A speech-only (optimized)
14.1
15 without CAS,
23 with CAS
G.729A speech-only
optimization with DTMF
14.1
23
G.729A speech and fax

demodulation
14.1
21.2
42.4
23
G.729A speech and bypass
14.1
50.9
44
10
G.729A speech, fax

demodulation, and bypass
14.1
21.2
42.4
44
Notes
(1)
The rate of 21.2 kb/s occurs for fax transmissions at 9600 bps or greater. The rate is lower for slower fax speeds.
(2)
CAS bandwidth optimization is disabled in profile 5. Extra peak bandwidth is allocated for CAS channels to accommodate
the transmission of FRF.11 signaling bit payloads at the rate of one payload every 20 ms during CAS transitions and
sustained at that rate for 500 ms following CAS transitions.
The speech coder rate is the rate when the speech coder is active. The speech coder
is active:
during speech
during fax calls for profiles with both bypass and fax demodulation disabled
during modem calls for profiles with bypass disabled
For profiles with silence suppression enabled, the transmission of speech
information stops during periods of silence in speech.
Peak rate reserved is the peak information rate in the ATM traffic descriptor of the
voiceband services profile that the node automatically assigns to a connection. This
rate is greater than or equal to the highest of the following:
speech coder
fax demodulation
bypass rate
67-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
Extra bandwidth beyond the highest of these rates is reserved to accommodate the
transport of the following:
FRF.11 signaling bit payloads

FRF.11 dialed digit payloads
ATM OAM cells

April 2001 90-4521-43
67-13
67-14

90-4521-43 April 2001
68 Viewing voiceband information
68.1 Viewing voiceband information
68-2
68.2 Voiceband parameter dependencies
68-3
68.3 Viewing information about voiceband channels and voiceband

profiles 68-5
68.4 Viewing CAS transport information
68-7
68.5 Viewing permanent clear channel information

68.6 Viewing speech information
68-8
68-9
68.7 Viewing fax and modem information
68-10
68.8 Viewing SVC options information of voiceband profiles

April 2001 90-4521-43
68-11
68-1
68.1
Viewing voiceband information

Table 68-1 describes the information displayed on the voiceband configuration
screens.
Table 68-1 Configuration information for voiceband channels and voiceband profiles
Field
Description
This field indicates the voiceband profile identifier or the voiceband channel endpoint
identifier.
Type
This field indicates the type of configured VS or CE card.
Status
This field indicates the status of the voiceband channel for the T1 VS or E1 VS card:
Name
Inactive: the channel is not connected to an ATM connection

Ok: the channel is connected and is not in an alarm state
LOC: the channel LOC alarm has been raised
This field indicates the optional alphanumeric name of the voiceband profile. See
section 66.3 for more information.
Table 68-2 lists voiceband channel status items that are specific to the CE-EC
module.
Table 68-2 Channel status items specific to the CE-EC module
68-2
Status field
Values
Section
Coding Mode
Clear Channel, Speech, Not Connected
64.3
EC Disabled Due to Tone
Yes, No
64.3
CAS Clear Channel Override
Yes, No
64.6

90-4521-43 April 2001
68.2
Voiceband parameter dependencies

Several of the voiceband channel parameters displayed on the screen depend on the
configuration values of other voiceband parameters.
Note Only the section on echo cancellation described below
applies to T1 CE and E1 CE cards configured with a CE-EC module.

The rest of the voiceband parameters described below apply to T1 VS
and E1 VS cards only.
Permanent clear channel

When you enable permanent clear channel on a channel, the value of Not Applicable
displays for:
ingress gain
egress gain
speech coder
echo cancellation
silence suppression
DTMF detection
fax demodulation
bypass
When you disable permanent clear channel on a channel, the value of Not Applicable
displays for the clear channel packing factor.
When you change permanent clear channel from disabled to enabled, the default
value displays for the clear channel packing factor.
When you change the configuration of permanent clear channel from enabled to
disabled, the default values display for:
ingress gain and egress gain

echo cancellation, non-linear processor, and minimum external ERL
speech coder and speech packing factor
post and high-pass filter and silence suppression
fax demodulation, maximum fax rate, and fax transmission level
fax and modem bypass, bypass coder, and bypass packing factor
DTMF detection and DTMF bandwidth optimization

April 2001 90-4521-43
68-3
Fax and modem bypass

When you disable fax and modem bypass on a channel, the value of Not Applicable
displays for:
bypass
bypass coder
bypass packing factor
When you change fax and modem bypass from disabled to enabled, the default
parameter values display for:
bypass
bypass coder
bypass packing factor
When you change the bypass configuration for a channel, the default value displays
for the bypass packing factor.
Fax demodulation
When you disable fax demodulation for a channel, the value of Not Applicable
displays for:
maximum fax rate

When you change the fax demodulation configuration from disabled to enabled, the
default values display for:
maximum fax rate

Speech coder
When you configure the speech coder for any G.711 or G.726 coders, the value of
Not Applicable displays for high-pass and post filters. When you change the
speech coder configuration from G.711 or G.726 to any other value, the default
values display for the high-pass and post filters.
When you change the speech coder configuration for a channel, the default value
displays for the speech packing factor.
68-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Echo cancellation
When you disable echo cancellation for a channel, the value of Not Applicable
displays for:
minimum external ERL (T1 VS and E1 VS cards only)

nonlinear processor
When you change the echo cancellation configuration from disabled to enabled, the
default values display for:
minimum external ERL (T1 VS and E1 VS cards only)

nonlinear processor
DTMF detection
When you disable DTMF detection for a channel, the value of Not Applicable
displays for DTMF bandwidth optimization.
When you change the DTMF detection configuration from disabled to enabled, the
the default values display for DTMF bandwidth optimization.
CAS transport
When a channel is configured for CAS transport, Enabled displays on the channel
options screen. If CAS transport is disabled, Not Applicable displays.
When you configure the signaling for a port on the E1 VS card to any value other
than CAS, Not Applicable displays on the channel options screen in the CAS field.
When the signaling configuration for a port changes from any other value to CAS,
the default values display for:
pulse dialing
CAS bandwidth optimization
When you disable RBS on at T1 VS card, Not Applicable displays on the screen for
the CAS field.
When you change RBS from disabled to enabled, the default values for the following
configuration CAS parameters display:
pulse dialing
CAS bandwidth optimization
68.3
Viewing information about voiceband channels and

voiceband profiles
Table 68-3 lists the displayed configuration information for voiceband channels and
voiceband profiles.

April 2001 90-4521-43
68-5
Table 68-3 Configuration information for voiceband channels and voiceband profiles
Field
Basic
Options
Description
Section
T1 and E1
VS cards
T1 and E1
CE cards
with CE-EC
module
Subchannel ID
This field indicates the subchannel identifier.
66.4
Min. Jitter Toler.
This field indicates the minimum jitter tolerance
66.4
LOC Monitoring
This field indicates whether LOC monitoring is enabled or

disabled.
66.4
CAS Transport
This field indicates whether CAS transport is enabled. Not

applicable displays when CAS transport is not enabled.
66.5
Ingress Gain
This field shows channel gain in the ingress direction. Not

applicable displays when permanent clear channel is
enabled.
66.6
Egress Gain
This field shows channel gain in the egress direction. Not

applicable displays when permanent clear channel is
enabled.
66.6
This field indicates whether permanent clear channel is

enabled or disabled.
66.7
66.7
Speech
This field indicates the type of speech coding used on the

channel. See section 66.9 for speech coder configuration
types.
66.12
Echo
Cancellation
This field indicates whether echo cancellation is enabled,

disabled, or not applicable. For the CE-EC only, it also
shows whether the nonlinear processor is enabled or
disabled.
66.8
66.8
Silence
Suppress.
This field indicates whether silence suppression is

enabled, disabled, or not applicable.
66.12
DTMF Detection
This field indicates whether DTMF detection is enabled,

disabled, or not applicable.
66.14
This field indicates one of:
66.15
66.15
Speech
Fax/Modem
Fax
Demodulation
Bypass
Disabled: the fax demodulation is disabled

Max: maximum fax rate followed by the current
configuration
Not Applicable: permanent clear channel is enabled
Disabled: fax/modem bypass is disabled

the bypass coders current value
Note
(1)
68-6
To view additional per-channel information related to echo cancellation for T1 VS and E1 VS cards, including information
on the nonlinear processor and minimum external ERL, see section 68-4.

90-4521-43 April 2001
Procedure 68-1 To view voiceband channel and voiceband profile

information
1
Select:

a
To specify a voiceband channel for a VS or CE card, enter:



Select:
OPTIONS
68.4
Viewing CAS transport information

Table 68-4 describes the displayed configuration information for CAS transport.
Table 68-4 Configuration information for CAS transport
Field
CAS Transport
Description
Section
Pulse Dialing
This field indicates whether pulse

dialing is enabled or disabled.
66.5
CAS Bandwidth Optimization
This field indicates whether CAS

bandwidth optimization is enabled
or disabled.
66.5

April 2001 90-4521-43
68-7
Procedure 68-2 To view CAS transport information

1
Enter:
CONFIG OBJECT MORE VOICEBAND CHANNEL <vs_channel_endpoint>
Select:
OPTIONS CAS
68.5
Viewing permanent clear channel information

Table 68-5 describes the displayed configuration information for permanent clear
channels.
Table 68-5 Configuration information for permanent clear channel
Field
Description
Section
This field indicates whether permanent clear channel is

66.7
Clear Channel Packing Factor
This field indicates the clear channel packing factor.
66.7
Procedure 68-3 To view permanent clear channel information

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS PERM_CLEAR
68-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
68.6
Viewing speech information

Table 68-6 describes the displayed configuration information for speech.
Table 68-6 Configuration information for speech
Field
Description
Section
Speech Coder
This field indicates the type of speech coding used on the channel.
66.9
This field indicates the speech packing factor.
66.10
66.12
Speech Coder
Speech Packing Factor

Silence Suppression
High Pass and Post

Filters
Echo Cancellation
This field indicates whether the high-pass filters and post filters are
66.13
66.8
Echo
Cancellation
Enabled: echo cancellation is enabled

Disabled: echo cancellation is disabled
Not applicable: permanent clear channel is enabled
Minimum External ERL
This field indicates the minimum external echo return loss.
66.8
Nonlinear Processor
(NLP)
This field indicates if the nonlinear processor is enabled or

disabled.
66.8
66.14
DTMF Detection
DTMF
Detection
Enabled: silence suppression is enabled

Disabled: silence suppression is disabled
DTMF Bandwidth
Optimization
Enabled: DTMF detection is enabled

Disabled: DTMF detection is disabled
This field indicates the DTMF bandwidth optimization is enabled or

disabled.
66.14
Procedure 68-4 To view speech information

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS SPEECH

April 2001 90-4521-43
68-9
68.7
Viewing fax and modem information

Table 68-7 describes the displayed configuration information for fax and modem.
Table 68-7 Configuration information for fax and modem
Field
Description
Section
Fax Demodulation
66.15
Fax Demodulation
Maximum Fax Rate
This field indicates the maximum fax rate of the channel.
66.15
Fax Transmission Level
This field indicates the egress fax transmission level. The

range is 16.5 to 3.5 dB.
66.15
This field indicates that the fax/modem bypass is disabled,

the bypass coders current value, or fax/modem bypass is
not applicable.
66.15
Bypass Coder
This field indicates the type of bypass coding used on the

channel.
66.16
Bypass Packing Factor
This field indicates the bypass packing factor. See

section 66.10 for packing factor ranges.
66.16
Fax/Modem Bypass
Fax/Modem Bypass
Disabled: the fax demodulation is disabled

Max: maximum fax rate followed by the current
configuration
Procedure 68-5 To view fax and modem information

1
Enter:
Select:
OPTIONS FAX_MODEM
68-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
68.8
Viewing SVC options information of voiceband profiles

Table 68-8 describes the displayed configuration information for voiceband profile
SVC options.
Table 68-8 Configuration information for SVC options
Field
SVC
Options
Description
Section
T1 and E1 VS
cards
T1 and E1 CE
cards configured
with CE-EC
module
Service Category
This field indicates the SVC service category

as CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR.
67.2
Clear Channel
Signaling
This field indicates whether the clear channel

signaling is enabled or disabled.
67.2
67.2
Signaling
Maximum Time
This field indicates the amount of time for a

signaling setup or release message to
connect across the network.
67.2
Procedure 68-6 To view SVC options information

1
Select:

a


See Table 67-2 for profile_number values
Select:
SVC_OPTIONS

April 2001 90-4521-43
68-11
68-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
100BASE-TX
100BASE-TX is an IEEE 802.3 LAN transmission standard for Fast

Ethernet. 100BASE-TX carries data at 100 Mb/s over two pairs of shielded
twisted pair or Category 5 unshielded twisted pair wire.
10BASE-T
10BASE-T is a IEEE 802.3 LAN transmission standard for Ethernet.

10BASE-T carries data at 10Mb/s to a maximum distance of 100 m over
unshielded twisted pair cabling.
2B1Q
two binary, one quaternary

2B1Q is an ISDN line encoding technique that uses two bits to represent four
variations in amplitude and polarity.
AAL
ATM adaptation layer

The AAL sits above the ATM layer and adapts non-ATM bit streams into
ATM cells.
AAL1
ATM adaptation layer - type 1

AAL1 is the type of ATM adaptation that constant bit rate service
applications use.
AAL5
ATM adaptation layer type 5

AAL5 supports the conversion of VBR, delay-tolerant, connection-oriented
traffic such as signaling and control data, and network management data.
This traffic requires minimal sequencing and minimal error detection
support.

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-1
Glossary
ABR
available bit rate

ABR is an ATM Forum service category that supports both connectionless
and connection-oriented services. Applications that have unpredictable
bandwidth requirements use ABR. All ABR connections share resources and
receive as much bandwidth as is available on an as-needed basis.
ABR provides guaranteed low cell loss, but does not specify an upper limit
on delay.
ACO
alarm cut off
ACP
adjunct call processor

The ACP is an off-board call processor that performs signaling for one or
more ports on the 7270 MSC system through signaling API links and proxy
signaling links.
ACR
adaptive clock recovery

ACR is the rate in cells/s at which the ABR source can send data.
ACT
absolute congestion threshold

ACT is a frame relay parameter related to the buffer capacity of a frame relay
device. At the ACT, the frame relay device discards all newly arriving
frames and raises a congestion alarm. See also MCT and SCT.
ADSL
asymmetrical digital subscriber line

ADSL is a digital telecommunications protocol designed for an upstream
data flow (client-to-server) that is a fraction of the downstream data flow
(server-to-client). The upstream data flow is measured in kilobits and the
downstream data flow is measured in megabits.
ADSL uses existing twisted pair telephone lines to deliver applications such
as video on demand and the World Wide Web, where the bulk of the data is
sent from the server to the client.
AESA
ATM end system address

The AESA is a 20-byte ATM address that identifies one or more
ATM endpoints for switched virtual connections.
AFI
authority and format identifier

The AFI is a two-digit field in the prefix of an ATM address that defines the
address format. Valid AFI formats include ICD, DCC, and E.164.
AIA
alarm indication area

The AIA is on the front panel of a shelf. It has LEDs to display minor, major,
and critical alarms.
GL-2

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
AINI
ATM Internet interface

The AINI acts as a gateway protocol between PNNI and SS7 networks, and
between PNNI networks. AINI is a combination of B-ISUP routing and
PNNI signaling.
AIS
alarm indication signal

An AIS is a code sent downstream in a digital network to indicate that a
traffic-related defect has been detected. It is also known as an RAI or yellow
alarm.
AMI
alternate mark inversion

AMI is the line-coding format in transmission systems whereby successive
ones (marks) are alternately inverted (sent with polarity opposite that of the
preceding mark).
ANSI
American National Standards Institute

ANSI is a nonprofit organization that develops and publishes standards, and
represents the U.S. in some international standards groups.
anycast
Anycast is a type of address that initiates communications between two

systems, such as between a client and a server.
API
application programming interface

An API is a set of programming functions and routines that act as an
interface to the network for application programs. APIs translate high-level
program code into low-level computer instructions that run the network.
APIs allow application programs to communicate with low-level programs
handling network data traffic.
ARP
address resolution protocol

ARP is a protocol within TCP/IP that maps IP addresses to Ethernet
MAC addresses. TCP/IP requires ARP for use with Ethernet.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Exchange

ASCII defines codes for a character set in binary bits. Out of a total of
128 characters, 96 are assigned to the alphabet, numbers, punctuation marks,
and other symbols. The remaining characters are assigned to control
functions.
ATM
asynchronous transfer mode

ATM is a multiplexing and switching technique in which information is
organized into fixed-length cells, with each cell consisting of an
identification header field and an information field. ATM is asynchronous in
the sense that the use of the cells depends on the required or instantaneous
bit rate.
ATM uses logical connections to provide QoS guarantees that enable
different traffic types, such as data, voice, and video, to be carried over the
same LAN or WAN.

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-3
Glossary
ATM Forum
The ATM Forum is an industry organization that defines standards for

ATM networking protocols.
AvCR_mT
available cell rate minimum threshold

The AvCR_mT value ensures that the value of significant change, that is
(AvCR_PM/100 * lastAdvertisedAvCR), is nonzero. The AvCR_mT is
expressed as a percentage.
AvCR_PM
available cell rate proportional multiplier

The AvCR_PM parameter enables a PNNI node to detect and advertise
significant bandwidth changes to other nodes in the peer group. The
AvCR_PM is expressed as a percentage.
AWG
American wire gauge

AWG is a standard measuring gauge for non-ferrous conductors.
B8ZS
binary 8-zero suppression

B8ZS is a technique used to accommodate the ones density requirement for
digital T-carrier facilities in the public network, while allowing 64 kb/s clear
data per channel.
bandwidth
Bandwidth is transmission capacity measured in hertz. The greater the

bandwidth, the more information can be sent over a circuit or transmission
medium in a given time.
baud
Baud is a measurement of transmission speeds for a data transmission

device. Baud is expressed in discrete conditions or signal events per second.
Bc
committed burst rate

The Bc is the maximum number of bits of user data that the network commits
to transfer over the committed rate measurement interval (Tc), under normal
circumstances.
Be
excess burst rate

The Be is the maximum number of bits of uncommitted user data in excess
of Bc that the network attempts to transfer over the committed rate
measurement interval (Tc).
BECN
backward explicit congestion notification
BECN bit
backward explicit congestion notification bit

The BECN bit is set in any frame switched from a DLC with a frame stream
in a congested state. The bit informs the receiving device that any frame
transmitted in reply on this DLC is likely to experience congestion.
BER
bit error ratio

The BER is the ratio of incorrect bits to total number of bits transmitted.
BERT
bit error ratio tester

A BERT is a device that tests the quality of a connection for communication.
GL-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
B-ICI
broadband inter-carrier interface
BIP
bit interleaved parity

BIP is a parity technique in which multiple parity bits are used in an
interleaved fashion over the data.
With even parity, an N-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment
over a specified portion of the signal so that the first bit of the code provides
even parity over the first bit of all N-bit sequences within the specified
portion.
B-ISDN
broadband integrated services digital network
B-ISSI
broadband inter-switching system interface

A cell relay link is a B-ISSI when it spans two ATM switches belonging to
one carrier.
B-ISUP
broadband ISDN user part

The B-ISUP is used in national and international B-ISDN networks.
B-ISUP enables public operators to introduce network specific signaling
messages and information elements. The B-ISUP uses the service provided
by the Message Transfer Part. It includes the basic bearer services of the
capability set 1 B-ISDN application and follows the numbering plan
according to ITU-T Recommendation E.164.
BITS
building integrated timing source

A BITS is a clock that supplies DS1 or composite clock timing reference to
all other clocks in a building.
blocking
Blocking occurs when calls cannot be completed because of congestion or

full use of switching capacity.
BNC
Bayonet Neil-Concelman
A BNC connector is a locking connector for slim coaxial cables, such as
those used for Ethernet.
BPDU
bridge protocol data unit

BPDU is the frame that LAN bridges supporting the 802.1d STP use to
communicate with each other.
bridge
A bridge is a LAN to LAN or LAN to WAN interconnecting device that

directs the flow of data. It distributes data within its own network or
forwards it to the destination network. Bridges make forwarding decisions
based on MAC-layer addresses.
bridging
Bridging is the process that bridges and routers use to make forwarding
decisions based on MAC layer addresses.
broadcast
Broadcasting a message sends it to all devices or nodes in a network, rather

than to specific devices. It also refers to the address of all devices in a
network.

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-5
Glossary
BTS
base transceiver station
byte
A byte is a group of eight bits, also called one octet.
cable
A cable is the physical medium for transmitting communications data.
CAC
connection admission control

CAC is an algorithm that evaluates whether or not a new connection can be
added to the node.
CAC examines QoS objectives defined by the PVC service category, as well
as its configured traffic descriptor and traffic rates, and determines whether
the 7270 MSC system can satisfy these criteria for the PVC and whether the
PVC will affect the guaranteed QoS that existing PVCs already have on the
node.
call
A call is a stream of information that flows through the network on a path.

Calls can be voice or data, and are generated at the customer end of the
network.
CAS
channel associated signaling

CAS is a type of E1 link in which 4 bits of signaling per timeslot are
multiplexed into timeslot 16.
CBR
constant bit rate

CBR is an ATM Forum service category that supports traffic characterized
by a service bit rate specified by a constant value and an evenly spaced cell
stream.
CCE
channelized circuit emulation
CCIP
Control Card Interconnect panel

The CCIP is a unit in the 7270 MSC system peripheral shelf that provides
external management and timing interfaces to the Control-2 card.
CCS
common channel signaling

CCS is a type of E1 link in which timeslot 16 is used for message-oriented
signaling.
CDV
cell delay variation

CDV is a measure of cell clumping, or how much more closely cells are
spaced than the nominal interval.
CDVT
cell delay variation tolerance
CE
circuit emulation
CE-EC
circuit emulation-echo cancellation

The CE-EC module is an add-on module for the PRI CE cards.
cell
GL-6
A cell is the basic unit of data in an ATM network. It is 53 bytes long and
contains a 5-byte header and 48 bytes of user data.

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
CFA
carrier failure alarm
CFR
channelized frame relay
channel
A channel is a physical or logical communications path that carries one call.
CIR
committed information rate

The CIR is the guaranteed minimum throughput between two end-user
devices over the frame relay network, under normal operating
circumstances.
circuit switching
Circuit switching establishes an on-demand data transmission connection

between two sending and receiving devices. The connection is reserved for
the devices until it is released.
client
A client is a device, system, or process that requests a service of another

computer system or process.
CLIP
calling line identification presentation

CLIP is an independent, supplementary service that sends the
B-ISDN number of the calling party to the called party.
CLIR
calling line identification restriction

CLIR is an independent, supplementary service that suppresses calling party
identification, such as a CLIP.
CLNP
connectionless network protocol

CLNP is the OSI-standard network layer protocol. It uses routing tables
rather than dedicated connections to forward user information between end
stations.
CLP
cell loss priority

CLP is a one-bit field in the ATM cell header that corresponds to the loss
priority of a cell. Lower priority cells can be discarded if there is congestion.
CLR
cell loss ratio

CLR is the ratio of discarded cells to cells that are successfully transmitted.
CMI
code mark inversion
CO
central office
The CO is a telephone company facility where subscriber lines are joined to
switching equipment for connecting subscribers to each other.
CL-BI
connectionless bearer independent

CL-BI is used to exchange information between two endpoints in the
Control plane only. No bearer channel is allocated for this type of
connection.

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-7
Glossary
CO-BI
connection oriented bearer independent

CO-BI is used to establish connections between two endpoints and exchange
information only on the Control plane. No bearer channel is allocated for this
type of connection.
COLP
connected line identification presentation

COLP is an independent, supplementary service that sends the B-ISDN
number of the called party to the calling party.
CPCS
common part convergence sublayer
CPE
customer premises equipment

CPE is the system or device located at the customer site.
CPSS
Control Packet Switching System

CPSS is the proprietary network protocol for communication between
vendor equipment. Similar to X.25, CPSS is a packet-switched system that
transfers configuration and status information between nodes.
CPU
central processing unit

The CPU is the part of a computer that performs the logic, computational,
and decision-making functions. The CPU is typically a single computer chip.
CRC
cyclic redundancy check

CRC is a process that checks the integrity of a block of data.
CRM
clear request message
CS
controlled slip
A controlled slip occurs when the replication or deletion of a DS1 frame is
performed by the CI.
CSL
CUG subscription list

A CSL is a list of CUGs to which a subscriber belongs.
CSMA/CD
carrier sense multiple access with collision detection

CSMA/CD is the method of accessing a LAN specified in IEEE 802.3. A
device listens until no signals are detected (carrier sense), then transmits and
checks to see if more than one signal is present (collision detection). If a
signal is detected, each device backs off and waits briefly before attempting
transmission again. CSMA/CD is used on 802.3 and Ethernet LANs.
CSU
channel service unit

A CSU provides the functionality for customer equipment to interface with
a T1 line.
CTC
common transmit clock
CTD
cell transfer delay
GL-8

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
CTS
clear to send
CTS is an RS-232 signal that is used in the exchange of data to indicate that
the path is ready to carry data.
CUG
closed user group

A CUG is a group of subscribers with call access restrictions. CUGs can
have different combinations of access restrictions to control communication
between CUG members and non-members. The CUG is identified by a
combination of the CUG data network identification and the CUG interlock
code.
DBC
database compatibility
DCE
data communications equipment

DCE refers to the gender of an interface on a data device, such as a modem
or transceiver. The pinouts are wired so that pin 2 receives data and pin 3
transmits data. In a direct connection between interfaces, one port must be
DCE, the other DTE.
DDI
direct dial in
DDI is a service where calls made to a DDI number arrive directly, without
assistance from an organizations operator, to an extension or group of
extensions. When an agent answers a call made to a DDI number,
information about the caller is automatically displayed.
DDS
dataphone digital service

DDS is an AT&T digital transmission service using DS0-A and DS0-B
formats. The ITU-T version of DDS is Recommendation X.50.
DE
discard eligibility
The DE is a bit in the header of each frame relay frame that, when set,
indicates that the frame should be discarded when network congestion has
increased past an acceptable level. The frame should be discarded before
other frames that do not have the DE bit set.
destination address
The destination address is the part of a message that indicates the recipient.
DIP
dual in-line package

A DIP is a tiny switch with on and off settings that is attached to a printed
circuit board. On the 7270 MSC system, there are DIP switches on the
Switching shelf, Peripheral shelves, and HSPSs to indicate the ISLs.
DLC
data link connection

A DLC is a frame relay connection.
DLCI
data link connection identifier

A DLCI identifies a DLC. DLCIs must be unique on a frame stream but not
across the network. All frames that have the same DLCI and that are carried
in the same frame stream are associated with the same logical connection.

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-9
Glossary
DM
degraded minutes
DMDS
Digital Media Distribution Service

DMDS is an IP multicast solution that uses ADSL to provide integrated
delivery of IP-based media sources (such as video and music channels),
high-speed Internet access, and voice traffic over a reliable,
point-to-multipoint ATM connection infrastructure.
DNU
do not use
DOC
Department of Communications
domain
A domain is a management group into which ATM, TDM, and management

nodes are organized. Domains allow a large network to be divided into
smaller subnetworks and reduce CPSS complexity. The result is improved
network performance and reliability, particularly in large networks.
Management nodes belong to domain 0 and can exchange CPSS messages
with nodes in all other domains. Nodes in all other domains can exchange
CPSS messages with only the nodes in their particular domain. Each domain
can contain up to 1023 networking nodes.
DRAM
dynamic random access memory

DRAM is RAM that requires electronic refresh cycles every few
milliseconds to preserve its data.
driver
A driver is a software module that reformats or interprets communications

between a computer and a peripheral device.
DS
digital signal
DS0
digital signal, level 0

DS0 is a worldwide standard for PCM digitized voice. It operates at 64 kb/s.
DS1

DS1 refers to digital signal level 1, which is created by multiplexing four
DS1 channels for a bandwidth of 1.544 Mb/s. It is also called T1.
DS3

DS3 refers to digital signal level 3, which is created by multiplexing
28 T1 channels for a bandwidth of 44.736 Mb/s. It is also called T3.
DSC
Dual Switching card

A DSC filters cells off the switching backplane and sends them out through
an intershelf link to an access shelf. Each DSC contains two intershelf link
outputs.
DSR
data set ready
DSS2
digital subscriber system number 2

DSS2 is a protocol that specifies procedures for establishing, maintaining,
and clearing network connections at the B-ISDN user-network interface.
GL-10

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
DSX-1
digital signal cross-connect, level 1

DSX-1 is an AT&T standard for the electrical and physical interface of a
DS1 signal inside a building.
DTE
data terminal equipment

DTE refers to the gender of the interface on a data device such as a PC. The
pinouts are wired so that pin 2 transmits data and pin 3 receives data. In a
direct connection between interfaces, one port must be DTE, the other must
be DCE.
DTL
detailed transit list

A DTL is a list of nodes that make up a path across a single PNNI peer group.
DTMF
dual tone multifrequency

DTMF is traditional touch-tone telephone service. POTS uses DTMF to
communicate which keys the user has pressed when dialing. When the user
presses a key on the telephone, the telephone generates two tones at the same
time. The first tone indicates the row and the second tone indicates the
column. The exchange decodes these tones to determine which key the user
pressed.
DTR
data terminal ready

DTR is a control signal sent from the DTE to the DCE to indicate that the
DTE is powered on and ready to communicate.
E1
E1 refers to primary rate, or aggregate bandwidth, transmissions conforming

to CCITT G.703 and G.732 at 2.048 Mb/s. E1 is the primary rate standard
commonly used in Europe.
E.164
E.164 is the international 15-digit telephony addressing system.
E3
European digital signal level 3

E3 is the European standard used instead of DS3. It is equivalent to
16 E1 timeslots and operates at 34.368 Mb/s.
EA
extended address
EA is a facility that allows larger addresses than normal for some
bit-oriented protocols.
EFCI
explicit forward congestion indication
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
EIR
excess information rate
EMC
electromagnetic compatibility
EMI
electromagnetic interference
EMI is an interruption in signals or data communications due to the
combined electric and magnetic fields associated with the flow of an electric
current.

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-11
Glossary
EN100
The EN100 interface card provides transparent bridging of Ethernet traffic

over the ATM network as specified by IEEE 802.1d. The card encapsulates
frames according to RFC 2684, segments them, and transports them over the
ATM network using the AAL5 protocol. The card has four independent
802.1d Ethernet LAN bridges that provide an interface to four Ethernet
LANs conforming to the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet MAC layer protocol.
EPD
early packet discard

EPD is a congestion control mechanism for ATM paths that attempts to
prevent delivery of partial packets through the network.
ePM
enhanced processing module

The ePM has 512 Mb of RAM and provides a processing speed of 350 Mhz
to the Control-2 and Service-2 cards.
ER
explicit rate
ER is a mechanism to control the source transmission rate. ER uses a field
in RM-cells to set the source transmission rate to a value that can be
sustained by all network nodes in the path.
ERL
echo return loss

ERL is the attenuation of echo due to transmission and hybrid loss in the
near-end path associated with an echo canceller.
ERLE
echo return loss enhancement

ERLE is the attenuation of the external echo signal as it passes through the
echo canceller toward the talker, excluding nonlinear processing by the echo
canceller.
ES
errored second
An ES is a second with one or more error events other than failed seconds.
ESD
electrostatic discharge
ESF
extended super frame

ESF is a framing format for T1 links that provides a 24-frame multiframe
with 24 64-kb/s channels per frame, a 4-kb/s FDL, and CRC-6 frame-check
sequence over each multiframe.
ESIS
end system to intermediate system
Ethernet
Ethernet is a data link layer protocol for interconnecting computer

equipment into LANs.
The Ethernet protocol specifies how data is placed on and retrieved from a
common transmission medium. It is used as the underlying transport vehicle
by several upper-level protocols, including TCP/IP and UDP/IP.
GL-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
eTM
Edge Titan Module

The eTM enhances traffic management functionality on the following cell
relay cards:
DS3 and E3
OC3 and STM1
OC3-2M and STM1-2M
The eTM provides traffic shaping in both the ingress and egress directions
on a per port basis for each service category of VPC and VCC paths. The
eTM performs traffic shaping on a per-VC basis according to the connection
traffic descriptors. The eTM also provides VPA shaping and dynamic flow
control for ABR connections using VS/VD. The eTM supports all 16 384
connections on the -2M card variants and provides substantial buffer
storage.
EXZ
excessive zero
F bit
framing bit
FAS
frame alignment signal

On E1s, FAS is a 7-bit sequence sent once per two frames of data for
alignment.
FC-PC
fiber connector-physical connector

FC-PC is a designation for fiber optic connectors designed by Nippon
Telegraph and Telephone.
FCS
frame check sequence

FCS is a cyclic redundancy check that determines errors in data packet
transmissions.
FDB
filtering database
The FDB is the database comprised of source MAC addresses along with
source segments used for the transparent Ethernet bridge filtering operation.
FDL
facilities data link

FDL is a 4000-b/s communications path between the two ends of a T1 ESF
link that uses a message protocol to send information in 12 of the 24 framing
bits in a superframe.
FE
far end
FEBE
far-end block error

FEBE is the number of blocks containing errors detected at the far end of a
connection.

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-13
Glossary
FECN bit
forward explicit congestion notification bit

FECN bits are used for congestion management in frame relay networks.
The FECN bit is set in any frame switched onto a DLC with a frame stream
that has entered a congested state. The bit informs the receiving device that
the frame is experiencing congestion.
FEPD
feedback based early packet discard
fiber optic
Fiber optic is a data transmission medium made from glass fibers. Light
sources, such as lasers and LEDs, send light through the fiber to a detector,
which then converts the light back to electrical signals.
FIC
Fabric Interface card
flow control
Flow control is the procedure that shuts down transmission when a receiving
workstation is unable to store the data that it is receiving.
FPB
frame processing bandwidth
FR
frame relay
Frame relay is a packet-switching protocol, similar to X.25, that requires
much less processing and is designed to operate at much higher speeds.
Numerous remote LAN terminals can use frame relay packet switching to
share the bandwidth of a single DS0 on a T1 link. Frame relay offers a
low-cost way of handling high-volume, bursty data transmissions.
FTP
file transfer protocol

FTP is the Internet standard protocol for transferring files from one
computer to another.
G.703
G.703 is the ITU-T recommendation pertaining to several digital

telecommunication interfaces. It relates to the physical and electrical levels
only. One example is E1 (2.048 Mb/s).
GAT
Generic Application Transport
gateway
Gateway is an IP networking term commonly used as a synonym for a

routing device. The term router refers to devices that perform network-layer
processing, and the term gateway refers to a special-purpose device that
performs an application-layer conversion of information from one protocol
stack to another.
GCAC
generic connection admission control

GCAC is used to determine if a link potentially has enough resources to
support a connection.
GCRA
generic cell rate algorithm
GDI
generating-system to data-collector interface

GDI is the interface protocol between the node that is generating data and
the data collector.
GFR
GL-14
generic frame router

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
GFT
generic functional transport

GFT is a protocol used to transport supplementary services and additional
network functions.
GND
ground
Ground is a conducting connection through which a circuit or electrical
equipment is connected to the earth or to a conducting body that is at earth
potential.
GPS
global positioning system

GPS is a system of 21 satellites that allow for the derivation of exact times
and locations around the world.
GTSM
Group Traffic State Machine
GUI
graphical user interface

A GUI is a computer user interface that incorporates graphics to make
software easier to use.
HDB-3
high density bipolar 3

HDB-3 is a bipolar coding method that does not allow more than 3
consecutive zeros.
HDLC
high-level data link control

HDLC is an ISO standard for serial data communication. HDLC is
composed of a family of bit-oriented protocols providing frames of
information with address, control, and frame-check sequence fields. It is
considered a superset of several other protocols, such as SDLC, LAP,
LAPB, and LAPD.
HO-DSP
high order - domain specific portion

The HO-DSP is the part of the ATM address that is specified by the authority
identified in the IDI field.
HSPS
High Speed Peripheral shelf
HSSI
high speed serial interface

HSSI is an electrical interface specification defined by EIA/TIA-612 and
EIA/TIA-613.
ICI
intercarrier interface
ICMP
Internet control message protocol

ICMP is a protocol that sends and receives the control and error messages
that manage the behavior of the TCP/IP protocol stack. ICMP is defined in
RFC 792 and RFC 950.
ICP
IMA control protocol
ICR
initial cell rate

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-15
Glossary
IE
information element
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEID
information element identifier
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol
IISP
Interim Inter-switch Signaling Protocol
IF
intermediate frequency
ILMI
integrated local management interface

ILMI is a protocol developed by the ATM Forum to verify the operation of,
and communicate addressing and connectivity across, the UNI.
IMA
inverse multiplexing over ATM

An algorithm that provides modular bandwidth for user access to
ATM networks over multiple links.
inARP
inverse address resolution protocol
interface
An interface is a common boundary between two devices where electrical

signals, connectors, and handshaking meet. An interface enables devices to
pass information to and from each other.
internetworking
Internetworking is communication between two networks, between two

types of networks, or between end equipment.
interoperability
Interoperability is the ability to operate software and exchange information

in a large network that is made up of several LANs.
I/O
input and output
IP
internet protocol
IP is part of the TCP/IP family of protocols that describe the software that
tracks the Internet address of nodes, routes outgoing messages, and
recognizes messages. IP is used in gateways to connect networks at
OSI network 3 and higher.
IR
intermediate reach
An optical fiber specification for single mode fiber transmission systems
suitable for distances from 2 km to 15 km (1.2 mi to 9.3 mi).
ISC
Internetworking Services card
ISIS
intermediate system to intermediate system
ISL
inter-shelf link
An ISL is cabling that carries traffic between the Switching shelf and a
Peripheral shelf or an HSPS sub-unit.
GL-16

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
ISO
International Standards Organization

The ISO is the official international organization responsible for establishing
standards.
ISP
Internet Service Provider
ITU-T
International Telecommunications Union-Telecommunications Sector

The ITU-T is the telecommunications standardization sector of the ITU, an
advisory committee established under the United Nations to recommend
international telecommunications standards.
JB7
jam bit 7
JB7 is a data transmission mode that guarantees ones density on a T1 carrier
while reducing effective transport bandwidth to 56 kb/s.
LAN
local area network

A LAN is a network that operates within a limited geographical area, such
as within a building. It connects a variety of data devices, such as PCs,
servers, and printers. Communication between devices is at a very high rate,
between 1 and 100 Mb/s.
latency
Latency is the amount of delay in the delivery of data through a network or

network device.
LC
link connection
An LC is a connection reserved for CPSS.
LCD
loss of cell delineation

An LCD is an indication that ATM cell delineation has been lost.
LDS
link delay synchronization
LED
light emitting diode

An LED is a semiconductor diode that emits light when a current passes
through it. LEDs are located on cards and shelves in the 7270 MSC system
to indicate normal operation and alarm conditions.
link
A link represents the physical medium (or the equivalent, such as a satellite
link) that carries paths through the network. Links connect ports to ports,
timeslots to timeslots, or ports to timeslots. A single link can contain a single
path, such as an asynchronous data link, or many paths, such as an E1 link
from a PBX.
LIS
loss of incoming signal

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-17
Glossary
LLC
logical link control

LLC is the upper sublayer of the ISO model data link layer and is the
protocol layer directly above the MAC layer. LLC provides logical
interfaces between two adjacent layers and governs the exchange of data
between two endpoints by handling addressing and error detection. LLC
governs packet transmission as specified by IEEE 802.2.
LLCP
logical link control protocol

Protocol used in the logical link control (LLC) layer. LLC is the upper sublayer
of the ISO model data link layer and is the protocol layer directly above the MAC
layer. LLC provides logical interfaces between two adjacent layers and governs
the exchange of data between two endpoints by handling addressing and error
detection. LLC governs packet transmission as specified by IEEE 802.2.
LMI
local management interface
LOC
loss of continuity
LOD
loss of delineation
An LOD indicates that ATM cell delineation has been lost.
LODS
line out of delay synchronization
LOF
loss of frame
An LOF indicates that framing has been lost.
loopback
A loopback is a diagnostic test where a signal is transmitted from, and

returned to, a sending device. Usually, the signal is sent across a data
communications link or network.
LOP
loss of pointer
An LOP indicates that the pointer has been lost.
LOS
loss of signal
An LOS indicates that the signal is lost on a receive cable.
LR
long range
LR is an optical fiber specification for carrier cable length greater than
40 km (24.9 mi).
MAC layer
media access control layer

The MAC layer is a sublayer of the data link layer in the OSI
communications stack. It is defined in IEEE 802.2. Every computer and
network node had a MAC address that is hardware encoded.
MAU
media attachment unit

A MAU is a transceiver device used in LANs between the AUI and the
physical cabling.
GL-18

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
MaxCR
maximum cell rate

MaxCR is the maximum capacity usable by connections that belong to the
specified service category.
MBS
maximum burst size

A traffic parameter that specifies the maximum number of cells (in a burst)
that can be transmitted at the peak rate. In the signaling message, the burst
tolerance is conveyed through the MBS, which is coded as a number of cells.
The BT, together with the SCR and the GCRA, determine the MBS that a
node can transmit at the peak rate and still conform with the GCRA.
MBR
maximum burst rate
MCR
minimum cell rate
MCT
mild congestion threshold

MCT is a frame relay parameter related to the buffer capacity of a frame
relay device. At the MCT, the frame relay device sets the FECN and
BECN bits for those frames queued for transmission. No frames are
discarded. See also ACT and SCT.
MDCR
minimum desired cell rate

MDCR is an ATM traffic parameter specific to the UBR service category
whose purpose is to facilitate user-plane load balancing of best-effort traffic.
MIB
management information base

The MIB is a database that stores objects representing the components of the
network.
MIR
minimum information rate

The minimum data transfer rate for a frame relay, VPC, or VCC path.
MMF
multimode fiber
MMF is an optical fiber specification for carrier cable length up to
2 km (1.2 mi).
module
A module is a printed circuit board that is installed on a larger circuit board.

Each module provides specialized functionality.
MSN
multiple subscriber number

MSN is an independent, supplementary service that provides the option of
assigning multiple ISDN numbers to one subscriber. It enables the selection
of one or more multiple distinct terminals attached to the same interface.

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-19
Glossary
MTSM
Multiservice Traffic Shaping Module

The MTSM enhances traffic management functionality on the following cell
relay cards within 7270 MSC nodes:
DS3 and E3
OC3 and STM1
The OC3-2M and STM1-2M cell relay cards support the MTSM when the
cards are installed in slots configured for the OC3 and STM1 variants.
The MTSM provides traffic shaping in both the ingress and egress directions
on a per port basis for each service category of VPC and VCC paths. The
MTSM performs traffic shaping on a per-VC basis according to the
connection traffic descriptors. The MTSM also provides dynamic flow
control for ABR connections using VS/VD.
MTU
maximum transmission unit

The MTU is the largest unit of data that can be transmitted over a particular
interface type in one packet.
multicast
Multicast refers to messages sent from one device to a specific set of devices
on a LAN.
N/A
not applicable
NCCI
network call correlation identifier

The NCCI is a unique number in a network that identifies a PVC, SPVC, or
SVC call on an end-to-end basis.
NCI
network control interface

NCI is a proprietary protocol that enables the 5620 NM to communicate with
and control network nodes. It uses CPSS for inter-node messages.
NE
near end
NEBS
Network Equipment Building Standards
nibble
A nibble is four bits, or half a byte. It is usually described by one

hexadecimal digit.
NIC
network interface card

A NIC is an adapter board that can be added to a workstation or PC to
provide a connection to a LAN or an ATM network.
N-ISDN
narrowband integrated services digital network
NIU
network interface unit
NMTI
node management terminal interface

An NMTI is a node management interface on a network node that is used for
configuration and maintenance functions. NMTI sessions are initiated
through a VT-100 terminal or a PC with VT-100 emulation software.
GL-20

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
NNI
network-to-node interface
An NNI is the interface between two network nodes that operate under
different administrative domains.
node
Nodes are the basic building blocks of a network. They serve as a

termination point for communication links and forward data to other nodes
and elements of a network. Nodes have a unique CPSS or IP address on the
network.
NRTL
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories
nrt-VBR
non real-time variable bit rate

The nrt-VBR is an ATM service category that guarantees low cell relay loss
and low delay for applications, such as video and frame relay, that are
characterized by an on/off source with known, predictable transmission
patterns. During the on period, cells are transmitted at the peak information
rate. No cells are transmitted during the off period.
NRZ
non-return to zero
NTP
network time protocol

The NTP is a timing protocol that synchronizes the node time to servers that
have access to accurate time standards, such as satellite-based GPS systems
or atomic clocks located on the Internet.
NVM
non-volatile memory
NVM is battery-powered memory that does not lose its contents when a
system is turned off.
OAM
operations, administration, and maintenance

OAM encompasses network maintenance features such as connectivity
verification, alarm surveillance, continuity checking, and performance
monitoring.
OC3
optical carrier 3
A SONET standard that operates at 155.52 Mb/s.
OCU
Office Channel Unit

An OCU is a device that provides an interface between a local loop and the
DDS network. It converts data into DS0-A format.
ODR
operator directed routing
OOF
out-of-frame
An OOF event occurs when the terminal loses frame synchronization.
OOS
out-of-service
The status of a primary rate link when it is out of service.
ORX
outside receiver

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-21
Glossary
OSPF
open shortest path first

OSPF is an IETF standard link-state routing protocol used for route
determination in IP networks.
OTR
outside transceiver
OTX
outside transmitter
P2MP
point-to-multipoint
P2MP is a connection that originates at a single endpoint and terminates on
multiple endpoints.
P2P
point-to-point
P2P is a connection that originates at a single endpoint and terminates on
multiple endpoints.
packet
A packet is a group of binary digits formatted to include the message,

address, data, and call control signals. The format is determined by the
transmission protocol.
PCMCIA
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
PCR
peak cell rate
PDU
protocol data unit

A PDU is the unit of data in the OSI Reference Model. It contains both
protocol-control information and user data from the layer above, and allows
the two processes to coordinate interactions.
physical layer
The physical layer is the first (or lowest) layer of the OSI model. It is
involved in the physical transfer (via electrical and mechanical connections)
of information between network nodes.
physical link
A physical link is a medium (such as a coaxial or fiber cable) through which

paths carrying customer information travel through the network and over
which overlay network links are routed.
PIR
peak information rate

The PIR is the peak data transfer rate for a frame relay, VPC, or VCC path.
PLCP
physical layer convergence protocol

PLCP is the format used to transfer information from the physical layer of
networking processing functions to the data link layer. The physical layer
interfaces with the electrical and mechanical transmission medium, detects
and generates signals on the medium, then converts and processes signals
received from both the medium and the data link layer.
PM
processing module
The PM adds 128 Mb of RAM and provides a processing speed of 233 Mhz
to the Control-2 and Service-2 cards.
GL-22

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
PNNI
private network node interface

PNNI is a protocol used between private ATM switches. PNNI includes a
protocol for distributing topology information between switches and clusters
of switches, used to compute paths through the network, and a signaling
protocol used to establish point-to-point or point-to-multipoint connections
across the ATM network. The signaling protocol is based on ATM Forum
UNI signaling, with extensions to support PNNI functions.
port
a) logical port
For bridges or routers, a logical port is the internal connection between a
bridging or routing module and an interface. Examples of logical ports are:
bridge ports, DECnet circuits, AppleTalk logical ports, and IDP logical
ports.
For an ATM Services card, the IMA group is considered a logical port.
b) physical port
A physical port is the physical access point on a bridge or router that makes
a connection to LAN or WAN interfaces.
POTS
plain old telephone service
PPP
point-to-point protocol
PPP is a protocol that allows a computer to use TCP/IP with a standard
telephone line and a high-speed modem to establish a link between two
terminal installations.
PRC
primary reference clock
primary rate
Primary rate refers to the digital transmission standards used by public

telephone companies for channelized links. North American primary rate is
the T1 interface (1.544 Mb/s). European primary rate is the E1 interface
(2.048 Mb/s).
PROM
programmable read-only memory

PROM is a programmable semiconductor device in which the contents are
not intended to be altered during normal operation.
protocol
A protocol is the set of rules that specify how devices communicate. These
rules govern format, timing, sequencing, and error control of data exchanged
between two communicating processes.
PRS
primary reference source
PSI
programmable serial interface
PTE
path terminating equipment
PTI
payload type indicator

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-23
Glossary
PVC
permanent virtual connection

A PVC is an end-to-end logical ATM path that is established through
network provisioning procedures.
QoS
quality of service
QoS parameters describe the end-to-end performance guarantees of an ATM
connection. The end-to-end network performance at the ATM layer is
measured by a particular instance of a set of generic negotiated parameters,
which are: CDV, CTD, and CLR.
QSIG
signaling at the Q reference point

QSIG is a private ISDN peer-to-peer protocol used between PBXs. It is
based on Q.931.
RAI
remote alarm indication

An RAI is a code sent upstream in a network as a notification that a failure
condition has been declared downstream. It is also known as AIS or yellow
alarm.
RCC
routing control channel

An RCC can be either a PVC or an SVCC connected through an NNI to a
neighboring logical node. The purpose of an RCC is to carry PNNI protocol
messages to and from neighboring nodes.
RDF
rate decrease factor

RDF is an ABR service factor by which a source should decrease its
transmission rate if there is congestion.
RDI
remote defect indication

An RDI is an alarm sent to the transmitting node by the receiving node to
indicate an incoming failure at the receiving node. This error is caused by
faulty local hardware, a faulty transmit connection or cable, or a faulty
remote receiver.
RIF
rate increase factor
RES
reserved
RM-cell
resource management cell

A RM-cell is used by different flow control protocols, such as ABR, to carry
control information across nodes and networks.
route
The route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its
destination.
router
A router is an interface device between two networks. It selects the most

cost-effective route for moving data between source and destination devices.
GL-24

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
routing
Routing is the process that routers use to select the correct interface and next
hop when they forward packets to another network. Routing decisions are
based on network-layer address information and on routing tables
constructed statistically and/or through dynamic routing protocols.
RT
routing table
RTD
routing table descriptor
RTS
request to send
RTS is an RS-232 signal used in the exchange of data that indicates that there
is data to be transmitted.
rt-VBR
real time variable bit rate

The rt-VBR is a traffic service category that provides further guaranteed low
cell loss and low delay for applications such as video and frame relay, which
are characterized by an on or off source with known, predictable
transmission patterns. During the on period, cells are transmitted at the peak
information rate. No cells are transmitted during the off period.
Rx
receive
The Rx is any part of the equipment that decodes entering signals or data into
the desired form for use by the equipment.
SAAL
signaling ATM adaptation layer

The SAAL is an adaptation layer that adapts signaling to the ATM layer.
SC
snap connection
A snap connection is a type of plastic connector for fiber-optic cable that
snaps into place when pushed into the port.
SCR
sustained cell rate
SCT
severe congestion threshold

SCT is a frame relay parameter related to the buffer capacity of a frame relay
device. At the SCT, the frame relay device sets the FECN and BECN bits for
those frames queued for transmission. It discards frames identified with a
DE bit. See also ACT and MCT.
SDH
synchronous digital hierarchy

SDH is an ITU-T standard for optical interfacing that is technically
consistent with SONET.
SDSL
symmetric digital subscriber line
SDT
structured data transfer
SEC
SDH equipment clock

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-25
Glossary
SEEP
serial electrically erasable PROM

SEEP is the memory that stores and reports product identity and other
long-lasting information about hardware assembly.
SEF
severely errored frame
SELV
safety extra low voltage

SELV is used in telecommunications equipment and cabling.
SHUB
Switching Hub card

The SHUB is a card that is located in the Peripheral shelf. It provides
switching services for standalone systems.
SI
service interface
An SI is the logical port interface on an edge forwarder through which
internetworking services are provided to customers.
signaled connection
A signaled connection is an SVC call or an SPVC path.
SIR
sustained information rate

The SIR is the average maximum amount of traffic carried on a line, based
on all the data received, regardless of its destination.
SLM
signal label mismatch
SMART
scalable multiple priority allocation of resources and traffic
SMC
SONET minimum clock
SMDS
switched multimegabit data service

A high-speed, connectionless, public, packet switching service that provides
for the exchange of variable-length data up to a maximum of 9188 octets.
SMF
single mode fiber

SMF is an optical fiber capable of supporting the propagation of only the
lowest order bound mode through the fiber.
SNAP
subnetwork access point

The subnetwork access point is a header used to define the properties of the
PDU it encapsulates. The presence of the SNAP header is declared in the
LLC header.
SNMP
simple network management protocol

SNMP is the IETF standard management protocol used for equipment in a
TCP/IP LAN. SNMP provides access to a device MIB.
software generic
GL-26
The software generic is a software identifier that is release and product

specific.

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
SONET
synchronous optical network

SONET is an optical interface standard that allows internetworking of
transmission products from multiple vendors and that defines a physical
interface, optical line rates known as OC signals, frame format and an
OAM protocol. The base rate is 51.84 Mb/s (OC1), and higher rates are
direct multiples of the base rate.
SP
serial port
An SP is an input/output port (plug) that transmits data out one bit at a time,
as opposed to the parallel port, which transmits data out eight bits, or one
byte at
a time.
SPN
switched private network

An SPN is a bridged virtual network in a VPN realm. It is defined in
IEEE 802.1q. The interface for some components may refer to an SPN as a
VLAN.
SPVC
soft permanent virtual connection
SPVCC
soft permanent virtual connection at the VC level
SPVPC
soft permanent virtual connection at the VP level
SR
short range
SRTS
Synchronous Residual Time Stamp
SSCS
service-specific convergence sublayer
SSN
single subscriber number
SSU
system synchronization unit

The SSU is a module on the Control card that generates the system clock
from the selected master clock.
SSUL
system synchronization unit local
SSUT
system synchronization unit transit
ST2
synchronization traceable to stratum 2
ST3
synchronization traceable to stratum 3
STP
spanning tree protocol

STP is a technique based on an IEEE 802.1d standard that detects and
eliminates forwarding loops in a bridged network. When multiple paths
exist, STP selects the most efficient path for the bridge to use. If that path
fails, STP automatically reconfigures the network to activate another path.
This protocol is used mostly by local bridges.
STP5
shielded twisted pair, category 5
STU
synchronization traceability unknown

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-27
Glossary
SVC
switched virtual connection

An SVC is a connection that is set up on demand through a signaling
protocol. SVCs tend to be of shorter duration than PVCs and are not
automatically re-established after they are torn down.
SVCC
switched virtual channel connection

An SVCC is an end-to-end SVC formed by a series of linked VCs between
cell relay devices.
SVPC
switched virtual path connection

An SVPC is an end-to-end SVC formed by a series of linked VPs between
cell relay devices.
TAC
test access connection
TAP
test access path

A TAP is the connection between the test system and the ATM network
element over which the actual signal to be tested is sent.
T-ARIC
time dimension multiple access ATM radio interface card
Tc
committed rate measurement interval

The Tc is the time interval over which the user can transfer Bc bits of
committed data, or Bc + Be bits of uncommitted data. It is calculated as
Tc=Bc/CIR.
TCA
threshold crossing alert

A TCA occurs when a statistics counter value crosses the defined threshold
during a 15-min interval.
TCBE
task control block extension
TCP
transmission control protocol

TCP is an Internet transport layer protocol that stream-related operations
use.
TCP/IP
transmission control protocol

TCP/IP is a set of protocols developed by the US Department of Defense to
link dissimilar computers across many kinds of networks. TCP/IP is
commonly used over subnetworks, including Ethernet, ATM, frame relay,
and leased line. TCP corresponds to layers three and four of the OSI model.
TCP/IP is a multivendor, non-proprietary standard.
TDM
time division multiplexing

A process of sharing a communication channel among several users by
allowing each to use the channel for a given period of time in a defined,
repeated sequence.
GL-28

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
TG
trunk group
A group of trunks with similar electrical characteristics running between two
geographical points.
TGI
trunk group index
throughput
Throughput is the amount of information that is transmitted or processed on

a communications link.
timeslot
A timeslot is a division of time within a primary rate frame. A T1 frame is

divided into 24 timeslots of equal duration. An E1 frame is divided into 32.
TIM-P
path trace mismatch
TM
test mode
traffic shaping
Traffic shaping changes the traffic characteristics of a stream of cells on a

connection to achieve better network efficiency while meeting the QoS
objectives. Shaping guarantees that the cells adhere to traffic descriptors.
TRAP attributes
traffic rates and policing attributes

TRAP attributes are the traffic descriptor values and traffic policing option
values when they are configured at a cross-connect endpoint.
TS-16
timeslot 16
Tx
transmit
The Tx is any part of the equipment that converts or encodes signals or data
exiting from the equipment into the desired form for transmission to other
equipment.
UBR
unspecified bit rate

UBR is a traffic service category that emulates the connectionless services
provided by conventional bridged and routed data networks. UBR provides
best effort delivery and is used for applications that do not require guarantees
of low cell loss or low delay.
UCS
universal card slot

A UCS is a slot into which one of many different interface cards can be
inserted.
UDT
unstructured data transfer

UDT is an AAL1 convergence sublayer procedure where all payload and
framing bits of an emulated circuit are carried on an ATM VC.
UFR
unchannelized frame relay

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-29
Glossary
UNI
user network interface

The UNI is the interface point between ATM end users and a private
ATM switch, or between a private ATM switch and the public carrier
ATM network. It is defined by physical and protocol specifications per
ATM Forum UNI documents. It is the standard adopted by the ATM Forum
to define connections between users or end stations and a local switch.
UPC
usage parameter control

UPC is a network function that checks conformance to traffic control
parameters.
USOC
universal service order code
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time
UTE
user terminal equipment
UTP5
unshielded twisted pair, category five
VBR
variable bit rate

VBR is an ATM Forum defined service category that supports variable bit
rate data traffic with average and peak traffic parameters.
VC
virtual channel
A VC is a logical communication channel that is available across a physical
ATM interface. It provides for the sequential, unidirectional transport of
ATM cells.
VCC
virtual channel connection

A VCC is the series of cross-connections used to traverse an ATM network
end to end.
VCI
virtual channel identifier

A VCI is a unique numerical tag that is defined by a 16-bit field in the
ATM cell header. It identifies a virtual channel over which the cell is to
travel.
VCN
The term VCN can be used two ways:
virtual connection identifier

The VCN is a field in the ATM header that identifies virtual connections.
virtual connection number

The VCN is a number that identifies the endpoint of a VC terminating on
a bridge of the EN100 card.
VP
virtual path
A VP is a logical communication channel that is available across a physical
cell relay interface and that can carry one or more virtual channels.
GL-30

90-4521-43 April 2001
Glossary
VPC
virtual path connection

A VPC is a series of linked virtual paths that extends between the point
where the virtual channel identifier values are assigned and the point where
those values are translated or removed.
VPI
virtual path identifier

A VPI is an 8-bit field in the ATM cell header that indicates the virtual path
over which the cell should be routed.
VPA shaping
virtual path aggregation shaping

VPA shaping is a commissioning capability that aggregates the traffic of
multiple VCCs terminating on the same VPI and shapes the aggregated
traffic on the egress port of a node to a particular VPC traffic descriptor,
rather than shaping individual VCCs to their own traffic descriptors.
VPN
virtual private network

A VPN is an intranet network that connects multiple corporate sites through
multiple service interfaces. Transport of the intranetwork traffic is provided
over a public network.
VS
voiceband services
VS/VD
virtual source/virtual destination
WAN
wide area network

A WAN is a network of digital transmission equipment that provides data
communications over large geographical areas.
WFQ
weighted fair queuing

WFQ is a method for nrt-VBR, ABR, and UBR connections to share
bandwidth in proportion to a weight assigned to each connection. The weight
for each connection is derived from its virtual bandwidth allocated by CAC.
WFQ is work conserving, which means that inactive connections, which are
not transmitting cells, have no effect on the active connections and do not
receive credit for bandwidth that they are not using.

April 2001 90-4521-43
GL-31
Glossary
GL-32

90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
Numerics
1+1 hot redundancy, 86-3
54016 address, 57-11
configuration options, 58-8
64 kb/s clear channel, 64-9
A
AAL service, 51-21
cell store, App B-6
T1/E1 circuit emulation cards, 9-6
AAL1
circuit performance parameters, 36-17
performance, 57-15
AAL5, voiceband statistics, 126-4
ABR
cell relay, 77-15
DE discard mapping, 78-5
setting ATM SVC permission, 107-5
SVC limit for ATM, 105-4
ABR flow control, 63-8
ER marking, 63-10
VS/VD, 63-8, 63-15
ac power
chassis grounding, 25-3
connection, 30-2
access
configuring CUG options, 108-3
configuring privileges, 39-3
level, 37-6

April 2001 90-4521-43
password, 37-6
access community
configuring, 39-2
deleting, 39-6
ACP, 16-9
DSS2 link set, 18-4
proxy signaling, 18-2
signaling API, 18-4
signaling intercept, 18-5
ACT
frame relay card buffer, 45-2
stream buffer congestion, 55-5
activity switch
overwriting database, 41-2
resetting Control card, 43-6
address
anycast registration, 19-4
configuring ATM endsystem, 73-2
configuring defaults, 106-12
configuring origination, 57-13
configuring subscriber addresses, 83-3
configuring target, 57-12
CPSS domain and node number, 37-8
CPSS,, 19-6
CPSS, class A range, 37-8
equivalent, 106-7
formats, 16-13
IP, 37-15
match to terminal call, 106-13
maximum number of summary addresses,
19-4
IN-1
Index
modifying SVC subscriber options, 82-9

origin, configuring, 58-10
prefixes, 83-2
presentation options, 87-10
registration, 73-2
registration using ILMI protocol, 19-3
routing parameters, 82-8
special, configuring SVC subscriber with,
106-9
subnet mask, 37-16
subscriber, appears deregistered, 84-26
supported formats, 83-2
system prefix, 83-3
translation table, 88-8
unique, 106-7
address match, 106-13
address scope
configuring, 94-7
summary address, 98-8
address translation, 89-2
address tunnelling, 89-5
call restriction, 89-6
editing table, 89-7
prefixes, 89-4
selective call statistics, 89-6
tables, 89-2
administrative status
PNNI path trace filter, 103-8
routing table descriptors, 99-10
administrative weight
configuring maximum, 109-9
node, 96-6
node radius, 96-5
PVC-based RCC, 97-11
routing table entries, 94-6
administrator privileges, 34-3
advertised values PNNI, 95-9
advertisement
automatic, 98-12
advertisement type routing table entries, 94-5
advertisment default summary address, 98-12
aggregate VCI, 76-3
aggregation token
PVC-based RCC, 97-12
aggregation token trunk group, 85-13
alarm
acknowledging, 146-5
Alarm Cut Off button and LED, 134-4
clearing, 146-6
configuring filters, 56-9
critical, 147-3
IN-2
deleting, 146-7
diagnostic, 150-2
disabling and enabling logging over
SNMP, 145-6
external indicators, 30-6
filtering, 56-9
filtering display, 146-2
handling options, 145-3
highest priority detected on port, 53-12
IMA group failure, 61-8
inband IP, 71-16
major, 148-3
minor, 149-2
not generated on ILMI link, 84-26
not generated when synchronization
module configured, 38-3
pin assignments for external connector,
30-6
queue redundancy, 146-7
queues, 145-2
queues, field descriptions, 146-2
queues, viewing outstanding, 146-2
relays, 3-9
remote logging, 145-4
remote logging overflow options, 145-6
status change, 146-4
stopped when IMA group or port disabled,
61-12
suppressing link management, 56-9
switching fabric fault, 137-3
system status LEDs, 7-3
time, cell and frame relay, 51-17
time, circuit emulation, 58-4
time, configuring on DS1 circuits, 57-7
updating display, 146-2
viewing, 146-2
viewing OAM surveillance, 80-4
Alarm I/O card
activating remote, 145-2
indicators, 140-6
Alarm I/O card about, 6-3
alternate call routing, 102-2
crankback, 102-2
on-demand, 102-3
ancestor list, 96-15
Annex A management protocol, 56-2
Annex D management protocol, 56-2
anycast address registration, 19-4
configuring, 106-8
asymmetrical
SVCC based RCC, 97-4
asynchronous card operation, 38-2
90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
ATM
anycast address registration, 19-4
cell relay VCs, 15-9
configuring service category, 105-6
configuring SVC limit, 105-5
ILMI link and endsystem addressing, 16-12
LLC/AAL5 statistics, 114-5
physical parameter control through ILMI
protocol, 19-3
port layer statistics, viewing on cell relay
card, 130-2
subscriber address, 106-7
SVC throughput, provisioning, 107-3
ATM address node management, 96-3
ATM address prefix PNNI, 95-7
attributes PNNI connection trace filter, 103-24
AvCR trunk group, 99-11
AvCR_MT, 99-12
configuring, 99-13
PNNI, 99-12
AvCR_PM, 99-11
configuring, 99-13
PNNI, 99-11
B
bandwidth
configuring trunk group partition, 85-8
influencing calculation of virtual, 85-6
port, reduced by switch, 85-5
battery return, dc system, 25-2
baud rate
configuring, 37-3
serial port options, 37-2
Bc, 77-4
configuring, 77-23
frame relay default, 105-3
SVC limit, 105-2
Be, 77-4
configuring, 77-23
SVC limit, 105-2
BECN bits, about, App A-8
BER threshold, 51-31
BERT
DLCI-level, 138-2
HDLC, 138-2
starting and stopping DLCI-level, 138-4
blocking points, 100-14
DTL stack display, 100-11
booking factor, CAC, 36-10
boot PROM, 43-7
April 2001 90-4521-43
border node PNNI, 95-6

broadband signaling, 64-10
burst rate, monitoring maximum, App A-11,
77-4
bypass coders, 66-21
bypass mode configuring, 63-12
C
cable
management, 3-9
routing, 23-2
cabling
network management, 27-4
node management, 27-2
CAC, 36-6
activating dynamic, 61-8
booking factor, 36-10
C value, configuring, 61-8
capacity checking, 36-9
changing connection type, 36-3
configuring, 36-11
configuring IMA link, 61-7
determining possible connections, 85-9
frame relay, App A-11
trunk group, 85-5
call blocking, reduced
congested networks, 95-13
PNNI, 95-13
call control group
configuring, 40-2
maintenance, 84-9
signaling link, 82-4
viewing, 84-9
call processing
redundancy, 86-2
statistics, 128-2
call rerouting
DTL-orginator, 102-6
entry border node, 102-6
call restriction, 89-6
editing, 89-9
call routing, 101-2
DTL-orginator level, 101-2
PNNI, 95-5
SVC calls, 101-2
call statistics, 89-6
called party address prefix
setting, 103-10
CANI statistics, 114-5
capacity checking, 36-9
IN-3
Index
card
asynchronous operation, 38-2
boot PROM, 43-7
common I/O, 29-2
configuration and management, 43-1
configuration display, 44-5
congestion statistics, 119-2
Control, 4-2
diagnostics, 136-3
displaying protection status, 34-8
hardware defect diagnostics, 136-3
hardware display, 44-5
identifier, 35-2
installation, 26-17
interface I/O, 29-2
IP address, 37-16
managing, 43-6
managing protection, 50-6
naming, 43-6
removal, 26-20
replacing, 32-2
resetting, 43-6
setting jumpers, 26-12
software download support, 42-2
types and installation slots, 26-17
viewing information, 44-1
card variants
DS3, 10-2
E1, 9-2
E3, 10-2
OC3, 12-3
STM1, 12-3
T1, 9-2
CAS control of clear channel, 64-10, 64-13
CAS mode channel reserved for signaling, 60-2
cause code, 128-4
ignored message, 128-5
viewing statistics, 128-11
CBR, 77-15
service category, 77-11
CDV tolerance values, 77-8
CE-EC module, 64-1
broadband signaling, 64-10
CAS control of clear channel, 64-10, 64-13
channel coding mode, 64-7
echo cancellation, 64-3
ERL, 64-2
ERLE, 64-2
installing, 26-6
IN-4
minimum external ERL, 64-13

narrowband signaling, 64-9
node predefined profiles, 64-8
nonlinear processor, 64-6
per-call echo canceller configuration, 64-9
performance parameters, 64-2
permanent clear channel, 64-6
redundancy, 64-11
tone disabler, 64-5
variants, 64-2
voiceband profiles, 64-7
cell
compensating for delay variation, App B-6
configuring playout buffer size, 59-5
mapping, 51-27
maximum back-to-back, 77-17
payload scrambling, 51-26
rate and delay, data octet to change, 59-6
rate for UDT or SDT service, App B-9
transfer delay, 58-6
wander, App B-9
cell relay, 14-2
between circuit switching networks, App
B-5
CAC resource allocation, 36-7
CLP bits, 77-9
configuring CDV tolerance, 77-8
discard mapping, 78-4
endpoints, 15-8
frame pacing, 77-6
options, discard mapping to frame relay,
78-5
path identified by VPCI, 85-14
PVC traffic management, 77-9
signaling links, 16-12
signaling protocols, 16-5
SVC signaling link, 82-7
SVC signaling parameters, 82-6
SVC, node communication, 106-11
traffic management, 77-10
transmitting signaled connections, 16-11
trunk groups, 84-2
VC, 15-9
VP, 15-8
cell relay card
configuring ILMI links, 73-2
configuring slots, 47-1
endpoint statistics, 133-2
LED activity during power-up, 136-2
90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
LEDs, activity after power-up, 135-2

OAM loopback, 141-2
OAM segment type, 141-3
slot options, 43-4
VP as subset of port, 16-12
cell relay port
default performance parameters for OAM,
36-17
managing the node, 20-4
statistics, 127-2
TCA profile, 52-2
trunk group, 16-12
cell relay statistics
clearing temporarily, 127-2
collection on cards, 127-2
eTM, 63-17
MTSM, 63-17
resetting, 127-3
viewing endpoint, 133-3
channel
adding, 59-3
allocation, 55-2
capacity, App B-2
deleting, 59-8
loopback, 140-6
speed, 51-19
channel coding mode, 64-7
status values, 64-7
channel group
adding, 59-3
channel information, 59-4
configuring data octet, 59-6
creating, 59-2
deleting, 59-8
disconnecting, 59-6
identifier, 15-6
name, 59-4
playout buffer, 59-5
SDT, App B-3
service adaptation statistics, 117-2
showing channels, 59-4
T1 and E1 circuit emulation cards, 60-1
channelized frame traffic, App A-2
chassis ground, 25-2
CIR
frame relay traffic rate, 77-4
circuit

April 2001 90-4521-43
54016 address, 57-11

alarm time, 57-7
enabling or disabling, 57-5
FDL mode, 57-8
framing type, 57-6
identifier, 15-7
maintenance, 58-2
naming, 57-4
synchronization and output timing, 57-10
viewing, 58-1
circuit emulation, App B-1
configuring CDV tolerance, 77-8
interworking, App B-5
on the system, App B-4
synchronization, 57-11
traffic, 77-7
traffic switching, App B-5
circuit emulation card
circuit-switching capability, 9-6
configuring slots, 43-3
LEDs, 135-2
OAM loopback, 141-2
PVC, 15-6
statistics, 117-4
circuit emulation port
DS3 application, 51-28
line length, 51-28
naming, 51-7
class-of-service
clear channel bearer capability, 64-10
clipping, configuring override, 104-12
clock
1.544 MHz input, 28-3
2.048 MHz input, 28-2
2.048 MHz output, 28-2
BITS input, 28-4
CLP bit, 77-9
cell relay discard mapping, 78-4
commands, entering, 34-9
component
protecting from ESD current, 25-2
reporting damage, 22-3
IN-5
Index
congestion
absolute, App A-7
avoiding, App A-12
configuring for severe, 112-4
control statistics, 121-2
dropping traffic based on CLP bit, 77-2
fabric statistics, 112-2
frame forwarding, App A-15
frame relay, default performance
parameters, 36-15
frame stream, 55-5
Hub card port, 112-5
IMA group, 112-6
interface card port, 112-6
level, App A-6
mapping, App A-8
mild, App A-7
points, 112-3
priority levels, 55-5
severe, App A-7
status mapping, App A-8
stream-level threshold, configuring, 55-6
threshold on frame relay card, 45-2
thresholds, 112-4
congestion statistic viewing fabric, 112-5
congestion statistics
counters, 119-1
viewing card, 119-2
viewing control, 119-3
viewing stream, 119-4
congestion threshold
configuring priority level, 55-5
frame relay card-level, 45-2
frame relay stream, 55-5
connection
ac power, 30-2
CAC, 36-6
cell relay PVC, 14-2
changing services category, 77-21
configuring peak rate for gateway CPSS,
19-8
CPSS gateway over ATM, 69-2
creating before configuring endpoints, 80-5
cross-connections supported, 15-2
dc power wires, 30-3
defining termination points, 80-2
determined by trunk group CAC, 85-9
Ethernet-based node terminal managers,
20-3
external alarm indicators, 30-6
IN-6
frame relay cards, endpoint, 9-5

frame traffic, 14-3
I/O card, 29-6
ILMI links, 73-2
loopback cells reflected back, 80-3
management equipment, 27-1
maximum IMA, 61-4
network devices, 29-1
OAM segment types and
cross-connections, 141-4
option summary, 15-13
overriding endpoints, 109-2
physical, 82-2
power, 30-1
PVC endpoints, supported, 15-2
rerouting path, 78-3
resource requirements, 85-5
serial-based node management terminal,
27-2
service category, configuring, 77-15
signaled, 16-2
SPVC, 16-7
VC, disconnecting, 76-3
VP cross-connections, 15-8
connection management
disabling, 56-5
enabling, 56-2
connection points, shelf, 3-10
connector
cleaning fiber optic, 33-2
Control card, 4-3
RJ-45 pin and signal assignment, 29-3
types for serial devices, 20-3
Control card
activity switch, 43-8
application, 4-2
boot PROM, 43-7
call processing, 4-2
call processing, N+1 redundancy, 86-2
connecting Ethernet-based management
device, 27-4
connector, 4-3
control application, 4-2
database during activity switch, 32-3
demerit values, 43-8
fault isolation after system restart, 146-7
inband IP, 71-6
installation, 23-2
installing the PCMCIA module, 26-10
90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
IP address, 37-15
isolating switching fabric faults, 137-2
LED activity, 134-2
LEDs, 4-3
managing, 43-8
PCMCIA slot, 4-3
PNNI, 4-2
redundancy, 2-6
remove to install synchronization module,
26-2
replacing, 32-3
reset after switching fabric configuration,
36-2
resetting, 43-6
signaled connections, 82-4
specifications, 4-4
statistics loss during reset, 128-2
status display, 43-8, 44-5
switching to inactive, 43-10
TIA/EIA port, 4-3
Control I/O card, 6-2
connecting to node management terminal,
20-2
CPSS, 19-4
address, 19-6
address, specifying for network manager,
41-3
address, specifying of the network
manager, 42-5
changing node type, 37-9
class A address, 37-8
configuration parameters, 19-9
configuring node link, 19-8
configuring node number, 37-10
configuring node type, 37-10
configuring node type,, 37-8
configuring path cost, 69-4
connecting link, 69-5
control frames, 19-7
disconnecting link, 69-6
domain, 19-6
domain number, 37-8
far-end type, 69-2
gateway connections over ATM, 69-2
in-band, 19-7
in-band transportation, 20-4
link and path, 19-8
link information, 37-13
link statistics, 114-2

April 2001 90-4521-43
managing, 37-11
node information, 37-12
node parameters, 37-8
node types, 19-6
path cost, 69-3
remote alarm logging, 145-4
valid connections, 19-8
viewing links, 70-2
CPSS link
connecting, 69-4
disconnecting, 69-6
overrides, 69-4
CPSS statistics
gateway link, 114-7
node-wide, 114-7
node-wide OSPF, 114-10
OSPF for specific link, 114-9
specific link, 114-6
crankback
on-demand, 102-3
PNNI, 16-14, 102-2
crankback flag; See trace crankback flag
CRC framing, 51-18
critical alarms, 147-3
CUG, 108-2
access options, 108-4
interlock code, 108-3
option parameters, 108-4
subscription, 108-6
D
D3 port statistics
physical layer interval, 118-7
viewing, 118-8
data octets, configuring channel group, 59-7
database
backup, 41-2
configuration information, 19-2
default, 2-6
file transfer, 41-2
management, 41-1
overwriting during activity switch, 32-3
reconciliation, 43-10
recovery, 41-2
removing SPVC path, 109-11
resetting, 41-6
date, setting, 37-3
IN-7
Index
dc power
battery return, 25-2
chassis grounding, 25-3
power source connection, 30-6
redundancy, 2-7
replacing system fuses, 32-6
DDS loopback, 140-7
DE bits
frame relay discard mapping, 78-4
desktop, mounting a shelf, 24-3
destination IP address, 39-5
diagnostic alarms, 150-2
diagnostic fault subcodes, 150-6
TCA subcodes, 150-6
diagnostics, 136-2
differential link delay, 61-11
DIP switch, setting, 24-2
configuring, 78-5
DLC
affected by frame size in stream, 55-9
identifiers, 15-4
loopback, 143-2
number of, when configuring ACT, 55-5
statistics, 120-10
DLCI
configuring network internetworking, 78-3
CPSS connections, 69-4
default, 55-7
frame relay, 15-4
loopback, 143-3
range, 55-7
domain
CPSS, 19-6
maximum number, 19-6
network manager, 41-3
DS0 channel, allocating, 55-2
DS1 circuit
54016, 57-11, 58-8
54016 origin address, 58-10
54016 target address, 58-9
AAL1 performance, 57-15
alarm time, 57-7, 58-4
ATM layer statistics, 123-3
configurable options, 57-3
FDL mode, 57-8, 58-5
framing type, 57-6, 58-3
identifier, 15-7
IN-8
maintenance, 57-4, 58-2

naming, 57-4
physical layer statistics, 123-2
physical layers, default performance
parameters, 36-16
physical options, 57-6
playout buffer, 57-9, 58-6
remote loopback, 140-2
selecting TCA profile, 57-14
synchronization and output timing, 57-10,
58-7
viewing, 58-1
DS3 card
cell mapping, 51-27
cell payload scrambling, 51-26
configuring application options, 51-28
LED activity, 135-5
line length, 51-28
OAM loopback, 141-2
physical loopback, 139-2
port name, 51-7
port, default performance parameters,
36-15
reference point, 51-25
resetting, 43-6
scaling factors, 51-29
switching fabric congestion statistics, 112-3
TCA profile, 52-2
viewing, 48-2
DS3 cell relay card
boot PROM, 43-7
configuring slot, 43-4
faceplate, 10-3
features, 10-2
installation, 23-3
installing eTM, 26-9
installing MTSM, 26-9
LED activity, 135-5
LEDs, 10-3
physical layer port statistics, 131-3
replacing, 32-4
specifications, 10-4
DS3 cell relay port
traffic shaping, 63-10
VPA shaping, 63-13
VS/VD, 63-15

90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
DS3 circuit emulation card, 10-1

boot PROM, 43-7
circuit identifier, 15-7
faceplate, 10-4
features, 10-2
installation, 23-3
LED activity, 135-4
LEDs, 10-4
replacing, 32-4
synchronization, 57-10, 58-7
DS3 circuit emulation card circuit
54016 address, 57-11
alarm time, 57-7
FDL mode, 57-8
framing type, 57-6
DS3 I/O card
1-port connector, 10-4
3-port connectors, 10-3
connection, 29-6
installation, 23-3
switches, 26-14
variants, 10-2
DSP, installing, 26-4
DSR statistics, 114-7
DSS2 link sets, 16-10
backup links, 87-13
configuring, 90-1
primary backup link, 90-3
signaling connections, 90-4
signaling mode, 87-13
DTL- orginator
call routing, 101-2
multi-homing, 101-5
path selection, 101-4
routing support, 101-5
routing table selection, 101-3
total path cost, 101-4
blocking points, 100-11
routing table display, 100-10
DTL-orginator
call rerouting, 102-6
dynamic routing
PNNI, 95-5
E
E1 cell relay card, 9-2

April 2001 90-4521-43
configuring port for IMA group, 9-7

faceplate, 9-4
IMA group, 61-2
installation, 23-2
installing IMA module, 26-7
replacing, 32-4
slot configuration for IMA, 46-1
specifications, 9-5
VP on port, 15-8
E1 circuit
alarm time, 57-7
framing type, 57-6, 58-3
naming, 57-4
options, 57-3
synchronization and output timing, 57-10
E1 circuit emulation
channel group, 59-3
in-band CPSS, 20-4
national use bit, 51-20
E1 circuit emulation card
AAL service, 51-21
alarm time, 51-17
cell rate, App B-9
channel group, 60-1
channel group configuration options, 59-1
configuring playout buffer, App B-6
CRC framing, 51-18
deleting channels and channel groups, 59-8
faceplate, 9-4
features, 9-6
in-band CPSS, 19-7
installation, 23-2
LED activity, 135-3
LEDs, 9-5
OAM loopback, 141-2
port configuration, 51-3
port name, 51-7
PVC, 15-6
remote channel loopback request, 140-9
replacing, 32-4
signaling, 51-16
statistics information, 117-4
synchronization, App B-9
trunk conditioning, 51-9
IN-9
Index
E1 circuit emulation port

channel group identifier, 15-6
statistics, 118-2
transmitting CPSS data, 69-4
UDT AAL1 statistics, 118-6
E1 frame relay card
alarm time, 51-17
congestion threshold, 45-2
CRC framing, 51-18
creating frame stream, 54-2
deleting frame stream, 54-6
DLCI range, 55-7
faceplate, 9-3
features, 9-5
frame size, 55-9
frame stream HDLC parameters, 55-8
installation, 23-2
LED activity, 135-3
LEDs, 9-5
OAM loopback, 141-2
port name, 51-7
port statistics, 118-2
port, configuration display, 53-7
replacing, 32-4
signaling, 51-16
slots, configuring, 43-3
stream congestion threshold, 55-5
streams, viewing information, 54-2
E1 I/O card
connections, 29-3
jumpers, 26-12
variants, 9-2
E1 physical layer, default performance
parameters, 36-16
E1 statistics
performance monitoring, 126-5
physical port, 118-5
E1 VS
endpoints, 15-7
E3 cell relay card
boot PROM, 43-7
cell mapping, 51-27
IN-10
cell payload scrambling, 51-26

faceplate, 10-3
features, 10-2
installation, 23-3
LED activity, 135-5
LEDs, 10-3
OAM loopback, 141-2
port name, 51-7
port, default performance parameters,
36-15
replacing, 32-4
resetting, 43-6
TCA profile, 52-2
viewing, 48-2
E3 cell relay port
VPA shaping, 63-13
VS/VD, 63-15
E3 I/O card
3-port connectors, 10-3
connection, 29-6
installation, 23-3
switches, 26-14
variants, 10-2
one-way, 64-3
two-way, 64-5
EFCI mapping, configuring, 78-7
egress traffic, App A-6
discarding packet, 77-16
frame relay buffer frame, 45-2
egress VC thresholds, 36-11
EN100 card, App C-1
bridge filtering, 65-11
bridge name, 65-6
configuring service group, 65-15
configuring spanning tree, 65-7
faceplate, 13-5
OAM diagnostics, 13-4
static bridge entry, 65-13

90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
endpoint
1-h statistics collection, 80-6
cell relay, 15-8
cell relay traffic rate, 77-13
changing traffic policing, 77-5
collecting statistics, 80-5
configuring options, 80-1
configuring VP type, 80-2
connection option summary, 15-13
CPSS link disconnects, 69-4
disconnecting multiple, 76-3
disconnecting point-to-multipoint, 76-2
disconnecting point-to-point PVC, 76-2
frame priority level, 77-4
frame relay, 15-4
grouping channels, 59-2
identifier, 15-10
OAM loopback, 141-2
OAM loopback segment types, 141-3
OAM segment type default value, 61-7
overriding connections, 109-2
PVC cross-connections, 15-2
root and leaf on same port, 75-2
single super-rate, 60-2
source and destination within same node,
75-2
specifying, 109-2
SPVC, 16-7
SPVC path compatibility, 16-9
statistics, 133-2
status information, 81-4
SVC call control group number, 16-3
SVC compatibility, 16-5
synchronized in IMA connection, 61-10
types, 35-3
unsynchronized in IMA connection, 61-10
viewing for service category, 77-21
viewing status information, 81-4
viewing status information for group, 81-5
end-to-end connectivity, 14-3
cross-connections, 15-2
enhanced signaling, configuring, 87-8
entry border node
called party number, 101-6
next transit DTL stack, 101-6
PNNI cranckback, 102-6
routing, 101-6
EPD, 77-16

April 2001 90-4521-43
equipment
loopback, 139-5
replacing, 32-1
ER marking
eTM, 63-10
MTSM, 63-10
ERL, 64-2
ERLE, 64-2
error range, 56-7
error rate test, 138-2
error threshold, configuring, 56-8
ESF framing, 58-5
ESF mode, DS1 out-of-band loopbacks, 140-2
Ethernet
bridging statistics, 125-8
inband IP, 71-9
managing the node over, 20-3
monitoring port, 6-2
eTM, 63-2
ABR flow control, 63-8, 63-15
bypass mode, 63-12
configuring, 63-1
connection redownloading, 63-17
egress VC thresholds, 36-11
enabling, 63-10
ER marking, 63-10
installing, 26-9
statistics, 63-17
traffic shaping, 63-3, 63-10
VPA shaping, 63-5, 63-13
VS/VD, 63-15
event range, 56-7
exit border node, local level routing, 101-8
extended buffering, 63-3
F
fabric
loopback, 139-5
switch, when resetting Hub card, 43-6
fabric congestion statistic, 112-5
fabric congestion statistics
Hub card port, 112-5
IMA group, 112-6
interface card port, 112-6
fabric error statistics, 113-2
IN-11
Index
fabric profile
controlling switching, 77-20
priority level, 77-6
switching fabric, 36-3
faceplate connections, 29-1
Fan Unit, 3-9
about, 3-9
features, 7-2
installing, 32-14, 32-16
LED activity, 134-4
LEDs, 7-2
replacing, 32-6
replacing filter, 32-17
status message, 40-5
far-end type, 69-2
fault tolerance, gateway node, 19-6
fax and modem bypass coders, 66-21
FDL
mode, 51-44
mode, configuring on DS1 circuit, 57-8
FECN bit, App A-8
mapping EFCI bit, 78-7
fiber optic connector, 33-2
file transfer, 41-2
filler plate, 2-5
installation and removal, 26-16
filter age timeout, 103-16
never age out, 103-17
setting, 103-16
filter location, 103-7
flash memory, 42-2
fractional loopback, 140-7
frame
configuring maximum mode, 104-13
connection, 14-3
endpoint, 15-4
pacing, 77-6
priority level, 77-6
processing, App A-6
selecting priority level, 77-28
viewing last errored, 54-10
frame discard, 77-16
configuring, 77-26
application, 55-3
configuring priority levels, 77-4
configuring stream application, 55-3
IN-12
congestion, App A-15

endpoint, 15-5
interworking, App A-13
pacing, 77-27
streams, App A-12
traffic management parameters, 77-4
frame forwarding stream statistics, 122-2
application, 55-3
CAC resource allocation, 36-7
class-of-service, App A-9
configuring default, 105-3
configuring limit, 105-2
configuring priority level, 77-4
configuring SVC limit, 105-2
congestion level, App A-6
congestion management mapping, App
A-8
congestion, default performance
parameters, 36-15
determining CAC, App A-11
DLCI loopback, 143-2
frame stream error threshold, 56-7
frame stream heartbeat, 56-5
frame stream status rate, 56-7
frame stream timeout, 56-6
internetworking option, 78-2
network interworking, App A-4
network stream, 78-2
option, discard mapping to cell relay, 78-4
pacing, 77-27
pacing to control frame speed, 77-6
port, managing the node over frame relay,
20-4
PVC management protocol, 56-2
selecting priority level, 77-28
service interworking, App A-4
signaling protocol, 16-4
stream and DLC statistics, 120-1
SVC, node communication, 106-11
testing lines, 138-2
traffic, App A-3
traffic policing, 77-5
traffic rates, 77-4

90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
frame relay card, 9-5

alarm time, 51-17
connection endpoint, 9-5
CRC framing, 51-18
DLCI range, 55-7
frame size, 55-9
HDLC, 55-8
LED activity after power-up, 135-2
overwriting, 54-9
port, configuration display, 53-7
streams per port, 120-2
viewing stream information, 54-2
frame relay port
line termination, 51-7
naming, 51-7
statistics, 118-2
frame relay statistics, 117-3
DLC, 120-10
port, 118-2
frame relay stream
configuring application, 55-3
discard statistics, 120-4
error statistics, 120-8
per port, 9-5
PVC management statistics, 120-5
statistics summary, 120-3
viewing error statistics, 120-9
frame relay SVC
address method, 83-2
configuring DLCI range, 55-7
configuring maximum frame mode, 104-13
signaling parameters, 82-6
frame size, 55-9
frame stream
alarm filter, 56-9
channel allocation, 55-2
configuration application, 55-4
congestion thresholds, 55-5
contiguous and non-contiguous, App A-2
creating, 54-2
deleting, 54-6
April 2001 90-4521-43
detecting management protocol, 56-3

DLCs supported, 55-9
error threshold, 56-7
heartbeat, 56-5
identifiers, 35-3
maintenance display, 54-10
managing, 54-8
maximum DLC formula, 55-9
naming, 54-5
number of streams per port, 9-5
statistics, 120-1
status rate, 56-7
TCA profile, 54-7
timeout, 56-6
viewing configured stream, 54-3
viewing last errored frame, 54-9
frame traffic
channelized, App A-2
management, forwarding traffic switching,
App A-12
framing mode, 140-8
framing type, 51-8
configuring DS1 circuits, 57-7
DS1 circuits, configuring on, 58-4
framing, transparent, 57-6
function keys, associated softkeys, 34-9
fuses, 3-9
fast-blow on dc shelf, 2-7
holder for dc system, 30-2
replacing, dc system, 32-6
G
gateway
configuring rates, 19-8
CPSS link, 114-2
routing node, 19-6
grounding, 25-2
ac chassis, 25-3
antistatic connection points, 3-10
shelf, 25-4
signal ground, 25-3
H
HDLC parameters, 55-8
heartbeat, configuring, 56-5
IN-13
Index
hierarchy list
ancestor list, 96-15
lowest level node, 96-15
viewing, 96-15
hold-down time, 110-3
configuring, 110-3
hop-by-hop crankback, PNNI, 102-6
horizontal link advertisment, SVCC-based
RCCs, 95-10
horizontal links
SVCC-based RCC, 97-25
Hub card
boot PROM, 43-7
connector, 5-2
fabric congestion statistic, 112-5
faceplate, 5-2
features, 5-2
installation, 23-2
LEDs, 5-2
replacing, 32-4
resetting, 43-6
specifications, 5-2
switching fabric error statistics, 113-2
switching fabric type, 36-2
viewing configuration information, 44-10
viewing SEEP information, 44-7
I
I/O card, 6-1
4-port, 9-3
8-port, 9-4
Alarm, 6-3
common for multiple service categories,
29-2
connection, 29-2
DS3 variants, 10-2
E1 variants, 9-2
E3 variants, 10-2
installation, 26-17
OC3 variants, 12-3
Reference Clock, 6-3
setting jumper, 26-12
slot identification, 3-6
STM1 variants, 12-3
T1 variants, 9-2
ICP header, configuring, 46-4
IN-14
identifier
card, 35-2
channel group, 15-6
circuit, 15-7
DLC, 15-4
endpoint, 15-10
fabric, 35-2
frame stream, 35-3
IMA group, 35-3
LC, connecting CPSS link, 69-4
port, 35-2
reserved range, 15-12
shelf, 35-2
showing channel in channel group, 59-4
slot, 35-2
summary, 35-4
idle channel suppression, 51-44
ILMI, 19-3
application options, 72-4
configuring application, 72-4
configuring protocol, 72-3
disconnecting link, 73-4
interaction with subscriber configuration,
106-7
link information, 74-2
profile information, 74-3
protocol options, 72-3
running over cell relay PVC, 20-4
viewing connection, 74-1
ILMI anycast address registration, 98-12
ILMI link, 16-12
assigning profile, 73-3
configuring, 73-2
default setting, 84-26
disabling, 84-26
disconnecting, 73-4
enabling, 84-26
management, 84-25
remains connected, 85-17
resetting, 84-26
viewing, 74-2
ILMI profile
configuring, 72-2
default for ILMI link, 73-3
naming, 72-2
selecting, 73-3
viewing, 74-3

90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
ILMI registered subscriber

information, 84-21
SVC subscriber configuration, 82-9
updating display, 84-19
IMA, 9-7
active links, minimum number, 61-9
adding link, 61-4
configuring differential link delay, 61-11
configuring dynamic CAC, 61-8
configuring ICP header, 46-4
configuring module, 46-3
configuring slot options, 46-2
deleting link, 61-5
fabric congestion statistics, 112-6
installing, 26-7
managing, 61-12
out-of-service connection, 61-7
physical port statistics, 132-3
physical port, disabling and enabling,
61-13
resetting port, 61-12
statistics, 132-2
viewing physical port statistics, 132-4
viewing port configuration information,
62-2
viewing port information, 62-4
viewing slot configuration, 46-2
IMA group
creating, 61-3
deleting, 61-3
enabling and disabling, 61-13
identifier, 35-3
ingress statistics, 132-2
link timeout, 61-6
management options, 61-12
network clock, 61-10
statistics, 132-2
synchronization options, 61-10
impedance coupling, 25-2
inband IP, 71-2
alarms, 71-16
configuration parameters, 71-12
Control card, 71-2, 71-6
Ethernet application, 71-9
interface card support, 71-2
April 2001 90-4521-43
IP address, 71-13
large network application, 71-4, 71-9
link, 71-2, 71-14
networking options, 71-6
overlay, 71-2
redundancy, 71-11
router, 71-9
small network application, 71-3, 71-6
small network configuration, 71-3
static routing, 71-5, 71-16
subnet mask, 71-13
typical application, 71-2
viewing configuration status, 71-15
inband IP, traffic parameters, 71-14
in-band loopback, 140-9
InfoPort
See online documentation, lxxv
information element
configuring subscriber profile, 104-5
ingress traffic
discarded packet, 77-16
frame relay buffer frame, 45-2
rate enforcement, App A-12
installation
Alarm I/O card, 23-4
Control card, 23-2
DS3 cell relay card, 23-3
DS3 I/O card, 23-3
E1 cards, 23-2
E3 card, 23-3
eTM, 26-9
Fan Unit, 32-6
filler plate, 26-16
grounding shelf, 25-3
grounding system, 25-2
Hub card, 23-2
I/O card, 26-17
IMA module, 26-7
interface card, 26-17
mid-mounting shelf, 24-8
MTSM, 26-9
OC3 card, 23-3
OC3 I/O card, 23-3
PCMCIA module, 26-10
Power Supply Unit, 32-12
Power Supply Unit fan, 32-13
preinstallation requirements, 22-2
IN-15
Index
Reference Clock I/O card, 23-4

shelf, desktop mount, 24-3
shelf, rack mount, 24-4
site planning, 21-2
STM1 card, 23-3
STM1 I/O card, 23-3
synchronization module, 26-2
system, 23-2
T1 cards, 23-2
verifying shipment, 22-3
interface card
call control group, 82-4
configuring port information, 53-12
Control card, assigning call control, 40-2
Ethernet port configuration information,
53-13
fabric congestion statistics, 112-6
protection, 50-7
redundancy, 2-6
supporting signaled connection, 82-3
interior link, 114-2
CPSS link statistics, 114-9
internal switch subscriber, prefixes, 83-6
international addressing, 83-2
address format, 87-10
configuring subscriber address, 106-6
interworking
frame relay network, App A-4
frame relay service, App A-4
service protocol error, 54-9
IP address, 37-15
assigning multiple, 39-3
configuring access parameter, 39-3
connecting CPSS link, 69-4
Control card, 37-15
default router, 37-16
destination, 39-5
restricting access, 39-3
specifying for network manager, 41-3
subnet mask, 37-16
IP overlay, 71-2
IP statistics, 114-5
IN-16
J
jumper
E1 I/O card, 26-12
OC3 electrical I/O card, 26-13
STM1 electrical I/O card, 26-13
T1 I/O card, 26-12
K
keyboard entries, 34-11
L
latched loopback, 139-5
LED
alarm indicator, 3-9
DS3 cell relay card, 10-3
E1 cards, 9-5
Fan Unit, 7-2
OC3 card, 12-5
STM1 card, 12-5
T1 card, 9-5
LED activity
Alarm Cut Off, 134-4
Control card, 134-2
diagnostics, 136-2
DS3 card, 135-4
E1 circuit emulation card, 135-3
E1 frame relay card, 135-3
Fan Unit, 134-4
OC3 card, 135-7
power-up diagnostic, 31-2, 31-3
power-up test, 136-2
PSI card, 135-6
STM1 card, 135-7
T1 circuit emulation card, 135-3
T1 frame relay card, 135-3
line loopback, 139-5

90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
link
activation timeout, 61-6
adding IMA, 61-4
configuring ILMI, 73-2
CPSS, about, 69-4
CPSS, viewing, 70-2
de-activation timeout, 61-6
deleting IMA, 61-4
differential delay, 61-11
differential delay between two, 61-4
disconnecting ILMI, 73-4
gateway, 114-2
IMA group, configuring minimum active
in, 61-9
interior, 114-2
maximum IMA connections, 61-4
resetting when selecting ILMI profiles, 73-3
viewing CPSS information, 37-13
viewing information for single, 84-6
link advertisements, PNNI, 95-9
link layer statistics
CANI, 114-5
IP, 114-5
LLC/AAL5 ATM, 114-5
RPTP, 114-4
viewing, 114-3
LLC/AAL5 ATM statistics, 114-5
LMI management protocol, 56-3
load balancing, PNNI hierarchy, 95-12
LOC
alarm, 142-11
SPVC reroute on, 82-11
local level routing, exit border node, 101-8
local port failure response, 83-6
location
default address, 106-12
logical group node
PNNI, 95-7
loopback
bidirectional, 139-8
bidirectional fabric, 139-3
channel, 140-6
circuit, clearing local, 139-7
clearing local, 139-6
DLCI, 143-2
equipment, 139-5
fabric, 139-5
in-band, 140-9
initiating local, 139-6
latched, 139-5
April 2001 90-4521-43
launch point identifier, 141-5

line, 139-5
OAM, 141-2
out-of-band, 140-4
payload, 140-8
physical, 139-2
port, clearing local, 139-7
remote, 139-6
remote DDS, 140-7
remote fractional, 140-9
remote line, 140-8
remote, initiating and clearing T1 or DS1,
140-5
running on T1 circuit emulation card, 140-9
running remote, 140-9
timed, 139-5
lowest-level node, hierarchy list, 96-15
M
main menu, 34-6
maintenance
circuit, 57-4
endpoint, 81-4
fiber optic cable jumper, 33-4
TCA profile, 52-8
major alarms, 148-3
management
cables, 23-2
CPSS, 19-4
database, 41-1
features, 4-2
frame stream, 54-1
interface types, 20-2
interfaces, 20-1
ports, 20-2
protocol options, 56-3
signaling links, 84-5
streams, 54-8
system synchronization, 38-7
traffic, 15-4
trunk group, 84-2
management protocol, 56-2
DLC quantity, 55-9
maximum path cost, 99-7
MCT
IN-17
Index
MDCR, 106-15
disable, 106-16
enable, 106-16
PCR, 106-15
set backward, 106-16
set forward, 106-16
SVC subscriber, 106-15
memory, configuring, 42-3
minimum available bandwidth
minimum external ERL, 64-13
minor alarms, 149-2
modem, connecting system to, 27-3
monitoring
Ethernet ports for connectivity, 6-2
functions on frame relay card, 138-2
MTSM, 63-2
ABR flow control, 63-8, 63-15
configuring, 63-1
configuring statistics, 133-3
enabling, 63-10
ER marking, 63-10
installing, 26-9
statistics, 63-17
traffic shaping, 63-3, 63-10
VS/VD, 63-15
N
narrowband signaling, 64-9
national use bit, 51-20
network
devices, 29-1
interworking DLCI, 78-3
stream, 78-3
network layer statistics
CPSS link, 114-6
viewing, 114-3
network load balancing, 95-11
network management system, 19-2
configuring signaling link profiles, 87-3
downloading software, 42-2
Ethernet ports, 27-4
overview, 19-2
transferring a database file, 41-2
next transit table, routing table display, 100-8
N-ISDN PRI SVC services, 16-5
NMTI inactivity timer, 34-5
NNI
IN-18
NNI mode
Annex A protocol, 56-2
Annex D protocol, 56-2
node
assigning to domain, 19-7
assigning unique address, 19-6
automatic change to subscriber
configuration, 106-12
configuring parameters, 37-1
CPSS statistics, 114-7
CPSS types, 19-6
enforcing presentation indication, 104-10
leaf, 19-6
number, 37-8
parameters, CPSS, 37-8
setting name, 37-3
SPVC path, removing from database,
109-11
SPVC path, terminating, 109-2
static routing, 82-8
type, 37-8
viewing CPSS domain information, 37-12
node administrative weight, configuring, 96-6
node advertisements, PNNI, 95-8
node ID, node management, 96-3
node level
configuring, 96-4
PNNI, 96-2
node maintenance, PNNI, 96-11
ATM address, 96-3
node ID, 96-3
peer group ID, 96-3
PNNI, 96-4
node management session
access, 34-3
automtically terminating, 34-5
backing up database, 41-2
before establishing ILMI session, 19-3
before logging on, 34-1
clearing latched loopback, 140-2
configuring access and trap communities,
19-3
default password, 34-3
Ethernet-based connection, 34-2
example, 34-12
executing instruction, 34-10
feature support and software generics, 34-2
forcing fabric switch, 36-4
identifier, 35-1
keyboard entries, 34-11
main menu, 34-6
90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
multiple sessions, 34-3

NMTI inactivity timer, 34-5
refreshing display, 34-8
resetting Control card, 43-6
screen layout, 34-6
serial-based connection, 34-2
softkeys, 34-9
start-up sequence, 34-4
using CPSS, 19-2
viewing CPSS nodes, 37-11
working with, 34-3
node management terminal, 19-2
connecting Ethernet port, 27-4
connecting serial port, 27-2
using, 34-2
node radius, administrataive weight, 96-5
nonlinear processor, 64-6
nrt-VBR
cell relay, 77-15
service category, setting ATM SVC
permission, 107-5
NTP, 37-4
O
OAM, 80-2
OAM CC, 142-2
LOC alarm, 142-11
persistent endpoint, 142-10
sink point, 142-7
source point, 142-3
OAM loopback, 141-2
initiating, 141-5
segment type, 141-3
OAM PM, 142-2
M values, 142-13
sink point, 142-7
source point, 142-3
statistics, 142-12
OC3 card
boot PROM, 43-7
configuring automatic protection
switching, 50-1
features, 12-2
installation, 23-3

April 2001 90-4521-43

LED activity, 135-7
LEDs, 12-5
line BER threshold, 51-31
OAM loopback, 141-2
port name, 51-7
protection, 50-7
replacing, 32-4
resetting, 43-6
TCA profile, 52-2
viewing, 47-2
OC3 I/O card
connections, 29-8
connectors, 12-6
installation, 23-3
jumpers on electrical, 26-13
variants, 12-3
OC3 port
default performance parameters, 36-17
VPA shaping, 63-13
VS/VD, 63-15
OC3-2M card, installing eTM, 26-9
OC3-2M port
VPA shaping, 63-13
VS/VD, 63-15
ODR of SPVC, PNNI hierarchy network, 101-9
on-demand, 102-3
calculations, 102-5
interactions, 102-5
path calculation, 102-4
pre-computed alternate path, 102-4
online documentation, lxxv
searching using the Find Topic button,
lxxxii
searching using the index, lxxxii
operations
PNNI connection trace filter, 103-25
OSPF statistics
about, 114-9
aggregate, 114-10
IN-19
Index
P
P identifier, 40-3
pacing
configuring traffic, 77-27
options, 77-27
packing factors, 66-21
parameters
configuring CUG subscription, 108-6
congestion, 112-4
CUG options, 108-4
HDLC, 55-8
internetworking, 78-1
layer-2, 87-14
routing, 82-8
signaling, 82-6
signaling link profile, 87-2
susceptibility to clipping, 104-12
system-wide, 82-4
system-wide for signaled connections, 83-1
traffic management for signaling links,
88-6
traffic management, viewing, 77-19
traffic rate, 77-23
part number, inventory form, 22-3
password
access levels, 37-6
changing, 37-7
choosing valid, 34-4
default, 34-3
specifying user information, 41-4
path cost, configuration options, 69-3
path selection algorithms
path trace, 51-47
payload loopback, framing mode, 140-8
PCMCIA module
installing, 26-10
slot, 4-3
PCR scaling factor, 51-29
peak rate
configuring sustained, 69-2
policing, 77-15
peer group ID, node management, 96-3
per-call echo canceller configuration, 64-9
performance parameter threshold, 36-14
per-VC queuing, 63-3
IN-20
per-VC shaping
configuring, 63-12
egress shaping, 63-5
fixed mode, 63-4
variable mode, 63-4
PGL election status, 96-14
viewing, 96-14
PGL priority, 96-4
setting, 96-5
physical layer port statistics
DS3, 131-3
E1, 118-3
E3, 131-5
OC3, 131-6
SDH, 131-6
SONET, 131-6
STM1, 131-6
T1, 118-2
viewing, 131-2
physical options
DS1 circuits, 57-6
E1 ports, viewing on, 53-9
T1 ports, viewing on, 53-9
pin and signal assignments for RJ-45
connectors, 29-3
planning system installation, 21-2
playout buffer
channel group, 59-5
configuring, 59-5
configuring size, 58-7
size, 51-24
size increments, 59-5
traffic fluctuations, configuring to reduce,
App B-6
PN127 fractional loopback, remote, 140-7
PNNI
address support, 87-10
advertised values, 95-9
advertisment frequency, 95-10
ATM address prefix, 95-7
AvCR_MT, 99-12
AvCR_PM, 99-11
border node, 95-6
call routing, 95-5
connection trace, 103-2
crankback, 16-14, 102-2
hierarchy management, 95-7
horizontal link advertisment, 95-10
link advertisements, 95-9
90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
logical group node, 95-7

neighbor statistics, 129-9
node advertisements, 95-8
node level, 96-2
node maintenance, 96-11
node radius, 96-5
nodes, address method, 83-3
path trace, 103-2
path trace filter, 103-2
PGL priority, 96-4
PNNI link, 16-12
PVC link statistics, 129-8
redundancy, 95-13
registering multiple anycast addresses,
19-4
resetting, 97-18
resource advertisements, 95-8
routing, 95-4, 95-5
routing protocol, 95-6
routing statistics, 129-5
routing subscriber, 95-8
signaling congestion avoidance, 102-6
summary addresses, 98-2
SVCC link statistics, 129-8
viewing routing statistics, 129-6
PNNI connection trace filter
attributes, 103-24
operations, 103-25
requesting, 103-26
retrieval, 103-24
triggering, 103-24
viewing, 103-26
PNNI crankback
triggering, 102-3
PNNI hierarchy, 95-2
network, ODR of SPVC, 101-9
viewing, 96-13
PNNI link
creating, 97-7
resetting, 97-18
PNNI links
disabling, 97-16
enabling, 97-16
PNNI node
child, viewing, 96-13
disable, 96-11
enable, 96-11
April 2001 90-4521-43
parent, viewing, 96-13

viewing, 96-13
administrative status, 103-8
attributes, 103-7
called party address prefix, 103-10
creating, 103-7, 103-8
deleting current, 103-19
deleting specific, 103-18
diagnostics, 103-2
disable, 103-8, 103-9
enable, 103-8, 103-9
filter age timeout, 103-16
filter location, 103-7
operations, 103-4
record count down, 103-13
results, viewing, 103-22
retrieval, 103-20
SPVC, 103-3
SVCC RCC, 103-3
trace crankback flag, 103-11
trace VPI/VCI flag, 103-12
triggering, 103-20
viewing, 103-18
viewing results, 103-22
PNNI trunk group routable, 97-19
point-to-multipoint connection
connecting PVCs, 75-2
disconnecting PVCs, 76-2
EN100 card, 65-4
point-to-point connection
connecting PVCs, 75-2
disconnecting PVCs, 76-2
port
ATM-layer statistics, 130-2
baud rate, 37-2
cell relay, 20-4
configuring cell relay port reference point
for ATM, 51-25
configuring ILMI links, 73-3
DS3 application for circuit emulation, 51-28
Ethernet, 6-2
Ethernet statistics, 125-3
frame relay, 20-4
identifiers, 35-2
IMA physical, enabling and disabling,
61-12
IMA synchronization, 61-10
local failure, 83-6
management, 20-2
IN-21
Index
physical layer statistics, 131-6

reconfigure to single cell relay, 61-3
resetting, 51-40
resetting IMA, 61-12
response to local failure, 82-4
serial, 20-2
statistics, 118-2
viewing DS3 and E3 configuration
information, 53-10
viewing DS3 cell relay status information,
53-10
viewing IMA information, 62-4
viewing physical options, 53-9
viewing status information, 53-2
viewing T1 and E1 configuration
information, 53-7
port configuration display
circuit emulation, 53-10
frame relay, 53-7
SONET and SDH ports, 53-12
port congestion statistics
eTM, 63-18
MTSM, 63-18
viewing, 63-18
power
ac connection, 30-2
calculating consumption, 21-2
changing DIP switch setting, 24-2
connecting to power source, 30-6
dc connection, 30-2
information, 21-2
LED sequence, 136-2
operating, 21-2
powering-up, 31-2, 31-3
redundancy, 2-7
supply recommendations, 8-2
supply redundancy, 21-2
system requirements, 8-3
Power Supply Unit
ac specifications, 8-5
dc specifications, 8-6
features, 8-2
installation, 23-3
installing fan, 32-13
LED activity, ac system, 134-3
IN-22
LED activity, dc system, 134-3

power information, 21-2
power requirements, 8-3
redundancy, 8-2
removing fan, 32-12
replacing, 32-12
replacing filter, 32-18
precomputed path
calculations, 102-5
interactions, 102-5
prefix
configuring, 83-6
ILMI interaction with subscriber
addresses, 106-7
system, 82-4
presentation restriction override, configuring,
104-10
primary rate card
CRC framing, 51-18
primary rate port
alarm time, 51-17
framing, 51-8
naming, 51-7
prioritized SPVC status reporting, 110-2
priority queues, 110-2
system-wide parameters, 110-2
priority level
about, 77-6
options, 77-28
selecting frame, 77-28
PROCEED key, 34-10
profile
ILMI link, 72-2
SVC subscriber, default, 106-10
protocol
mapping, App A-5, 78-6
parameters, configuring, 99-13
proxy signaling, 16-9
PSI FR card, 11-2
clocking mode, 51-49
connectors, 11-2
LED activity, 11-2, 135-6
loopback, 140-10
running loopbacks, 140-11

90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
PSI FR port
clock rate, 51-49
clocking mode, 51-50
control leads, 51-50
gender, 51-51
interface type, 51-53
inverted clocking, 51-50
loopback processing, 51-52
PSI gender, 51-51
PVC
alarm filters, 56-9
cell relay, 14-2
cell relay statistics, 127-3
cell relay traffic management, 77-9
circuit emulation endpoints, 15-6
circuit emulation traffic management, 77-7
configuring point-to-multipoint
connection, 77-2
configuring point-to-point connection,
75-2
disconnecting point-to-multipoint, 76-2
disconnecting point-to-point, 76-2
frame relay, 20-4
frame relay management protocol, 56-2
frame relay statistics, 117-3
frame relay traffic management, 77-3
ILMI link, 82-10
network stream, 78-2
OAM loopback, 141-2
PNNI link, 16-12
point-to-multipoint connection,
disconnecting, 76-2
point-to-point connection, disconnecting,
76-2
traffic management information, 77-19
VC, disconnecting multiple, 76-3
viewing endpoint, 81-4
PVC-based RCC
administrative weight, 97-11
aggregation token, 97-12
disconnecting, 97-8
traffic parameters, 97-9
QoS
CAC, 36-6
priority levels, 77-6
QSIG, 16-6, 17-1, 17-2
billing, 17-6
crankback, 17-6
CUG, 17-6
GFT, 17-5
GFT categories, 17-5
N-ISDN interworking, 17-4
PNNI interworking, 17-3
redundancy, 17-6
supported services, 17-2
switching, 17-5
queuing point types, 36-8
QUIT key, 34-10
R
rack adapter rail
front-mounting shelf, 24-4
mid-mounting shelf, 24-7
RDI cell, 80-3
record count down, 103-13
setting, 103-14
trace forever, 103-15
recrod count down
setting, 103-14
trace forever, 103-15
redundancy, 2-5
1+1 hot, 86-3
CE-EC module, 64-11
configuring call processing, 86-2
configuring fabric, 36-2
configuring type, 50-2
Control card, 2-6
Control card installation, 23-2
dc power feed, 2-7
Hub card, 23-2
inband IP, 71-11
interface card, 2-6
PNNI, 95-13
power information, 2-7, 21-2
power on a dc shelf, 30-2
switching to Control card, 43-10
switching to redundant fabric, 36-4
synchronization sources, 28-2
Q.922, 87-14

April 2001 90-4521-43
IN-23
Index
Reference Clock
connecting external source, 6-3
synchronization with other equipment, 2-7
connectors, 6-3
installation, 23-4
setting jumpers, 26-15
variants, 6-3
reference point, IMA group, 61-7
refreshing screen display, 34-8
relay contact, external, 30-6
remote alarm
logging overflow method, configuring,
145-6
logging using CPSS, 145-4
logging using SNMP, 145-4
queue overflow, 145-6
SNMP trap format, 145-5
channel requests, 140-9
DDS, initiating and clearing, 140-7
DS1 circuit, 140-2
fractional, 140-9
frame, 140-2
framing mode, 140-8
latched, 140-2
line loopback, 140-8
running, 140-9
running fractional, 140-10
T1 frame, 140-2
T1, initiating or clearing, 140-5
report priority, 110-2
configuring, 110-3
resource advertisements, PNNI, 95-8
restrictions, SVC subscribers, 105-2
retrieval
RJ-45 connectors, pin and signal assignments,
29-3
routable
route list, 94-4
router
inband IP, 71-9
IP address for default, 37-16
routing, 16-13
call routing, 95-5
changing state, 84-12
IN-24
courtesy down state, 84-11

default, 84-11
dynamic routing, 95-5
enabling, 84-11
enhanced UNI SVC, 16-6
gateway node, 19-6
maintenance information, 84-10
minimum domain nodes, 19-6
nodes routing CPSS traffic, 19-6
optimize using administrative weight,
109-9
parameters, 82-8
PNNI, 16-12, 95-4
PNNI parameters, 99-2
PNNI protocol, 95-6
PNNI subscriber, 95-8
statistics, 129-2
table configuration, 94-1
traffic, rerouting in response to port failure,
83-6
administrative status, 99-10
maximum path cost, 99-7
minimum available bandwidth, 99-5
path selection algorithms, 99-8
significant cost difference, 99-6
routing table display
next transit table, 100-8
routing table entries
adding, 94-2
adding route list, 94-4
advertisment type, 94-5
changing route list, 94-4
deleting, 94-2
viewing, 94-8
routing table management, 100-2
blocking point, 100-14
viewing, 100-2
RPTP statistics, 114-4
rt-VBR service category
cell relay, 77-15
setting ATM SVC permission, 107-5
rubber feet, installing, 24-3

90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
S
SAAL, 87-15
SCR scaling factor, 51-29
screen display, refreshing, 34-8
screen layout, 34-6
SCT
SDH card, LED activity, 135-7
SDH port
type and status, 53-12
SEEP, 44-7
selective call statistics, 89-6
selector byte, transparently passed, 106-7
serial port, 20-2
baud rate, 37-2
information, 20-3
making serial connection, 20-3
service adaptation card
OAM segment type, 141-3
slot options, 43-3
statistics, 117-1
service category
cell relay, 77-11
configuring, 77-21
configuring ATM SVC permissions, 107-4
configuring for ATM calls, 105-6
DE mapping default, 78-5
default CLR value, 77-13
disconnecting signaling link, 88-6
frame priority level, 77-6
optimum traffic type, 77-20
return to default, 77-21
trunk group partition support, 85-10
viewing number of endpoints, 77-21
service internetworking, protocol mapping
options, 78-6
service interruption
adding IMA link, 61-4
changing redundancy state, 86-3
changing service category, 77-21
changing SPVC path options, 109-3
fabric switch, 36-4
running directed diagnostic, 136-3
shaping, 63-2
April 2001 90-4521-43
configuring mode, 63-11

port and service category, 63-12
VPA shaping, 63-5, 63-13
shelf
alarm indicator, 3-9
cards, 3-3
configuring, 40-1
features, 3-2
filler plates, 2-5
grounding, 25-3
identifier, 35-2
installation, 24-1
layout, 3-4
redundancy, 36-4
setting DIP switch, 24-2
shelf display, 40-6
viewing configuration display, 44-4
Shelf power feeds, 3-8
Shelf-front slot identification, 3-5
Shelf-rear slot identification, 3-6
shipment verification, 22-3
signal ground, 25-3
signal noise, ground loops, 25-2
signaled connection, 16-2
address method, 83-2
call control group, 82-4
configuration task summary, 82-3
infrastructures, 82-2
managing and viewing, 84-1
NNI components, 16-11
physical components, 82-2
queued for processing, 109-8
routing on node ignores selector byte,
106-7
SPVC path, 109-2
support for, 82-1
system-wide parameters, 83-1
types, 84-2
UNI, 16-11
signaling
API, 16-10
default options, 87-7
enhanced, 87-8
intercept, 16-10
N-ISDN PRI SVC services, 16-5
parameters, 82-6
protocols supported, 16-2
IN-25
Index
signaling congestion avoidance, 102-6

disabling, 102-9, 102-10
enabling, 102-9, 102-10
option, 102-7
signaling link
assigning support for profiles, 87-8
associating with address translation table,
88-8
cause code statistics, 128-4
clearing calls, 84-8
configuring for enhanced signaling, 84-24
configuring traffic management
parameters, 88-7
creating, 88-4
default, 84-8
disconnecting, 88-9
filtering screen entries, 84-7
frame relay SVC, 88-3
managing, 84-5
protocol compatibility, 87-4
resetting, 84-8
screening subscribers, 106-12
separated by trunk group, 82-5
SPVC, 16-7
traffic management parameter, 88-6
trunk group assignment, 88-4
viewing multiple, 84-7
viewing single, 84-6
signaling link profile
address presentation options, 87-10
assigning default, 88-5
assigning options, 87-8
configuring presentation, 87-11
default configuration, 87-2
enhanced signaling options, 87-6
layer-2 protocol timers, 87-14
modifying, 87-2
naming, 87-3
network-wide, 87-3
signaling protocols, 87-4
signaling protocol
address presentation default, 87-11
IN-26
cell relay, 16-5

frame relay, 16-4
QSIG, 17-1
significant cost difference, routing table
descriptors, 99-6
singled connections
site
grounding electrode, 25-2
preparation, 21-2
verifying, 22-2
slots
configuring as empty, 43-2
configuring for card type, 43-2
configuring for IMA, 46-1
configuring for service adaptation card,
43-3
identification, 3-4
identifier, 35-2
managing, 43-6
naming, 43-6
options for frame relay card, 45-3
options for service adaptation card, 43-3
viewing cell relay card information, 48-2
viewing frame relay card information, 45-3
viewing OC3 card information, 47-2
viewing STM1 card information, 47-2
viewing summary information, 44-3
SNMP
access community, 19-3
alarm logging, enabling and disabling,
145-6
alarm traps, 145-5
configuring access community, 39-2
deleting communities, 39-6
remote alarm logging, 145-4
SNMP v1 management, 19-3
trap community, 39-4
softkeys, 34-9
associated function key, 34-9
associated function keys, 34-8
CANCEL, 34-10
menu, 34-9
QUIT, 34-4
selecting, 34-9
sequence, instruction or command, 34-9
toggling, 34-9

90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
software downloading, 42-1

access level, 42-2
activating new software, 42-8
current bank, 42-3
next active bank, 42-3
specifying CPSS address, 42-5
specifying file information, 42-6
specifying IP address, 42-4
specifying user information, 42-5
support on cards, 42-2
to other bank, 42-3
transfer from network manager, 42-2
software generic, node management, 34-2
software, initalizing during Control card reset,
43-6
SONET card, LED activity, 135-7
SONET port
type and status, 53-12
specification
Control card, 4-4
DS3 card, 10-4
E1 circuit emulation card, 9-5
E1 frame relay card, 9-5
E3 card, 10-4
EN100 card, 13-6
Hub card, 5-2
OC3 card, 12-7
Power Supply Units, dc, 8-6
STM1 card, 12-7
system, 22-2
T1 cell relay card, 9-5
T1 frame relay card, 9-5
SPVC, 16-7
clearing statistics temporarily, 116-3
configuring support, 82-2
diagnostic options, 84-23
diagnostic, cause code values, 84-17
prioritized status reporting, 110-2
reroute on LOC, 82-11
services through Control card, 82-4
viewing diagnostics, 84-24
viewing information about, 81-2
SPVC path
configuration, 82-11
April 2001 90-4521-43

configuring traffic management, 109-6
connecting, 109-10
connection priority, 109-8
creating, 109-3
default traffic management configuration,
109-4
deleting, 109-11
disconnecting, 109-10
endpoint compatibility, 16-9
endpoint, viewing on or after specific,
109-14
frame relay interworking, configuring,
109-7
on node, viewing all, 84-22
operational status change, 109-10
operational status, viewing specific, 109-13
order processed by Control card, 109-8
rerouted for optimum administrative
weight, 109-9
single, 84-23
specific endpoint, 84-23
specific operational status, 84-22
statistics, 116-2
summary information, 109-7
viewing all on node, 109-13
starvation state, playout buffer, 59-5
static routing, 16-13, 95-5
inband IP, 71-5, 71-16
parameters, 82-8
PNNI, 95-5
statistics, 129-4
static routing statistic
description, 129-4
viewing, 129-4
statistics
1-h, endpoint collection, 80-6
AAL1 layer, 118-3
ATM-layer port, 130-2
CANI, 114-5
card congestion, 119-2
cause code, 128-4
cell relay, 127-2
cell relay endpoint, 133-2
channel group, 124-3
clearing temporarily, 112-6
congestion control, 119-3
CPSS link, 114-2
CPSS, clearing temporarily, 114-3
CPSS, refreshing, 114-4
IN-27
Index
D3 port, viewing, 118-8

discard, frame relay stream, 120-5
discard, viewing frame forwarding stream,
122-4
DLC, 120-10, 120-12
DS1 circuit ATM layer, 123-4
DS1 circuit physical layer, 123-3
DS3 cell relay physical layer port, 131-3
DSR, 114-7
E1 performance monitoring, 126-5
E1 physical port statistics, 118-5
E3 cell relay physical layer port, 131-5
editing, 89-10
endpoint, 80-5
endpoint collection, 80-3
error, viewing frame forwarding stream,
122-5
Ethernet bridging, 125-8
Ethernet endpoint, 125-9
Ethernet port, 125-3
Ethernet, viewing, 125-4
eTM, 63-17
fabric congestion, 112-4, 112-5
fabric error, 113-2
frame forwarding stream, 122-2
frame relay, 117-3
frame relay stream, 120-2
gateway link, 114-7
IMA, 132-2
IMA physical port, 132-3
IP, 114-5
link layer, 114-2
LLC/AAL5 ATM, 114-5
MTSM, 63-17, 133-3
network layer, 114-2
node-wide for CPSS link, 114-7
node-wide OSPF, 114-10
OAM PM, 142-12
OSPF for specific CPSS link, 114-9
physical layer for E1 port, 118-3
physical layer for T1 port, 118-2
physical layer port, 131-6
PNNI links, 129-7
PNNI neighbor, 129-9
PNNI PVC link, 129-8
PNNI routing, 129-5
PNNI SVCC link, 129-8
port, 118-2
port congestion, 63-18
refreshing, 112-6
resetting cell relay, 127-3
resetting for interval, 113-2
IN-28
routing, 114-2, 129-2

RPTP, 114-4
service adaptation, 117-2
specific CPSS link, 114-6
SPVC path, 116-2
SPVC path, viewing, 116-3
stream congestion, 119-4
summary, for frame relay stream, 120-3
summary, viewing frame forwarding
stream, 122-3
SVC signaling link, 128-2
switching fabric congestion, 112-2
switching fabric error, 113-2
system, 111-2
T1 circuit emulation port UDT AAL1,
viewing, 118-6
T1 performance monitoring, 126-5
T1 physical port statistics, 118-4
viewing cause code, 128-11
viewing E1 circuit emulation port UDT
AAL1, 118-6
viewing frame forwarding endpoint, 122-7
viewing frame stream error, 120-9
viewing frame stream PVC management,
120-7
viewing physical layer port, 131-2
voiceband, 117-4
VPA shaping, 63-18
status
change in operational, 109-10
frame stream, configuring rate, 56-7
STM1 card, 12-1
boot PROM, 43-7
configuring APS, 50-1
features, 12-2
installation, 23-3
LED activity, 135-7
LEDs, 12-5
line BER threshold, 51-31
OAM loopback, 141-2
port name, 51-7
protection display, 50-7
90-4521-43 April 2001
Index

replacing, 32-4
resetting, 43-6
scaling factor, 51-29
TCA profile, 52-2
viewing, 47-2
STM1 I/O card
connections, 29-8
connectors, 12-6
installation, 23-3
jumpers on electrical, 26-13
variants, 12-3
STM1 port
default performance parameters, 36-17
VPA shaping, 63-13
VS/VD, 63-15
STM1-2M card
STM1-2M port
VPA shaping, 63-13
VS/VD, 63-15
stream congestion
configuration threshold, 55-6
statistics, 119-3
TCA profile, 54-7
stream statistics
frame forwarding, 122-2
frame relay, 120-2
stream, managing, 54-8
subnet mask, 37-16
subscriptions, CUG, 108-2
adding, 98-6
address scope, 98-8
automatic advertisment, 98-12
child node, 98-10
configuring, 98-6
deleting, 98-6
ILMI, 98-12
parent node, 98-10
PNNI, 98-2
superframe, frame-check sequence, 57-6
SVC, 16-3
call processing statistics, 128-2
call routing, 101-2
cause code statistics, 128-4
configuring support, 82-2
April 2001 90-4521-43
diagnostic options, 84-15

endpoint compatibility, 16-5
frame relay restriction defaults, 105-3
frame relay, DLCI range for, 55-7
ILMI in call processing, 19-3
N-ISDN PRI services, 16-5
path information, 84-21
permission, 105-5
restriction configuration options, 105-2
route maintenance, 84-10
routing, enhanced UNI, 16-6
service categories for ATM calls,
configuring, 105-6
service category permissions, 107-5
services, 16-3
services through Control card, 82-4
signaling link statistics, 128-2
subscriber maintenance, 84-12
support at VP and VC levels, 16-4
throughput limits, 105-5
SVC diagnostic
automatically disabled, 84-15
cause code values, 84-17
disabling on subscriber, 84-18
SVC route lists, 93-4
adding or removing routes, 93-3
configuring, 93-2
naming, 93-2
SVC routes
adding or removing trunk groups, 92-3
configuring, 92-2
resetting configuration, 92-4
viewing, 92-4
access to multiple trunk groups, 16-6
address default, 84-15
address format, 106-6
address prefix, 83-3
address with same ATM endsystem prefix,
creating, 106-9
assigning locations, 106-11
configuring, 82-9
configuring address, 106-8
configuring ATM endsystem address,
106-8
configuring default number presentation,
104-9
configuring prefix, 83-6
configuring special address, 106-9
IN-29
Index
configuring type, 106-15

CUG, 108-2
CUG subscription parameter, 108-5
default address selection, 106-12
deleting, 106-17
diagnostic, 84-19
disabling, 84-15
disabling services, 104-5
enabling, 84-15
filtering screen entry, 84-14, 106-4
ILMI registered, configuring for, 82-10
ILMI-registered, default address, 84-21
information, 84-12
internal switch prefix, 83-3
limit verification, 107-4
management, 84-12
MDCR, 106-15
modifying SVC subscriber options, 82-9
multiple, with same address, 106-13
naming, 106-5
node communication, 106-11
provisioning ATM throughput limit, 107-2
restrictions, 105-2
screening, 106-12
viewing multiple, 84-14, 106-4
viewing single, 106-3
SVC subscriber profile
assigning optional name, 104-5
clipping override, 104-12
configuring IE, 104-7
default configuration, 104-5
default number presentation options, 104-9
link layer core parameters, 104-13
modifying, 104-4
naming, 104-5
presentation restriction override, 104-10
SVCC
PNNI link maintenance, 97-21
SVCC link, statistics, 129-8
SVCC RCC, PNNI path trace filter, 103-3
SVCC-based RCC
asymmetrical, 97-4
configuring, 96-8, 96-9
horizontal link advertisment, 95-10
horizontal links, 97-25
maintenance, 97-21
PGL election, 96-9
protocol information, 97-21
resetting, 97-23
IN-30
routable, 97-24
timer parameters, 96-9
traffic parameters, 97-13
viewing, 97-22
switching fabric
activity switch, 36-4
changing, 36-5
configuring profile, 36-4
default profile, 77-20
error statistics, 113-2
fault alarm, 137-3
fault isolation, 137-2
identifier, 35-2
loopback, 139-5
managing, 36-4
profile, 36-3
redundancy, 2-5
service category profile, 36-3
size, 36-2
standalone system, 137-2
traffic loss, 137-2
type, 36-2
synchronization, 2-7
after demerit point accumulation, 43-9
Bellcore standards, 4-4
circuit emulation port, App B-9
circuit emulation, configuring, 57-11
configuring, 38-1
Control card, 4-4
Control card database, 43-6
disabling or enabling sources, 38-5
forcing switch, 38-7
free-run mode, 38-7
holdover mode, 38-7
IMA group, 61-10
maintenance display, 38-8
making connection, 28-1
mode, determining system response, 38-6
options, 38-2
overview, 2-7
reverting to original source, 38-7
sources, selecting, 38-3
switching mode, 38-7
synchronization module, 4-4
system, 38-2
system, managing, 38-7
timing source standards, 2-7

90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
synchronization module
Bellcore standards, 4-4
configuring, 38-3
connecting timing output, 28-2
installation, 26-2
reference source, 38-2
using timing input, 28-2
Synchronization traceability, 38-9
system, 2-2
adapting frame relay traffic for transport,
55-3
administrator privileges, 34-3
burst rate, monitoring maximum, App
A-11
configuring parameters, 36-1
configuring prefix, 83-6
database behavior during activity switch,
32-3
default subscriber profile, 106-10
demerit value for Control card, 43-8
diagnostics, 136-3
disconnecting call, 84-8
grounding information, 21-4
I/O card, 6-1
installation, 23-2
LED activity, 134-4
LED activity, card and shelf, 134-1
management using CPSS, 19-4
monitoring ingress traffic, App A-11
parameters, 82-4
planning, 21-2
power information, 21-2
powering up, 31-2, 31-3, 31-4
prefix, 83-3
protocols remapped, App A-5
resetting displayed value, 111-2
shelf configuration, 40-1
statistics, 111-2
status LEDs, 7-3
synchronization, 38-2, 38-7
temperature control, 3-9
trunk group, automatic creation of, 82-5
types, 2-2
system queue service factor, 36-5
T
T1 cell relay card, 9-7

April 2001 90-4521-43
configuring port for IMA group, 9-7

creating IMA group, 61-2
faceplate, 9-4
installation, 23-2
installing IMA module, 26-7
replacing, 32-4
slot configuration for IMA, 46-1
specifications, 9-5
VP on port, 15-8
T1 cell relay port, VP, 15-8
AAL service, 51-21
alarm time, 51-17
cell rate, App B-9
channel group, 60-1
channel group configuration options, 59-1
configuring playout buffer, App B-6
CRC framing, 51-18
deleting channels and channel groups, 59-8
faceplate, 9-4
FDL mode configuration, 51-44
features, 9-6
framing type, 51-8
installation, 23-2
LED activity, 135-3
LEDs, 9-5
OAM loopback, 141-2
playout buffer size, 59-5
port name, 51-7
PVC, 15-6
remote channel loopback request, 140-9
replacing, 32-4
robbed bit signaling, 51-15
statistics information, 117-4
synchronization, App B-9
zero suppresion, 51-19
T1 circuit emulation port
channel group identifier, 15-6
statistics, 118-2
viewing UDT AAL1 statistics, 118-6
IN-31
Index
T1 frame relay card

about, 9-2
alarm time, 51-17
channel speed, 51-19
CRC framing, 51-18
creating frame stream, 54-2
DLCI range, 55-7
DS0 channel, 55-2
faceplate, 9-3
features, 9-5
frame size, 55-9
frame stream HDLC parameters, 55-8
frame stream, deleting, 54-6
framing, 51-8
installation, 23-2
LED activity, 135-3
LEDs, 9-5
OAM loopback, 141-2
port name, 51-7
replacing, 32-4
stream congestion threshold, 55-5
viewing stream information, 54-2
zero suppresion, 51-19
T1 frame relay port
statistics, 118-2
T1 I/O card
connections, 29-3
jumpers, 26-12
variants, 9-2
T1 remote loopback, 140-2
running, 140-5
T1 statistics
viewing physical port, 118-4
T1 VS card
endpoints, 15-7
robbed bit signaling, 51-15
T1.403 fractional loopback, remote, 140-7
IN-32
TAC, 144-1
configuring, 144-10
disconnecting, 144-11
monitor TAC, 144-4
split-back TAC, 144-6
split-loop TAC, 144-7
statistics, 144-8
viewing, 144-10
TCA profile, 36-14
AAL1 performance, selecting, 57-15
cell relay port, 52-2
circuit emulation port, 52-2
class codes, 36-18
configuring threshold, 36-19
frame relay card, 45-4
frame stream, 54-7
information, 57-13
maintenance, 52-8
naming, 36-18
profile class information, 57-16
profile parameters, default values, 36-15
selecting for streams, 54-8
selecting, DS1 circuits, 57-14
testing frame relay lines, 138-2
throughput limit, provisioning ATM SVC,
107-2
TIA/EIA-232 port, 4-3
time, setting, 37-4
timed loopback, 139-5
timeout, configuring, 56-6
timeslots
calculating for AAL1 service, 9-6
calculating for SDT, App B-3
capabilities to transmit CPSS data, 19-7
reserved for framing, 59-3
timing inputs
connecting 1.544 MHz, 28-3
connecting 2.048 MHz, 28-2
timing outputs, connecting 2.048 MHz, 28-2
timing source standards, 2-7
tone disabler, 64-5
trace crankback flag
off, 103-11
on, 103-11
trace VPI/VCI flag, 103-12
off, 103-12
on, 103-12

90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
traffic
ATM N-ISDN PRI setup, 16-5
changing cell rate on circuit emulation
card, App B-9
configuring for predictable behavior, 77-20
configuring playout buffer size, App B-6
congestion delay, App A-7
conversion from frame relay to cell relay,
App A-11
descriptors, 77-12
disruption when changing CPSS node
type, 37-9
egress, App A-6
entering rates, 77-4
exceeding configured bandwidth, 77-23
frame forwarding streams, App A-12
frame relay congestion mapping, App A-8
ingress, App A-6
management, 15-4
managing non-conforming, 77-2
pacing, 77-27
priority level options, 77-28
switching circuit emulation, App B-5
switching to redundant switching fabric,
36-4
switching, frame relay, App A-3
transmission rates for circuit emulation
ports, App B-3
traffic descriptor
configuring, 77-22
service categories, 77-22
traffic management
cell relay, 77-10
circuit emulation PVC, 77-7
configuration for default, 109-4
configuring parameters for signaling link,
88-7
frame parameters, 77-4
ILMI link parameters, 73-4
path directions, 77-2
preventing loss or delay, App A-11
procedures for cell relay, 77-17
PVC parameters, 77-2
SPVC path, configuring for, 109-6
viewing parameters, 77-19
viewing PVC information, 77-19
traffic management parameters
configuring, 97-10

April 2001 90-4521-43
PNNI link, 97-9

traffic parameters
inband IP, 71-14
PVC-based RCC, 97-9
traffic policing
cell relay options, 77-15
circuit emulation options, 77-8
configuring, 77-26, 104-11
disabling cell relay, 77-5
frame relay, 77-5
options, 77-25
SVC subscribers, 104-11
UBR options, 77-16
traffic rate
automatic rounding-up, 77-13
cell relay endpoints, 77-13
configuring, 77-23
configuring parameters, App A-9
descriptors, 77-13
enforcement, App A-11
frame relay, 77-4
maximum burst, calculating, App A-10
parameters, 77-23
return to default, 77-21
configuring, 63-10
port and service category, 63-12
shaping mode, 63-11
VPA shaping, 63-13
trail trace, 51-32
transparent framing, 57-6
trap
generating, 39-6
sending to IP address, 39-5
SNMP agent, 19-3
trap community
configuring, 39-5
configuring SNMP, 39-4
deleting, 39-6
name, 39-5
triggering
IN-33
Index
trunk group, 82-5

administrative status, changing, 84-5
aggregation token, 85-13
assigning TGI, 85-4
automatic assignment, 88-4
automatic creation, 82-5
AvCR, 99-11
bandwidth for partition, 85-9
CAC, 85-5
configuring bandwidth, 85-6
configuring partition, 85-8
configuring VPCI, 85-14
creating, 85-4
decreasing VPI range, 85-15
default range, 85-15
deleting, 85-18
disconnecting signaling link, 85-17
display, 84-2
enhanced UNI SVC routing, 16-6
maximum calls, managing, 107-2
name, 85-5
partition information, 85-8
PNNI routing information, 16-12
range of supported VCIs, 85-16
routable PNNI, 97-19
route in courtesy down state, 84-11
service category support, 85-10
support PNNI, 95-11
VCI range, 85-16
viewing information for single, 84-4
viewing partition, 85-9
virtual port capability, 16-12
VP, corresponding to, 16-12
VPA shaping, 63-13
VPCI identifying cell relay path, 85-14
VPI range, 85-15
when to use, 82-5
tunnelling, 89-5
U
UBR
as default service category, 77-20
default priority level, 77-4
endpoints, policing, 77-16
IN-34
service category, setting ATM SVC

permission, 107-5
UDT port, 15-6
UNI
virtual, configuring subscribers, 107-4
UNI mode
Annex A protocol, 56-2
Annex D protocol, 56-2
LMI protocol, 56-3
unidirectional traffic management, 77-13
V
VBR, SVC limit for ATM, 105-4
VC
cell relay, 15-9
configuring ILMI link, 73-2
disconnecting multiple, 76-3
reserved VCI range, 15-12
SVC support, 16-4
VCC, 14-6
OAM alarm surveillance, 80-3
OAM loopback, 141-2
VCI
configuring range, 85-16
voiceband
basic options, 66-6
CAS, 66-8
channel options, 66-3
channels, 66-4
DSP module, 26-4
DTMF detection, 66-18
endpoints, 15-7
fax bypass, 66-21
fax demodulation, 66-19
modem bypass, 66-21
per-channel gain, 66-9
profile options, 66-3
silence suppression, 66-16
speech coding, 66-12
speech compression, 66-14
speech filters, 66-17
90-4521-43 April 2001
Index
statistics, 117-4
traffic descriptor, 77-9
voiceband channel
CAS transport, 68-7
fax, 68-10
modem, 68-10
parameter dependencies, 68-3
speech, 68-9
SVC options, 68-11
voiceband profiles, 64-7, 67-2
applying, 67-6
applying to channels, 64-7
applying to connections established using
signaling API, 64-8
applying to SVCs created by N-ISDN, 64-7
clear channel signaling, 67-4
configurable options, 67-2
copying, 67-8
groups, 67-2
maximum signaling time, 67-5
SVC options, 67-3
trunk group, 67-5
voiceband slot configuration, 49-1
DSP transport modules, 49-3
license credits, 49-4
voiceband statistics, 126-2
AAL5, 126-4
voiceband system profile, 67-9

April 2001 90-4521-43
parameter settings, 67-10

traffic rates, 67-12
VP, 16-12
cell relay, 15-8
configuring type for OAM, 80-2
reserved VPI range, 15-12
SVC support, 16-4
type, 80-2
VPA shaping, 63-5
configuring, 63-13
statistics, 63-18
VPC, 14-7
OAM alarm surveillance, 80-3
OAM loopback, 141-2
VPCI default, 85-14
VPI
configuring range, 85-15
decreasing range on trunk group, 85-15
VPT, OAM alarm surveillance, 80-3
VS/VD
eTM, 63-8, 63-15
MTSM, 63-8, 63-15
VT100 terminal, initializing a node
management session, 19-2
W
WFQ, 63-8
WTR timer, configuring, 50-5
Z
zero suppression, 51-19
IN-35
Index
IN-36

90-4521-43 April 2001
2001 Alcatel. All rights reserved.

95-5223-01-00-B

ALU 7270 02 - SysConfig PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

ALU 7270 02 - SysConfig PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Alcatel assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented, which is subject to change without notice.

This document describes the 7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3,

Product Introduction and Installation

7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3

5620 Network Manager User Guide

7470 Multiservice Platform Technical Practices

IP Services Card Technical Reference

Identifies a keyboard key.

Type the appropriate consecutive keystroke sequence.

Type the appropriate simultaneous keystroke sequence.

Press the Return key.

An em dash in a table cell indicates that there is no information or

An asterisk is a wildcard character that means any character in

An asterisk also indicates a default option for an NMTI parameter.

7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3

Warning The described activity or situation may or will cause

Caution The described activity or situation may or will cause

Note A note provides important information.

Procedures with options or substeps

Procedure 1 Example of options in a procedure

This is one option.

This is another option.

You must perform this step.

7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3

Procedure 2 Example of substeps in a procedure

This is the first substep.

This is the second substep.

This is the third substep.

You must perform this step.

decibels per meter

rack unit 1.75 in.

7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3

Introducing online documentation

ability to scroll through chapters

Maintaining the online documentation library

7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3

InfoPort documentation viewer orientation

Next Chapter and

Content display frame

7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3

The InfoPort documentation viewer is divided into the following parts:

7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3

Click on the Table of Contents button to

Click on the List of Figures button to

Click on the List of Tables button to view

Click on the List of Procedures button to

Click on the Index button to view an

Click on the Documentation Library

Introductory Splash Screen

Click on the Introductory Splash Screen

7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3

Figure 3 InfoPort button bar buttons

Click on the Glossary button to view the

Click on the PDF button to view or print

Click on the Rebranding button to view

Click on the Find Topic button to

Click on the Print button to print the

Click on the Help button to launch the

7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3

Navigating through the online documentation

7270 Multiservice Concentrator, Release 4.3

Online presentation features